Table of Contents

 

 

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

Washington, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM 20-F

 

 

(Mark One)

REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

 

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year ended 31 March 2019

OR

 

TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

 

SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report

For the transition period from                      to                 

Commission File Number: 1-08819

 

 

BT Group plc

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

 

 

 

Not Applicable   England and Wales
(Translation of Registrant’s name into
English)
  (Jurisdiction of incorporation or
organization)

 

BT Centre

81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ

England

(address of principal executive offices)

 

BT Americas Inc.

8951 Cypress Waters Blvd

Suite 200

Dallas, TX 75019

United States

FAO: Richard Nohe, Vice President and Chief Counsel North America

(203) 461-8098

(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

 

Title of each class:

 

Trading Symbol(s)

 

Name of each exchange on which registered:

American Depositary Shares   BT   New York Stock Exchange
Ordinary shares of 5p each     New York Stock Exchange*

 

*

Not for trading, but only in connection with the registration of American Depositary Shares representing these shares, pursuant to the requirements of the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None

 

 

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report:

9,968,127,681 Ordinary Shares, of 5p each

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities

Act.    Yes  ☒    No  ☐

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes  ☐    No  ☒

Note — Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15 (d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes  ☒    No  ☐

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files).    Yes  ☒    No  ☐

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, a non-accelerated filer, or an emerging growth company. See definition of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” and “emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

Large accelerated filer  ☒             Accelerated filer  ☐             Non-accelerated filer  ☐            Emerging growth company  ☐

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards† provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act.  ☐

 

The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP  ☐   

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued

by the International Accounting Standards Board  ☒

   Other  ☐

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.    Item 17  ☐    Item 18  ☐

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).     Yes  ☐    No  ☒

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Sections 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.    Yes  ☐    No  ☐

Not Applicable

 

 

 


Table of Contents

TABLE OF CONTENTS

 

PART I

    3  

ITEM 1. IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

    3  

ITEM 2. OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

    3  

ITEM 3. KEY INFORMATION

    3  

ITEM 4. INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

    13  

ITEM 4A. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

    15  

ITEM 5. OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

    15  

ITEM 6. DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

    17  

ITEM 7. MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

    18  

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

    19  

ITEM 9. THE OFFER AND LISTING

    20  

ITEM 10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

    21  

ITEM 11. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

    27  

ITEM 12. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

    27  

PART II

    29  

ITEM 13. DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

    29  

ITEM  14. MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

    29  

ITEM 15. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

    29  

ITEM 16A. AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

    29  

ITEM 16B. CODE OF ETHICS

    29  

ITEM 16C. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

    29  

ITEM  16D. EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

    30  

ITEM  16E. PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

    30  

ITEM 16F. CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

    30  

ITEM 16G. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

    31  

ITEM 16H. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

    31  

PART III

    32  

ITEM 17. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

    32  

ITEM 18. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

    32  

ITEM 19. EXHIBITS

    32  

SIGNATURES

    33  

All references in this Form 20-F to “us”, “we” or “the Company”, are to BT Group plc. None of the websites referred to in the Annual Report for the year ended March 31, 2019 included as Exhibit 15.2 to this Form 20-F (the “Annual Report 2019”), including where a link is provided, nor any of the information contained on such websites is incorporated by reference in this Form 20-F.

 

2


Table of Contents

PART I

ITEM 1. IDENTITY OF DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND ADVISERS

Not applicable

ITEM 2. OFFER STATISTICS AND EXPECTED TIMETABLE

Not applicable

ITEM 3. KEY INFORMATION

3.A Selected financial data

The information set forth under the heading “Selected financial data” on page 188 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

3.B Capitalization and indebtedness

Not applicable

3.C Reasons for the offer and use of proceeds

Not applicable

3.D Risk factors

Principal risks and uncertainties

The principal risks and uncertainties that affect us could have an impact on our business, brand, assets, revenue, profits, liquidity and capital resources. The principal risks we described last year have evolved, and so has our response to them.

Our Enterprise Risk Management framework gives reasonable (but cannot give absolute) assurance that we’ve identified and addressed our biggest risks. However, there may be some risks that are either currently unknown, or currently seen as less important but with the potential to become more so in the future.

Events outside BT present both risks and opportunities. We focus our efforts on predicting and reducing risks while aiming to take advantage of any opportunities that may emerge.

We recognise the uncertainty that political and geopolitical risks present and have continued to operate a specific Brexit programme across BT that looks at how we might be affected and what our response should be. This programme is keeping a close watch on developments, and reports to a steering group chaired by our group CFO.

STRATEGIC RISKS

Competition & Technology Changes

Our strategy and business model could be disrupted by technology change and/or intensifying competition from established players and new entrants into our markets. This competition compounds some of the external challenges that we see in the market place, notably:

 

   

fixed broadband and mobile connectivity nearing saturation

 

   

customers seeking fast migration from higher-margin legacy products to fully digitised, converged, secure, faultless solutions

 

   

efficient markets demanding clear differentiation for premium pricing, driving price deflation of basic connectivity and data

 

   

high exit barriers, prolonging and intensifying competition even when selected companies in the sector are struggling to generate economic returns.

Technology change is also a key characteristic of our sector. We need to be able to identify emerging technologies, assess how customers will adopt these technologies, and invest accordingly, frequently a long-time before the demand materialises. We also need to respond to changes in the use of existing technology, such as the exponential growth the sector has seen in data consumption and network capacity requirements.

Potential impact

Intensified competition can result in lower volumes and/or prices than we currently forecast. If we do not respond effectively to competition then we can lose market share, revenue and/or profit.

In addition, new technology developments can lead to accelerated obsolescence of our current products, increased investment requirements, new sources of competition and/or the deterioration of our competitive position. This in turn can result in lower volumes and prices, stranded assets and higher costs. A failure to invest optimally in technology today can have implications for our market position and ability to generate future returns.

 

3


Table of Contents

What’s changed over the last year?

Set against a challenging economic climate our leading competitors have been very active over the last 12 months. Important developments included:

 

   

The UK telecom market has struggled to grow.

 

   

Competition increased in the UK as many of our competitors tried to take more market share.

 

   

Some alternative network providers announced fibre network investment plans in the UK.

 

   

UK sports rights competition increased, with Amazon winning a three-year broadcast package for the Premier League, starting in 2019.

 

   

Competitors are developing their future 5G propositions.

Communications Industry Regulation

Regulation affects much of what we do.

In the UK, where Ofcom identifies competition concerns in communications markets, it can set rules requiring us to provide certain services on specified terms to our customers. Ofcom reviews markets regularly and can introduce, extend, relax or remove rules as a result of its findings. It has powers to conduct specific investigations about market behaviour, including price levels. In addition, Ofcom can set out rules for spectrum auctions and to ensure consumer protection in the sector.

Ofcom will investigate our compliance with regulatory requirements and can impose fines and restitution on us if we fail to comply.

Ofcom also has powers to regulate the terms on which we’re supplied with certain services by others – for instance, mobile call termination – and can sort out disputes between us and other communications providers about the terms on which services are supplied. Appeals of regulatory decisions also give rise to risks (and opportunities).

Outside the UK, regulation defines where and how we are able to compete through licensing rules and defining the terms on which we are able to access networks of incumbent operators.

Potential impact

Some of our revenue comes from supplying wholesale services to markets where Ofcom has found us to have significant market power. This includes revenue relating to services where regulation requires us to cut average prices each year by a specific, real-term percentage for a three-year period.

Where other telecoms providers ask Ofcom to resolve disputes with us, there is a risk that Ofcom may set the prices at which we supply services, make us provide additional services and/or impact how we structure our business. In some circumstances, Ofcom can adjust past prices and make us pay back amounts to wholesale customers.

Regulation outside the UK can hit our revenue too. For example, overly-restrictive licensing requirements or ineffective regulation of access to other networks mean we might not be able to compete fairly. Regulation can also define and control the terms of access to necessary regulated inputs, which raises our costs.

What’s changed over the last year?

Ofcom has continued its cycle of market reviews, including consultations on the business connectivity and physical infrastructure markets and on its move to more holistic regulation of access across business and residential markets.

Ofcom also published Digital Communications Review Implementation Reports in June and November 2018 reviewing BT’s and Openreach’s adoption of the Commitments and Governance Protocol.

Consumer issues such as charges once a customer’s minimum contract term expires were part of a super-complaint made by Citizens Advice in September 2018 to the Competition and Markets Authority, which covered matters across the telecommunications and financial services sectors and has been referred back to Ofcom.

Finally, the Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport published its Future Telecoms Infrastructure Review in July 2018 as part of the Government’s modern Industrial Strategy, setting out a longer-term vision for the UK’s connectivity and associated infrastructure.

Political Risk

Across our operations we are exposed to the effects of political and geopolitical risks, in particular:

 

   

In the UK, internet access is increasingly seen as an essential part of people’s lives. As a result, political debate continues to focus on network coverage, quality and speed of service, as well as broader issues of online safety and security. As well as providing a critical element of the UK’s national infrastructure, both fixed and wireless, we’re also engaged in supporting high-profile programmes such as the Broadband Delivery UK regional fibre deployment programme and the Emergency Services Network.

 

   

The result of the UK referendum to leave the European Union (‘Brexit’) significantly increased political uncertainty. This continues to impact political debates around the United Kingdom, such as the possibility of a second Scottish Independence referendum and the complex situation in Northern Ireland including border matters.

 

   

Outside the UK, political and geopolitical risk can impact our business through changes in the regulatory and competitive landscape but also as a direct threat to our people and assets as a result of social unrest or a breakdown in the rule of law.

 

4


Table of Contents

Potential impact

Political uncertainty can have direct financial consequences across the economy, impacting for example foreign exchange rates, the availability and cost of capital, interest rates and also resulting in changes in the tax regime. For BT specifically, the most significant impact of political risk is its potential interaction with some of our other Principal Risks. In the UK, we’re seeing an increasing overlap between political debate and the regulatory environment, with the potential that our Communications Industry Regulation risk increases as a result.

The impacts of Brexit are still uncertain while the UK’s future trading and transition relationship with the EU is determined, albeit the agreement in principle on a number of withdrawal measures was welcome, notably the commitment to protect the rights of EU citizens living in the UK and vice versa. There is the potential for our costs to increase, for example through any changes required to our systems to reflect new taxes or customs duties or other processes. Our regulatory risk could increase if there were to be future divergence with the EU regime. Our suppliers may face disruption as a result of challenges in their own organisations and supply chains. Also, delivering a great customer experience and great network will become more challenging if it is harder for us to recruit and retain skilled talent and to source a sufficient construction workforce. The UK economy may also suffer as a result of this uncertainty.

Geopolitical risk outside the UK can most clearly impact our Communications Industry Regulation risk, but also our Security and Resilience risks where it poses a threat to the continuity of our operations.

What’s changed over the last year?

There has been continued uncertainty over the eventual nature and timing of Brexit, despite ongoing negotiations between the EU and UK to agree arrangements against a backdrop of domestic political instability that has included new political parties being established and the defection of MPs from both the Conservative and Labour parties. In the build up to the UK’s scheduled exit from the EU we’ve continued our contingency planning activities, including issuing communications to our people and working with our suppliers to understand issues such as how we can best manage stock levels through this period.

In the UK, there was continued high political interest and policy focus around communications – particularly fibre broadband and 5G. As referenced above, this included the publication by the Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport of its Future Telecoms Infrastructure Review in July 2018. There was also more political focus on issues like consumer pricing and contracts, and security and competition in the communications supply chain.

 

5


Table of Contents

FINANCIAL RISKS

Pensions Risk

We have a large funding obligation to our defined benefit (DB) pension schemes. The largest of these, the BT Pension Scheme (BTPS or Scheme), represents over 97% of our pension obligations. The BTPS faces similar risks to other UK DB schemes: things like future low investment returns, high inflation, longer life expectancy and regulatory changes may all mean the BTPS becomes more of a financial burden.

Potential impact

The next valuation of the BTPS is scheduled to take place as at 30 June 2020. When a valuation is calculated, the funding position is affected by the financial market conditions at the valuation date. When determining expected future returns on the Scheme assets, different factors are taken into account, including yields (or returns) on government bonds. If assets returns are lower than expected over the period to the next valuation, or a lower future investment return assumption is adopted at the 30 June 2020 valuation, the deficit would likely increase, potentially leading to a higher level of future deficit payments. Indirectly it may also have an adverse impact on our share price and credit rating.

Any deterioration in our credit rating would increase our cost of borrowing and may limit the availability or flexibility of future funding for the group, thereby affecting our ability to invest, pay dividends or repay debt as it matures.

What’s changed over the last year?

The actuarial valuation of the Scheme as at 30 June 2017 was announced in May 2018. This led to a £2bn contribution in June 2018, funded by proceeds from issuing long-term bonds to the BTPS. Agreement of this valuation and the associated funding plan provides certainty over the level of cash contributions required until the next triennial valuation is concluded, taking place no later than as at 30 June 2020.

As part of the actuarial valuation, we discussed the Scheme’s approach to investing assets with the Trustee. The resulting changes should help protect the BTPS from volatile investment returns and high inflation by investing in a way which provides greater certainty over the Scheme’s ability to meet benefit payments over the longer term.

We also reviewed pension arrangements for our UK people, closing Sections B and C of the BTPS to future benefit accrual on 30 June 2018 (representing more than 99% of active members at the time). This has largely removed the build-up of additional future liabilities in the BTPS.

In March 2019 The Pension Regulator issued its Annual Statement, which increased the regulatory pressure on companies – for example encouraging trustees to seek shorter Recovery Plans (of less than 7 years) and to aim for contributions no lower than dividend payments. This could potentially have a negative impact on the level and timing of BT’s cash contributions following the next valuation at 30 June 2020.

Financial Risk

In common with other major international businesses, we’re exposed to a variety of financial risks. These include treasury risks, which arise principally from market risk (including interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk), credit risk, and liquidity risk. They also include tax risk, principally that we need to understand fully the current and future tax consequences of business decisions to comply with tax rules and avoid financial and reputational damage.

Potential impact

If there is an adverse movement in foreign exchange and interest rates there could be a negative impact on the group’s profitability, cash flow, and balance sheet. Sensitivity in the income statement and shareholders’ equity arising from interest rate and foreign exchange volatility is shown in note 27 to the consolidated financial statements.

The failure of Treasury counterparties to honour financial obligations could have an adverse impact on the group’s liquidity (for example from the loss of cash deposits) and profitability (for example from increased finance expenses). A deterioration in liquidity could have an adverse impact on the Board’s assessment of going concern, particularly if combined with an inability to refinance maturing debt.

If we fail to comply with tax rules then we could face financial penalties and reputational damage. Beyond compliance, if we don’t adequately reflect the current and future tax consequences in our business decisions, we might make bad decisions resulting in financial loss and potentially financial misstatements, as well as reputational damage.

What’s changed over the last year?

We continue to face similar treasury risks as in financial year 2017/18.

Earlier in the year S&P and Fitch downgraded our credit rating, due to concerns over the effect that competing pressures, including those related to our pension and our network investments, may have on our cash flows. The three main agencies now rate us Baa2/BBB with stable outlook.

Global tax rules also continue to evolve, for example the OECD’s Base Erosion and Profit Shifting project, US tax reform, the European Commission’s challenge to tax practices under state aid provisions, and EC and UK proposals for the introduction of an interim digital services tax. All these change the current and future tax consequences of business decisions. As the external tax environment changes, we have to make more judgements to forecast the future tax consequences of business decisions.

 

6


Table of Contents

COMPLIANCE RISKS

Significant Financial Control Failure Risk

Financial controls, and the assurance that exists over them, play an important part in our ability to prevent and detect inappropriate behaviour and error. Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Therefore even those systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and presentation.

Potential impact

Failures in our financial control framework could result in financial misstatement, financial loss including a failure to prevent fraud, or key decisions being taken based on incorrect information.

What’s changed over the last year?

A new central financial controls and assurance team has been created with responsibility for setting and maintaining finance controls, policies and standards. During the year, the team continued the improvements and commenced a significant Sarbanes-Oxley control enhancement programme which identified two particular areas requiring remediation: IT general controls and risk assessment, in particular, documentation of information used in controls. Although significant improvements have been made, remediation and testing of all remediating plans was not complete at 31 March 2019 and will be a significant focus for 2019/20. We concluded that unremediated deficiencies in the two areas resulted in a material weakness in our internal control over financial reporting as at 31 March 2019 as defined by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. As a result, management concluded that our disclosure controls and procedures were not effective to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by us in the reports that we file or furnish under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarised and reported, within the time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms.

Management also carried out an assessment of our close procedures, which resulted in more detailed and holistic quarterly reviews, improved quality and timeliness of reviews, as well as reduced duplication and increased standardisation.

The central financial controls and assurance team also support the BT units’ first line compliance teams in the enhancement of and compliance with their financial process and related control frameworks. The programme of detailed balance sheet reviews, including in our operations outside the UK have continued in 2018/19. All actions resulting from these reviews are tracked and monitored and the reviews performed in 2018/19 have not identified significant issues or areas of concern.

KPMG became our new external auditors this year. We have also brought together, under new management, our risk management, compliance, internal audit and some second line assurance functions with the intention of creating more integrated and aligned assurance activity.

Privacy, Data Protection and Governance

We control and process huge quantities of customer data around the world, so observing data privacy laws is something we take extremely seriously. It’s essential that individuals and businesses can trust us to do the right thing with their data.

We make sure our customers’ data is secure, and protected against both internal and external threats (e.g. cyber-attacks). Being trusted with our customers’ data goes further than that though. It means preserving the integrity of the personal data we process, and only keeping the things we need to provide customers with the services they’ve signed up for. It also means being transparent around how we use customer data, who we share it with, making sure the way we process personal data is legal, fair and in line with customers’ rights and wishes, and ensuring that we fulfil the legal obligations we have when customers want to exercise their rights under data legislation.

As a communications provider we currently operate under a stringent reporting regime to tell the UK Information Commissioner’s Office (ICO) if we become aware of a personal data security breach. We must also tell any affected individuals as quickly as possible if the incident is likely to have an impact on them.

An individual’s fundamental right to privacy is reflected in the fact that data privacy laws are in force in more than 100 countries. The nature of those laws varies across different parts of the world. Increasingly we (and other multinationals) have to show that we’re handling personal data in line with a complex web of national data laws and society’s ethical expectations.

Potential impact

Failing to stick to data protection and privacy laws could result in regulatory enforcement action, significant fines, class-action, prison sentences and the regulator telling us to stop processing data.

On top of that, we could see huge reputational damage and big financial losses. Those losses could come from fines and damages if we fail to meet our legal requirements, as well as the subsequent customer churn. Companies who’ve had high profile data incidents have seen a significant impact to their share price and suffered ongoing costs from their non-compliance.

What’s changed over the last year?

The EU General Data Protection Regulation (EU GDPR) came into force on 25 May 2018. It is deemed one of the biggest shake ups in data law for over a decade. It’s been created to update the existing law to ensure that individuals’ data is protected and secured and gives people a greater say as to how their data is used. It also increases their rights as to how their personal data is kept, used and retained by businesses. The sanctions for breaching the GDPR are significantly higher than under the previous regime, which could result in a substantial fine in the event of a breach.

Scrutiny from national regulators is increasing as companies are monitored to ensure they are working in compliance with the new law. In addition within the last 12 months several large companies have suffered further well-publicised data incidents.

 

7


Table of Contents

Health, Safety and Wellbeing

Our colleagues are crucial to our business and if they feel safe, healthy and happy they will perform better for our customers and our shareholders. Working to reduce the risk of harm to our people helps us comply with health and safety laws wherever we operate.

Many of our people, especially our UK engineers, work for much of the time in community settings where we have limited control over the working environment. Much of the network is carried above ground level and temporary work at height is a major risk for us. All of our people work in a fast-paced and highly competitive sector where change is constant and psychological pressures are significant. Managing physical and psychological hazards is therefore complex.

There is a risk we might fail to ensure the health, safety and wellbeing of our people or members of the public, in breach of health and safety laws and regulations.

Potential impact

We work to make sure our people go home safely every day. Any health and safety failure could result in injury to our people or members of the public, financial penalties, hindered or stopped operations and/or reputational damage.

The wellbeing of our colleagues is important if we’re to transform our business while continuing to recruit, retain and engage our workforce to deliver a great customer experience and grow the business. An adverse reaction to change could impact talent retention, resulting in a loss of critical skills and greater need for external recruitment, which would add cost to the business. Poor engagement also raises the risk of general industrial unrest and action.

What’s changed over the last year?

We aim to adapt our technology and working practices to help reduce the physical risks to our people, although there can be no assurances that these changes will be successful. For example, this year we introduced new TETRA ladders to the Openreach workforce to support safer working at height.

In parallel, a change in our workforce is increasing risks in areas such as driving. We’ve had a mature workforce with little labour turnover for many years. That cadre is reaching retirement age and so we’re recruiting large numbers of younger people. The new intake may have a different risk attitude, combined with less experience, so we need to make sure we put in additional safeguards with less reliance on expertise and individual judgement.

The pace of upgrading the network, fixed and mobile, has continued to accelerate. That increases our civil engineering workload and the hazards and risks associated with that type of work.

The pace and scale of change within the business has also continued to accelerate and we’re aware this has a psychological impact on our people. Finally, we’ve also appointed a new Director of Health, Safety and Wellbeing this year.

Ethical Culture

It’s crucial that we maintain high ethical standards. We respect human rights and we don’t tolerate fraud, bribery, any form of corruption or any illegal or unethical activity.

We follow local and international law, including anti-corruption and bribery laws. The UK Bribery Act and US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) have extraterritorial reach, so cover our global operations. We also have to make sure we follow trade sanctions and import and export controls. We comply with the Modern Slavery Act and follow international standards on human rights, such as the International Labour Organisation’s Principles and the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights.

We also face the risks associated with inappropriate and unethical behaviour in local and other markets by our people or associates, such as suppliers or agents, which can be difficult to detect. There is also a risk that our controls, which are designed to prevent, detect and correct such behaviour, may be circumvented. Controls and procedures, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable assurance of achieving their objectives and there can be no assurance that any design will succeed in achieving its stated goals under all potential conditions, regardless of how remote.

Potential impact

If our people, or associates like suppliers or agents, breach anti-corruption, bribery, sanctions or other legislation there could be significant penalties, criminal prosecution and damage to our brand and reputation. This could have an impact on future revenue and cash flow depending on the nature of the breach, the legislation concerned and any penalties. If we were accused of corruption, bribery, human rights abuses, violating sanctions regulations or other laws, it could lead to reputational damage with investors, regulators, civil society and customers. A breakdown in our financial control framework could result in financial misstatement.

What’s changed over the last year?

We’ve seen an increase in Speak Up (BT’s confidential whistleblowing service) reports and conflict of interest registrations. This is indicative of a culture where people are more aware and confident to tell us about their concerns.

 

8


Table of Contents

In terms of anti-corruption and bribery enforcement generally, we’ve continued to see a steady flow of significant cases from both the UK Bribery Act and the FCPA. There’s also been an increase in legislation (either enacted or proposed) to address and report on human rights abuses by companies.

 

9


Table of Contents

OPERATIONAL RISKS

Customer Experience

There is a risk that our customer experience (products and services, culture, brand, processes, leadership, technology, people and policies) may not be brand enhancing nor drive sustainable profitable revenue growth.

Potential impact

If we don’t deliver a great customer experience it could damage our brand, cause customers to leave and so reduce our revenue, or even lead to financial penalties. It could also impact our people’s pride in working for BT. Perceptions around poor customer experience also have the potential to influence political and regulatory discussions and interventions, which can in turn then impact our business.

What’s changed over the last year?

Customer complaints to Ofcom reduced by a third for both BT’s consumer broadband and EE’s mobile customers when measured on a year on year basis. From the 1 st April, Consumer has chosen to automatically compensate BT brand customers if we miss our provision or repair promises. EE will join this scheme in 2020 with Plusnet to follow.

Our consumer brands came together under a new Consumer Unit and we combined Business & Public Sector with Wholesale & Ventures to create a new ‘Enterprise’ division. Our One BT change programme includes activity to simplify the way we work. However, as that and other change programmes progress, there emerges an associated risk that the volume of change across BT could result in a loss of focus on delivering for the customer.

We also launched our new Be There brand positioning and launch new and innovative products to further enhance our customers’ experience.

Major Contracts

We have a number of complex and high-value national and multinational customer contracts. The revenue and profitability of these contracts are affected by things like: variation in cost; achieving cost savings anticipated in contract pricing (both in terms of scale and time); delays in achieving agreed milestones owing to factors either in or out of our control; changes in customers’ needs, their budgets, strategies or businesses; and our suppliers’ performance. Any of these factors could make a contract less profitable or even loss-making.

The degree of risk varies with the scope and life of the contract and is typically higher in the early stages. Some customer contracts need investment in the early stages, which we then expect to recover over the life of the contract.

Major contracts often involve implementing new systems and communications networks, transforming legacy networks, managing customer networks and developing new technologies. Delays or missed milestones might have an impact on us recovering these upfront costs. There’s a substantial performance risk throughout the term of some of these highly-complex contracts.

Potential impact

If we don’t manage to meet our commitments under these contracts – or if customers’ needs, budgets, strategies or businesses change – then our expected future revenue, profitability and cash generation may go down. Unexpectedly high costs associated with fulfilling particular transformational contracts could also hit profitability. Earnings may drop. Contracts may even become loss-making through loss of revenue, changes to customers’ businesses (due to, for example, mergers or acquisitions), business failure or contract termination.

One of our highest profile contracts is providing a key element of the UK Emergency Services Network (ESN) on our EE mobile network. The complexities described above all apply to this programme. This service is delivered with several partners and managed by the Home Office. Furthermore, the criticality of this service increases our risk exposure, and given the network provides emergency services communications for the UK, any in-life network performance issues could have reputational consequences for BT.

We’re continuing to deliver contracts with local authorities through regional fibre deployment programmes, including the Broadband Delivery UK programme (BDUK). As with our other major contracts, if we fail to deliver these contracts successfully it might lead to reduced future revenue, profitability and cash generation. As well as carrying a higher reputational risk, these contracts present specific risks around deployment, delivery and our ability to recover public funding. We also have an obligation to potentially either reinvest or repay grant funding depending on lots of different factors – including how many customers take up a new service.

What’s changed over the last year?

Governance and risk management over our major customer contracts remains a key area of focus. Initiatives over the course of the year have included a focus on: learning more about why the performance of some contracts deteriorates and how to stop it happening in future; the process for management reviewing contracts; long-term forecasting; our contract management systems and governance processes; and redefining and enhancing our controls and assurance.

On top of deploying the second and third phases of our BDUK contracts, we continued to win new BDUK work to further extend coverage of superfast broadband in rural areas. Although these third phase contracts are smaller in scale and coverage, the deployment challenges are significantly greater in terms of the geography encountered as we reach further into the final 5% of households.

 

10


Table of Contents

We also agreed a new ESN contract framework with the Government. While our broadband contracts and ESN carry a different risk profile to other major corporate contracts, we apply our governance and reporting processes to make sure we identify risks and mitigation activities and report them to management.

Service Interruption

Our commercial success is firmly rooted in our reputation for the security and resilience of our services. So we strive to maintain the highest standards of protection and incident management in order to confront the natural perils, network and system faults, and malicious acts that threaten our operations.

There is a risk we are unable to prevent and respond to incidents caused by natural perils, network and system faults, and malicious acts that threaten our network We may also fail to prevent interruption to our services as a result of supply chain failure, software changes, equipment faults, fire, flood, infrastructure outages and sabotage.

Potential impact

The consequences of service interruption can include major financial loss, long-term damage to reputation and loss of market share. Regulatory sanctions, fines and contract penalties might be applied, contracts might be terminated, and costly concessions might be needed, together with unplanned and rapid improvements to retain business and rebuild trust. We might also miss opportunities to grow revenue and launch new services ahead of the competition.

What’s changed over the last year?

Extreme weather always challenges our IT and network estate. This year we had to keep our network operating through the joint hottest UK summer on record, lightning storms and heavy rain. Another driver of service interruption can arise from technology aging and no longer being supported by its suppliers. We’ve therefore particularly focused on technology lifecycle management to recognise and manage the risks associated with our systems estate over time.

Cyber and Information Security

Security risks could arise from people inside BT or from external sources like hacktivists, criminals, terrorists or nation states attacking our infrastructure and assets, for example through use of hacking tools, phishing scams and disruptive malware.

As noted above, our commercial success is firmly rooted in our reputation for the security and resilience of our services. So we strive to, as far as possible, detect, prevent, limit the impact of and respond to any cyber-attacks that threaten our operations.

By monitoring cyber-attacks on our networks and systems and our peers and customers, we see that hacking tools, phishing scams and disruptive malware are becoming more sophisticated and yet more accessible to attackers. In response, we continue to develop our cyber defence capability, make use of proactive threat hunting and invest more in automatic detection and prevention systems.

Potential impact

The consequences of security risks can include major financial loss, long-term damage to reputation and loss of market share. Regulatory sanctions, fines and contract penalties might be applied, contracts might be terminated, and costly concessions might be needed, together with unplanned and rapid improvements to retain business and rebuild trust. We might also miss opportunities to grow revenue and launch new services ahead of the competition.

What’s changed over the last year?

Cyber attackers are learning how to defeat conventional defences such as Anti-Virus (AV), proxy servers, and basic authentication. They are changing malware signatures faster than AV vendors can deliver matching identity files, launching Denial of Service attacks that are disguised as legitimate traffic at the application level, and using increasingly convincing phishing emails to trick users into giving access to restricted systems. The growth in ransomware attacks has made headline news and caused significant disruption to some of our corporate customers, but we have so far managed to avoid such consequences. Our incident management teams are gaining experience from these events and applying lessons learned to improve our responses. We’re also helping customers by sharing this expertise.

Major corporates have continued to fall victim to cyberattack, with a number of high-profile incidents occurring in 2018/19. Also of particular significance this year was the EU General Data Protection Regulation (EU GDPR) coming into force on 25 May 2018, which could be relevant to this risk where a cyber-attack also results in a data breach.

Supplier Risk

We operate in a global supply market. Our supply chains range from simple to very complex. It’s critical to our operations that we can guarantee their integrity and continuity.

Global markets expose us to global risks, including different standards in labour, environmental and climate change practices, increasing regulation and geopolitical events. We weigh up the impact and likelihood of external market forces on our suppliers’ ability to support us.

 

11


Table of Contents

Globalisation means better sourcing opportunities, but brings challenges if suppliers become more geographically and culturally remote from our customers – or if governments put barriers in the way of doing business to protect national or regional economic interests.

Our dealings with suppliers follow our trading and ethical policies, from the way we choose them to the contracts we sign and how we pay them.

Potential impact

If something goes wrong in our supply chain, the speed and scale of impact can vary. We need to determine the potential damage to customer experience, the likelihood of higher costs and the potential damage to our brand. If substituting a failing supplier meant that we had to disrupt our business, it could cost us a lot of time and money. If we couldn’t find an alternative supplier, it might compromise the commitments we make to our customers, which could in turn lead to breach of contract, lost revenue or penalties.

If any link in our supply chain falls foul of the law, or fails to meet our ethical expectations, that could damage our reputation – possibly leading to legal action, fines and lost revenue.

If we don’t meet the expectations of regulators that govern us and the data we manage, it could result in significant penalties. In the case of EU General Data Protection Regulation 2018, this could amount to 4% of our global annual turnover.

What’s changed over the last year?

We dedicate time to assessing emerging geopolitical threats and the impact they could have on our supply chain. These include the impacts of the UK vote to leave the EU, which has required extensive preparation on our part to understand our suppliers’ readiness and the impact the availability of goods and services. Other impacts of supplier risk include the threat of modern slavery and human trafficking; and the growing threat of cyber-attacks on our systems and networks where our suppliers represent a source of vulnerability.

We continue to monitor the trend for mergers and acquisitions in some of the global markets we do business in. It highlights the risk of us becoming too dependent on single or monopolistic suppliers. We also try to make sure that suppliers do not become too dependent on us. Both scenarios are unhealthy for our business.

With EU GDPR coming into force, we worked closely with our suppliers through the year to help protect our people and customers and incorporate privacy-by-design and default into the products and services they supply us. More broadly, we have also started work to establish a new centralised third-party risk and control capability.

Over the course of the year there has been significant geo-political focus on Huawei, one of our major suppliers whose products include mobile handsets and also equipment for both current networks and for future 5G networks. On 15 May 2019, the U.S. government issued an Executive Order relating to the information and communications technology and services supply chain, which allows for the prohibition of certain transactions that pose a risk to U.S. national security. On 16 May 2019, the U.S. Department of Commerce amended its Entity List of restricted persons to include a number of Huawei entities. Certain transactions with the listed Huawei entities of any item subject to the Export Administration Regulations now require prior licensing. On 20 May 2019, the Department of Commerce issued a Temporary General License allowing specified activities for a period of 90 days. We have been closely monitoring these developments and will continue to do so as governments determine their future policies. In December 2018 we announced that in line with our long-standing network architecture principles around the use of Huawei, we will replace the current Huawei 4G core (inherited through the EE acquisition). This will be implemented as we move to a future new and combined 4G/5G core.

Colleague Engagement

Our people are central to everything we do and a vital part of our ambition to deliver a great customer experience and sustainable, profitable revenue growth. Our people strategy supports this ambition by creating an inclusive and enjoyable workplace so that our people can thrive as part of a dynamic business. Great employee engagement is necessary to ensure we meet our strategic aims.

Potential impact

We need to transform our business while also continuing to recruit, retain and engage our workforce to deliver a great customer experience and grow the business. An adverse reaction to change could impact talent retention resulting in a loss of critical skills and greater need for external recruitment, which would add cost to the business. Poor engagement also raises the risk of general industrial unrest and action, which in turn could cause disruption to our operations and the services that we provide to our customers.

What’s changed over the last year?

We’ve worked constructively with our unions this year to agree a number of transformation initiatives, including changes to our defined benefit pension scheme and the TUPE transfer of our people into Openreach Limited. As we create a simpler business, we’re also working closely with them to roll out a new people framework defining job families and career levels for our people.

Change Management

We are implementing a wide-ranging change programme across the entire organisation known as One BT. We need to continue to deliver differentiated customer experiences, whilst being able to have the financial capacity to invest in integrated network leadership. At the same time, we want BT to be a simple and agile business where our people can thrive.

In transforming our operating model, we need to manage this change carefully to ensure it delivers the desired outcomes. We recognise that such extensive change can also be a distraction and can cause uncertainty amongst our colleagues, so it’s important that we keep focused on delivering for our customers.

 

12


Table of Contents

Potential impact

If we do not manage our change programmes carefully then they will not deliver the business outcomes that we are trying to achieve. That could result in poorer customer experiences, negative impacts on employee engagement, or potential overspend on the projects themselves, and at the end of the programmes we may not have achieved the efficient processes needed to deliver a great customer experience, the desired cost savings, or differentiated products and services we were trying to launch.

As we describe elsewhere, we’ve been working hard on improving our customers’ experiences. If our transformation programmes do not deliver their intended customer benefits, or divert colleagues’ attention away from serving our customers, then we may suffer a reduction in the quality of the service we provide, and as a result incur customer churn and even financial penalties in some cases.

There is also a risk that we could overspend on the change programme itself.

What’s changed over the last year?

Over the past year, we have progressed delivery of our BT transformation plan and reorganising our business, including establishing a new people framework for our management grades. Work has continued delivering a new Digital Global Services with a new organisational structure. We have also completed the integration of our Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures units into a single new Enterprise unit.

ITEM 4. INFORMATION ON THE COMPANY

4.A History and development of the company

Background

BT Group plc is a public limited company registered in England and Wales and listed on the London and New York Stock Exchanges. It was incorporated in England and Wales on 30 March 2001 as Newgate Telecommunications Limited with the registered number 4190816. Its registered office address is 81 Newgate Street, London EC1A 7AJ and its telephone number is 020 7356 5000 (from within the United Kingdom) and +44 1793 596 931 (from outside the United Kingdom). The company changed its name to BT Group plc on 11 September 2001. The principal laws and legislation under which BT Group plc operates is the Companies Act 2006, as amended, and regulations made under it.

Following the demerger of mmO2 from BT in November 2001, the continuing activities of BT were transferred to BT Group plc.

British Telecommunications plc is a wholly-owned subsidiary of BT Group plc and encompasses virtually all the businesses and assets of the group. The successor to the statutory corporation British Telecommunications, it was incorporated in England and Wales as a public limited company, wholly owned by the Government, as a result of the Telecommunications Act 1984. Between November 1984 and July 1993, the Government sold all of its shareholding in British Telecommunications plc in three public offerings.

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“About BT” on page 4;

 

   

“Our customer-facing units” on page 5;

 

   

“Our corporate units” on page 5;

 

   

“Group performance — Capital expenditure” on page 37; and

 

   

“General information — Capital management and funding policy” on page 97

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

4.B Business overview

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“About BT” on page 4;

 

   

“Our customer-facing units” on page 5;

 

   

“Our corporate units” on page 5;

 

   

“Market context” on page 8;

 

   

“Our business model” on page 12;

 

   

“Our strategy” on page 14;

 

   

“Strategic progress – Delivering a differentiated customer experience” on page 16;

 

   

“Strategic progress – Building the best converged network” on page 18;

 

13


Table of Contents
   

“Strategic progress – Creating a simplified, leaner and more agile business” on page 20;

 

   

“Our stakeholders” on page 22;

 

   

“Our performance as a sustainable and responsible business” on page 32;

 

   

“A message from the Openreach Chairman” on page 42;

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Segment information” on page 122;

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Operating costs” on page 128; and

 

   

“Additional information — Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements” on page 190

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

Further note on certain activities

In addition, under Section 219 of the Iran Threat Reduction and Syria Human Rights Act of 2012, which added Section 13 (r) to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, we are required to disclose whether BT or any of its affiliates knowingly engaged in certain activities, transactions or dealings relating to Iran or certain designated individuals or entities. Disclosure is required even when the activities were conducted outside the US by non-US entities and even when they were conducted in compliance with applicable law.

During 2018/19, certain of the group’s non-US subsidiaries or other non-US entities conducted limited activities in, or with persons from, certain countries identified by the US Department of State as State Sponsors of Terrorism or otherwise subject to US sanctions. These activities, which generally relate to the provision of communications services to embassies and diplomatic missions of US-allied governments, other Communication Providers, news organisations, multinational corporations and other customers that require global communications connectivity, are insignificant to the group’s financial condition and results of operations.

BT has a contract in place with Telecommunication Infrastructure Company (TIC), to make and receive voice calls from Iran to the UK.

BT entered into a Framework Agreement with Rafsanjan Industrial Complex (RIC) for business consultancy services in May 2010 and provided an initial consultancy engagement under phase 1 of the agreement. In February 2011, phase 2 was agreed with RIC however BT stopped work in December 2011 due to the geopolitical situation. RIC made an advance payment to BT of €384,120 to carry out the phase 2 work.

BT’s subsidiary, EE (the acquisition of which was completed on 29 January 2016), has in place roaming partner agreements with Mobile Company of Iran (MCI), and Taliya Company (also known as Rafsanjan Industrial Complex). These bilateral agreements allow the transmission of mobile calls. There has been no traffic with Taliya in 2018/19. The value of the gross revenue to EE under these contracts is less than £25,000, although no payments have been made or received in 2018/19.

4.C Organizational structure

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“About BT” on page 4;

 

   

“Our customer-facing units” on page 5;

 

   

“Our corporate units” on page 5;

 

   

“Executive Committee” on page 6;

 

   

“Our business model” on page 12; and

 

   

“Related undertakings” on page 177

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

4.D Property, plants and equipment

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Networks and physical assets” on page 12;

 

   

“Strategic progress – Creating a simplified, leaner and more agile business” on page 20;

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Property, plant and equipment” on page 138; and

 

   

“Selected financial data” on page 188

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

 

14


Table of Contents

ITEM 4A. UNRESOLVED STAFF COMMENTS

As far as the Company is aware, there are no unresolved written comments from the SEC staff regarding its periodic reports under the Exchange Act received more than 180 days before March 31, 2019.

ITEM 5. OPERATING AND FINANCIAL REVIEW AND PROSPECTS

5.A Operating results

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Our customer-facing units” on page 5;

 

   

“Our corporate units” on page 5;

 

   

“Strategic progress – Delivering a differentiated customer experience” on page 16;

 

   

“Strategic progress – Building the best converged network” on page 18;

 

   

“Strategic progress – Creating a simplified, leaner and more agile business” on page 20;

 

   

“Our stakeholders” on page 22;

 

   

“Our key performance indicators” on page 30;

 

   

“Our performance as a sustainable and responsible business” on page 32;

 

   

“Group performance” on page 34, excluding the information under the sub-headings “2019/20 outlook” and “Outlook for 2019/20” on page 34;

 

   

“A message from the Openreach Chairman” on page 42;

 

   

“Alternative performance measures” on page 185; and

 

   

“Additional information — Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements” on page 190

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

5.B Liquidity and capital resources

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Group performance” on page 34, excluding the information under the sub-headings “2019/20 outlook” and “Outlook for 2019/20” on page 34;

 

   

“Additional information — Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements” on page 190;

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Loans and other borrowings” on page 159;

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Financial instruments and risk management” on page 163; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Financial commitments and contingent liabilities” on page 171

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

5.C Research and development, patents and licenses

Our research programmes are carefully designed to support the strategic aims of the whole of BT’s business and, even more importantly, to deliver the absolute best for our customers.

We work with the very best technologists from all over the world, drawing research & technologies from partnerships with universities and academia, start-ups, strategic partners, Government bodies, other telcos and key customers. We apply our own deep research skills & expertise, combined with our business and market know-how, to deliver innovative solutions that better serve our customers.

Key areas of focus include the pioneering work we are driving with partners and standards bodies, in network technologies to enable our customers to get the data speeds they need at a competitive cost.

Then there’s our business and operational transformation research programmes. These have led us to transform the way we serve our customers and manage our networks.

 

15


Table of Contents

Our industry-shaping research into the critical technologies of our time – ranging from security, cloud computing, the Internet of Things to mobility, TV & content and big data – is pioneering new products and services across BT Group.

Converged network research

The ability to provide world-class connectivity across converged networks is an absolute priority for BT. That’s why our research mission is to accelerate the adoption of converged networks. We are exploring the possibilities of virtualised environments such as cloud-centric networks and IT convergence and expanding the reach and coverage of our fixed and mobile networks into rural areas.

In particular, for connected cars and trains we are researching how 5G network slicing could help deliver dedicated, low-latency networks which are essential for the large-scale introduction of safe and secure connected vehicles.

And because 5G will be based on virtualised infrastructures, we are carrying out a broad spectrum of research initiatives looking at programmable networking and software-defined networks (SDN) and network functions virtualisations (NVF) and how they can empower our customers.

AI, Big Data

Our aim is to help the company become more efficient in the way we use data and information to manage our business and deliver products and services to our customers. We want to better understand how to store data and how to harvest the vast quantities of information being collected. Using analytics and data science, we are also exploring how artificial intelligence (AI) can analyse data to help us better predict future trends.

Cybersecurity

In cybersecurity we are investing heavily in research and development to come up with robust solutions that secure our networks and help our customers do the same.

The research we do is focused on three main areas with the first of these being prevention, working on building systems and virtual environments like cloud or IoT networks that are intrinsically very hard to break into.

Another key area for us is detection and prediction, where AI, machine learning and big data analysis can help us to create sophisticated network ‘alarm systems’ that find anomalies and react to them or to predict threats before they happen. We are also researching interactive visualisation technologies that allow humans to assess, review and take the necessary action in a way that’s innovative.

Innovations like automatic system patching or disruptive technologies like blockchain can help speed up response times to help reduce or eliminate threats – and we’re exploring both.

Connected Entertainment

We want to make sure our customers get the same viewing experience regardless of location, the network they are using or however they choose to watch that content. That’s why, right now we are exploring areas such as low latency, single content architectures and 5G network slicing. These are the technologies that will pave the way for true, near real-time multi-screen viewing experiences. We are also carrying out research into High Dynamic Range (HDR) TV, working closely with BT Sport.

This year we invested £643m (2017/18: £632m) in innovation over the last decade we’ve been one of the largest investors in innovation in the UK, and globally in the telecoms sector. We have a portfolio of more than 5,000 patents and applications, with 106 patents for inventions filed in 2018/19.

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Significant accounting policies that apply to the overall financial statements — Research and development” on page 121; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Operating costs” on page 128

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

5.D Trend information

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Group performance” on page 34, excluding the information under the sub-headings “2019/20 outlook” and “Outlook for 2019/20” on page 34;

 

   

“Selected financial data” on page 188; and

 

   

“Additional information — Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements” on page 190

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

 

16


Table of Contents

5.E Off-balance sheet arrangements

The information set forth under the heading “General information — Off-balance sheet arrangements” on page 97 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

5.F Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations

The information set forth under the heading “Group performance — Contractual obligations and commitments” on page 39 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

5.G Safe harbor

The information set forth under the heading “Additional information — Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements” on page 190 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 6. DIRECTORS, SENIOR MANAGEMENT AND EMPLOYEES

6.A Directors and senior management

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Board of Directors” on page 58; and

 

   

“The Board” on page 60

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

6.B Compensation

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Report on Directors’ Remuneration” on page 73;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Focus on Remuneration” on page 76;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Annual Remuneration Report” on page 79;

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Retirement benefit plans” on page 145; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Share-based payments” on page 155

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

6.C Board practices

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Our governance framework” on page 57;

 

   

“Board of Directors” on page 58;

 

   

“The Board” on page 60;

 

   

“Nominations Committee Chair’s report” on page 66;

 

   

“Audit & Risk Committee Chair’s report” on page 69;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Report on Directors’ Remuneration” on page 73;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Focus on Remuneration” on page 76;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Annual Remuneration Report” on page 79

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

The information set forth under the heading “Remuneration Policy” on pages 139 to 145 of the Annual Report & Form 20-F 2017, filed as Exhibit 15.2 to the BT Group plc Form 20-F filed on May 25, 2017, is incorporated herein by reference, excluding any cross-references to other sections of the Annual Report & Form 20-F 2017.

6.D Employees

 

17


Table of Contents

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“People” on page 22; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Employees” on page 129

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

6.E Share ownership

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Report on Directors’ Remuneration” on page 73;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Focus on Remuneration” on page 76;

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Annual Remuneration Report” on page 79; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Share-based payments” on page 155

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

The information set forth under the heading “Remuneration Policy” on pages 139 to 145 of the Annual Report & Form 20-F 2017, filed as Exhibit 15.2 to the BT Group plc Form 20-F filed on May 25, 2017, is incorporated herein by reference, excluding any cross-references to other sections of the Annual Report & Form 20-F 2017.

ITEM 7. MAJOR SHAREHOLDERS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

7.A Major shareholders

The information set forth under the heading “Relations with shareholders” on page 64 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

Analysis of shareholdings at 31 March 2019

 

                   Ordinary shares of 5p each  

Range

   Number of
holdings
     Percentage of total
%
     Number of shares held
millions
     Percentage of total
%
 

1 – 399

     291,732        39.85        61        0.61  

400 – 799

     190,237        25.99        105        1.06  

800 – 1,599

     136,690        18.67        153        1.54  

1,600 – 9,999

     107,629        14.70        335        3.36  

10,000 – 99,999

     4,616        0.63        87        0.88  

100,000 – 999,999

     643        0.09        239        2.40  

1,000,000 – 4,999,999

     295        0.04        687        6.90  

5,000,000 and above a,b,c,d

     192        0.03        8        83.25  
  

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

    

 

 

 

Total e

     732,034        100.00        9,968        100.00  

 

a  

9m shares were held in trust by Ilford Trustees (Jersey) Limited for allocation to employees under the employee share plans.

b  

Under the BT Group Employee Share Investment Plan, 61.8m shares were held in trust on behalf of 39,934 participants who were beneficially entitled to the shares. 378,918,106 shares were held in the corporate nominee BT Group EasyShare on behalf of 89,064 beneficial owners.

c  

167.4m shares were represented by ADSs. An analysis by size of holding is not available for these.

d  

45.3m shares were held as treasury shares.

e  

7.08% of the shares were in 732,034 individual holdings, of which 45,519 were joint holdings, and 92.92% of the shares were in 7,713 institutional holdings.

As far as the company is aware, the company is not directly or indirectly owned or controlled by another corporation or by the UK Government or any other foreign government or by any other natural or legal person severally or jointly. There are no arrangements known to the company, the operation of which may at a subsequent date result in a change in control of the company.

The company’s major shareholders do not have different voting rights to those of other shareholders.

At 8 May 2019, there were 9,968,127,681 ordinary shares outstanding, including 45,269,774 shares held as treasury shares. At the same date, approximately 34m ADSs (equivalent to 174,468,805 ordinary shares, or approximately 1.75% of the total number of ordinary shares outstanding on that date) were outstanding and were held by 1,379 record holders of ADRs.

At 31 March 2019, there were 3,426 shareholders with a US address on the register of shareholders who in total hold 0.03% of the ordinary shares of the company.

 

18


Table of Contents

7.B Related party transactions

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Directors’ information — Interest of management in certain transactions” on page 93; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Related party transactions” on page 171

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

7.C Interests of experts and counsel

Not applicable

ITEM 8. FINANCIAL INFORMATION

8.A Consolidated statements and other financial information

See Item 18 below.

In addition, the information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“General information — Legal proceedings” on page 97; and

 

   

“Group performance — Dividends” on page 37

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

Dividends

The company’s shareholders can declare dividends by passing an ordinary resolution provided that no dividend can exceed the amount recommended by the directors. Dividends must be paid out of profits available for distribution. If the Board considers that the profits of the company justify such payments, they can pay interim dividends on any class of shares of the amounts and on the dates and for the periods they decide. Fixed dividends will be paid on any class of shares on the dates stated for the payments of those dividends.

The directors can offer ordinary shareholders the right to choose to receive new ordinary shares, which are credited as fully paid, instead of some or all of their cash dividend. Before they can do this, the company’s shareholders must have passed an ordinary resolution authorising the directors to make this offer.

Any dividend which has not been claimed for ten years after it was declared or became due for payment will be forfeited and will belong to the company.

A final dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2018 was paid on 3 September 2018 to shareholders on the register on 10 August 2018, and an interim dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 was paid on 4 February 2019 to shareholders on the register on 28 December 2018. The final proposed dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019, if approved by shareholders, will be paid on 9 September 2019 to shareholders on the register on 9 August 2019.

The dividends paid or payable on BT shares and ADSs for the last five financial years are shown in the following table. The dividends on the ordinary shares exclude the associated tax credit. The amounts shown are not those that were actually paid to holders of ADSs. Dividends have been translated from Sterling into US Dollars using exchange rates prevailing on the date the ordinary dividends were paid.

 

            Per ordinary share                  Per ADS                 Per ADS  

Financial years ended 31 March

   Interim
pence
     Final
pence
     Total
pence
     Interim
£
    Final
£
    Total
£
    Interim
US$
    Final
US$
    Total
US$
 

2015

     3.90        8.50        12.40        0.390       0.850       1.240       0.573       1.285       1.858  

2016

     4.40        9.60        14.00        0.220 a       0.480 a       0.700 a       0.296 a       0.623       0.919  

2017

     4.85        10.55        15.40        0.2425       0.5275       0.770       0.281       0.6658       0.9468  

2018

     4.85        10.55        15.40        0.2425       0.5275       0.770       0.319       0.6658       0.9468  

2019

     4.62        10.78        15.40        0.231       0.5390       0.770       0.282       b       b  

 

a  

The reduction in the dividend payment is to reflect the ratio change to BT ADRs.

b  

Qualifying holders of ADSs on record as of 9 August 2019 are entitled to receive the final dividend which will be paid to ADS holders on 16 September 2019, subject to approval at the AGM. The US Dollar amount of the final dividend of 53.90 pence per ADS to be paid to holders of ADSs will be based on the exchange rate in effect on 9 September 2019, the date of payment to holders of ordinary shares.

 

19


Table of Contents

As dividends paid by the company are in Sterling, exchange rate fluctuations will affect the US Dollar amounts received by holders of ADSs on conversion by the Depositary of such cash dividends.

Dividend investment plan

Under the Dividend investment plan, cash from participants’ dividends is used to buy further BT shares in the market. Shareholders could elect to receive additional shares in lieu of a cash dividend for the following dividends:

 

     Date paid      Price per share
pence
 

2013/14 interim

     3 February 2014        385.76  

2013/14 final

     8 September 2014        387.00  

2014/15 interim

     9 February 2015        436.92  

2014/15 final

     7 September 2015        428.17  

2015/16 interim

     8 February 2016        469.41  

2015/16 final

     5 September 2016        394.44  

2016/17 interim

     6 February 2017        309.41  

2016/17 final

     4 September 2017        291.07  

2017/18 interim

     5 February 2018        248.73  

2017/18 final

     3 September 2018        222.31  

2018/19 interim

     4 February 2019        231.16  

Global Invest Direct

Details of the direct purchase plan run by the ADR Depositary, JPMorgan Chase & Co, Global Invest Direct, including reinvestment of dividends, are available from JPMorgan Chase & Co on +1 800 428 4237 (toll free within the US), or on written request to the ADR Depositary.

8.B Significant changes

The information set forth under the heading “Directors’ information — Going concern” on page 92 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

Spectrum Annual Licence Fee restitution claim

Annual fees for 1800MHz spectrum have increased from 31 January 2019 following Ofcom’s final statement and introduction of new fees regulations in December 2018. The Group has sought, through legal proceedings, repayment of overpaid fees that were charged during the period 2015-2017 under the previous 2015 fees regulations that were quashed by the Court of Appeal in 2017. On 17 May 2019, the Commercial Court handed down its judgment in the favour of the Group, and the Group received a payment of £87 million on 21 May 2019. Ofcom has obtained permission to appeal the judgment to the Court of Appeal, the appeal will likely be heard in late 2020.

Other than as disclosed in this item above, since the date of the annual consolidated financial statements included in this Form 20-F, which are dated May 8, 2019, no significant change has occurred.

ITEM 9. THE OFFER AND LISTING

9A. Offer and listing details

The principal listing of BT Group’s ordinary shares is on the London Stock Exchange. Trading on the London Stock Exchange is under the symbol ‘BT.A’. American Depositary Shares (ADSs), have been issued by JPMorgan Chase & Co, as Depositary for the American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) evidencing the ADSs, and are listed on the New York Stock Exchange. Trading on the New York Stock Exchange is under the symbol ‘BT’.

In December 2015 BT changed the ratio of its NYSE-listed American Depositary Receipt (ADR) programme from the previous ratio of one ADR per ten ordinary shares to one ADR per five ordinary shares. These changes to the ADR ratio have brought the ADR price broadly in line with the market average. To implement the change, ADR holders on the record at the close of business on 30 November 2015 received two ADRs for every one ADR held. There was no change to the underlying ordinary shares.

9B. Plan of distribution

Not applicable

9C. Markets

See Item 9A above

 

20


Table of Contents

9D. Selling shareholders

Not applicable

9E. Dilution

Not applicable

9F. Expenses of the issue

Not applicable

ITEM 10. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

10A. Share capital

Not applicable

10B. Memorandum and articles of association

Articles of Association (Articles)

The following is a summary of the principal provisions of BT’s Articles, a copy of which has been filed with the Registrar of Companies. A ‘holder of shares’ and a ’shareholder’ is, in either case, the person entered on the company’s register of members as the holder of the relevant shares. Shareholders can choose whether their shares are to be evidenced by share certificates (i.e. in certificated form) or held in electronic (ie uncertificated) form in CREST (the electronic settlement system in the UK).

BT adopted new Articles of Association with effect from July 2015, to provide additional flexibility for BT when trying to trace shareholders and to amend the provisions in line with the UK Corporate Governance code by providing for automatic retirement of all the directors at each AGM.

(a) Voting rights

Subject to the restrictions described below, on a show of hands, every shareholder present in person or by proxy at any general meeting has one vote and, on a poll, every shareholder present in person or by proxy has one vote for each share which they hold.

Voting at any meeting of shareholders is by a show of hands unless a poll is demanded by the chairman of the meeting or by at least five shareholders at the meeting who are entitled to vote (or their proxies), or by one or more shareholders at the meeting who are entitled to vote (or their proxies) and who have, between them, at least 10% of the total votes of all shareholders who have the right to vote at the meeting.

No person is, unless the Board decides otherwise, entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting or to exercise any other right conferred by being a shareholder if they or any person appearing to be interested in those shares has been sent a notice under section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 (which confers upon public companies the power to require information with respect to interests in their voting shares) and they or any interested person has failed to supply to the company the information requested within 14 days after delivery of that notice.

These restrictions end seven days after the earlier of the date the shareholder complies with the request satisfactorily or the company receives notice that there has been an approved transfer of the shares.

(b) Variation of rights

Whenever the share capital of the company is split into different classes of shares, the special rights attached to any of those classes can be varied or withdrawn either:

 

(i)

with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class; or

 

(ii)

with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal value of the issued shares of that class.

At any separate meeting, the necessary quorum is two persons holding or representing by proxy not less than one-third in nominal amount of the issued shares of the class in question (but at any adjourned meeting, any person holding shares of the class or his proxy is a quorum).

The company can issue new shares and attach any rights and restrictions to them, as long as this is not restricted by special rights previously given to holders of any existing shares. Subject to this, the rights of new shares can take priority over the rights of existing

shares, or existing shares can take priority over them, or the new shares and the existing shares can rank equally.

(c) Changes in capital

The company may by ordinary resolution:

 

(i)

divide all or any of its share capital into shares with a smaller nominal value; and

 

(ii)

consolidate and divide all or part of its share capital into shares of a larger nominal value.

 

21


Table of Contents

The company may also:

 

(i)

buy back its own shares; and

 

(ii)

by special resolution reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve and any share premium account.

(d) Dividends

The company’s shareholders can declare dividends by passing an ordinary resolution provided that no dividend can exceed the amount recommended by the directors. Dividends must be paid out of profits available for distribution. If the Board considers that the profits of the company justify such payments, they can pay interim dividends on any class of shares of the amounts and on the dates and for the periods they decide. Fixed dividends will be paid on any class of shares on the dates stated for the payments of those dividends.

The directors can offer ordinary shareholders the right to choose to receive new ordinary shares, which are credited as fully paid, instead of some or all of their cash dividend. Before they can do this, the company’s shareholders must have passed an ordinary resolution authorising the directors to make this offer.

Any dividend which has not been claimed for ten years after it was declared or became due for payment will be forfeited and will belong to the company.

(e) Distribution of assets on winding up

If the company is wound up (whether the liquidation is voluntary, under supervision of the court or by the court) the liquidator can, with the authority of a special resolution passed by the shareholders, divide among the shareholders all or any part of the assets of the company. This applies whether the assets consist of property of one kind or different kinds. For this purpose, the liquidator can place whatever value the liquidator considers fair on any property and decide how the division is carried out between shareholders or different groups of shareholders. The liquidator can also, with the same authority, transfer any assets to trustees upon any trusts for the benefit of shareholders which the liquidator decides. The liquidation of the company can then be finalised and the company dissolved. No past or present shareholder can be compelled to accept any shares or other property under the Articles which could give that shareholder a liability.

(f) Transfer of shares

Certificated shares of the company may be transferred in writing either by an instrument of transfer in the usual standard form or in another form approved by the Board. The transfer form must be signed or made effective by or on behalf of the person making the transfer. The person making the transfer will be treated as continuing to be the holder of the shares transferred until the name of the person to whom the shares are being transferred is entered in the register of members of the company.

The Board may refuse to register any transfer of any share held in certificated form:

 

(i)

which is in favour of more than four joint holders; or

 

(ii)

unless the transfer form to be registered is properly stamped to show payment of any applicable stamp duty and delivered to the company’s registered office or any other place the Board decide. The transfer must have with it: the share certificate for the shares to be transferred; any other evidence which the Board ask for to prove that the person wanting to make the transfer is entitled to do this; and if the transfer form is executed by another person on behalf of the person making the transfer, evidence of the authority of that person to do so.

Transfers of uncertificated shares must be carried out using a relevant system (as defined in the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 (the Regulations)). The Board can refuse to register a transfer of an uncertificated share in the circumstances stated in the Regulations.

If the Board decide not to register a transfer of a share, the Board must notify the person to whom that share was to be transferred giving reasons for its decision. This must be done as soon as possible and no later than two months after the company receives the transfer or instruction from the operator of the relevant system.

(g) Untraced shareholders

The company may sell any shares if the shares have been in issue for at least ten years, during that period at least three dividends have become payable on them and have not been cashed and BT has not heard from the shareholder or any person entitled to the dividends by transmission. BT must take all reasonable steps in the circumstances, to trace shareholders. This can include engaging an asset reunification company or other tracing agent to search for shareholders who have not kept their details up-to date, or taking any other steps the company considers appropriate. Shareholders whose shares are sold following this process will not be able to claim the proceeds of the sale. BT will be able to use the proceeds in any way the Board from time to time thinks fit.

(h) General meetings of shareholders

Every year the company must hold an annual general meeting. The Board can call a general meeting at any time and, under general law, must call one on a shareholders’ requisition. At least 21 clear days’ written notice must be given for every annual general meeting. For every other general meeting, at least 14 clear days’ written notice must be given. The Board can specify in the notice of meeting a time by which a person must be entered on the register of shareholders in order to have the right to attend or vote at the meeting. The time specified must not be more than 48 hours before the time fixed for the meeting.

(i) Limitations on rights of non-resident or foreign shareholders

The only limitation imposed by the Articles on the rights of non-resident or foreign shareholders is that a shareholder whose registered address is outside the UK and who wishes to receive notices of meetings of shareholders or documents from BT must give the company an address within the UK to which they may be sent.

 

22


Table of Contents

(j) Directors

Directors’ remuneration

Excluding remuneration referred to below, each director will be paid such fee for his services as the Board decide, not exceeding £65,000 a year and increasing by the percentage increase of the retail prices index (as defined by section 833(2) Income and Corporation Taxes Act 1988) for any 12-month period beginning 1 April 1999 or an anniversary of that date. The company may by ordinary resolution decide on a higher sum. This resolution can increase the fee paid to all or any directors either permanently or for a particular period. The directors may be paid their expenses properly incurred in connection with the business of the company.

The Board can award extra fees to a director who: holds an executive position; acts as chairman or deputy chairman; serves on a Board committee at the request of the Board; or performs any other services which the Board consider extend beyond the ordinary duties of a director.

The directors may grant pensions or other benefits to, among others, any director or former director or persons connected with them. However, BT can only provide these benefits to any director or former director who has not been an employee or held any other office or executive position in the company or any of its subsidiary undertakings, or to relations or dependants of, or people connected to, those directors or former directors, if the shareholders approve this by passing an ordinary resolution.

Directors’ votes

A director need not be a shareholder, but a director who is not a shareholder can still attend and speak at shareholders’ meetings.

Unless the Articles say otherwise, a director cannot vote on a resolution about a contract in which the director has an interest (this will also apply to interests of a person connected with the director).

If the legislation allows, a director can vote and be counted in the quorum on a resolution concerning a contract:

 

(i)

in which the director has an interest of which the director is not aware; or which cannot reasonably be regarded as likely to give rise to a conflict of interest;

 

(ii)

in which the director has an interest only because the director is a holder of shares, debentures or other securities of BT, or by reason of any other interest in or through BT;

 

(iii)

which involves: the giving of any security, guarantee or indemnity to the director or any other person for money lent or obligations incurred by the director or by any other person at the request of or for the benefit of BT or the benefit of any of its subsidiary undertakings; or a debt or other obligation which is owed by BT or any of its subsidiary undertakings to that other person if the director has taken responsibility for all or any part of that debt or obligation by giving a guarantee, security or indemnity;

 

(iv)

where BT or any of its subsidiary undertakings is offering any shares, debentures or other securities for subscription or purchase to which the director is or may be entitled to participate as a holder of BT securities; or where the director will be involved in the underwriting or sub-underwriting;

 

(v)

relating to any other company in which the director has an interest, directly or indirectly (including holding a position in that company) or is a shareholder, creditor, employee or otherwise involved in that company – these rights do not apply if the director owns 1% or more of that company or of the voting rights in that company;

 

(vi)

relating to an arrangement for the benefit of BT employees or former BT employees or any of BT’s subsidiary undertakings which only gives the directors the same benefits that are generally given to the employees or former employees to whom the arrangement relates;

 

(vii)

relating to BT buying or renewing insurance for any liability for the benefit of directors or for the benefit of persons who include directors;

 

(viii)

relating to the giving of indemnities in favour of directors;

 

(ix)

relating to the funding of expenditure by any director or directors: on defending criminal, civil or regulatory proceedings or actions against the director or the directors; in connection with an application to the court for relief; or on defending the director or the directors in any regulatory investigations; or which enables any director or directors to avoid incurring expenditure as described in this paragraph; and

 

(x)

in which the director’s interest, or the interest of directors generally, has been authorised by an ordinary resolution.

Subject to the relevant legislation, the shareholders can, by passing an ordinary resolution, ratify any particular contract carried out in breach of those provisions.

Directors’ appointment and retirement

Under BT’s Articles there must be at least two directors, who manage the business of the company. The shareholders can vary this minimum and/or decide a maximum by ordinary resolution. The Board and the shareholders (by ordinary resolution) may appoint a person who is willing to be elected as a director, either to fill a vacancy or as an additional director.

At every annual general meeting, all directors must automatically retire. A retiring director is eligible for re-election.

In addition to any power of removal under the 2006 Act, the shareholders can pass an ordinary resolution to remove a director, even though his or her time in office has not ended. They can elect a person to replace that director subject to the Articles, by passing an ordinary resolution. A person so appointed is subject to retirement by rotation when the director replaced would have been due to retire.

Directors’ borrowing powers

To the extent that the legislation and the Articles allow, the Board can exercise all the powers of the company to borrow money, to mortgage or charge its business, property and assets (present and future) and to issue debentures and other securities, and give security either outright or as collateral security for any debt, liability or obligation of the company or another person. The Board must limit the borrowings of the company and exercise all the company’s voting and other rights or powers of control exercisable by the

 

23


Table of Contents

company in relation to its subsidiary undertakings so as to ensure that the aggregate amount of all borrowings by the group outstanding, net of amounts borrowed intragroup among other things, at any time does not exceed £35bn. These borrowing powers may only be varied by amending the Articles.

(k) Sinking fund, liability to further calls and change of control

BT’s shares are not subject to any sinking fund provision under the Articles or as a matter of the laws of England and Wales. No shareholder is currently liable to make additional contributions of capital in respect of BT’s ordinary shares in the future. There are no provisions in the Articles or of corporate legislation in England and Wales that would delay, defer or prevent a change of control.

(l) Disclosure of interests in shares

Under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 and the UK Disclosure and Transparency Rules there is a statutory obligation on a person who acquires or ceases to have a notifiable interest in the relevant share capital of a public company like BT to notify the company of that fact. The disclosure threshold is 3%. These Rules also deal with the disclosure by persons of interests in shares or debentures of companies in which they are directors and certain associated companies. Under section 793 of the 2006 Act (referred to in (a) above), BT may ascertain the persons who are or have within the last three years been interested in its shares and the nature of those interests. The UK City Code on Takeovers and Mergers also imposes strict disclosure requirements with regard to dealings in the securities of an offeror or offeree company on all parties to a takeover and also on their respective associates during the course of an offer period.

10C. Material contracts

Not applicable

10D. Exchange controls

Limitations affecting security holders

There are no government laws, decrees, regulations, or other UK legislation which have a material effect on the import or export of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by the company except as otherwise described in Item 10E below.

There are no limitations under UK law restricting the right of non-residents to hold or to vote shares in the company.

10E. Taxation

Taxation (US Holders)

This is a summary only of the principal US federal income tax and UK tax consequences of the ownership and disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs by US Holders (as defined below) who hold their ordinary shares or ADSs as capital assets. It does not address all aspects of US federal income taxation and does not address aspects that may be relevant to persons who are subject to special provisions of US federal income tax law, including: US expatriates; insurance companies; tax-exempt organisations; banks; regulated investment companies; financial institutions; securities broker-dealers; traders in securities who elect a mark-to-market method of accounting; persons subject to alternative minimum tax; investors that directly, indirectly or by attribution own 10% or more of the total combined voting power or total value of share capital of BT; persons holding their ordinary shares or ADSs as part of a straddle, hedging transaction or conversion transaction; persons who acquired their ordinary shares or ADSs pursuant to the exercise of options or otherwise as compensation; or persons whose functional currency is not the US Dollar, amongst others. Those holders may be subject to US federal income tax consequences different from those set forth below. This summary does not address US federal taxes other than the income tax (such as estate or gift taxes) or US state and local taxes.

For the purposes of this summary, a US Holder is a beneficial owner of ordinary shares or ADSs that, for US federal income tax purposes, is: a citizen or individual resident of the United States; a corporation (or other entity taxable as a corporation for US federal income tax purposes) created or organised in or under the laws of the United States or any political subdivision thereof; an estate the income of which is subject to US federal income taxation regardless of its the administration of the trust and one or more US persons are authorised to control all substantial decisions of the trust. If a partnership holds ordinary shares or ADSs, the US tax treatment of a partner generally will depend upon the status of the partner and the activities of the partnership. A partner in a partnership that holds ordinary shares or ADSs is urged to consult its own tax adviser regarding the specific tax consequences of owning and disposing of the ordinary shares or ADSs.

In particular, this summary is based on (i) current UK tax law and the practice of Her Majesty’s Revenue & Customs (HMRC) and US law and US Internal Revenue Service (IRS) practice, including the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended, existing and proposed Treasury regulations, rulings, judicial decisions and administrative practice, all as currently in effect and available, (ii) the United Kingdom-United States Convention relating to estate and gift taxes, and (iii) the United Kingdom-United States Tax Convention that entered into force on 31 March 2003 and the protocol thereto (the Convention), all as in effect on the date of this Annual Report, all of which are subject to change or changes in interpretation, possibly with retroactive effect.

US Holders should consult their own tax advisers as to the applicability of the Convention and the consequences under UK, US federal, state and local, and other laws, of the ownership and disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs.

Taxation of dividends

Under current UK tax law, BT will not be required to withhold tax at source from dividend payments it makes. Unless a US Holder of ordinary shares or ADSs is resident for UK tax purposes in the UK or unless a US Holder of ordinary shares or ADSs carries on a trade, profession or vocation in the UK involving the ordinary shares or ADSs, the holder should not be liable for UK tax on dividends received in respect of ordinary shares and/or ADSs.

 

24


Table of Contents

For US federal income tax purposes, a distribution will be treated as ordinary dividend income. The amount of the distribution includible in gross income of a US Holder will be the US Dollar value of the distribution calculated by reference to the spot rate in effect on the date the distribution is actually or constructively received by a US Holder of ordinary shares, or by the Depositary. In the case of ADSs, a US Holder who converts Sterling into US Dollars on the date of receipt generally should not recognise any exchange gain or loss. A US Holder who does not convert Sterling into US Dollars on the date of receipt generally will have a tax basis in Sterling equal to their US Dollar value on such date. Foreign currency gain or loss, if any, recognised by the US Holder on a subsequent conversion or other disposition of Sterling generally will be US source ordinary income or loss. Dividends paid by BT to a US Holder will not be eligible for the US dividends received deduction that may otherwise be available to corporate shareholders.

For purposes of calculating the foreign tax credit limitation, dividends paid on the ordinary shares or ADSs will be treated as income from sources outside the US and generally will constitute ‘passive income’. US Holders who do not elect to claim a credit with respect to any foreign taxes paid in a given taxable year may instead claim a deduction for foreign taxes paid. A deduction does not reduce US federal income tax on a Dollar for Dollar basis like a tax credit. The deduction, however, is not subject to the limitations applicable to foreign credits.

As of 6 April 2016, UK tax credits no longer attach to any dividends paid on the ordinary shares or ADSs, irrespective of the domicile or residence of the shareholder. No question therefore arises as to the entitlement of any US Holder to any UK tax credit.

Certain US Holders (including individuals) are eligible for reduced rates of US federal income tax (currently at a maximum of 20%) in respect of qualified dividend income. There could also be a 3.8% net investment income tax on dividends to individuals and other non-corporate holders with income above a certain amount. For these purposes, qualified dividend income generally includes dividends paid by a non-US corporation if, among other things, the US Holders meet certain minimum holding periods and the non-US corporation satisfies certain requirements, including that either (i) the shares or ADSs with respect to which the dividend has been paid are readily tradable on an established securities market in the US, or (ii) the non-US corporation is eligible for the benefits of a comprehensive US income tax treaty (such as the Convention) which provides for the exchange of information. BT currently believes that dividends paid with respect to its ordinary shares and ADSs should constitute qualified dividend income for US federal income tax purposes. Each individual US Holder of ordinary shares or ADSs is urged to consult his own tax adviser regarding the availability to him of the reduced dividend tax rate in light of his own particular situation and regarding the computations of his foreign tax credit limitation with respect to any qualified dividend income paid by BT to him, as applicable.

Taxation of capital gains

Unless a US Holder of ordinary shares or ADSs is resident for UK tax purposes in the UK or unless a US Holder of ordinary shares or ADSs carries on a trade, profession, or vocation in the UK through a branch, agency, or, in the case of a company, a permanent establishment in the UK, and the ordinary shares and/or ADSs have been used, held, or acquired for the purposes of that trade, profession or vocation, the holder should not be liable for UK tax on capital gains on a disposal of ordinary shares and/or ADSs.

A US Holder who is an individual and who has ceased to be resident for tax purposes in the UK on or after 17 March 1998 or who falls to be regarded as resident outside the UK for the purposes of any double tax treaty (Treaty non-resident) on or after 16 March 2005 and continues to not be resident in the UK or continues to be Treaty non-resident for a period of less than five years of assessment and who disposes of his ordinary shares or ADSs during that period may also be liable on his return to the UK to UK tax on capital gains, subject to any available exemption or relief, even though he is not resident in the UK or is Treaty non-resident at the time of disposal.

For US federal income tax purposes, a US Holder generally will recognise capital gain or loss on the sale, exchange or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs in an amount equal to the difference between the US Dollar value of the amount realised on the disposition and the US Holder’s adjusted tax basis (determined in US Dollars) in the ordinary shares or ADSs. Such gain or loss generally will be US source gain or loss, and will be treated as long-term capital gain or loss if the ordinary shares have been held for more than one year at the time of disposition. Long-term capital gains recognised by an individual US Holder generally are subject to US federal income tax at preferential rates. The deductibility of capital losses is subject to significant limitations. Non-corporate US Holders may also be subject to a 3.8% tax on net investment income in respect of any gains.

A US Holder’s tax basis in an ordinary share or ADS will generally be its US Dollar cost. The US Dollar cost of an ordinary share or ADS purchased with foreign currency will generally be the US Dollar value of the purchase price on the date of purchase, or the settlement date for the purchase, in the case of ordinary shares or ADSs traded on an established securities market, as defined in the applicable Treasury Regulations, that are purchased by a cash basis US Holder (or an accrual basis US Holder that so elects). Such an election by an accrual basis US Holder must be applied consistently from year to year and cannot be revoked without the consent of the IRS. The amount realised on a sale or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs for an amount in foreign currency will be the US Dollar value of this amount on the date of sale or disposition. On the settlement date, the US Holder will recognise US source foreign currency gain or loss (taxable as ordinary income or loss) equal to the difference (if any) between the US Dollar value of the amount received based on the exchange rates in effect on the date of sale or other disposition and the settlement date. However, in the case of ordinary shares or ADS traded on an established securities market that are sold by a cash basis US Holder (or an accrual basis US Holder that so elects), the amount realised will be based on the exchange rate in effect on the settlement date for the sale, and no exchange gain or loss will be recognised at that time.

Passive foreign investment company status

A non-US corporation will be classified as a passive foreign investment company (a PFIC) for US federal income tax purposes for any taxable year if at least 75% of its gross income consists of passive income or at least 50% of the average value of its assets consist of assets that produce, or are held for the production of, passive income.

BT currently believes that it did not qualify as a PFIC for the tax year ended 31 March 2019. If BT were to become a PFIC for any tax year, US Holders would suffer adverse tax consequences. These consequences may include having gains realised on the disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs treated as ordinary income rather than capital gains and being subject to punitive interest charges on certain

 

25


Table of Contents

dividends and on the proceeds of the sale or other disposition of the ordinary shares or ADSs. Furthermore, dividends paid by BT would not be ‘qualified dividend income’ which may be eligible for reduced rates of taxation as described above. US Holders should consult their own tax advisers regarding the potential application of the PFIC rules to BT.

US information reporting and backup withholding

Dividends paid on and proceeds received from the sale, exchange or other disposition of ordinary shares or ADSs may be subject to information reporting to the IRS and backup withholding. Certain exempt recipients (such as corporations) are not subject to these information reporting requirements. In addition, non-corporate US Holders may be required to report their investment on a Form 8938. Backup withholding will not apply, however, to a US Holder who provides a correct taxpayer identification number or certificate of foreign status and makes any other required certification or who is otherwise exempt. Persons that are US persons for US federal income tax purposes who are required to establish their exempt status generally must furnish IRS Form W-9 (Request for Taxpayer Identification Number and Certification). Holders that are not US persons for US federal income tax purposes generally will not be subject to US information reporting or backup withholding. However, such holders may be required to provide certification of non-US status in connection with payments received in the US or through certain US-related financial intermediaries.

Backup withholding is not an additional tax. Amounts withheld as backup withholding may be credited against a holder’s US federal income tax liability. A holder may obtain a refund of any excess amounts withheld under the backup withholding rules by timely filing the appropriate claim for refund with the IRS and furnishing any required information.

UK stamp duty

A transfer of or an agreement to transfer an ordinary share will generally be subject to UK stamp duty or UK stamp duty reserve tax (SDRT) at 0.5% of the amount or value of any consideration provided rounded up (in the case of stamp duty) to the nearest £5. SDRT is generally the liability of the purchaser. It is customarily also the purchaser who pays UK stamp duty.

A transfer of an ordinary share to, or to a nominee for, a person whose business is or includes the provision of clearance services or to, or to a nominee or agent of, a person whose business is or includes issuing depositary receipts may give rise to a charge to stamp duty or SDRT of 1.5% of the amount of the consideration provided rounded up (in the case of stamp duty) to the nearest £5. HMRC accept that this charge is in breach of EU law so far as it applies to transfers that are an integral part of a share issue, and it was confirmed in the Autumn 2017 Budget that the Government intends to continue this approach following Brexit. HMRC’s published view is that the 1.5% SDRT or stamp duty charge continues to apply to other transfers of shares into a clearance service or depositary receipt arrangement, although this has been disputed. In view of the continuing uncertainty, specific professional advice should be sought before incurring a 1.5% SDRT or stamp duty charge in any circumstances.

No SDRT will be payable on the transfer of an ADS (assuming it is not registered in the UK), and, provided that the transfer documents are executed and always retained outside the UK, no UK stamp duty should in practice be required to be paid on the transfer of an ADS.

Transfers of ordinary shares into CREST will generally not be subject to stamp duty or SDRT unless such a transfer is made for a consideration in money or money’s worth, in which case a liability to SDRT will arise, usually at the rate of 0.5% of the value of the consideration. Paperless transfers of ordinary shares within CREST are generally liable to SDRT at the rate of 0.5% of the value of the consideration. CREST is obliged to collect SDRT from the purchaser of the shares on relevant transactions settled within the system.

The above statements are intended as a general guide to the current position. Certain categories of person (including recognised market makers, brokers and dealers) may not be liable to stamp duty or SDRT or may, although not liable for the tax, be required to notify and account for it under the Stamp Duty Reserve Tax Regulations 1986.

UK inheritance and gift taxes in connection with ordinary shares and/or ADSs

The rules and scope of domicile for UK tax purposes are complex and action should not be taken without advice specific to the individual’s circumstances.

A lifetime gift or a transfer on death of ordinary shares and/or ADSs by an individual holder, who is US domiciled (for the purposes of the UK/US Estate and Gift Tax Convention) and who is not a UK national (as defined in the Convention) will not generally be subject to UK inheritance tax if the gift is subject to US federal gift or US estate tax unless the tax is not paid (otherwise than as a result of a specific exemption, deduction, exclusion, credit or allowance).

10F. Dividends and paying agents

Not applicable

10G. Statement by experts

Not applicable

10H. Documents on display

All reports and other information that BT files with the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) may be inspected at the SEC’s public reference facilities at Room 1580, 100 F Street NE, Washington, DC 20549, US.

These reports may be accessed via the SEC’s website at sec.gov

10I. Subsidiary information

Not applicable

 

26


Table of Contents

ITEM 11. QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

The information set forth under the heading “Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Financial instruments and risk management” on page 163 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 12. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES OTHER THAN EQUITY SECURITIES

12.A. Debt securities

Not applicable

12.B. Warrants and rights

Not applicable

12.C. Other securities

Not applicable

12.D American Depositary Shares

During the 2019 financial year, the Company received direct and indirect payments from the Depositary of USD $1,099,420.45 which included the annual NYSE listing fee, investor relations expenses and other costs relating to the ADR program.

 

Category (as defined by SEC)

  

Depositary Actions

  

Associated Fee

(a) Depositing or substituting the underlying shares   

Each person to whom ADRs are issued against deposits of Shares, including deposits and issuances in respect of:

 

•  Share distributions, stock split, rights, merger

 

•  Exchange of securities or any other transaction or event or other distribution affecting the ADSs or the Deposited Securities

   USD 5.00 for each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) evidenced by the new ADRs delivered
(b) Receiving or distributing dividends    Distribution of dividends    USD 0.05 or less per ADS
(c) Selling or exercising rights    Distribution or sale of securities, the fee being in an amount equal to the fee for the execution and delivery of ADSs which would have been charged as a result of the deposit of such securities    USD 5.00 for each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof)
(d) Withdrawing an underlying security    Acceptance of ADRs surrendered for withdrawal of deposited securities    USD 5.00 for each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) evidenced by the ADRs surrendered
(e) Transferring, splitting or grouping receipts    Transfers, combining or grouping of depositary receipts    USD 1.50 per ADS
(f) General depositary services, particularly those charged on an annual basis   

•  Other services performed by the depositary in administering the ADRs

 

•  Provide information about the depositary’s right, if any, to collect fees and charges by offsetting them against dividends received and deposited securities

   USD 0.05 per ADS (or portion thereof) not more than once each calendar year and payable at the sole discretion of the depositary by billing Holders or by deducting such charge from one or more cash dividends or other case distributions

 

27


Table of Contents
(g) Expenses of the depositary   

Expenses incurred on behalf of Holders in connection with

 

•  Compliance with foreign exchange control regulations or any law or regulation relating to foreign investment

 

•  The depositary’s or its custodian’s compliance with applicable law, rule or regulation

 

•  Stock transfer or other taxes and other governmental charges

 

•  Cable, telex, facsimile transmission/delivery

 

•  Expenses of the depositary in connection with the conversion of foreign currency into U.S. dollars (which are paid out of such foreign currency)

 

•  Any other charge payable by depositary or its agents

   Expenses payable at the sole discretion of the depositary by billing Holders or by deducting charges from one or more cash dividends or other cash distributions

 

28


Table of Contents

PART II

ITEM 13. DEFAULTS, DIVIDEND ARREARAGES AND DELINQUENCIES

Not applicable

ITEM 14. MATERIAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE RIGHTS OF SECURITY HOLDERS AND USE OF PROCEEDS

Not applicable

ITEM 15. CONTROLS AND PROCEDURES

(a) Disclosure controls and procedures

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Directors’ Information” on page 92; and

 

   

“General Information” on page 94

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

(b) Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting

The information set forth under the heading “General Information – Controls and procedures – Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019” on page 95 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

(c) Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“General information – Controls and procedures – Audit of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting” on page 96; and

 

   

“Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” on page 102

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

(d) Changes in internal control over financial reporting

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“General Information – Controls and procedures – Remediation of material weakness in relation to the calculation of our IAS19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations” on page 94; and

 

   

“General Information – Controls and procedures – Changes in internal control over financial reporting” on page 96

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 16A. AUDIT COMMITTEE FINANCIAL EXPERT

The information set forth under the heading “General Information — US Regulation — US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002” on page 94 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 16B. CODE OF ETHICS

The information set forth under the heading “General Information — US Regulation — US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002” on page 94 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 16C. PRINCIPAL ACCOUNTANT FEES AND SERVICES

16C.(a) Audit Fees

The information set forth in the table under the heading “Audit services” in “Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Audit, audit related and other non-audit services” on page 130 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

16C.(b) Audit-Related Fees

The information set forth in the table under the heading “Audit related assurance services” in “Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Audit, audit related and other non-audit services” on page 130 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

 

29


Table of Contents

16C.(c) Tax Fees

The information set forth in the table under the headings “Other non-audit services — Taxation compliance services” and “Other non-audit services — Taxation advisory services” in “Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Audit, audit related and other non-audit services” on page 130 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

16C.(d) All Other Fees

The information set forth in the table under the headings “Other non-audit services — All other assurance services” and “Other non-audit services — All other services” in “Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Audit, audit related and other non-audit services” on page 130 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

16C.(e)

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Reports of the Board committees — Audit & Risk Committee Chair’s report” on page 69; and

 

   

“Consolidated financial statements — Notes to the consolidated financial statements — Audit, audit related and other non-audit services” on page 130

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

16C.(f)

Not applicable

ITEM 16D. EXEMPTIONS FROM THE LISTING STANDARDS FOR AUDIT COMMITTEES

Not applicable

ITEM 16E. PURCHASES OF EQUITY SECURITIES BY THE ISSUER AND AFFILIATED PURCHASERS

Share buyback

There were no share repurchases between 1 April 2018 and 31 March 2019

 

Calendar month

   Total number of shares
purchased
     Average price paid per
share (pence- net of
dealing costs)
     Total number of shares
purchased as part of
publicly announced
plans or programmes
     Maximum number of
shares yet to be
purchased under the
AGM authority a
 

April 2018

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

May

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

June

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

July

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

August

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

September

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

October

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

November

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

December

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

January 2019

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

February

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  

March

     nil        n/a        nil        941,326,818  
           

 

 

 
              941,326,818  
           

 

 

 

 

a  

Authority was given to purchase up to 996m shares on 12 July 2017 and 992m shares on 11 July 2018. These authorities expire at the close of the following AGM.

ITEM 16F. CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

KPMG LLP (“KPMG”) was our auditor for the 2018/19 financial year, such appointment having been approved by shareholders at the Company’s Annual General Meeting on 11 July 2018. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) was our auditor for the 2017/18 financial year and for prior financial years.

PwC and its predecessor firms were our auditors since BT listed on the London Stock Exchange in 1984 and PwC’s reappointment had not been subject to a tender until 2017 when the Audit & Risk Committee recommended to the Board that an audit tender process be undertaken with a view to appointing a new auditor for the financial year 2018/19. PwC advised the Audit & Risk Committee on 11 April 2017 that it would not participate in the tender process and so effectively indicated that it would decline to stand for re-election after the completion of the 2017/18 audit for the purposes of Item 16F(a)(1)(i) of Form 20-F. In this regard, we note that PwC would only have been permitted to serve as our auditor until the end of the 2019/20 audit due to the auditor rotation rules in the United Kingdom. In June 2017, following the conclusion of the audit tender process, we announced that the Board had approved the proposed appointment of KPMG as auditor beginning with the 2018/19 financial year, and the appointment was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 11 July 2018.

 

30


Table of Contents

PwC audited our financial statements for 2016/17 and 2017/18. None of the reports of PwC on those financial statements contained an adverse opinion or disclaimer of opinion, or was qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles.

During those fiscal years there were no disagreements with PwC, whether or not resolved, on any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure, or auditing scope or procedure, which, if not resolved to PwC’s satisfaction, would have caused PwC to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with their reports. During such fiscal years there were no “reportable events” as that term is defined in Item 16F(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F other than management concluded that there was a material weakness in internal control over financial reporting as at 31 March 2017 in respect of the Italian business, as described our Annual Report on Form 20-F for 2016/17 and 2017/18, and as at 31 March 2018 in respect of the IAS 19 accounting error, as described on pages 94 to 95 of the Annual Report 2019 incorporated herein by reference.

As part of our investigation into our Italian business, in October 2016, we engaged KPMG to conduct an independent review of the accounting practices in our Italian business. The investigation, which included our own review with support and oversight from our Legal, Governance & Compliance function and Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer, revealed inappropriate behavior in our Italian business, improper accounting practices and a complex set of improper sales, purchase, factoring and leasing transactions.

In 2017, KPMG and our internal investigation team, with support and oversight from our Legal, Governance & Compliance function and Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer conducted an investigation of the systems and controls relating to our Italian business. This investigation resulted in the steps to improve our internal controls described in our Annual Reports on Form 20-F for 2016/17 and 2017/18.

We have provided KPMG with a copy of this disclosure in response to Item 16F and requested that KPMG provides us with a letter addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission stating whether they agree with such disclosure. A copy of KPMG’s letter, dated May 23, 2019, is attached as Exhibit 15.4 to this Form 20-F.

We have provided PwC with a copy of this disclosure in response to Item 16F and requested that PwC provides us with a letter addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission stating whether they agree with such disclosure. A copy of PwC’s letter, dated May 23, 2019, is attached as Exhibit 15.5 to this Form 20-F.

ITEM 16G. CORPORATE GOVERNANCE

The information set forth under the heading “General Information — US Regulation — New York Stock Exchange” on page 94 of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

ITEM 16H. MINE SAFETY DISCLOSURE

Not applicable

 

31


Table of Contents

PART III

ITEM 17. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Not applicable

ITEM 18. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The information set forth under the headings:

 

   

“Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” on page 101;

 

   

“Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm” on page 102; and

 

   

“Financial statements” on page 110

of the Annual Report 2019 is incorporated herein by reference.

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of BT Group plc

Opinion on the Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying group balance sheet of BT Group plc and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of 31 March 2018, and the related group income statements, comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended 31 March 2018, including the related notes (collectively referred to as the “financial statements”), before the effects of the adjustments noted in the paragraph below. In our opinion, the financial statements before the effects of the adjustments noted in the paragraph below, present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of 31 March 2018, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended 31 March 2018 in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union (the 2018 financial statements before the effects of the adjustments noted in the paragraph below are not presented herein).

We were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the adjustments in relation to the following:

 

   

retrospectively apply the transfer of the Northern Ireland Networks business between reportable segments, as described in Notes 2, 5, and 8, and retrospectively apply the reclassification of internal revenue generated by the Ventures business within the Enterprise segment, as described in Note 5; and

 

   

retrospectively apply the re-presentation of other operating costs as described in Note 7, and the presentation of amounts related to items designated as hedging instruments in Note 27.

Accordingly, we do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance about whether such adjustments are appropriate and have been properly applied. Those adjustments were audited by other auditors.

Basis for Opinion

These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s financial statements before the effects of the adjustments described above based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits of these financial statements, before the effects of the adjustments described above, in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud.

Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom

9 May 2018, except for the effects of the restatement of previously issued financial statements for IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations discussed in Note 1 to the financial statements, as to which the date is 19 September 2018.

We served as the Company’s auditor from 1984 to 2018.

ITEM 19. EXHIBITS

The following exhibits are filed as part of this annual report:

1.1    Articles of Association of the Company, incorporated by reference to Exhibit 1.1 to the Company’s Annual Report on Form 20-F dated May 19, 2016
4.1    Service contract appointing Philip Jansen as Chief Executive, dated 24 October 2018
4.2    Letter of appointment of Matthew Key as a non-executive director, dated 24 October 2018,
4.3    Letter of appointment of Allison Kirkby as a non-executive director, dated 12 February 2019.
4.4    Extension letter of Mike Inglis as a non-executive director, dated 9 April 2018
8.1    Significant subsidiaries as of March 31, 2019, see “Related undertakings” on page 177 of the Annual Report 2019 included as Exhibit 15.2
12.1    Section 302 certification of Chief Executive
12.2    Section 302 certification of Chief Financial Officer
13.1    Section 906 certification
15.1    Consent of KPMG LLP, independent registered public accounting firm
15.2*    Annual Report 2019
15.3    Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, independent registered public accounting firm
15.4    Letter from KPMG LLP to the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, dated May 23, 2019
15.5    Letter from PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP to the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission, dated May 23, 2019
101    The following materials from this Form 20-F formatted in XBRL (eXtensible Business Reporting Language): (i) the Group income statement, (ii) the Group statement of comprehensive income, (iii) the Group balance sheet, (iv) the Group statement of changes in equity, (v) the Group cash flow statement and (vi) the Notes to the consolidated financial statements.

 

*

Certain of the information included within Exhibit 15.2, which is provided pursuant to Rule 12b-23(a)(3) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, is incorporated by reference in this Form 20-F, as specified elsewhere in this Form 20-F. With the exception of the items and pages so specified, the Annual Report 2019 is not deemed to be filed as part of this Form 20-F.

 

32


Table of Contents

SIGNATURES

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

BT Group plc
/s/ Simon Lowth
Name: Simon Lowth
Title:   Chief Financial Officer

Date: May 23, 2019

 

33

Exhibit 4.1

DATED 24 OCTOBER 2018

 

(1)

BT GROUP plc

 

(2)

PHILIP ERIC RENE JANSEN

 

 

DIRECTOR’S SERVICE CONTRACT

 

 


CONTENTS

 

1.

  INTERPRETATION      3  

2.

  PERIOD      6  

3.

  DUTIES      6  

4.

  SHARE DEALING AND OTHER RULES      7  

5.

  CONFLICTS      8  

6.

  SALARY AND INCENTIVE ARRANGEMENTS      8  

7.

  PENSION      9  

8.

  INSURANCE      9  

9.

  HOLIDAY      10  

10.

  CAR      10  

11.

  TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES      10  

12.

  SICK PAY      10  

13.

  MEDICAL EXAMINATION      11  

14.

  EXPENSES      11  

15.

  PROFESSIONAL SUBSCRIPTIONS AND ADVICE      11  

16.

  INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY      11  

17.

  DISCIPLINARY AND GRIEVANCE PROCEDURE      12  

18.

  OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE WORK      12  

19.

  TERMINATION      13  

20.

  CONFIDENTIALITY      15  

21.

  RESTRICTIONS      16  

22.

  DATA PROTECTION      17  

23.

  CONTINUATION      17  

24.

  VARIATION      17  

25.

  NOTICES      18  

26.

  COUNTERPARTS      18  

27.

  CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT 1999      18  

28.

  MISCELLANEOUS      18  

 

2


DATED 24 OCTOBER 2018

PARTIES

 

1)

BT GROUP plc (registered number 4190816) whose registered office is at 81 Newgate Street, London EC1A 7AJ (BT)

 

2)

PHILIP ERIC RENE JANSEN whose address is 81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ (the Director)

 

1.

INTERPRETATION

 

1.1

In this Agreement the following expressions shall mean:

 

Agreement    means this agreement and any of its schedules.
Associated Company    any company or venture in which BT or a Subsidiary has a shareholding or equity participation;
Benefits    pension benefits (including life cover), health cover, dental cover, the car currently provided on termination together with the cost of maintenance, insurance and motor vehicle tax (but not petrol);
Board    the board of directors of BT, or a committee of the board;

BT Group

Chairman

  

BT and all its Subsidiaries from time to time;

the chairman of BT or his designated nominee;

Commencement Date    1 January 2019;
Competing Business    means any business which competes (or is about to compete) with the part(s) of BT or BT Group’s business in which the Director was actively involved any time during the 12 months immediately before the date his employment ends—or about which he had access to Confidential Information.
Confidential Information    means trade secrets, commercially sensitive information and confidential information which the Director knows about as part of or in connection with his employment. It means anything about the business, products, affairs, personal affairs, and finances of BT, BT Group—or any of their customers or prospective customers, suppliers, management or shareholders—which could be of value, or which could give an unfair advantage to an actual or potential competitor of BT or BT Group, or would cause harm to BT or BT Group if disclosed. It can be in any form. It includes but isn’t limited to:
(i)      terms of business with suppliers and what they’ve charged;
(ii)     past, current or prospective customers’ identities;
(iii)    contract and business terms with past or current

 

3


   customers, including what they’ve asked for, and what BT has charged (or details of negotiations with prospective customers);
(iv)      individual contact numbers, addresses and details of past, current or prospective customers, clients and suppliers;
(v)       business plans, strategies (including pricing strategies), costings, pricing structures or lists, sales plans, policies, targets and forecasts, and business dealings or transactions, tenders and bids;
(vi)      confidential management and financial information, results and forecasts (including draft, provisional and final figures). That’s things like dividend information, turnover and stock levels, profits and profit margins;
(vii)     confidential proposals on acquisitions or disposals. That could be about whole or parts of BT or the BT Group, or us proposing to grow or shrink any of our activities. It could also be any other information about confidential transactions or proposals;
(viii)    confidential details of employees, consultants and officers and of their pay, fees or other benefits;
(ix)      information on products, services, research, inventions, secret processes, technology development, manufacture, composition, designs, formulae, specifications, drawings, technical data, source codes, computer systems, software, prototypes and product lines;
(x)       marketing strategy, market share statistics, marketing plans, surveys, and/or reports, marketing research and/or marketing methods; and
(xi)      any information which is treated as confidential or which the Director has been told (or should reasonably know) is confidential. That includes information given to BT or the BT Group in confidence by customers, suppliers or anyone else.

Controller,

 

Personal Data and

  
Process/Processing    have the meanings ascribed to them in the Directive, and/or in the GDPR and will apply from the Commencement Date;
Data Protection   
Legislation    means collectively (i) the Directive, (ii) other applicable legislation of the European Union, (iii) applicable local legislation relating to the Processing of Personal Data and/or the protection of an individual’s privacy, and, (iv) from 25 May

 

4


   2018, the GDPR, and any successor legislation or regulation and (v) any binding guidance or code of practice issued by a Supervisory Authority;
Directive    means Directive 95/46/EC of the European Parliament and of the Council of 24 October 1995;
Employment    the Director’s employment in accordance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement;
Group Company    any company in the BT Group;
GDPR    means General Data Protection Regulation (EU) 2016/679 repealing the Directive, and any amendment or replacement to it (including any corresponding or equivalent national law or regulation which implements the GDPR); and
“in any way”    in the Schedule means acting in any capacity directly or indirectly for the Director or jointly with (or for) any person, company or organisation. That includes acting as agent, consultant, director, employee, owner, partner, shareholder or in any other capacity. The Director is allowed to hold for investment purposes only up to five per cent of any class of securities of any company, whether or not it is listed on a recognised investment exchange.
Key Employee    is a director or senior employee of BT or BT Group with whom the Director had personal dealings any time during the 12 months immediately before the date his employment ends, and who knows Confidential Information, or has knowledge of, connections with, or influence over BT or BT Group customers.
The Offer   
Letter Terms    The terms set out in Annex 1 to this Agreement.
Salary    £1,100,000 a year or such higher salary as may be determined by the Board;
Subsidiary    any subsidiary which for the time being is a subsidiary company (as defined in Section 1159 of the Companies Act 2006) of BT
Supervisory Authority    means any competent authority responsible for supervising compliance with Data Protection Legislation.
“the date the Director’s employment ends”    in the Schedule means the effective date of termination of his BT employment, as defined by Section 97 of the Employment Rights Act 1996 (as amended).
Works    means any invention, design, or copyright work, including without limitation all documents, data, drawings,

 

5


   specifications, articles, computer programmes, object codes, source codes, network designs, business logic, notes, sketches, drawings, reports, modifications, tools, scripts or other items

 

1.2

A reference to something being determined, specified or required by BT includes a determination, specification or requirement from time to time.

 

1.3

This Agreement supersedes any previous agreement between BT or any other Group Company and the Director.

 

2.

PERIOD

 

2.1

Subject to Paragraph 19, this Agreement will continue for an indefinite period until either BT has given to the Director previous written notice of not less than twelve months or the Director has given to BT previous written notice of not less than six months, ending in either case at any time after the initial period.

 

2.2

The Director’s period of continuous employment for statutory purposes shall begin on the Commencement Date.

 

3.

DUTIES

 

3.1

BT will employ the Director as a full-time executive director and as of 1 February 2019, Chief Executive of BT. The Director’s initial place of work will be at BT’s head office, which is currently located at BT Centre, 81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ. However, you will be required to visit and work at various other locations, in the UK and overseas, so that you can properly fulfil your duties.

 

3.2

During the Employment, the Director will:

 

  (a)

diligently perform all such duties and exercise all such powers as are lawfully and properly assigned to him from time to time by the Board, whether such duties or powers relate to BT or the BT Group and Associated Companies, at such locations in the United Kingdom or overseas, as the Board or the Chairman may specify;

 

  (b)

comply with all BT rules, regulations, policies and procedures (including codes of conduct) and those of any applicable Group Company or Associated Company from time to time in force;

 

  (c)

comply with all directions lawfully and properly given to him by the Board;

 

  (d)

unless prevented by sickness, injury or other incapacity, and other than any time reasonably spent on any external non-executive directorship or other position which has been approved by the Chairman or the Remuneration Committee, devote the whole of his time, attention and abilities during his working hours to the business of BT or any other Group Company or Associated Company for which he is required to perform duties;

 

6


  (e)

promptly provide the Board with all information it may require in connection with the business or affairs of BT and of any other Group Company or Associated Company for which he is required to perform duties; and

 

  (f)

report to BT and any applicable Group Company or Associated Company any matters of concern of which he is aware, in particular any wrongdoing (or proposed wrongdoing), acts of misconduct, dishonesty, breach of any policies of the BT Group or Associated Companies, including but not limited to the codes of conduct or breach of any relevant regulatory rules committed, contemplated or discussed by any member of staff, contractor or other third party.

 

3.3

The Director acknowledges that the Company may appoint a temporary replacement as acting Chief Executive if, as a result of any illness, injury or other incapacity, he has been unable to perform his duties for a continuous period of three months (or, in the reasonable opinion of the Board, is likely to be unable to perform his duties for a continuous period of at least three months).

 

3.4

The Director’s working hours will be such hours as are required for the proper performance of his duties

 

3.5

The Director agrees, that due to the autonomous nature of his role the duration of his working time cannot be measured or monitored and, accordingly, the Director’s employment falls within the scope of regulation 20 of the Working Time Regulations 1998 (the Regulations ).

 

3.6

The Director’s employment with BT is subject to and conditional upon his being entitled to be lawfully employed by BT in the UK and the Director providing evidence, satisfactory to BT, of the same. The Director will not be permitted to commence employment unless and until he has done this to BT’s satisfaction. The Director agrees to immediately notify BT about any change to his entitlement to work for BT in the UK. If the Director’s lawful employment in the UK is subject to BT making an application for a visa, permission or any other approval in respect of the same, it is a condition of the Director’s employment that he cooperates with any such application and provides BT with any information, assistance and documents as BT may specify

 

3.7

Should the Director:

 

  (a)

cease, or appear in BT’s belief to have ceased, to be entitled to be lawfully employed by BT in the UK;

 

  (b)

fail to provide on request documents to demonstrate that he is entitled to be lawfully employed by BT in the UK; or

 

  (c)

not provide BT with the information, assistance or documents it may specify in relation to any application relating to the Director’s lawful employment in the UK,

BT may terminate the Director’s employment without notice and without compensation or Payment in Lieu.

 

7


4.

SHARE DEALING AND OTHER RULES

 

4.1

The Director will comply with the BT share dealing rules, BT’s internal codes, rules and/or policies as amended from time to time, BT’s Articles of Association and with all applicable rules and regulations from time to time of the UK Listing Authority, any stock exchange on which BT’s and/or any other Group Company’s shares and/or stock are listed and/or traded, and any other relevant regulatory bodies.

 

4.2

The Director will:

 

  (a)

consent to BT or any other Group Company inspecting any electronic equipment used by the Director, and to monitoring and recording any use that he makes of BT’s or any other Group Company’s electronic communications and information technology systems for the purpose of ensuring that BT’s rules (and those of any other Group Company) are being complied with and for legitimate business purposes; and

 

  (b)

comply with any electronic communication systems policy that BT may issue from time to time.

 

5.

CONFLICTS

 

5.1

The Director will promote, and not do anything which is harmful or conflicts with, the interests and reputation of the BT Group.

 

5.2

The Director will not without obtaining prior written consent of the Chairman:

 

  (a)

work for (in any capacity) any other person, business, organisation or company or be engaged, concerned or interested either directly or indirectly in any other trade, profession, business or occupation or hold any directorship or office in any company or entity that does or is likely to compete with the BT Group businesses; or

 

  (b)

hold any shares or interests in any business or company that does or is likely to compete with the BT Group businesses.

 

5.3

The Director is entitled to fees received by him from directorships of other companies but only in accordance with BTs remuneration policy.

 

5.4

If the Director becomes aware of any conflicts of interest that may arise, he must disclose these without delay to the Board.

 

6.

SALARY AND INCENTIVE ARRANGEMENTS

 

6.1

The Director will be paid the Salary in twelve equal monthly instalments, payable on the last business day of each month.

 

6.2

The Director’s salary will be inclusive of all fees and other remuneration to which he may be or become entitled as an officer of any Group Company or Associated Company.

 

6.3

The Director will be eligible to participate in annual performance-related bonus arrangements at the discretion of the Board, subject to and in accordance with the

 

8


  terms of the relevant bonus arrangements from time to time in force. Any bonus will be subject to applicable deferral arrangements.

 

6.4

The Director may, at the discretion of the Board, participate in any scheme established for BT employees to acquire shares in BT subject to the applicable rules of the scheme, but participation under such schemes will not constitute a term of employment.

 

6.5

The Director agrees that, pursuant to Part II of the Employment Rights Act 1996, BT has the right to deduct from his Salary and/or any other sum or benefit due to the Director any amount owed to BT and/or any other company in the BT Group by the Director, including without limitation any amount to be recovered pursuant to any share-related arrangement in which the Director participates.

 

6.6

Following the enactment of sections 79 to 82 of the Enterprise and Regulatory Reform Act 2013 the Director agrees that:

(a) any obligation of BT or any other Group Company or Associated Company under this Agreement and any other arrangement relating to remuneration from which the Director benefits or enters into in connection with being a director of BT shall comply with the Directors’ Remuneration policy as approved by BT shareholders in a general meeting in accordance with the terms of applicable legislation; and(b) in the event that approval of the Director’s Remuneration Policy is not obtained at any general meeting, the Director will have no entitlement to compensation or damages in respect of any loss suffered as a consequence.

 

7.

PENSION

 

7.1

BT will pay an amount of 15 percent of the Salary in each year as a contribution to the Director’s personal pension by twelve monthly instalments, payable on the last day of each month or should the Director so elect such sum will be paid to him as a cash allowance each month (subject to the appropriate deductions). The cash allowance does not count as salary for the purpose of determining incentives or other benefits

 

7.2

BT will comply with its automatic enrolment obligations under legislation in relation to the Director. If the Director is automatically enrolled to an automatic enrolment scheme nominated by BT in accordance with its automatic enrolment obligations and does not opt out, or if the Director opts in to such a scheme, the pension allowance described in Paragraph 7.1 will be reduced by an amount equal to the aggregate of any employer and employee contributions (including tax relief in respect of such contributions, if any) payable to or in respect of the Director to such scheme.

 

8.

INSURANCE

 

8.1

During the Employment, subject to the Director’s age, health and/or any other personal characteristics (or, where relevant, that of his spouse or children) not preventing cover being obtained without exceptional conditions or unusually high

 

9


  premiums, and to the terms of the relevant policy and rules of the relevant insurer or provider from time to time, BT will:

 

  (a)

arrange for the benefit of the Director life insurance cover equal to 4 times Salary and

 

  (b)

arrange private health cover for the Director, the Director’s spouse and children under the age of 18 (or 21 if in full-time education) and dental cover for the Director and the Director’s spouse.

 

  (c)

The Director acknowledges that as the above insured benefits are insured arrangements, the payment of any benefit is subject to the discretion of the insurers. BT has no obligation to assist the Director in the advancement of any claim under the insurance, nor any obligation to make any payment or provide any alternative benefit should the insurer refuse to pay or provide cover for any reason

 

9.

HOLIDAY

The Director will be entitled to paid statutory holidays and to 30 days’ paid holiday in each year which accrues rateably each month in arrears, to be taken at times agreed with the Chairman.

 

10.

CAR

 

10.1

BT will provide the Director with a car appropriate to his status and responsibilities in accordance with BT’s company car policy from time to time. BT will bear the cost of taxing, insuring, repairing and maintaining the car as well as the cost of business mileage.

 

11.

TELECOMMUNICATIONS FACILITIES

BT will provide telecommunications facilities and home security at the Director’s main residences in the UK, all as determined by BT.

 

12.

SICK PAY

 

  (a)

During the Employment, the Director will be entitled to receive sick pay (inclusive of any statutory sick pay and any benefits payable under any permanent health insurance effected by BT) of: one-twelfth of the Salary for each month in the first six months; and

 

  (b)

one twenty-fourth of the Salary for each month in the next six months

in total in any continuous period of four years and subject to production of medical certificates and any other requirements BT may reasonably request, including (without limitation) the Director complying with BT’s sickness policies and procedures for executives (including any sickness reporting obligations). Once the Director has been absent for more than twelve months within a rolling four year period, no further sick pay will be payable. Both calculations run in conjunction with each other taking into account each day’s absence in the respective rolling period.

 

10


12.2

If the Director’s absence is due to the actionable negligence of a third party in respect of which damages are recoverable, then he must

 

  (a)

notify BT immediately of all the relevant circumstances and of any claim, compromise, settlement, judgement or award made in connection with it;

 

  (b)

give to BT such information concerning the above matters as BT may reasonably require; and

 

  (c)

if BT requires it, refund to BT any amount received from any such third party provided that the refund will be no more than the amount which has been recovered in respect of remuneration.

 

13.

MEDICAL EXAMINATION

BT may, at its expense, require the Director to be examined by a medical practitioner of BT’s choice. BT will be entitled to receive a copy of any report produced in connection with all such examinations, on a confidential basis, and to discuss the contents of the report with the doctor who produced it.

 

14.

EXPENSES

BT will reimburse authorised expenses properly incurred in the course of the Director’s duties against receipts or other proof of expenditure.

 

15.

PROFESSIONAL SUBSCRIPTIONS AND ADVICE

 

15.1

The Director will be reimbursed subscriptions to professional bodies where the Chairman considers it to be in the interests of BT.

 

15.2

BT will pay the cost of personal tax and financial planning advice up to a maximum of £5,000 (excluding VAT) a year.

 

16.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY

 

16.1

Subject to the Patents Act 1977 and the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, any Works made by the Director during the course of his employment with BT (whether or not in the course of his duties) shall immediately upon creation or performance vest in and shall be and remain the sole and exclusive property of BT, and the Director hereby irrevocably and unconditionally assigns to BT, all right, title and interest in and to the same.

 

16.2

The Director must promptly notify BT of any Works which he creates, which shall become the absolute property of BT and he hereby unconditionally waive in favour of BT all rights (if any) he may have under Chapter IV (moral rights) of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988 (or any foreign corresponding rights) in connection with the authorship of any Works, wherever in the world enforceable, including without limitation the right to be identified as the author of such Works and the right not to have such Works altered or subjected to derogatory treatment.

 

11


16.3

The Director agrees to execute any formal and additional assignment required by BT to vest or confirm the vesting in it of all rights in any Works as set out in this Clause at the expense of BT.

 

16.4

The Director hereby authorises BT to appoint someone to be his attorney and, in his name, and on his behalf, to sign, execute and do all such things as BT thinks necessary or desirable to fully vest or confirm the vesting in it of all rights in any works as set out in this Clause.

 

16.5

The terms and obligations of this Clause survive the expiry or termination of the Director’s employment for any reason.

 

17.

DISCIPLINARY AND GRIEVANCE PROCEDURE

 

17.1

If the Director is dissatisfied with any disciplinary decision taken in relation to him he may appeal in writing to the Board within seven days of that decision. The Board’s decision shall be final.

 

17.2

If the Director has any grievance he may apply in writing to the Chairman who personally will either propose a solution or refer the matter to the Board.

 

18.

OBLIGATION TO PROVIDE WORK

 

18.1

BT is under no obligation to provide the Director with work and may:

 

  (a)

suspend the Director, if the Board considers this appropriate, for up to 3 months; or

 

  (b)

if notice to terminate this Agreement has been given or received or the Director seeks to or indicates an intention to resign (or terminate) his employment without notice (or full notice), vary the Director’s duties or require the Director to cease performing all duties during all or part of the notice period (or during the period that should have been the notice period),

in which case BT may continue to pay the Salary in accordance with Paragraph 6.1 and provide the Benefits under this Agreement until this Agreement terminates and the Director will, in addition to his duties of fidelity, confidence and good faith, continue to comply with his obligations under this Agreement, including under Paragraph 5.

 

18.2

Where Paragraph 18.1 applies, BT may require the Director:

 

  (a)

not to attend any BT Group or Associated Company premises

 

  (b)

to refrain from business contact with any customers, prospective customers, workers, officers, directors, employees or any other business contacts of the BT Group or any Associated Company

 

  (c)

to take any holiday which has accrued under Paragraph 9 during any period of suspension under this Paragraph 18.2;

For the avoidance of any doubt, where Paragraph 18.1 applies, the Director will:

 

12


  (a)

not compete with BT, any Group Company or any Associated Company; and/or

 

  (b)

not do any act or thing or make or cause to be made any statement reasonably likely to damage the business or reputation of BT, any Group Company or any Associated Company.

 

18.3

Where Paragraph 18.1(b) applies, the Director will at BT’s request promptly resign in writing as a director of BT (and as a member of any committee of the Board), any other Group Company and of any company of which BT is a shareholder but this Agreement will not terminate on the Director resigning under this sub-paragraph. The Company Secretary of BT is irrevocably authorised as the Director’s attorney to sign a letter of resignation on behalf of the Director if he fails to do so.

 

19.

TERMINATION

 

19.1

This Agreement will terminate immediately, without compensation, Payment in Lieu or prior notice:

 

  (a)

subject to Paragraphs 18.3 and 19.3, if the Director:

 

  (i)

ceases to be a director under the provisions of BT’s Articles of Association as altered from time to time (other than in connection with a change of control of BT); or

 

  (ii)

resigns as a Director of BT or any Group Company; or

 

  (iii)

is disqualified from acting as a director; or

 

19.2

BT may terminate this Agreement without notice, and without compensation or Payment in Lieu, if the Board believes that the Director:

 

  (a)

is incapacitated for any reason from performing the Director’s duties for a continuous period of one year or any periods totalling 365 days in any continuous period of two years; or

 

  (b)

is guilty of any fraud, dishonesty or disreputable conduct; or

 

  (c)

is guilty of any misconduct (including outside the course of his employment) or neglect of duty after receiving a warning; or

 

  (d)

is guilty of any gross misconduct or gross negligence or any conduct which, in the opinion of the Board does or may result in the breakdown in trust and confidence between the Director and BT and/or which does or may prejudice any Group Company’s business or reputation; or

 

  (e)

is guilty of a breach of the Market Abuse Regulation, or the rules or regulations as amended from time to time of the UK Listing Authority or any other regulatory authorities relevant to BT or any other Group Company or any code

 

13


  of practice issued by BT or any Group Company from time to time relating to dealing in securities of BT or any Group Company; or

 

  (f)

is convicted of any criminal offence (other than under the Road Traffic Acts for which a penalty of imprisonment is not imposed); or

 

  (g)

repeatedly, and after receiving a warning, fails to follow BT’s policies and procedures or his obligations in this Agreement.

 

19.3

If the Director ceases to be a director of BT because he is not re-elected or deemed to be re-elected at a general meeting, BT may either;

 

  (a)

terminate this Agreement immediately and pay compensation in lieu of notice (calculated in accordance with Paragraph 19.4 below) subject to Paragraph 19.5 and the Director complying with his obligations under it; or

 

  (b)

require the Director to perform such duties for the BT Group (other than as a director of BT), as the Board or the Chairman may specify.

 

19.4

In lieu of giving the Director the 12 months’ notice referred to in Paragraph 2.1 or at any time during any notice period (whether given or received by BT), BT may (but shall not be obliged to) terminate this Agreement immediately and subsequently make a payment in lieu of notice equal to:

 

  (a)

the Salary which the Director would have been entitled to receive in accordance with Paragraph 6.1 during the notice period referred to in Paragraph 2.1 if notice had been given or received or (if notice has already been given or received) during the remainder of the notice period; and

 

  (b)

the cost to BT of continuing to provide the Benefits during that period. Alternatively, BT may in its absolute discretion continue to provide the Benefits during that period,

(the “Payment in Lieu” ).

 

19.5

The Payment in Lieu will be payable in equal monthly instalments on the normal payroll dates. These instalments will continue until the date on which the relevant notice period would have expired or (if earlier) the date on which the Director secures alternative employment or alternative engagements, subject to the conditions set out in sub-Paragraphs 1.1(a) to (b) below:

 

  (a)

the Director will provide to the Board the evidence it may reasonably require on a monthly basis to show that he is making all reasonable efforts to secure alternative employment or engagements and full details of his remuneration package in any such employment or engagements; and

 

  (b)

in the absence of such evidence or if the Board is not satisfied (on reasonable grounds) that the evidence provided shows that the Director is making reasonable efforts to secure alternative employment or engagement(s), BT may cease making any further payments. In these circumstances, the Director will have no right to any compensation or damages in respect of the loss of any

 

14


  further instalments of the Payment in Lieu that would otherwise have been due to him.

 

  (c)

in the event that the Director secures alternative employment or engagement(s) at a lower basic salary or fee than the Salary, then subsequent instalments of the Payment in Lieu shall be reduced by an amount equal to such lower salary or fee (expressed on a monthly basis) in calculating the Payment in Lieu. The Payment in Lieu will be further reduced as the Board deems appropriate if the remuneration arrangements agreed between the Director and his new employer, in the reasonable opinion of the Board, are not appropriately balanced between basic salary and other incentives and benefits in accordance with market practice

 

19.6

Upon termination of this Agreement the Director will at BT’s request promptly resign in writing as a director of BT (and as a member of any committee of the Board or any other office holdings) and of any company of which BT is a shareholder and from any Group Company, and will promptly return to BT any property of the BT Group

 

19.7

The Company Secretary of BT is irrevocably authorised as the Director’s attorney to sign a letter of resignation on behalf of the Director if he fails to do so

 

19.8

After the termination of his employment under this Agreement, the Director will, on request, render assistance and perform any tasks and functions BT may require for its business to assist BT or any other Group Company to deal properly, efficiently and cost-effectively with any matters in connection with the affairs of BT and/or any other Group Company and in respect of which the Director has particular knowledge and expertise by reason of his employment under this Agreement. The Director will be entitled to be reimbursed all reasonable out of pocket expenses properly incurred in rendering assistance and performing the tasks and functions if approved in advance by BT

 

20.

CONFIDENTIALITY

 

20.1

The Director must apply the highest standards of confidentiality and not disclose to any person, firm or company (whether during the course of the appointment or at any time after its termination) any Confidential Information concerning BT or any other Group Company with which the Director comes into contact by virtue of his position.

 

20.2

The Director agrees to accept the following restrictions;

 

  (a)

He must not, (other than in the proper course of his duties), without consent divulge or make known to any person or use for the benefit of himself or any other person, any Confidential Information.

 

  (b)

During his employment with BT he must not obtain or seek to obtain any financial advantage (direct or indirect) from the disclosure of Confidential Information he has acquired during the course of his employment with BT.

 

  (c)

During his employment or after its termination (without limit in time) he must not for his own or any other purposes (other than those of BT) for any reason

 

15


  and in any manner use, divulge or communicate to any person, firm, company or organisation any Confidential Information acquired or discovered by him in the course of his employment with BT.

 

20.3

The restrictions contained in this clause don’t apply to;

 

  (a)

any disclosure authorised by the Board or required by the order of a court of competent jurisdiction or as otherwise required by law;

 

  (b)

any information which he can demonstrate was known to him before the start of his employment by BT or is in the public domain otherwise than as a result of a breach by the Director of this clause; or

 

  (c)

a protected disclosures made pursuant to and in accordance with the Public Interest Disclosure Act 1998 and/or any policy on disclosure operated by BT from time-to-time;

 

  (d)

using his personal skill, expertise and know-how in the business in which he may be lawfully engaged following the termination of his employment.

 

20.4

The Director must not make or publish any derogatory or disparaging statements or do anything in relation to BT or any Associated or Group Company and/or its or their current or former officers or employees which is intended to, or which might be expected to damage or lower their reputations.

 

20.5

The Director’s attention is also drawn to the requirements under both legislation and regulation as to the handling and disclosure of inside information. The Director should avoid making any statements that might breach these requirements without prior clearance from the BT Company Secretary.

 

20.6

All notes, memoranda, records, lists of customers and suppliers and employees, correspondence, documents, discs and tapes, digital memory and data storage devices, computer software, computer programmes, computer operating systems, computers, laptops, tablet computers, mobile phones, PDAs, other portable electronic devices, data listing, codes, and other documents and material whatsoever (whether made or created by the Director or otherwise and whether or not containing Confidential Information) relating to the business of BT or any other Group Company (and any copies of the same) shall be handed over and delivered by the Director to BT (or to such other Group Company as the case may require) immediately on demand and in any event on the termination of his employment (whether or not requested by BT).

 

20.7

This Paragraph 20 shall continue to apply after the termination of the Director’s employment and the Agreement (whether terminated lawfully or not) without limit in time.

 

21.

RESTRICTIONS

 

21.1

The Director will be bound by the provisions of the Schedule to this Agreement.

 

16


21.2

The 12-month periods referred to in the Schedule will be reduced by any time during which BT exercises its right not provide the Director with any work under Paragraph 18.1(b) during his notice period.

 

21.3

The Director will not at any time after termination of his employment represent himself as being in any way concerned with or interested in the business of, or employed by, any company in the BT Group or any Associated Company.

 

22.

DATA PROTECTION

 

22.1

Personal data about other people: While the Director is working for BT he may have access to personal data about other BT people, customers, clients, suppliers or agents. The Director must only access and/or use this personal data when he needs it to do his job. The Director must not use it for any other reason. If the Director handles personal data in his job he must comply with Data Protection Legislation, BT’s privacy policy, employee privacy policy and any other information security and information retention policies BT makes him aware of.

 

22.2

Personal data about the Director:

 

  (a)

While the Director is working for BT, BT will process personal data, including special categories of personal data, about him. BT do this for legal, personnel, administrative and management reasons. BT will do this in line with Data Protection Legislation and BT’s employee privacy policy. It might include, but isn’t limited to:

 

  (i)

Information about the Director’s physical or mental health so BT can monitor sick leave and make decisions about the Director’s fitness for work.

 

  (ii)

The Director’s racial or ethnic origin and religious (or similar) information so BT can make sure it is following equal opportunities legislation.

 

  (iii)

Any other information BT’s need to make sure it is sticking to the law and our obligations to third parties.

 

  (b)

BT may share the Director’s personal data with anyone who supplies products or services to BT, (like advisers and payroll administrators), BT’s pension and benefits providers, regulatory authorities, potential or future employers, governmental or quasi-governmental organisations and potential purchasers of BT or the business the Director works in. This could include the Director’s name, address, gender, date of birth and other information. BT can transfer the Director’s personal data to countries or territories outside the European Economic Area even if they don’t have adequate data protection standards.

 

  (c)

The Director can refer to BT’s employee privacy notice for more details on how it uses the Director’s personal information, what information BT collect about him (including from third parties), why BT collects it, what BT uses it for and on what basis

 

17


23.

CONTINUATION

Paragraphs 16, 19.6, 19.7, 19.8 20 and 21 inclusive will continue in force after the termination of this Agreement.

 

24.

VARIATION

BT may vary Paragraphs 8 to 12 inclusive, 15 and 17 but only after first consulting the Director.

 

25.

NOTICES

Any notice or document may be served on the Director personally or by posting it to his last known address, or on BT addressed to the Company Secretary at its registered office, and if sent by first class post will be deemed to have been received within 24 hours after posting.

 

26.

COUNTERPARTS

This Agreement may be executed in any number of counterparts, and by each party on separate counterparts. Each counterpart is an original, but all counterparts shall together constitute one and the same instrument. Delivery of an executed counterpart signature page of this Agreement by e-mail or fax shall be as effective as delivery of a manually executed counterpart of this Agreement. In relation to each counterpart, upon confirmation by or on behalf of the signatory that the signatory authorises the attachment of such counterpart signature page to the final text of this Agreement, such counterpart signature page shall take effect together with such final text as a complete authoritative counterpart.

 

27.

CONTRACTS (RIGHTS OF THIRD PARTIES) ACT 1999

Save for any Group Company or any Associated Company, a person who is not a party to this Agreement shall have no right under the Contracts (Rights of Third Parties) Act 1999 to enforce any of its terms.

 

28.

MISCELLANEOUS

 

28.1

This Agreement (including the Schedule and Annex 1) constitute the entire agreement and understanding between the parties and supersedes all other agreements both oral and in writing between BT and the Director (other than those expressly referred to in this Agreement). The Director acknowledges that he has not entered into this Agreement in reliance upon any representation, warranty or undertaking which is not set out in this Agreement or expressly referred to in it as forming part of the Director’s contract of employment.

 

28.2

The Director represents and warrants to BT that he will not by reason of entering into the Employment, or by performing any duties under this Agreement, be in breach of any terms of employment with a third party whether express or implied or of any other obligation binding on him.

 

28.3

Any reference in this Agreement to an Act of Parliament shall be deemed to include any statutory modification or re-enactment of it                     

 

18


28.4

The following provisions shall have effect for the purposes of the Employment Rights Act 1996 as amended:

 

  (a)

there is no current requirement for the Director to work outside the United Kingdom for any consecutive period in excess of one month; and

 

  (b)

there are no collective agreements currently in force which affect directly or indirectly the terms and conditions of the Director’s employment.

 

28.5

This Agreement is governed by, and shall be construed in accordance with, the laws of England. The Courts of England shall have exclusive jurisdiction in relation to all disputes arising out of or in connection with this Agreement.

 

29.

Directors and Officers Liability Insurance and Indemnity

 

29.1

The Company shall maintain directors and officers liability insurance (D&O Insurance) to insure the Director as a director of the Company during the period of the Director’s appointment and for a period of six years thereafter to the extent that such insurance can be obtained at such cost and on such terms as the board considers to be reasonable.

 

29.2

The Director shall have the benefit of the indemnity from the Company as set out in the deed poll executed by the Company on 13th October 1992 as amended by supplemental deed poll dated 7th September 2001.

This Agreement has been executed as a deed and is delivered and takes effect on the date written on the first page of this Agreement.

 

19


SIGNED as a DEED and DELIVERED by

PHILIP ERIC RENE JANSEN

In the presence of:
Name, address and occupation of witness:
THE COMMON SEAL of
BT GROUP PLC affixed to this
DEED is AUTHENTICATED by
Authorised signatory

 

20


SCHEDULE

 

1.

Confidentiality

1.1 The Director must not ever, in any way, use Confidential Information for anything other than properly carrying out his job. Nor must he, ever, in any way, use Confidential Information for his own or for anyone else’s benefit (other than BT) or disclose it to any person, company or other organisation.

1.2 The Director also agrees to use his best endeavours to prevent unauthorised use or publication or disclosure of any Confidential Information. If he suspects, or finds out, that anyone has inappropriately used or knows any Confidential Information, he must tell the Chairman straight away.

1.3 Clauses 1.1 to 1.2 apply throughout the Director’s employment and still apply at any time after his employment ends (however it ends). The exceptions to this are:

 

  (i)

If he uses or discloses Confidential Information as part of properly performing his job, or if BT authorises him to do so (in writing) or if he is required to by law.

 

  (ii)

If any information is already in the public domain, other than through his unauthorised disclosure.

 

  (iii)

If it’s a protected disclosure under section 43A of the Employment Rights Act 1996.

 

2.

Restrictive Covenants

During the Director’s employment with BT, he will have access to Confidential Information and personal knowledge of customers and employees of BT or BT Group. Because of this, he agrees with BT (for itself and as trustee and agent for each BT Group Company) to be bound by the following covenants:

 

  (i)

For 12 months immediately after the date his employment ends, he will not in any way (as defined) carry on, be engaged, employed, be concerned or interested in any Competing Business, or take steps to set up, promote or help to create any Competing Business in the United Kingdom;

 

  (ii)

For 12 months immediately after the date his employment ends, he will not in any way for the purposes of any Competing Business canvass, solicit, deal with or accept business or custom from any person, company or organisation who:

 

  a.

was a business customer of BT or BT Group any time during the 12 months immediately before the date his employment ends; and

 

21


  b.

he personally dealt with as part of his employment at any time during the 12 months immediately before the date his employment ends, or about whom he had access to Confidential Information;

 

  (iii)

For 12 months immediately after the date his employment ends, he will not solicit, or entice away (or try to), or offer engagement or employment to any Key Employee to work for any Competing Business.

 

  (iv)

Any reference to “engagement or employment” in this Schedule means with or without a contract. If under a contract, it could include a contract of employment, or a contract for services, or any other form of contract.

3. The Director agrees that the restrictions in this Schedule are necessary to protect the legitimate interests of BT and the BT Group, and that they’re reasonable.

4. If any of the restrictions in this Schedule are judged to be void or ineffective for whatever reason but would be valid and effective if part of the wording were deleted or reworded, then they will apply with whatever changes would be needed to make them valid and effective. (For example, if periods or areas referred to were reduced in time or scope.)

5. Each of the covenants in this Schedule is intended to be separate and severable. If any one or more of them are partly or entirely unenforceable for any reason, then the other ones will still apply.

6. The Director can only change or waive the restrictions in this Schedule with written agreement from BT. If this happens, everything BT hasn’t changed or waived will still apply.

7. If the Director is asked to be involved in any business concern in any way before the date his employment ends or before the restrictions set out in this Schedule expire, he must:

 

  (i)

straight away (and before he accepts any such offer) give a copy of this Schedule to the person, company or organisation making the offer; and

 

  (ii)

tell the Chairman the name of the person, company or organisation that’s making the offer and the role they’re offering before he accepts the offer.

8. If any current or former employee of BT or BT Group solicits or induces the Director to leave his employment with a view to working in any way for any Competing Business, he must tell the Chairman straight away.

9. If BT asks the Director to, he must enter into a separate agreement with any BT Group Company. In that agreement he would agree to be bound by restrictions corresponding to the ones in this Schedule (or those which BT consider appropriate) to protect the legitimate interests of that company.

 

22


10. The terms of this Schedule will continue to apply after the date the Director’s employment ends (however it ends).

ACCEPTANCE ~ SCHEDULE

I acknowledge that my contract of employment with BT includes the covenants set out above in the Schedule and I undertake to observe them.

 

Signed
Date
Name Philip Eric Rene Jansen

 

23


Annex 1 - The Offer Letter Terms

 

  1.

Buy Out

 

  a.

The Director will be granted an award of 370,798 BT shares under the BT Incentive Share Plan which will not be subject to any BT performance conditions. This number of shares has been determined based on a grant value of £895,848 at a BT closing share price on 17 October 2018 of £2.4160 and an US$ FX rate of 1.3088. The award will be granted as soon as practicable after joining subject to any close period dealing restrictions.

 

  b.

The shares will vest on 20 March 2020 (“the Vesting Date”) subject to the Director’s continued employment and will only vest to the extent that the original Worldpay award vests based on the original Worldpay performance conditions (for example, if the original Worldpay award vests on 20 March 2020 at 50% based on the performance achieved then the BT buy-out will vest at 50% of the BT shares granted).

 

  c.

The Director has committed to hold any vested shares for a further one year until 20 March 2021. In accordance with the BT Incentive Share Plan rules, if the Remuneration Committee deem the Director to be a ‘good leaver’ between the date the buy-out is granted and 20 March 2020, BT will pro-rate the buy-out award and it will continue to vest on 20 March 2020 subject to the satisfaction of the original Worldpay performance conditions.

 

  d.

The Director will be deemed to be a good leaver unless prior to the Vesting Date he has been dismissed pursuant to Clause 19.1 or 19.2 of this Agreement or he has given notice of termination (other than in response to a repudiatory breach of contract by BT).

 

  2.

Annual Bonus for Financial Year 2018/19

 

  a.

The Director is eligible to be considered for a bonus of up to 240% of salary subject to meeting the rules of the scheme including performance. On-target performance is expected to deliver a bonus of 120% of salary. Two thirds of any bonus will be paid in cash. One third of any bonus will be deferred into shares for a further 3 year period. Any cash bonus is scheduled to be paid in June 2019. Any bonus for the 2018/19 financial year will be pro-rated to reflect the Director joining part way through the year.

 

  3.

ISP for the Financial Year 2018/19

 

  a.

The Director will be granted a new joiner Incentive Share Plan award as soon as practicable after joining subject to the rules of the scheme including any close period dealing restrictions. The award will have a grant value of 300% of salary to reflect the Director joining part way through the three-year performance period.

 

  b.

The shares will vest after three years subject to the rules of the scheme including performance. Vested shares must be held for a further two years. The performance targets will be the same as those used for the Incentive Share Plan award granted to BT Group executives in June 2018.

For the avoidance of doubt there is no contractual entitlement to participate in any future annual or long term incentive schemes or plans.

 

24

Exhibit 4.2

 

Matthew Key, Esq

c/o pp A9F

BT Centre

81 Newgate Street

London

EC1A 7AJ

24 October 2018

Dear Matthew,

The Board of BT Group plc (the Company) has agreed your appointment as a non-executive director and a member of the Audit & Risk and Nominating & Governance Committees. You will be appointed to such other Board Committees as may from time to time be agreed with you. This letter sets out the terms of your appointment.

Appointment

Your appointment is for an initial period of three years from 25 October 2018. During that period either you or the Board can give the other at least three months’ written notice to terminate the appointment at any time. If for any reason the Board does not give you such notice, you will not be entitled to any compensation in respect of your notice period or otherwise.

Your appointment is subject to the Company’s Articles of Association. Nothing in this letter is intended to exclude or vary the terms of the Articles of Association as they apply to you as a director of the Company.

In accordance with the relevant corporate governance provisions, you will be required to stand for election at the Company’s next Annual General Meeting and then for re-election at the Company’s Annual General Meeting each year.

Subject to your annual re-election as a director and satisfactory performance by you of your duties as a non-executive director, the appointment may be continued at the end of the initial three year period if you and the Board agree.

If you are not re-elected by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting, or your directorship is terminated under the Company’s Articles of Association, the Companies Act 2006 or in accordance with the Termination provision below, your appointment will terminate automatically, with immediate effect and without any compensation in respect of your notice period or otherwise.

 

1


Time commitment

You are expected to attend all meetings of the Board (including a minimum of six meetings in person), all meetings of those Board Committees to which you are appointed, the Annual General Meeting (in person) and any Board away days. If you cannot attend any meeting you should advise the Secretary in advance. In addition, you will be expected to devote appropriate preparation time ahead of each Board and Board Committee meeting and to take part in at least one visit each year to one of BT’s offices or other sites.

It is difficult to be precise about the amount of time you should expect to spend on this work, but we estimate that you should allow a minimum of 22 days each year, subject to Board Committee commitments. You should allow a slightly higher commitment in the first year of your appointment whilst you familiarise yourself with the BT group and go through our induction programme for new directors. Additional time commitment may also be required if the Company is undergoing a period of particularly increased activity (such as a major acquisition or capital transaction).

By accepting this appointment, you confirm that you are able to allocate sufficient time to meet what is expected of you in your role as a non-executive director. You should obtain the agreement of the Chairman before accepting any additional commitments that might affect the time you are able to devote to your role as a non-executive director of the Company.

Role

Non-executive directors have the same general legal responsibilities to the Company as any other director.

The Board’s principal focus is the strategy, development, growing shareholder value, oversight and control and governance of the group. In support of this it approves the group’s strategic plans, annual and investment budgets and capital expenditure. It sets the direction for the group’s values, ethics and business policies and practices. It also has oversight of the group’s operating and financial performance, risk management and internal controls, and compliance and major public policy issues. Board members are expected to challenge constructively and help develop proposals on strategy. These responsibilities are set out in the formal statement of the Board’s role, included in your directors’ briefing pack and are in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

2


Fees and expenses

You will receive fees for your services as a director, and as a Board Committee member or Chair, of £110,000 a year comprising a Basic Fee of £75,000 p.a., the Audit & Risk Committee members’ fee of £25,000 p.a. and the Nominating & Governance Committee members’ fee of £10,000 p.a. Your fees will be paid monthly in arrears subject to such deductions for income tax and social security contributions as the Company may be required by law to deduct.

You will have no entitlement to any bonus and no entitlement to participate in any employee share plan or pension scheme operated by the Company.

The Company will either pay or reimburse you for all reasonable and properly documented travelling, hotel and other expenses incurred on the Company’s business.

Any obligation of the Company or any group companies under this letter and any other arrangement relating to remuneration from which you benefit or enter into after becoming a director shall be subject to and conditional on approval, by the shareholders in a general meeting, of the Company’s policy on directors’ remuneration in accordance with the relevant legislation. If that approval is not obtained, you will not be entitled to compensation or damages in respect of any loss or damage suffered as a result.

Independence

You are considered to be an independent non-executive director and will be identified accordingly in the Company’s annual report and other documentation. If circumstances change, and you believe that your independence may be in doubt, you should discuss this with the Chairman or the Secretary as soon as practicable.

Outside interests

It is acknowledged and accepted that you have business interests other than those of the Company. You are required to disclose to the Board, via the Secretary, any interests you have at the date of your appointment. Advice on notifiable interests is enclosed in your briefing pack. You will be asked to review the interests notified annually. However, you should notify the Secretary of any new interests or potential conflicts of interests which arise during your period of appointment as soon as they become apparent.

 

3


Confidentiality and share dealings

You must apply the highest standards of confidentiality and not disclose to any person, firm or company (whether during the course of the appointment or at any time after its termination) any confidential information concerning the Company or any group companies with which you come into contact by virtue of your position as a non-executive director of the Company. For these purposes, confidential information shall include, but not be limited to, information (whether or not recorded in documentary form, or stored electronically) relating to the business, products, affairs and finances of the Company and/or any group companies, which is treated as confidential to the Company and/or any group companies or which you are told or ought reasonably to know is confidential or which has been given to the Company and/or any group companies in confidence by customers, suppliers or other persons, and any trade secrets including, without limitation, technical data and know-how relating to the business of the Company and/or any group companies or any of its or their business contacts.

Your attention is also drawn to the requirements under both legislation and regulation as to the handling and disclosure of inside information. You should avoid making any statements that might breach these requirements without prior clearance from the Secretary.

You will be bound by the Company’s Articles of Association, any rules and regulations that may apply to the Company, including any rules issued by the United Kingdom Listing Authority, the Market Abuse Regulation, the Company’s share dealing code and such other requirements as the Board may from time to time specify.

For a period of six years after the termination of your appointment, you may retain documents and papers made available to you by the Company provided that (i) you comply strictly with the confidentiality obligations set out above, and (ii) you return to the Company all documents, papers and other property of or relating to the business of the Company or any group company which are in your possession, custody or power by virtue of your position as a non-executive director of the Company at the end of that period, and you do not retain copies (other than where the Company permits this). The Company is able to arrange the disposal of papers which you no longer require.

 

4


Induction and briefings

The Company has in place arrangements to complement the briefing material you have received about the BT group through an on-going programme to keep you informed about the Company’s businesses, activities and developments, the communications industry and the regulatory environment. This can include meetings with the Company’s executive management, major shareholders and other stakeholders and the external auditors. We will also arrange a tailored package of visits to business locations so you can see BT and its people at work.

Review

The performance of the Board and its committees is evaluated annually. If, in the interim, there are any matters which cause you concern about your role you should discuss them with the Chairman or the Secretary as soon as is appropriate.

Individual training and development needs will be regularly reviewed and agreed with each director as part of the Board evaluation process.

Insurance

You are covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance. We intend to continue to arrange this insurance cover. In the event that we do not, run-off cover will be arranged for six years commencing from the date that cover under the latest insurance policy lapsed. The current limit in respect of any one claim or all claims in aggregate during the period of the insurance policy is £250 million.

Independent professional advice

The Company has a procedure for its directors, in furtherance of their duties, to take independent advice if necessary, at the Company’s expense. If you feel it necessary to seek such advice, please contact the Secretary first. A copy of the procedure is included in your briefing pack.

Termination

The Company may immediately terminate your appointment if you:

 

a)

are in material breach of any of the terms of this letter;

 

b)

are guilty of gross misconduct and/or any serious or persistent negligence or misconduct in respect of your obligations under this letter;

 

c)

have engaged in any conduct which has or may have the effect of materially prejudicing the reputation of the Company or any other group company; or

 

5


d)

fail or refuse to carry out the duties reasonably and properly required of you under this letter.

Upon termination of your appointment for any reason you will, at the Company’s request, promptly resign in writing as a director of BT Group plc. The Secretary is irrevocably authorised by this letter to sign a letter of resignation on your behalf if you fail to do so.

After your appointment is terminated, you will not represent yourself as being in any way concerned with or interested in the business of the Company or any group companies.

Data protection

During your appointment you may have access to personal data relating to BT people, customers, clients, suppliers or agents. You must only access and/or use this personal data when you need to, for the purposes of your role. If you handle personal data you must comply with Data Protection Legislation, the Company’s privacy policy, the BT employee privacy notice and any other information security and information retention policies the Company adopts.

During your appointment the Company will process personal data, including special categories of personal data, about you, for legal, personnel, administrative and management reasons. We will do it in line with Data Protection Legislation and the BT employee privacy notice. It is limited to information we need to make sure we are complying with the law and obligations to third parties.

We may share your personal data with third parties including regulatory authorities and governmental or quasi-governmental organisations. This could include your name, address, gender, date of birth and other information. We can transfer your personal data to countries or territories outside the European Economic Area. A copy of the Company’s employee privacy notice is included in your briefing pack.

Miscellaneous

You confirm that you will not by reason of your appointment or your performance of any duties under this letter be in breach of any legal obligation binding on you.

This letter (and any document referred to in it) constitutes the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes all other agreements (both oral and in writing) between you and the Company.

 

6


The terms of this letter are governed by English law and the parties submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.

Acceptance

Please confirm your acceptance of these terms by signing the attached copy of this letter as a deed and returning it. For convenience, this letter may be executed in counterparts. Once executed, the counterparts will constitute an original, and both counterparts together will constitute one instrument.

Yours sincerely

DAN FITZ

 

To:

Dan Fitz

Company Secretary

I confirm acceptance of my appointment on the above terms.

SIGNED as a DEED and    )

DELIVERED by                         )

                                                       )

in the presence of:

Witness’s Signature:                                                              

Witness’s Name (in capitals):                                                              

Witness’s Address:

 

 

 

 

Date:                                                              

 

7

Exhibit 4.3

 

Allison Kirkby

c/o pp A9F

BT Centre

81 Newgate Street

London

EC1A 7AJ

12 February 2019

Dear Allison,

The Board of BT Group plc (the Company) has agreed your appointment as a non-executive director. You will be appointed to such Board Committees as may from time to time be agreed with you. This letter sets out the terms of your appointment.

Appointment

Your appointment is for an initial period of three years from 15 March 2019. During that period either you or the Board can give the other at least three months’ written notice to terminate the appointment at any time. If for any reason the Board does not give you such notice, you will not be entitled to any compensation in respect of your notice period or otherwise.

Your appointment is subject to the Company’s Articles of Association. Nothing in this letter is intended to exclude or vary the terms of the Articles of Association as they apply to you as a director of the Company.

In accordance with the relevant corporate governance provisions, you will be required to stand for election at the Company’s next Annual General Meeting and then for re-election at the Company’s Annual General Meeting each year.

Subject to your annual re-election as a director and satisfactory performance by you of your duties as a non-executive director, the appointment may be continued at the end of the initial three year period if you and the Board agree.

If you are not re-elected by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting, or your directorship is terminated under the Company’s Articles of Association, the Companies Act 2006 or in accordance with the Termination provision below, your appointment will terminate automatically, with immediate effect and without any compensation in respect of your notice period or otherwise.

 

1


Time commitment

You are expected to attend all meetings of the Board (including a minimum of six meetings in person), all meetings of those Board Committees to which you are appointed, the Annual General Meeting (in person) and any Board away days. If you cannot attend any meeting you should advise the Secretary in advance. In addition, you will be expected to devote appropriate preparation time ahead of each Board and Board Committee meeting and to take part in at least one visit each year to one of BT’s offices or other sites.

It is difficult to be precise about the amount of time you should expect to spend on this work, but we estimate that you should allow a minimum of 22 days each year, subject to Board Committee commitments. You should allow a slightly higher commitment in the first year of your appointment whilst you familiarise yourself with the BT group and go through our induction programme for new directors. Additional time commitment may also be required if the Company is undergoing a period of particularly increased activity (such as a major acquisition or capital transaction).

By accepting this appointment, you confirm that you are able to allocate sufficient time to meet what is expected of you in your role as a non-executive director. You should obtain the agreement of the Chairman before accepting any additional commitments that might affect the time you are able to devote to your role as a non-executive director of the Company.

Role

Non-executive directors have the same general legal responsibilities to the Company as any other director.

The Board’s principal focus is the strategy, development, growing shareholder value, oversight and control and governance of the group. In support of this it approves the group’s strategic plans, annual and investment budgets and capital expenditure. It sets the direction for the group’s values, ethics and business policies and practices. It also has oversight of the group’s operating and financial performance, risk management and internal controls, and compliance and major public policy issues. Board members are expected to challenge constructively and help develop proposals on strategy. These responsibilities are set out in the formal statement of the Board’s role, included in your directors’ briefing pack and are in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code.

 

2


Fees and expenses

You will receive fees for your services as a director of £75,000 p.a. Your fees will be paid monthly in arrears subject to such deductions for income tax and social security contributions as the Company may be required by law to deduct.

You will have no entitlement to any bonus and no entitlement to participate in any employee share plan or pension scheme operated by the Company.    

The Company will either pay or reimburse you for all reasonable and properly documented travelling, hotel and other expenses incurred on the Company’s business.

Any obligation of the Company or any group companies under this letter and any other arrangement relating to remuneration from which you benefit or enter into after becoming a director shall be subject to and conditional on approval, by the shareholders in a general meeting, of the Company’s policy on directors’ remuneration in accordance with the relevant legislation. If that approval is not obtained, you will not be entitled to compensation or damages in respect of any loss or damage suffered as a result.

Independence

You are considered to be an independent non-executive director and will be identified accordingly in the Company’s annual report and other documentation. If circumstances change, and you believe that your independence may be in doubt, you should discuss this with the Chairman or the Secretary as soon as practicable.

Outside interests

It is acknowledged and accepted that you have business interests other than those of the Company. You are required to disclose to the Board, via the Secretary, any interests you have at the date of your appointment. Advice on notifiable interests is enclosed in your briefing pack. You will be asked to review the interests notified annually. However, you should notify the Secretary of any new interests or potential conflicts of interests which arise during your period of appointment as soon as they become apparent.

Confidentiality and share dealings

You must apply the highest standards of confidentiality and not disclose to any person, firm or company (whether during the course of the appointment or at any time after its termination) any confidential information concerning the

 

3


Company or any group companies with which you come into contact by virtue of your position as a non-executive director of the Company. For these purposes, confidential information shall include, but not be limited to, information (whether or not recorded in documentary form, or stored electronically) relating to the business, products, affairs and finances of the Company and/or any group companies, which is treated as confidential to the Company and/or any group companies or which you are told or ought reasonably to know is confidential or which has been given to the Company and/or any group companies in confidence by customers, suppliers or other persons, and any trade secrets including, without limitation, technical data and know-how relating to the business of the Company and/or any group companies or any of its or their business contacts.

Your attention is also drawn to the requirements under both legislation and regulation as to the handling and disclosure of inside information. You should avoid making any statements that might breach these requirements without prior clearance from the Secretary.

You will be bound by the Company’s Articles of Association, any rules and regulations that may apply to the Company, including any rules issued by the United Kingdom Listing Authority, the Market Abuse Regulation, the Company’s share dealing code and such other requirements as the Board may from time to time specify.

For a period of six years after the termination of your appointment, you may retain documents and papers made available to you by the Company provided that (i) you comply strictly with the confidentiality obligations set out above, and (ii) you return to the Company all documents, papers and other property of or relating to the business of the Company or any group company which are in your possession, custody or power by virtue of your position as a non-executive director of the Company at the end of that period, and you do not retain copies (other than where the Company permits this). The Company is able to arrange the disposal of papers which you no longer require.

Induction and briefings

The Company has in place arrangements to complement the briefing material you have received about the BT group through an on-going programme to keep you informed about the Company’s businesses, activities and developments, the communications industry and the regulatory environment. This can include meetings with the Company’s executive management, major shareholders and other stakeholders and the external auditors. We will also arrange a tailored package of visits to business locations so you can see BT and its people at work.

 

4


Review

The performance of the Board and its committees is evaluated annually. If, in the interim, there are any matters which cause you concern about your role you should discuss them with the Chairman or the Secretary as soon as is appropriate.

Individual training and development needs will be regularly reviewed and agreed with each director as part of the Board evaluation process.

Insurance

You are covered by the Company’s directors’ and officers’ liability insurance. We intend to continue to arrange this insurance cover. In the event that we do not, run-off cover will be arranged for six years commencing from the date that cover under the latest insurance policy lapsed. The current limit in respect of any one claim or all claims in aggregate during the period of the insurance policy is £250 million.

Independent professional advice

The Company has a procedure for its directors, in furtherance of their duties, to take independent advice if necessary, at the Company’s expense. If you feel it necessary to seek such advice, please contact the Secretary first. A copy of the procedure is included in your briefing pack.

Termination

The Company may immediately terminate your appointment if you:

 

a)

are in material breach of any of the terms of this letter;

 

b)

are guilty of gross misconduct and/or any serious or persistent negligence or misconduct in respect of your obligations under this letter;

 

c)

have engaged in any conduct which has or may have the effect of materially prejudicing the reputation of the Company or any other group company; or

 

d)

fail or refuse to carry out the duties reasonably and properly required of you under this letter.

Upon termination of your appointment for any reason you will, at the Company’s request, promptly resign in writing as a director of BT Group plc. The Secretary is irrevocably authorised by this letter to sign a letter of resignation on your behalf if you fail to do so.

 

5


After your appointment is terminated, you will not represent yourself as being in any way concerned with or interested in the business of the Company or any group companies.

Data protection

During your appointment you may have access to personal data relating to BT people, customers, clients, suppliers or agents. You must only access and/or use this personal data when you need to, for the purposes of your role. If you handle personal data you must comply with Data Protection Legislation, the Company’s privacy policy, the BT employee privacy notice and any other information security and information retention policies the Company adopts.

During your appointment the Company will process personal data, including special categories of personal data, about you, for legal, personnel, administrative and management reasons. We will do it in line with Data Protection Legislation and the BT employee privacy notice. It is limited to information we need to make sure we are complying with the law and obligations to third parties.

We may share your personal data with third parties including regulatory authorities and governmental or quasi-governmental organisations. This could include your name, address, gender, date of birth and other information. We can transfer your personal data to countries or territories outside the European Economic Area. A copy of the Company’s employee privacy notice is included in your briefing pack.

Miscellaneous

You confirm that you will not by reason of your appointment or your performance of any duties under this letter be in breach of any legal obligation binding on you.

This letter (and any document referred to in it) constitutes the entire agreement between the parties and supersedes all other agreements (both oral and in writing) between you and the Company.

The terms of this letter are governed by English law and the parties submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the English courts.

 

6


Acceptance

Please confirm your acceptance of these terms by signing the attached copy of this letter as a deed and returning it. For convenience, this letter may be executed in counterparts. Once executed, the counterparts will constitute an original, and both counterparts together will constitute one instrument.

Yours sincerely

RACHEL CANHAM

 

To:

Rachel Canham

Company Secretary

I confirm acceptance of my appointment on the above terms.

SIGNED as a DEED and

DELIVERED by ALLISON KIRKBY

in the presence of:

Witness’s Signature:                                                              

Witness’s Name (in capitals):                                                              

 

Witness’s Address:    

 

 

Date:                                                              

 

7

Exhibit 4.4

Mike Inglis

c/o BT Centre

81 Newgate Street

London

EC1A 7AJ

April 2018

I am writing to confirm that the Board has agreed to extend your appointment for three years from 1 September 2018. Your appointment will continue in all other respects on the terms set out in your letter of appointment dated 11 August 2015 including, and in particular, that either you or the Board may give the other at least three months’ written notice to terminate the appointment at any time. Please sign the attached copy of this letter to confirm your acceptance of this extension on the above terms and return a copy to me.

Yours sincerely

DAN FITZ

Company Secretary, BT Group plc

 

 

 

To:

Dan Fitz

Company Secretary, BT Group plc

I accept this extension of my appointment on the above terms.

 

 

    

 

Mike Inglis      Date

Exhibit 12.1

CERTIFICATION

I, Philip Jansen, certify that:

 

  1.

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of BT Group plc;

 

  2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

  3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

  4.

The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a)

Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b)

Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c)

Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d)

Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

  5.

The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a)

All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and


  b)

Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: May 23, 2019

/s/ Philip Jansen
Name: Philip Jansen
Title:   BT Chief Executive

Exhibit 12.2

CERTIFICATION

I, Simon Lowth, certify that:

 

  1.

I have reviewed this annual report on Form 20-F of BT Group plc;

 

  2.

Based on my knowledge, this report does not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary to make the statements made, in light of the circumstances under which such statements were made, not misleading with respect to the period covered by this report;

 

  3.

Based on my knowledge, the financial statements, and other financial information included in this report, fairly present in all material respects the financial condition, results of operations and cash flows of the company as of, and for, the periods presented in this report;

 

  4.

The company’s other certifying officer and I are responsible for establishing and maintaining disclosure controls and procedures (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(e) and 15d-15(e)) and internal control over financial reporting (as defined in Exchange Act Rules 13a-15(f) and 15d-15(f)) for the company and have:

 

  a)

Designed such disclosure controls and procedures, or caused such disclosure controls and procedures to be designed under our supervision, to ensure that material information relating to the company, including its consolidated subsidiaries, is made known to us by others within those entities, particularly during the period in which this report is being prepared;

 

  b)

Designed such internal control over financial reporting, or caused such internal control over financial reporting to be designed under our supervision, to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles;

 

  c)

Evaluated the effectiveness of the company’s disclosure controls and procedures and presented in this report our conclusions about the effectiveness of the disclosure controls and procedures, as of the end of the period covered by this report based on such evaluation; and

 

  d)

Disclosed in this report any change in the company’s internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by the annual report that has materially affected, or is reasonably likely to materially affect, the company’s internal control over financial reporting; and

 

  5.

The company’s other certifying officer and I have disclosed, based on our most recent evaluation of internal control over financial reporting, to the company’s auditors and the audit committee of the company’s board of directors (or persons performing the equivalent functions):

 

  a)

All significant deficiencies and material weaknesses in the design or operation of internal control over financial reporting which are reasonably likely to adversely affect the company’s ability to record, process, summarize and report financial information; and


  b)

Any fraud, whether or not material, that involves management or other employees who have a significant role in the company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Date: May 23, 2019

/s/ Simon Lowth
Name: Simon Lowth
Title:   Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 13.1

CERTIFICATION PURSUANT TO

18 U.S.C. SECTION 1350,

AS ADOPTED PURSUANT TO

SECTION 906 OF THE SARBANES-OXLEY ACT OF 2002

We the undersigned hereby certify that to the best of our knowledge:

 

  1.

this annual report on Form 20-F of BT Group plc fully complies with the requirements of Section 13(a) or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934; and

 

  2.

the information contained in this annual report fairly presents, in all material respects, the financial condition and results of operations of BT Group plc.

Date: May 23, 2019

/s/ Philip Jansen

 

Name: Philip Jansen

Title: Chief Executive

Date: May 23, 2019

/s/ Simon Lowth

 

Name: Simon Lowth

Title: Chief Financial Officer

Exhibit 15.1

Consent of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

The Board of Directors

BT Group plc:

We consent to the incorporation by reference in the registration statements (No. 333-178663 and 333-219524) on Form S-8 of BT Group plc of our reports dated 8 May 2019, with respect to the group balance sheet of BT Group plc and subsidiaries as of 31 March 2019, the related group income statement, group statement of comprehensive income, group statement of changes in equity, and group cash flow statement for the year ended 31 March 2019, and the related notes (collectively, “the consolidated financial statements”), and the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019, which reports appear in the 31 March 2019 annual report on Form 20-F of BT Group plc.

Our report on the consolidated financial statements refers to our audit of the adjustments that were applied to revise the 2018 and 2017 consolidated financial statements to:

 

   

Retrospectively apply the transfer of the Northern Ireland Networks business between reportable segments, as described in Notes 2, 5, and 8,

 

   

Retrospectively apply the reclassification of internal revenue generated by the Ventures business within the Enterprise segment, as described in Note 5,

 

   

Retrospectively apply the re-presentation of product costs and commissions; provision and installation; marketing and sales; and other operating costs as described in Note 7, and

 

   

Retrospectively apply the re-presentation of disclosures required resulting from the adoption of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments , with respect to items designated as hedging instruments, as described in Note 27.

However, we were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the 2018 and 2017 consolidated financial statements other than with respect to such adjustments.

Our report on the consolidated financial statements refers to a change in method of accounting for revenue from contracts with customers in 2019 due to the adoption of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers , and a change in method of accounting for financial instruments in 2019 due to the adoption of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments.

Our report dated 8 May 2019, on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019, expresses our opinion that BT Group plc did not maintain effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019 because of the effect of material weaknesses on the achievement of the objectives of the control criteria and contains an explanatory paragraph that states material weaknesses related to General IT Controls and Risk Assessments have been identified and included in management’s assessment.

/s/ KPMG LLP

London, United Kingdom

23 May 2019

Table of Contents

Exhibit 15.2

 

LOGO

 

    

BT Group plc

Annual Report

2019

 

    


Table of Contents

 

LOGO

 

    

At a glance                
                   
                   
                      

We help build better digital
lives and businesses, and
support the UK as a world-
class digital economy.

     

In a rapidly

changing

industry…

              …we have a clear business model…     
                   

Our purpose

We use the power of

communications to

make a better world.

   

Market context

We understand and respond

to market opportunities and

challenges.

     

Business model

We provide customers with

communications and connectivity

services.

 
                   
       

p8

        p12    
                   
                   
                   
                   

…supported by a strategy with three refreshed priorities…

   

…a strong culture with shared values…

     

…focused on

sustainable growth…

 
                   

Our strategy

• Differentiated customer experience.

• Best converged network.

• Simplified, lean and agile business.

   

People and

culture

Making BT

a brilliant

place to work.

 

Values

• Personal

• Simple

• Brilliant

      Key performance indicators   Group performance  
                   

p14

       

p22

  p22       p30   p34  
                   
                   
                   
                   

…and being a

responsible business…

   

…to achieve

our goal.

       
                   

Non-financial performance

Our performance

as a sustainable

and responsible business.

 

Governance

Corporate

Governance

is critical to

delivering our

strategy.

     

Our goal

Drive sustainable

growth in value.

         
                   

p32

  p55                  
                   
                        

 

Non-Financial Reporting Information Statement

Our integrated approach to reporting means that the requirements

of the Non-Financial Reporting Directive are addressed throughout

the Strategic report. For ease of reference, information pertaining to

each of the matters addressed by the new regulation can be found

on the following pages: Human rights (page 25); Our people (page

22); Social (page 24); Environmental (page 26); Anti-corruption and

bribery (page 32).

 

 

    


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

 

                    1  

        

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 
              

 Governance

 

          

              

 Financial statements

 

 

              

 Additional information

 

 

                
              
   

Contents

 

     
   

Strategic report

     

Look out for these throughout

the report:

 

LOGO

Reference to another page in the report

 

LOGO

Reference to further reading online

 

LOGO

Critical accounting estimates

and key judgements

 

More information

 

LOGO

btplc.com

bt.com/annualreport

 

Digital impact and sustainability report

btplc.com/digitalimpactandsustainability

         
 

A message from our Chairman

     2             
 

 

A message from our Chief  Executive

     3     
 

 

About BT

     4     
 

 

Executive Committee

     6     
 

 

Market context

     8     
 

 

Our business model

     12     
 

 

Our strategy

     14     
 

 

Strategic progress

     16     
 

 

Our stakeholders

     22     
 

 

Our key performance indicators

     30     
 

 

Group performance

     34     
 

 

A message from the Openreach Chairman

     42     
 

 

Our approach to risk management

     44     
 

 

Our principal risks and uncertainties

     46     
 

 

Our viability statement

     54     
 

 

Governance

     55     
 

 

Financial statements

     100     
 

 

Additional information

     185     
       
       
       
       
       
       
         

 

 

          

This Strategic report was approved

by the Board on 8 May 2019.

     
     
By order of the Board      
     
Rachel Canham      
Company Secretary & General Counsel, Governance   
8 May 2019      
     
Please see the cautionary statement regarding
forward-looking statements on page 190.
  
  
Pages 1 to 54 form the Strategic report. It includes
Our business model, Strategic progress, Group
performance and Our principal risks and uncertainties.
  
  
The Governance section on pages 55 to 99 forms the
Report of the Directors.
  
     

 

    

 



Table of Contents
2         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

A message from

our Chairman

      
      

 

LOGO

 

We have made good progress on delivering our strategy, focused around differentiated customer experience, our best converged network, and creating a simple, lean and agile business.

 

I am pleased to report that we have over the last year overcome numerous challenges to deliver a set of solid financial results. More importantly, we have made good progress on delivering our strategy, focused around differentiated customer experience, our best converged network, and creating a simple, lean and agile business. We have continued to deliver the vital connectivity and services that families and businesses in the UK and beyond need to flourish.

 

BT has a critical role at the heart of the UK’s digital future, and our substantial investments in fixed and mobile networks make an essential contribution. The new converged propositions we launched this year are the start of the services of the future. Within BT we are strengthening our focus on enabling the digital skills of our people, customers and communities, thereby further contributing to the UK’s digital economy.

 

We will be launching 5G in 16 cities this year. We will also increase our investment in fibre-to-the-premises (FTTP), while working with the Government and Ofcom to create the right conditions to go further and faster. We are pleased with our closer relationships with these key stakeholders as we unite around the common goal of building the UK’s FTTP network.

 

     

In May 2018 we agreed the 2017 triennial funding valuation for the BT Pension Scheme. This allows us to move ahead with greater financial certainty.

 

Our solid profit and normalised free cash flow not only provide the foundation for investment in our strategic priorities but allow us to reward shareholders. We are paying the same dividend as last year at 15.4p per share. We also expect to hold the dividend unchanged in respect of the 2019/20 financial year given our outlook for earnings and cash flow. The Board remains committed to our dividend policy, which is to maintain or grow the dividend each year whilst taking into consideration a number of factors including underlying medium term earnings expectations and levels of business reinvestment (which would include the consideration of accelerated FTTP investment).

 

I am satisfied we are making progress at pace. The coming year will see BT continuing its transformation to become a simplified, lean and agile business. Across the business I see a commitment to streamlining processes, governance and organisational structures; simplifying lines of responsibility; and helping people make better decisions.

 

As a Board, we are leading by example. I recently carried out a review of the structure, composition and operation of our committees to speed up decision making and improve overall governance. As a result, we have reduced the number of board committees and clarified lines of responsibility. Further details are described in the Governance report on page 55.

 

I would like to welcome non-executive directors Matthew Key and Allison Kirkby to the Board. They both bring valuable experience of the communications and technology sectors.

 

Gavin Patterson stepped down as chief executive at the end of January and I would like to thank him for his contribution to the business over his 15 years with the company. He led BT with vision and dedication through a challenging time and started the necessary process of transforming our business for the demands of modern society. We wish him well for the future.

 

     

I would like to extend a warm welcome to our new chief executive Philip Jansen. Philip is a proven leader with outstanding experience in managing large, complex businesses and has the right combination of skills and experience to take BT into the future. Philip has made an excellent start as chief executive and I am confident that he will have the full support of all our people as we embark on the challenging but exciting next chapter of this great company.

 

This is a very important time for BT and the UK’s digital economy. I look forward to working with Philip and his team as they develop our strategy and accelerate the reshaping of BT to deliver future success.

 

Jan du Plessis

Chairman

8 May 2019

 

Full year dividend per share

 

15.4p

 

Revenue

 

£23.4bn (1)%

 

Profit after tax

 

£2.2bn +6%


Table of Contents
                  3
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

A message from

our Chief Executive

      
      

 

LOGO

 

I am delighted to be the new chief executive of BT. We play an important role in UK society and provide mission-critical services all around the world. It is a privilege to lead such a special company, with a great history and a very exciting future. BT creates value for a large and diverse group of stakeholders.

 

My first priority on joining in January was to meet as many BT colleagues as possible, and I have seen first-hand the energy and commitment they bring to doing the right thing by our customers. As we build the BT of the future, this dedication will be essential for transforming the company and improving the service we provide to our customers.

 

Many of our people talk to customers every day and can provide great insight into how they think. The way our customers see the world and our role in their lives and businesses is changing. In the coming year we will focus on developing a better understanding of what customers value about BT in each of our market segments.

 

BT is already making significant investments in our key markets and we have a very strong market position, but we need to invest more in our core areas to drive future growth. Constant innovation is key to keeping our business moving forward. Our increasing investment in fibre and 5G programmes is vital to our future success.

 

Our relationship with the UK Government and Ofcom continues to improve. We’re working in a pragmatic, straightforward and collaborative way. We want to shape the regulatory environment so that it is clear and predictable, enabling BT to

     

succeed by delivering sustainable value that reflects what customers and society want.

 

Our core priorities around customer experience, building the best converged network and transforming our operating model underpin how we will compete and drive sustainable growth.

 

Everything we do should start with the aim of delivering a differentiated customer experience. We are already making progress with this. We introduced our first converged products, BT Plus, for consumers and 4G Assure, for small businesses, which have seen strong take-up. In the coming year there will be additional investment to improve our propositions, offer great value for money and increase consumer loyalty.

 

We will also invest to maintain our network leadership position. We already have the best mobile and fixed networks and in the coming year we will launch 5G across 16 UK cities and accelerate our rollout of FTTP. Although important points still need to be agreed, our dialogue with the Government and Ofcom is constructive and we are increasingly confident in the environment for investment in the UK. As a result we are increasing our aim of reaching 3 million homes to 4 million by March 2021 and 15 million by the mid-2020’s, subject to conditions being right.

 

BT has made progress during the year towards creating a simplified, lean and more agile business. We will make further improvements in the coming year to speed up decision making and the pace of work, making use of the latest digital technologies. Our people recognise we are too complex and want us to go faster in our transformation. Employee engagement is high, with a 77% engagement outcome for colleagues participating in our recent people survey. The results were generally encouraging, and demonstrate our collective desire to embrace the changes required to make BT a brilliant place to work and give our customers an outstanding experience.

 

I am pleased to see how much our people contribute to the community and am proud that BT encourages this work. One area I want us to really lead on is improving digital skills – for our colleagues, customers and families across the UK and well beyond. BT is uniquely qualified to help people navigate the

     

opportunities and challenges of our digital age. Enabling these skills will help people adapt to new ways of working and create future customer demand for our products.

 

We’re committed to respecting human and digital rights – we launched an overarching human rights policy, and we’re partnering with others to combat modern slavery. We continue to tackle environmental challenges, having recently announced our ambition to be a net zero carbon emissions business by 2045.

 

BT has delivered solid results for the year, and this is due to the commitment of our colleagues. The markets we are in remain highly competitive and we continue to expect market dynamics, cost inflation and legacy product declines and the changing regulatory environment to impact our results in the short term, however, we are confident that our plans will deliver good returns over the medium term and improve the quality and performance of the business.

 

As a result, for 2019/20, we expect adjusted revenue to be down around 2%. This is mainly as a result of the challenging market conditions, regulatory pressure in both fixed and mobile markets, and the ongoing impact from our decision to de-emphasise lower margin products, particularly in our enterprise businesses.

 

Along with the flow through of lower revenue, we expect our opex investments to result in Group adjusted EBITDA for 2019/20 being in the range £7.2bn – £7.3bn. While we will sustain these opex investments into 2020/21, we continue to expect Group adjusted EBITDA for 2020/21 to be above that for 2019/20.

 

We are raising our reported capital expenditure guidance (excluding BDUK clawback) for 2019/20 to be in a range of £3.7bn – £3.9bn. We expect normalised free cash flow for 2019/20 to out-turn in the range £1.9bn – £2.1bn.

 

I look forward to working alongside our colleagues to build the new BT and I am optimistic and energised for the future.

 

Philip Jansen

Chief Executive

8 May 2019


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

4         

BT Group plc

     

Annual Report 2019

        
        

 

About BT

    

    
    

 

Who we are

We’re one of the world’s leading communications services companies. We’re based in the UK but we serve customers in 180 countries.

 

What we do

We develop and sell communications products and services and build and operate networks that are an essential part of modern lives, businesses and communities.

 

How we’re organised

BT is organised into two types of units: customer-facing units that sell products and services and corporate units that support the whole group.

    

   

Financial highlights

 

 
   

Revenue

£23.4bn (1)%

 

Profit before tax

£2.7bn +2%

 

Basic earnings per share

21.8p +6%

 

Net cash inflow from

operating activities

£4.3bn (14)%

 

LOGO

For more information on our

financial performance see page 34.

 

Change in underlying a revenue

(0.9)%

 

Adjusted b EBITDA

£7.4bn (2)%

 

Adjusted b earnings per share

26.3p (6)%

 

Normalised free

cash flow c

£2.4bn (18)%

 

Capital expenditure d

(excluding BDUK clawback)

£3.8bn +8%

   

    

Alternative performance measures

 

We assess the performance of the group using a variety of performance measures. These measures are not all defined under IFRS and are therefore termed ‘non-GAAP’ measures. We present a reconciliation from these non-GAAP measures to the nearest prepared measure in accordance with IFRS on pages 185 to 187. The alternative performance measures we use may not be directly comparable with similarly titled measures used by other companies.

 

a  Underlying revenue excludes specific items, foreign exchange movements and disposals.

 

b  Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 185 for more information.

 

c  After net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items.

 

d  Additions to property, plant and equipment and software in the period less proceeds from disposals.

 
   
     

 

 


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

                  5

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

Strategic report

            

Governance

            

Financial statements

            

Additional information

            

 

Our customer-facing units         Our corporate units  

 

Consumer

 

Across our three brands – BT, EE and Plusnet – we connect customers to information, entertainment, friends and family, at home and on the move. Between them, the three brands serve the whole of the UK, providing mobile, broadband, home phone and TV services. We buy access to fixed-line and broadband infrastructure from Openreach, and we use EE’s mobile network to provide mobile phone services.

 

Led by

Marc Allera

CEO, Consumer

   

 

Enterprise

 

We sell communications and IT services to businesses and public sector organisations in the UK and Ireland. We also provide network products and services to communications providers operating in Great Britain. We’re focused on four main product markets: fixed voice, mobile, converged connectivity and networked IT services.

 

Led by

Gerry McQuade

CEO, Enterprise

        

 

Strategy and Transformation

 

We are responsible for developing and setting corporate, network and product strategies for the group. We also drive pan-BT transformation programmes.

 

Led by

Michael Sherman

Chief strategy

and transformation officer

 

Technology

 

We are responsible for designing, building and operating BT’s core and mobile networks, platforms and IT systems in the UK and globally. We also work with the customer-facing units to develop and roll out products and services for their customers.

 

Led by

Howard Watson

Chief technology

and information officer

 

Corporate functions

 

The remaining corporate units carry out central activities on behalf of the group. We benefit from shared expertise and economies of scale. They include: Finance, HR, Legal and Company Secretarial, Compliance, Corporate Affairs, Property, Facilities, Procurement, Regulatory Affairs and Group Business Services.

 

 

              

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

                       

External revenue

£10,588m +3%

   

External revenue

£5,933m (4)%

     

 

 

Percentage of

group revenue

45%

 

 

LOGO

   

 

 

Percentage of

group revenue

25%

 

 

LOGO

     
                  

Global Services

 

We are a leading enterprise communications provider, serving enterprise customers in 180 countries. We provide managed network and IT infrastructure services, enabling customers’ digital transformations.

 

Led by

Bas Burger

CEO, Global Services

   

Openreach

 

We build and operate the fixed network that connects the UK’s homes and businesses. We are responsible for providing wholesale ‘last mile’ fixed access from premises to exchanges, and installing and maintaining the fibre and copper communications networks.

 

Led by

Clive Selley

CEO, Openreach

     
                  

External revenue

£4,735m (6)%

   

External revenue

£2,200m   (3)%

         

 

Percentage of

group revenue

20%

 

 

LOGO

   

 

Percentage of

group revenue

10%

 

 

LOGO

         
               
               
               
               
               

 

    


Table of Contents
6         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Executive Committee

      
      
      
      

 

The  Executive Committee provides input and recommendations to support the chief executive in exercising the authority delegated by the Board to run the business of the group day-to-day. It meets weekly and is chaired by the chief executive.

 

The  Executive Committee assists the chief executive in:

 

• developing the group strategy and budget for the Board’s approval

 

• executing the strategic plan once agreed by the Board

 

• providing assurance to the Board in relation to overall performance and risk management.

 

All decisions are taken by the chief executive, or his delegate, in keeping with the principle of single point accountability.

     

LOGO

 

Philip Jansen

Chief executive

Appointed as chief executive in February 2019 and on the Board since January 2019.

 

Philip joined BT from Worldpay where he had been CEO since April 2013. Before that he was CEO and then chairman at Brakes Group between 2010 and 2015. Philip spent the previous six years at Sodexo where he was group chief operating officer and chief executive, Europe, South Africa and India. Prior to that he was chief operating officer at MyTravel Group from 2002 to 2004 and managing director of Telewest Communications (now Virgin Media) from 2000 to 2002, after starting his career at Procter & Gamble.

     

LOGO

 

Simon Lowth

Chief financial officer

Appointed to the Board as chief financial officer in July 2016.

 

Simon was CFO and executive director of BG Group before the takeover by Royal Dutch Shell in February 2016. Previously Simon was CFO and an executive director of AstraZeneca, and finance director and executive director of ScottishPower. Prior to that, Simon was a director of McKinsey & Company.

 

LOGO

 

Gerry McQuade

CEO, Enterprise

Appointed CEO, Wholesale and Ventures in March 2016 and became CEO, Enterprise in May 2018.

 

Gerry was formerly chief sales and marketing officer at EE responsible for the business, wholesale and product development areas which he had overseen since the merger in 2010 of Orange and T-Mobile. He joined the board of Orange in January 2008, and prior to Orange he was a founding director of Virgin Mobile.

 

LOGO

 

Howard Watson

Chief technology and information officer

Appointed February 2016.

 

Howard was formerly chief architect and managing director, global IT systems and led the technical teams behind the launch of BT Sport in 2013.

 

Howard joined BT in 2011 and has 30 years of telecoms experience having spent time at Telewest Communications (now Virgin Media) and Cartesian, a telecommunications consultancy and software company.

 


Table of Contents
                  7
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

LOGO

 

Marc Allera

CEO, Consumer

Appointed February 2016 as CEO, EE and became CEO, Consumer in September 2017.

 

Marc was previously chief commercial officer for EE from 2011 to 2015. Marc spent ten years at Three UK as sales and marketing director and subsequently chief commercial officer. Prior to that, Marc was general manager of Sega UK and Europe.

       

LOGO

 

Bas Burger

CEO, Global Services

Appointed June 2017.

 

Bas was formerly president, BT in the Americas, BT Global Services. Bas joined BT in 2008 as CEO Benelux.

 

Before joining BT, Bas was executive president and a member of the management committee of Getronics NV, where he ran global sales, channels and partnerships, developing the company’s international business. He was also CEO and managing director of KPN Entercom Solutions.

       

LOGO

 

Sabine Chalmers

General counsel

Appointed April 2018.

 

Before joining BT, Sabine was chief legal and corporate affairs officer and company secretary of Anheuser-Busch InBev for 12 years. She also held various legal leadership roles at Diageo. Sabine is qualified to practise law in England and Wales and New York State.

               

LOGO

 

Ed Petter

Corporate affairs director

Appointed November 2016.

 

Ed was formerly deputy director of corporate affairs at Lloyds Banking Group. Prior to that he held corporate affairs roles at McDonald’s Europe, McKinsey & Company and the Blue Rubicon communications consultancy, having previously worked as a news producer and editor at the BBC.

       

LOGO

 

Cathryn Ross

Regulatory affairs director

Appointed January 2018.

 

Cathryn was formerly chief executive of Ofwat, the independent economic regulator for the water and waste water sector in England and Wales. Cathryn is an experienced regulatory and competition economist and has worked across a number of different sectors advising on economic, regulatory and competition issues.

       

LOGO

 

Michael Sherman

Chief strategy and transformation officer

Appointed May 2018.

 

Michael is responsible for developing BT’s long-term strategy and guiding pan-BT business transformation. Prior to BT, Michael was a partner and managing director at Boston Consulting Group for 11 years. Before that, Michael spent eight years as an executive at Viewlocity, an enterprise software company.

   
               

LOGO

 

Alison Wilcox

HR director

Appointed July 2015.

 

Alison was formerly regional HR director for Vodafone Europe and before that, regional HR director for Vodafone’s Africa, Middle East and Asia Pacific footprint. Alison joined Vodafone in 2006 as group director of leadership following a career in consulting.

       

 

LOGO

 

Clive Selley

Invitee, CEO, Openreach

 

Clive was appointed CEO, Openreach in February 2016. He was formerly CEO, BT Technology, Service & Operations, CEO BT innovate & design and before that president, BT Global Services portfolio & service design. The CEO of Openreach cannot be a member of the Executive Committee under the provisions of the Commitments. Clive attends Executive Committee meetings as appropriate.

 

       

 

LOGO

 

Rachel Canham

Company secretary & general counsel, governance

 

Rachel is company secretary of BT Group plc. She joined BT in 2011 as a senior commercial lawyer before becoming chief counsel for mergers & acquisitions in 2013. Rachel was appointed company secretary & general counsel, governance in November 2018. Rachel attends all Executive Committee meetings.

 


Table of Contents
8         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        

 

    

Market context

    

      
      

 

      

 

By understanding market trends in our own industry and in others
that affect us, we can take advantage of opportunities as they arise
and act more quickly to reduce any risks to our business.

 

Our share of UK households

(Number of households)

 

LOGO

 

   

Our brands

 

  UK fixed
    connectivity    
      UK Mobile         TV and content    

 

Converged

connectivity

    and services    

 

 

Global

  telecoms services  

 

Fixed

    infrastructure    

      
 

BT

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

     
 

EE

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

         
 

Plusnet

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

                 
 

Openreach

 

LOGO

                 

LOGO

 
               
               
   

Selected competitors
primary offering

                           
         
 

Amazon Prime Video

         

LOGO

             
 

Apple TV

         

LOGO

             
 

CityFibre

 

LOGO

                 

LOGO

 
 

Giffgaff

     

LOGO

                 
 

Hyperoptic

                     

LOGO

 
 

Netflix

         

LOGO

             
 

O2

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

             

LOGO

 
 

Orange Business Solutions

                 

LOGO

     
 

Sky

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

         
 

TalkTalk

 

LOGO

     

LOGO

 

LOGO

     

LOGO

 
 

Three

     

LOGO

                 
 

Virgin Media

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

     

LOGO

 
 

Vodafone

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

     

LOGO

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

 
 

 

Please note that these are primary offerings. We acknowledge that our competitors also have secondary offerings in some of our markets in addition to the above.

 
               
               

 


Table of Contents
                  9
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 UK fixed connectivity

 

LOGO

 

Providing fixed
broadband services to
consumers, businesses
and communications
providers.

   

We connect customers to information, entertainment, and friends and family, at home.

 

Fixed connectivity includes providing connectivity directly to homes or businesses and is our biggest market by revenue. It includes voice telephony, internet access and the provision of dedicated lines for business and public sector customers.

 

Within Enterprise, we have three main types of customers with different communications needs:

 

• Small and Medium Enterprise customers, who we define as having fewer than 100 employees, often rely heavily on communications services and look for more consumer-style products.

 

• Corporate customers, who often have more complex needs, and who are increasingly buying more security and cloud-based products.

 

• Public Sector and Major Business customers, who look to buy both fixed and mobile services in multi-year contracts and who can demand very high security.

 

We also serve communications providers who want to buy solutions to sell on to their end customers.

   

This segment is experiencing a technology migration from the legacy Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) to Internet Protocol (IP). The UK Government actively supports this.

 

In Consumer, fixed internet connectivity is increasingly essential to our individual and household customers, with each using an average of 240GB a year. In 2018, nine in ten people had access to the internet in their home. Many adults claim to spend as much as 24 hours per week online, more than twice as much as in 2007.

 

Price competition on phone calls and broadband continues to be intense. Therefore, revenue opportunities in this segment focus on increased demand for higher speed and better-quality products, driven by consumers and businesses using more data.

       

 UK mobile

       

LOGO

 

Providing mobile
connectivity to
consumers, businesses
and MVNOs.

   

This market includes any data or voice services on mobile devices. It is a major segment of our business.

 

We use EE’s mobile network to provide mobile phone services across our three brands to the whole of the UK.

 

Both Consumer and Enterprise sell mobile services in this market.

 

Another aspect of the mobile market is wholesaling to Mobile Virtual Network Operators (MVNOs) in the UK, where Mobile Network Operators offer wholesale mobile connectivity.

   

Historically, the mobile market has largely been driven by handset launches. Less innovation and differentiation mean consumers are keeping their handset for longer and visiting stores less often. This trend is leading to increased uptake of SIM-only plans in the market. We also see market volume growth coming from consumers buying extra SIMs and devices and using more data.

 

Businesses are increasingly letting their people use their own smartphones at work. Despite that, they are continuing to buy large data bundles to support their people’s increasing mobile data use, for example in areas such as collaboration.

 

The UK currently has more than 100 MVNOs and we are one of the leading providers of MVNO services.


Table of Contents
10         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Market context continued

    

      

 

 TV and content

 

LOGO

 

Providing TV content
to customers.

   

We sell TV content in our Consumer division under our BT and EE brands.

 

We also wholesale BT Sport to other providers.

   

The UK has a well-established free-to-air TV service, on top of which consumers buy many premium content packages including live sport, which continues to be a staple in most UK homes.

 

In comparison to ‘cord-cutting’ where consumers abandon TV packages in favour of a range of over-the-top (OTT) streaming media offers, we are seeing some evidence of ‘package-thinning’ as an emerging feature of the market. This is where customers buy the most basic package to get TV access and accentuate this with on-demand OTT content.

 

These trends are affecting traditional providers in limiting their ability to sell premium monthly content subscription packages.

       

 Converged connectivity and services

       

LOGO

 

Providing converged
products and services
to customers.

   

With our fixed and mobile networks, we are well positioned in the converged connectivity and services market.

 

We have launched BT Plus, the UK’s first converged fibre and 4G plan that gives customers BT’s fastest speeds in and out of the home with a unique Keep Connected Promise, all on one simple bill.

 

We launched 4G Assure for our business customers, providing 4G connectivity if their fixed broadband service was not available.

   

The UK is in the early stages of convergence – the bundling of fixed, mobile and TV services into a single service.

 

Convergence can increase customer lifetime value, as those taking converged offers tend to be more loyal.

 

Greater connectivity and new devices will lead to new possibilities for technology convergence. As an example, people can already answer their front doors and adjust their central heating remotely using Internet of Things (IoT) technology.

 

Applications like smart homes and connected cities are no longer ideas beyond the horizon – they are here and are already part of many major economies.


Table of Contents
                  11
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 Global ICT services

 

LOGO

 

Providing ICT services to
global enterprises.

   

The global ICT services market includes security, network and IT services and is highly competitive, with many players. It includes local markets – often dominated by incumbent communications providers – and the global enterprise-grade fixed line services market.

 

Global Services operates in this market, leveraging the strengths of the BT network and capabilities, to deliver the tailored service that customers need.

   

The demands of business customers are changing. For example, they are moving from traditional voice services to digital voice services – from MPLS (Multi Protocol Label Switching) to services such as SD-WAN (Software-Defined Wide Area Networks). They are also increasingly focused on solving security challenges.

 

Companies value partners with the knowledge to help them on this journey. They rely on their technical expertise and scale to help them benefit from advanced services, in multiple regions, across infrastructures with mixed technologies and standards.

 

       

 Fixed infrastructure

       

LOGO

 

Providing network
access to
communications
providers.

   

In just under half of the fixed infrastructure market, Openreach is the main provider to communications providers, who then offer services to their home and business customers. In the rest, we overlap with our biggest cable and fibre competitors.

 

Openreach is deploying new technologies such as Fibre to the Premises (FTTP) and Gfast to improve the performance and quality of its network. It also provides regulated access to its passive network assets (ducts and poles) to support network build by other providers.

 

    The UK has a large fixed access network consisting of fibre and copper communication networks. Openreach operates in the UK’s regulated, fixed access market and trades mainly with communications providers. It is responsible for providing services over the local access network, sometimes referred to as the ‘last mile’, installing and maintaining the fibre and copper communications networks that connect homes and businesses.
       


Table of Contents

LOGO     

 

    

 

12           

BT Group plc

     

Annual Report 2019

                  
          

 

Our business

model

    

  

International Integrated

Reporting Council’s capitals

 

This key provides a mapping to the ‘capitals’ of the IIRC’s Integrated Reporting (IR) Framework.

 

LOGO

You can find out more at theiirc.org

  LOGO   Financial
  LOGO   Human
  LOGO   Manufactured
  LOGO   Intellectual
  LOGO   Social
  LOGO   Natural
   

 

     

    

  

 

 

 

            

 

 

Our business model is centred around providing customers with communications and connectivity services, while delivering great experiences and maintaining long-term relationships.

 

Our customers and what we offer them

Our customers are consumers, businesses, multinational corporations, public sector organisations and other communications providers.

 

We sell fixed-voice, broadband, mobile and TV to UK consumers, with a range of ancillary products and services such as handsets and insurance. For our UK and global business customers, our services range from phone and broadband to complex managed networks, IT services and cybersecurity. We also sell wholesale access products and services to UK communications providers.

 

Customers primarily buy through monthly, recurring subscriptions or contracts, which provide us with ongoing and predictable revenue. This is complemented by pay-as-you-go mobile services.

 

Individuals, households and SMEs pay for standalone or bundled services, typically on 12- to 24-month contracts. In addition, large enterprise customers – both domestic and international – buy managed services on multi-year contracts.

 

Wholesale contracts range from one month for regulated products, to five years or more for major managed services deals.

 

To create lasting revenue and profit, we focus on providing a differentiated customer experience, measured through Net Promoter Score (NPS a ), which has improved over 11 consecutive quarters.

 

a  Group NPS measures Net Promoter Score in our retail business and Net Satisfaction in our wholesale business.

    

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

What sets us apart

We have a unique combination of people, technology, content, networks and other physical assets that sets us apart and supports us in adding value:

 

       
 

LOGO   Financial strength

 

Our cash flows provide us with the funding to make long-term investments. This year we invested £2.1bn in our network and generated £2.4bn normalised free cash flow, to support investment in future years.

 

LOGO   Our people

 

The commitment, expertise and diversity of our people are key to our success. We have 106,700 employees, 84,300 of whom are in the UK.

 

LOGO   Our customer base

 

The size, scope and breadth of our customer base gives us an advantage over our competitors. We have a total of around 26.8 million consumer customers, 1.1 million UK business customers and 4,100 multinational customers.

 

LOGO   Networks and physical assets

 

We maintain a substantial core network with key fixed and mobile assets, such as our superfast fibre broadband footprint of 27.5 million homes and businesses and our mobile spectrum assets.

 

LOGO   Our brands

 

We own three retail brands: BT, EE and Plusnet. We also own the Openreach brand which serves communications providers.

 

LOGO  Retail footprint

 

In the UK we have more than 600 retail stores, giving us the largest retail footprint of any mobile network operator.

 

LOGO  Innovation

 

This year we spent £643m on research and development enabling us to stay at the forefront of a rapidly changing world. We have a portfolio of more than 5,000 patents and applications, with 103 patent applications for inventions filed in 2018/19. As an example we are currently market leaders in the rollout of 4G and intend to lead the market to 5G.

 

LOGO   Partners

 

Our business model relies on partners and suppliers.

    

£2.4bn

 

Normalised free cash flow

 

106,700

 

Total number

of employees

 

28m

 

Total number of customers worldwide

 

27.9m

 

Homes and businesses with superfast fibre broadband

 

Our brands

 

LOGO

 

600

 

Retail stores

throughout the UK

 

£643m

 

R&D spend

 

100

 

Number of countries we have suppliers in

  

 

    

 


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

 

                    13
 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

            

 

 Strategic report

              

 Governance

              

 Financial statements

              

 Additional information

                   

 

 

 

                                                        

 

What we do

 

                    

Stakeholder outcomes

 

     

Our purpose

To use the power of communications to make a better world.

 

Our goal

Drive sustainable growth in value. Lead in converged connectivity and services, seize new business opportunities and deliver industry-leading efficiency.

 

                                                                                  

 

   

Shareholders

10.78p

 

Proposed final dividend

per share

 

Customers

5.4%

 

Improvements in Right

First Time performance

 

Colleagues

77%

 

Employee engagement

outcome

 

Suppliers

£13.4bn

 

Spent with

suppliers

  

 

15.40p

 

Full year dividend

per share

 

3.4m

 

BT Call Protect

customers

 

1,400

 

Agency workers

converted to

permanent

 

67%

With top 100

suppliers

  

We build

We build fixed and mobile connectivity across the UK, creating the UK’s leading network.

  LOGO     
      

We innovate

We use our customer insight and technical skills to create new connectivity-based products and solutions.

  LOGO     
      Communities and society   

We sell

Through our brands, we sell products and services to build trust, create value and generate loyalty.

  LOGO    

2m

 

Children reached

through the Barefoot

Computing programme

 

Government

1,800

UK public sector

customers

  

87%

Electricity used from

renewable sources

worldwide (UK now

at 100% directly

purchased)

  
         

We operate

We operate fast, secure and reliable fixed and mobile networks that deliver what our customers need.

  LOGO        
      LOGO      

LOGO

 

 

   

Information linked to our business model

 

About BT – we explain how we’re organised

and how and where we operate on page 4.

 

Strategy – our strategy supports our business

model and is on page 14.

 

Principal risks and uncertainties – we describe

these and how we manage them on page 46.

 

Viability statement – our directors’ assessment

of our prospects and viability is on page 54.

 

Governance – we describe how we govern

our business from page 55.

 

Remuneration – the directors’ remuneration

report is from page 73.

    

  

 

    


Table of Contents
              14           
 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 
 

 

   

 

 
                 
            
            
   

Our strategy

    

        
        
   
                
           Our strategy is to lead in converged connectivity and services, capitalising on new business opportunities and delivering industry-leading operational efficiency. This is to support our goal of delivering sustainable growth in value.      

Our markets are transitioning but they are still based on the universal need to connect and communicate, a need which has never been more essential.

 

Creating experiences for our customers that truly differentiate us from our competitors is at the centre of our strategic framework. Everything we do with respect to building the best converged network, and becoming a simpler, leaner and more agile business, needs to ultimately support our strategy to deliver great customer experience.

    

      We have underpinned our strategy to fulfil the needs of two other critical stakeholder groups – our people and the communities in which we do business. For our people, our strategy is to make BT a brilliant place to work. For the communities we operate in, our strategy is to be a valued partner in helping to build better digital lives.  
                

 

                

 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
                                 15               
         

 

 
 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 
 

 

   

 

   

 

 
              

 Governance

 
         

 

 
              

 Financial statements

 
         

 

 
              

 Additional information

 
         

 

 
           

            

 

 

 

Strengths and opportunities

Our long-standing relationships with home and business customers give us a platform for continued investment.

 

Our investments result in long-lasting assets. This includes nationwide networks, where we are investing in the critical physical components – such as cabling, switches and routers – of the digital economy of the near future. Our strategy supports the building of a robust network that will underpin the growth of the digital economy, and enhanced connectivity in all parts of the UK.

 

Our network also creates a robust physical foundation for many uses in next generation technologies which need the best connectivity. We will own the foundation and therefore be in an unrivalled position.

     

We see significant opportunities in the advancement of Artificial Intelligence (AI) and machine learning, for new communications methods, such as virtual and augmented reality, and for connected devices. All of these opportunities require great connectivity, which we will need to support.

 

As a major player in the UK communications market we have a responsibility to do the right thing for the UK and make sure we operate within a fair regulatory framework and clear ethical boundaries. But being a player with substantial resources and a large and diverse customer base also gives us a real strategic advantage.

     

In global markets we are often a challenger to the incumbent, presenting an opportunity to innovate and move faster to deliver secure hybrid network solutions that support our customers’ migration to new digital technologies.

 

LOGO

For more on the risks that affect us

see page 46.

 

            

 

           
                         
            
            
Best           Differentiated              Simplified,    

converged

network

    

customer    

experience    

   

lean and agile

business

   
            

LOGO

     LOGO     LOGO    
            

Customers want fast, secure,

seamless and reliable connectivity

to enable their digital lives and

businesses. Therefore we must

deliver the best converged network

in the UK through our rollout of

FTTP and 5G.

    

Consumers and businesses have

more choice than ever about how

they communicate and the company

they choose to buy from. We want

to deliver a brilliant experience to

encourage existing customers to

stay with us and do more with us,

and to encourage potential

customers to switch to us. We

aim to offer easy, personalised

experiences across our channels

and deliver seamless digital services.

   

Markets today are more dynamic

and competitive and we operate

in a complicated and regulated

space. We are creating a

simplified and lean business

with agile ways of working.

This means continually

modernising our organisation,

changing how we work to do

things better for less cost, and

simplifying our products,

processes and systems.

   
            
                                                                                                                                                                                                               

 

LOGO

For more information

see page 18.

    

 

LOGO

For more information

see page 16.

   

 

LOGO

For more information

see page 20.

   
            
            
            
            
            


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

16         

BT Group plc

     

Annual Report 2019

        
        
        
        

 

   

Strategic progress

Delivering a differentiated customer experience

        
      

 

                  
Creating an outstanding customer experience for all our customers, backed by the best network, is central to our long-term growth and future success. We are making progress but we want to go further.     
        

Everyone at BT is responsible for providing a brilliant customer experience. We want our customers to enjoy using the products, services and support channels that we provide.

 

We measure customer experience in two different, but complementary, ways: customer experience (based on Net Promoter Score) and how often we get things Right First Time (RFT).

 

We regularly review the priorities of both our consumer and business customers, and will be evolving our RFT metric for 2019/20 to reflect this.

   

Our evolved measure, Keeping Our Promises, is focused on us meeting the commitments we make and providing a more reliable service.

 

NPS has increased over 11 consecutive quarters, with this year’s overall score 6.5 points better than last year’s. RFT was up 5.4%.

 

These improvements are largely due to our consistent approach over the past three years, focusing on:

                                                                                                               
            
        
1. Delivering a consistent and reliable service     2. Loyalty and value     
        

42

 

We have met or exceeded all of Ofcom’s 42 Minimum Service Level targets on copper and broadband services

   

600 shops

 

Customers can now talk to us face-to-face in more than 600 EE shops

    
        

<1.8%

 

We now miss less than 1.8% of engineering appointments

   

45Mbps

 

Average broadband speeds for BT consumer customers is 45Mbps

    
            
        
3. Products that fit our customers’ needs     4. Enabling digital global business     
        

90%

 

More than 90% of Samsung mobile phones were repaired on the same day

   

180

 

Next generation SD-WAN is available in 180 countries

    
        

SD-WAN

 

Launched innovative converged business products such as SD-WAN

   

First

 

First foreign communications provider to be awarded a licence in China

    
        
        

 

    


Table of Contents
                  17
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

1. Delivering a consistent and reliable service

 

The communications we enable are so essential to our customers that delayed orders, faults or service disruptions can cause significant distress. This year, therefore, our investments included:

 

• speeding up our ultrafast fibre rollout (FTTP), passing an average of c14,000 new premises every week in 2018/19.

 

• hiring over 4,000 new contact centre agents, and switching 800 from agency contracts to full time, helping cut call centre wait times for business customers by a third and for EE broadband customers by a half.

 

• increasing the proportion of all BT brand Consumer service conversations handled in the UK to around 83%, and working towards a target of 100%. All BT Plus, EE and Plusnet calls are handled in the UK

 

• improving our eChat service, which is now used by one in five BT brand Consumer customers for service queries.

 

• increasing our intake of engineering apprentices by around 1,700.

 

We are innovating to improve the experience of our customers. For example, we are using remote visual assistant technology to help our call centre agents and our engineers provide expert advice more quickly.

 

Openreach’s proactive maintenance meant we had 2% fewer copper network faults than in 2017/18, Global Services transformation has enabled 71% of service incidents to be proactively detected. Openreach provided 99% of all customers with their first appointment date for a new service within 12 days, an improvement from 92% in 2017/18. Customer complaints to Ofcom reduced by a third for both BT’s consumer broadband and EE’s mobile customers when measured on a year-on-year basis.

 

Like many businesses, our complexity is still a challenge. But making our portfolio smaller and simplifying our processes will cut the cost and inertia that leads to poor customer experience.

 

Service progress around BT

 

• We have met or exceeded all of Ofcom’s 42 Minimum Service Level targets on copper and broadband services.

 

• We now miss less than 1.8% of engineering appointments, 23% fewer than last year.

 

• Average Ethernet provisioning times went down 7.6% compared to last year.

 

• Enterprise won two golds at the UK Customer Experience Awards.

     

2. Loyalty and value

 

We want to reward customer loyalty by focusing on value for money.

 

There will be no price increases for our BT brand consumer broadband, line rental and mobile products in 2019.

 

We want to do more than just stop customers leaving. We want to build more loyalty across all our brands, by focusing on value for money. We want customers to increasingly get more for their money – whether that is faster broadband speeds or better mobile coverage.

 

Loyalty and value progress around BT

 

• Customers can talk to us face-to-face in more than 600 EE shops about BT broadband and TV and EE products and services, with a full BT service planned for the end of 2019/20.

 

• Average broadband speeds for BT’s Consumer customers have improved 10% to 45Mbps.

 

• We now have nearly 3.4 million customers using our Call Protect product, preventing more than 220 million unwanted calls since launch in January 2017.

 

3. Products that fit our customers’ needs

 

Our BT Plus convergence proposition includes mobile replacement, guaranteed minimum speeds and double mobile data allowances for customers.

 

BT Plus launched in May 2018 and has around one million subscribers. Complete Wi-Fi subsequently launched as an enhanced version of the service and the take up has been encouraging. BT Sport saw a 4% audience increase for English Premier League games and an 18% increase for Champions League coverage.

 

We also launched BT’s new Stay Fast Guarantee to improve customer experience and reduce churn. We’ll optimise connection performance for new and re-contracting customers and then monitor and proactively manage connection quality, offering £20 compensation if we cannot fix speed issues.

 

We launched EE Smart Plans to expand our differentiation and drive value through more for more offers. The handset plan came with Swappable Benefits to increase value and encourage migration from SIM only, whilst both handset and Smart SIM plans offer a Service Pack including annual device health checks, accessory vouchers and extended device warranties.

     

Openreach launched a new volume-related discount offer for communications providers to help them boost their customers’ adoption of higher-speed and more reliable broadband services.

 

We have also started migrating customers to our all-IP digital platform. This brings opportunities for a range of richer experiences and propositions – from smart home technologies for consumers to sophisticated voice services for SMEs.

 

Products progress around BT

 

• We have launched innovative converged products for businesses such as BTNet, SD-WAN and cloud solution collaboration with Microsoft Azure.

 

• In TV, we are now a content super-aggregator with Netflix and Amazon Prime already available, and Sky (via NOW TV) on its way later in 2019.

 

• We launched a trial of fast mobile phone delivery through Enjoy on EE (within the M25) – offering customers delivery and set-up of their smartphone as quickly as two hours from placing their order.

 

• We launched a trial same-day repair service with Samsung where more than 90% of repairs were fixed on the same day and 80% in the same hour.

 

• We launched 4G Assure for our business customers, providing 4G connectivity if their fixed broadband service was not available. Half of new SME business orders now take this product.

 

4. Enabling digital global business

 

Our Global Services unit is refocusing on truly global customers. We are offering a smaller portfolio of repeatable, scalable cloud-of-clouds solutions – supported by market-leading security – to give customers flexibility, choice and control. We are also making processes smoother with self-service tools and automation.

 

Digital global business progress around BT

 

• Next generation, SD-WAN services are now available in 180 countries and we have launched two new Cisco and Meraki-based solutions.

 

• We were the first to market with Riverbed’s ‘Visibility as a Service’, which allows customers to view and manage their application traffic.

 

• To help our customers migrate to the cloud, last year we added Google and IBM to the partners we already support on our Cloud Connect Platform.

 

• Last year, a BT joint venture was awarded domestic operating licences within China. This is a major step towards allowing us to better serve our multinational customers.


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

18         

BT Group plc

     

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

   

Strategic progress

Building the best converged network

        
      

 

                  
The converged network we are creating is a long-term, sustainable asset. The investments we make today are the foundation of tomorrow’s digital services and our future revenue.     
        

Our aim is to bring together our mobile, broadband and wi-fi networks to lead the market for converged digital services, while reducing our network costs by switching off assets like legacy PSTN by 2025.

 

    Our technology focus areas have stayed the same over recent years, aligned to meeting our customers’ needs to connect and communicate. These are:                                                                                                                
            
        
1. Superfast and ultrafast fibre     2. Current and future mobile     
        

12.2m

 

We have 12.2m fibre broadband customers

   

16

 

We will launch 5G in 16 UK

cities in 2019

    
        

3.2m

 

Number of homes and businesses in the UK passed by our ultrafast fibre

 

   

84%

 

The percentage of 4G

geographic coverage

in the UK

    
          
        
3. Network integration         
        

First

 

EE is the first UK network

to support all major smart

home ecosystems

        
        

50%

 

By the end of March 2019 half

of SME broadband sales came

with 4G Assure

        
        
        

 

    


Table of Contents
                  19
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

This year we made good progress, which will continue next year. More of our customers took up superfast broadband products and we increased the pace of our investments in ultrafast.

 

Ultimately, our ambition is to lead the UK to 5G. We are starting to roll out our 5G network, with 16 UK locations going live in 2019. We are proud of still being the best network in the UK for current technologies, such as 4G.

 

We believe fibre is the future fixed connection to homes and we are rolling it out as fast as possible. We are increasing our aim of bringing FTTP from three million to four million properties by the end of March 2021, and our ambition to go from ten million properties to 15 million by the mid-2020s, subject to conditions being right.

 

To keep us in the lead for mobile, we are switching 3G signal to 4G and upgrading 4G sites to enable more spectrum and give customers a better experience. In 2018 we also acquired the spectrum we needed to start rolling out 5G. There is another spectrum auction happening in Spring 2020 where we expect to bid for more.

 

Commercial success increasingly depends on innovation, which is why we invest in research and development.

 

We are constantly looking at new innovations to deploy – like edge computing to cut network congestion and speed up application performance.

 

This year we invested £643m (2017/18:

£632m) in innovation. Over the last decade we’ve been one of the largest investors in innovation in the UK, and globally in the telecoms sector.

 

We have a portfolio of more than 5,000 patents and applications, with 103 patents for inventions filed in 2018/19.

     

1. Superfast and ultrafast fibre a

 

We have now rolled out ultrafast fibre to 3.2 million homes and businesses. As part of the Openreach full fibre rollout, we are progressing build in 26 locations and in April announced a further 12 locations to benefit from FTTP availability. This includes London, Birmingham, Leeds, Manchester, Bristol, Cardiff, Edinburgh and Liverpool.

 

Superfast and ultrafast progress around BT

 

• We have 12.2 million superfast fibre broadband customers, within our footprint of 27.5 million covering 86.6% of homes and businesses.

 

• Our ultrafast fibre footprint now reaches more than 3.2 million homes and businesses.

 

• EE will offer ultrafast broadband to customers in summer 2019.

 

• We are working with government and Ofcom on options for a broadband Universal Service Obligation – to provide 100% of UK homes and businesses with a minimum speed of 10Mbps by 2020.

 

2. Current and future mobile

 

In August, RootMetrics named EE as the UK’s best network for the fifth year in a row. Using Ofcom measures, our mobile network now provides 84% geographic coverage in the UK. We aim to be the UK’s first mobile provider to offer 5G, launching in 16 busy UK cities in 2019.

 

Mobile progress around BT

 

• We’ve switched on 5G sites in East London and are rapidly launching more. We have also trialled live 5G in Canary Wharf.

 

• We announced a partnership with OnePlus on 5G in the UK. EE will be the first mobile operator in the world to offer the OnePlus 5G smartphone.

 

•  We continue to increase capacity on 4G sites, laying the foundation for our 5G launch, and we have built more than 350 new 4G sites in the last 12 months to connect previously unconnected rural communities.

 

 

     

3. Network integration

 

We are bringing together our market-leading mobile, broadband and wi-fi networks into one converged, digital network to give customers seamless connectivity wherever they go. It will be the first of its kind in the UK. It is scheduled for completion in 2022 and when it launches it will signal a new era of connectivity.

 

Network integration progress around BT

 

• EE showcased Hybrid Broadband, combining mobile and fixed connections in one service.

 

• EE is the first UK network to support all major smart home ecosystems – with partnerships including Google, Apple, Alexa, Hive and Nest.

 

• We launched broadband with 4G Assure for SME customers to keep their broadband running if the fixed connection is lost. By the end of March 2019 half of SME broadband sales came with 4G Assure.

 

• We created a team dedicated to partnering with innovative converged technology companies to introduce new content, smartphones and smart home technology.

 

• Since EE launched shared data plans there have been more than three million data gifts between customers.

a Superfast fibre broadband refers to fibre-to-the-cabinet (FTTC). Ultrafast broadband refers to fibre-to-the-premises (FTTP) and Gfast.


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

20         

BT Group plc

     

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Strategic progress

Creating a simplified, leaner and more agile business

        
      

 

                  
This year we have continued to focus on modernising our organisation, to put customers at the heart of what we do.     
        

We simplified our structure by bringing together our Consumer and EE businesses and our Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures businesses to create two new customer-facing units – Consumer and Enterprise.

 

Our specific focus areas are:

 

    We are changing our culture to bring it more in line with the dynamic company we want to be. That includes changes to the way we manage performance, our job categories and inter-team working.                                                                                                                
            
        
1. Simplifying products, processes and systems     2. Building a more modern, productive operation     
        

4

 

Number of customer-facing units reduced from six last year

   

£875m

 

Overall cost savings from our cost transformation programme are currently an annualised benefit of £875m with an associated cost of £386m

    
        
      
3. Strategic sourcing         
        

67%

 

Around 67% of our spend is with our top 100 suppliers

   

4,029

 

Roles removed in the year through our cost transformation programme

    
        
        
        
        

 

    


Table of Contents
                  21
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

To transform our business we need a simpler, flatter and more modern organisational structure. This means having broader, more accountable roles; fewer job levels; market-aligned pay; and clearer career paths that support individuals’ development.

 

Last year we committed to reshaping our workforce by reducing roles in the UK and overseas by 13,000 over the next three years, with a focus on senior and middle management roles and by getting smarter about how we operate.

 

We are on track against our restructuring plans with reductions in senior management balanced with hiring in our front lines – engineers and contact centres. This includes hiring more apprentices into Openreach to resource our integrated network and fibre rollout programmes.

 

In contact centres, we are recruiting more people to help improve the experience of our customers when they get in touch with us. Balancing the reductions in management roles with the increases in contact centre and engineering roles will leave a net reduction of around 7,000 roles by March 2021.

 

We are working with our people to ensure those affected by changes are supported through the change process.

 

We are one of the biggest private sector recruiters of apprentices in the UK by a significant margin. We are also popular – last year there were 63,000 apprentice applications for almost 4,000 places.

 

We aim to reshape our workplaces to make working for BT feel more like working for a modern technology company. We have started to roll out a more open working culture. This includes more teams working in the same buildings to boost productivity, innovation and inter-team working, supported by a wider range of collaborative software.

 

We are also speeding up ways of working. This means quickly bringing together teams for specific projects, then dissolving them when the project has finished. We are also letting people work in more fluid ways, encouraging more collaboration and cross functional working than we had before. We are creating more opportunities for people to test, learn and try again.

 

We have around 7,000 properties in the UK and 1,678 across the rest of the world. We lease most of our UK properties from Telereal Trillium, part of the William Pears group. We signed a sale and lease back arrangement with them in 2001. Eighty-seven per cent of our UK properties are operational sites housing fixed and mobile telecoms and

     

broadband kit. These are retail outlets, offices, contact centres, depots and data centres. We also have BT Sport TV studios in London.

 

To enable these new working practices, we are creating and investing in more modern, fit-for-purpose office environments. For example, we are focusing on around 30 modern, strategic sites to create a more collaborative, open and customer focused working culture.

 

We recently carried out a review of the structure, composition and operation of our Board committees to speed up executive decision making and improve overall governance. Changes were approved and implemented by the Board in April 2019.

 

LOGO

For further information please see page 56 of the Governance report.

 

1. Simplifying products, processes and systems

 

Our large portfolio of products and services is complicated for customers and is resource-intensive to support.

 

We are starting to simplify our products and services and streamline our IT systems and processes. This will reduce additional work and duplication and help us keep our promises to customers more quickly and reliably. It will also give us a springboard to become the efficient business we need to be to thrive in the future.

 

Simplifying operations progress around BT

 

• We brought together our Consumer and EE businesses, integrating teams under a new multi-brand operating model.

 

• We integrated our Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures businesses into Enterprise to strengthen services and products and help customers move to converged technologies.

 

• Global Services restructured its operating model to create a new sales organisation around three global industry verticals, supported by a single, global commercial unit. This will give us deeper focus on fewer customers, improving their experience of doing business with us.

 

2. Building a more modern, productive operation

 

We know that becoming more efficient will make us more productive in the future, better able to offer a truly differentiated customer experience.

     

To do that we need a smaller workforce in some areas and a larger one in others. Our recent investments in front line contact centre people and engineers are part of our plan to put resources, support and decision making as close as possible to our customers.

 

To further boost productivity we also need our people to have better places to work and better digital skills. These will enable much

greater customer focus.

 

Productivity progress

 

• Our better workplace programme is reducing the number of sites and upgrading those that remain.

 

• Our cost transformation programme remains on track, with c4,000 roles removed in the year.

 

• Overall savings from our cost transformation programme are currently an annualised benefit of £875m with an associated cost of £386m.

 

• Outsourcing of our UK and Republic of Ireland facilities management and projects and construction teams took effect on 1 April 2019. This has resulted in approximately 1,900 employees transferring out of BT.

 

• Openreach is committed to achieving a world-class cost base to underpin our fibre build and has integrated key network delivery teams to improve efficiency.

 

• In Global Services we are redesigning our service and portfolio operations to focus on the needs of our largest multinational customers.

 

3. Strategic sourcing

 

Through strategic sourcing, we delivered significant savings in 2018/19 and we are on track to deliver more savings in the future.

 

This approach is changing the way we think about procurement, which is also helping suppliers. Thinking earlier helps them optimise their own supply chains to support our future plans. This gives everyone more certainty and cuts back on unnecessary cost, which in turn improves our customer experience.

 

Strategic sourcing programme

 

• We are further rationalising our supplier base to reduce risk and cost.

 

• We are signing better value multi-year deals with more of a partnering ethos.

 

• We are working with our suppliers’ suppliers to cut raw material sourcing costs.


Table of Contents
22         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our stakeholders

    

      
      

 

We rely on our stakeholders for our success as we build the UK’s national digital infrastructure.

 

Our main stakeholders are customers, our people, the communities in which we do business, the environment, shareholders, suppliers, government and regulatory bodies.

     

Customers

 

We offer our customers the latest technologies and services to enable them to communicate, share, be entertained and do business. We deliver and support these products and services to build valuable, high-quality, long-term and sustainable relationships.

 

Our 28 million customer base is integral to our success. Our customers are consumers, businesses, multinational corporations, public sector organisations and other communications providers.

 

Some customers are also competitors because we sell wholesale products and services to other communications providers in the UK and overseas.

 

Everything we do starts with the aim of delivering a differentiated customer experience to generate value and create loyalty.

 

LOGO

You can find more information on how our customers fit into our business model on page 12.

 

People

 

Our people are central to the transformation of our business, and our ability to deliver our vision, goals and strategic priorities.

 

We want them to use their skills and our technology to deliver great products and services for customers, communities and societies around the world.

 

Our people strategy is summed up by our ambition to be a brilliant place to work. We want to deliver an outstanding customer experience by getting our employee experience right. That means making BT a place where our people feel engaged and inspired to be at their best.

     

At the heart of this are our values:

 

LOGO

 

In January’s BT-wide ‘Your Say’ employee engagement survey, we did better than previous years on all our value scores:

 

LOGO

 

Eighty-four per cent of our people know how to use our values in their every day work, which helps us to provide our customers with a differentiated customer service.

 

We know that we still need to do more and make it easier for our people to make things happen for our customers. As a result we have introduced the RAPID ® (Recommend, Agree, Perform, Input, Decide) framework.

 

RAPID ® helps us be clear about the accountabilities for key decisions, which fosters speed, effectiveness and greater empowerment. We are embedding the framework through training our leaders across the organisation in how to use it.

 

Engaging our people

We are proud that BT people continue to live by our values – personal, simple, brilliant – and that their engagement keeps improving.

 

Our most recent annual engagement survey in January had an extremely high response rate of 87% and our year-on-year people engagement score increased by three percentage points to 77%.

 

We tell our people about company results, major business decisions and other things that affect them through lots of different channels. Leaders regularly meet their teams through roundtables, town hall debates, site visits, webcasts and blogs.

 

LOGO

You can find more information on how we are reshaping our organisation and ways of working on page 21.


Table of Contents
                  23
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

LOGO      

Supporting our people in their careers

Careers are becoming more flexible. Many of our people want portfolio careers with different phases. Newer generations recognise that they might work for longer than their parents but don’t necessarily want jobs for life; they want to do different things and learn different skills.

 

We are making changes to our culture to keep abreast of these trends. We are working to attract and retain a diverse workforce, invest in our people’s development, promote their health and wellbeing and help them save for a better retirement.

 

As we reshape our workforce we are also providing a new career philosophy with greater transparency, clearer choice and a focus on skills for the future.

 

We continue in our positive approach to recruiting and developing disabled talent as part of our vision to be a disability confident employer. Our range of support services and our processes support our managers to making the necessary adjustments for new or existing disabled persons within BT.

 

Health and wellbeing

Employee wellbeing is one of the biggest contributors to organisational health and business success. Our aim is to build a team of engaged, healthy people who are fulfilled at work.

 

Our approach to wellbeing reflects this. We provide access to employee assistance globally, and we are making it easier for our people to get mental health support through early access counselling services. We have expanded our peer-to-peer scheme and manager training on mental health both in the UK and internationally. Our success rate in getting people with mental illness back to work has risen to 96.5%.

 

The support available to our managers and team members helps us maintain a low absence rate of 2.36%. We have strengthened our support in managing and coping with change to help our people and managers work through the changes in our business.

 

We continue to drive focus on safety and assurance programmes. Our lost time injury rate is currently 0.24 working hours per 200,000 working hours, with an increase against a low baseline impacting the results. We track incident trends very closely and have not seen a pattern to the increase but continue to monitor this monthly.

 

106,700

We employ 106,700 full-time equivalent people in 60 countries, 84,300 of whom are in the UK. We employ an additional 2,000 FTE people through agencies.

 

16,000

This year, excluding acquisitions, we hired almost 16,000 people, 12,300 of whom were UK-based.

 

4,000

In 2018/19 we took on almost 4,000 new apprentices and more than 400 graduates.

 

     

 

1,400

We converted just under 1,400 agency workers to permanent, 800 of whom were in contact centres.

 

70%

The average age of our workforce is reducing with 70% under 50.

 

14,700

In 2018/19, 14,700 people left the company. 10,800 left through natural attrition, and 3,900 through paid leaver programmes as part of our drive to create a simple, lean and agile business.

 

   
            

We also listen to our people’s concerns through more formal engagement with our European Consultative Council, the Communications Workers Union, Prospect and EE employee representatives in the UK.

 

Building skills for future careers

We are reshaping our workforce profile to meet the evolving needs of our customers and the changing technology landscape.

 

We have continued to invest in apprenticeships and graduate programmes in all disciplines, mainly engineering, cyber, technology and customer operations. We complement functional skills with front line and future leader programmes which prepare our people for people management roles.

 

We are also focusing on hiring and developing talent to meet rising demand for digital and security skills over traditional telecommunications skills. For example, we have a Digital Academy in Consumer, we are building digital media and data insights teams in Enterprise, and in Global Services we are developing cloud computing and cyber skills at scale.

     

As we transition from PSTN to a modern, all-IP fibre network, we need to develop different skills. In Openreach we are addressing this increased demand with our ‘Open Street’ training facilities, which replicate a complete end-to-end network – from fibre to copper. They also recreate the homes and streets that our engineers encounter and provide a safe, real time environment to master new skills quickly. For example, ‘real’ scenarios can be created for students, including blocked ducts, open joints and intermittent faults. We plan to invest a further £11m and by 2021 have 11 fully operational Regional Training Centres all with their own ‘Open streets’.

 

This is part of our overall focus on improving digital skills – helping us contribute to the future success of the digital UK, improve our customers’ ability to connect, create demand for our future products and feed our talent pipeline.

 

LOGO

For more information on our digital skills programmes see page 25.

   
         
           
       
       


Table of Contents
24         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our stakeholders continued

    

 

 

LOGO

 

24%

Around 24% of our workforce (26,100) and 28% of our management (13,700) are women, including three out of 11 Board members. Our workforce includes around 79,800 men, with 34,000 of these in management roles.

  

 

12%

Around 12% of our UK people have a black, Asian or minority ethnic background.

 

5.0%

This year, BT’s overall median gender pay gap is 5.0%. Our mean gender pay gap is 5.9%. This is roughly the same as last year.

  

 

•  We are redesigning our technology apprentice and graduate schemes to reduce the risk of selection bias.

 

•  We have active people networks for Gender, Disability, Ethnicity, LGBT+ and Neurodiversity. All have senior sponsors and charters aligned to our strategy.

 

•  We continue to develop long-term initiatives such as TechWomen, furtHER and STEM Returners to help the organisation retain and nurture female talent.

 

 

Pay and benefits

We regularly review our pay and benefits. Most of our UK-based engineering and support people’s pay is negotiated through collective bargaining with our recognised trade unions. This means everyone gets treated fairly. Our managers’ pay ranges are also set at competitive levels. We work out bonuses through a mix of business performance and personal contribution.

 

Our executives may also get long-term share awards. These are discretionary and aligned to the long-term strategy of the company. What they get is determined by the group’s performance over a three-year period. Executive directors must keep hold of those shares for two more years.

 

Incentives for Openreach are tied to a combination of personal contribution and Openreach’s performance, not Group performance. And these are paid in cash, not BT shares.

      

We support our people through retirement savings plans, employee share schemes and country-specific benefits.

 

Volunteering

This year, we took the decision to no longer focus purely on the proportion of our people who volunteer, which is why the volunteering participation rate dropped to 26%. Instead we will refocus our volunteering efforts on digital skills – the area we think will deliver the greatest impact for the UK and BT.

 

In the year ahead we’ll develop a new target, that better reflects the impact and growing contribution our people are making through volunteering. As an example, this year just over 2,500 of our people contributed more than 6,700 days supporting digital skills programmes and helping young people prepare for the world of work.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Helping people save for a better retirement

Over the past two years we have worked to change the way our people save for retirement. This ensures that our pensions are fair, flexible and affordable for all members and also helps manage our future risks and costs.

 

The BT Pension Scheme (BTPS) triennial valuation process ran in 2017/18. In 2018/19 we concluded our UK Pensions Review, agreeing the closure of Sections B and C of the BTPS to future accrual with members moving into the BT Retirement Saving Scheme (BTRSS).

 

LOGO

 

For further information on our pension scheme, see page 145.

 

Communities

 

Our communications products, services, networks and people are vital to the communities in which we operate. Our place at the heart of so many communities also makes it important that our business practices are ethical and transparent.

 

Our total investment in society in 2018/19 was £28.7m – 0.83% of adjusted profit before tax. Although this was below our target of 1%, we remain committed to the target and have invested £194.9m at an average of 1.02% over the last five years.

 

Going forward, this investment will mainly be directed towards digital skills. This has led to some difficult decisions, like the closure of our fundraising platform, MyDonate, in June 2019.

 

Introduced in 2011, MyDonate was the UK’s first fee-free platform, but there are now many other providers in the market. We’re proud of what we achieved, helping raise more than £400m over the last nine years. But it is now time to lead in another important area for the UK. Our work with charities and other partners will increasingly focus on digital skills. We will continue to report on our ambition to use our skills and technology to generate more than £1bn for good causes by 2020, but it will no longer be a business priority. Since 2012/13, we’ve

 

 

 


Table of Contents
                  25
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

used our technology and expertise to help generate more than £646m for good causes, including £109m this year.

 

Digital skills

The UK faces a major digital skills challenge and we are in a unique position to help tackle this. We are fundamental to the UK’s ambition to be a leading digital economy. We take our responsibilities very seriously – investing in nurturing the skills needed by everyone to flourish in the digital world.

 

Doing so serves a number of our stakeholders as well as creating the potential for future demand for our products and helping us to adapt our workforce.

 

We’re increasing our efforts with a major push to encourage and equip our customers and communities to upgrade their digital skills and capabilities.

 

To reflect our ambition in this important area, we have set a target to reach ten million people in the UK with digital skills training by 2025. This supersedes our existing target (to help ten million people overcome social disadvantage through the benefits our products and services can bring) with a more focused and measurable programme.

 

This new target builds on our existing investment in young people. In a world where life and work increasingly depend on technology, giving today’s school children the right skills will be critical to their success.

 

Barefoot Computing, our partnership with BCS, the Chartered Institute for IT, operates in around 60% of UK primary schools and helps young people (aged five to 11) develop their computational thinking skills as part of the computer curriculum. BT volunteers have helped to train more than 70,000 teachers. Through them, Barefoot has reached more than two million children since 2014.

 

BT has become the first strategic partner of the new National Centre for Computing Education (NCCE). This initiative from the Department for Education is designed to improve the reach and quality of computing teaching across England. Among other things, we’ll be bringing Barefoot to the heart of the NCCE’s offer for primary schools.

 

Championing human and digital rights

We’re committed to respecting everyone’s basic rights and freedoms – both online and offline. The nature of what we do means we must protect customers from online harm, safeguard their privacy and security and support their right to free expression. Our Digital Impact  & Sustainability Committee, a board committee, oversees our human and digital rights programme.

LOGO

65%

  

11.3m

  

3 in 4

  

£63bn

The percentage of children starting school today who will have jobs that don’t yet exist.

  

The number of adults who lack basic digital skills.

  

The number of UK businesses who report internal digital skills gaps.

  

The estimated annual impact of the digital skills gap on the UK’s future competitiveness.

 

The above data has been drawn from external sources.

Boosting digital skills and inclusion

•  We’re helping SMEs with digital skills, through initiatives including workshops run by BT Sport and Google Digital Garage. We held 11 workshops and coached over 1,000 BT Sport commercial customers to enhance their online profiles.

 

•  Our BT furtHER programme in partnership with ‘Code First: Girls’ is a free full-time digital intensive programme that gives women the opportunity to move into a technical career. Twenty-one women from the first programme have transitioned into software developer roles in technology.

 

  

•  EE partnered with ‘Action On Hearing Loss’ to give mobile plans and service to the one in six people in the UK who have hearing loss.

 

•  We’ve partnered with the British Asian Trust in India on a programme that aims to empower 500,000 adolescent girls through technology and education.

 

•  Our funding and technical expertise is helping Jā LOGO gala, a tech start up, develop easy to deploy wi-fi systems for refugee camps and in a wide range of humanitarian situations in Italy, Serbia and the UK.

 

 

This year we launched a new overarching human rights policy, and reported on modern slavery, privacy and freedom of expression. We collaborate on privacy and free expression challenges through the Global Network Initiative.

 

We want to lead the way in tackling modern slavery through technology. This year we co-founded and launched Tech Against Trafficking, a coalition of organisations including Amazon, Vodafone, AT&T, Microsoft, Nokia, Salesforce and anti-trafficking experts, to work together on the challenge. We also partnered with the UK charity Unseen to extend the reach of the UK Modern Slavery Helpline through a smartphone app.

 

We comply with the Modern Slavery Act and follow international standards on human rights, such as the International Labour Organisations Principles and the UN Guiding Principles on Business and Human Rights. We have contractual standards on working conditions to avoid forced labour. We also have processes in place to assess the risks of our suppliers not meeting these conditions. We work with EcoVadis and the Responsible Business Alliance to inform our assessments. We will follow up with our suppliers on any improvements needed. For higher risk sites of concern, we go to see the working conditions for ourselves.

 

LOGO

For more information on human and digital rights, see btplc.com /digitalimpact and sustainability/humanrights/modernslavery

 

 

 


Table of Contents
26         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our stakeholders continued

    

    

      
 
      
      

 

The environment

Our products, supply chain and operations all have an impact on the environment. We are taking a leadership role in tackling climate change and have a target to become a ‘net zero’ carbon emissions business by 2045.

The Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change report published in October 2018 has underscored the importance of urgently tackling climate change. We continue to work in areas we control, while also being active in driving change with our customers, suppliers and other stakeholders.

Cutting our emissions and energy use

This year our energy consumption dropped by 2.24% and we reduced our total end-to-end worldwide CO 2 equivalent (CO 2 e) emissions by 7.4%.

We have saved around £298m since 2009/10 through more efficient cooling systems, modernising data centres, optimising our networks, introducing LED lighting and installing energy management systems. This year we celebrate our tenth year of investment in energy reduction programmes, through which we have consistently delivered energy

Our worldwide greenhouse gas emissions a

Year ended 31 March

 

LOGO

 

a  

We restate previous years’ data when we think subsequent information is materially significant (eg replacing estimates with measured figures).

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
LOGO

    In October 2018 we pledged to become a net zero carbon emissions business by 2045. This extends our 1.5° C science-based target to reduce the carbon emissions intensity of our operations by 87% by 2030 (against a 2016/17 baseline). There are three main areas we are focusing on to achieve this:

   

•  purchase 100% renewable electricity worldwide by 2020 where markets allow. We are currently at 87%. This year, we agreed new contracts to power EE’s mobile network with renewable electricity meaning that in the UK, 100% of our directly purchased electricity is now from renewable sources

 

•  convert our fleet to ultra-low emissions vehicles

 

•  decarbonise our buildings.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Our CO 2 e emissions           

Year ended 31 March

 

    

CO 2 e Ktonnes

     2017        2018          2019

Scope 3

     4,772        4,387          4,112

Scope 2

     222        193          114

Scope 1

     182        184          184

Total

     5,176        4,764        4,410

 

Scope 1 + 2 intensity:

          

(CO 2 e tonnes per £m value added)

     31        29        23

We now include all scope 3 emissions in our reporting. Figures exclude third-party consumption. Scope 2 data uses market-based calculation. For full methodology and further data see btplc.com/digitalimpactandsustainability

  Our worldwide energy use

  Year ended 31 March

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

 

 
 


Table of Contents
                  27
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

consumption savings. There will be further savings as energy efficiency reduces our environmental impact and plays a part in overall cost transformation.

 

Helping customers lessen their impact

Our products and services help our customers reduce carbon emissions – for example, through avoiding travel and becoming more efficient.

 

Last year our products and services helped our customers avoid 11.7 million tonnes of carbon. That is the equivalent of the carbon emissions of around three million UK households.

 

Carbon in our supply chain

The products we sell are manufactured in our upstream supply chain and we continue to work with key suppliers to reduce their carbon impact.

 

Wider environment aspects

We are reducing plastic waste from our products and from our operations. We track this through our Environmental Management System. Our people are passionate about reducing plastic use within BT. More than 4,500 BT people signed our recent internal plastic pact, pledging to cut their plastic use at work and at home.

 

LOGO

For more on this, and on other environmental matters, see our Digital impact and sustainability report

btplc.com/digitalimpactandsustainability

 

Shareholders

 

We have two main shareholder groups: institutional investors and individual shareholders. We also have debt investors.

 

As a consequence of privatisation in 1984, most of our c829,000 shareholders are individual shareholders, although institutional investors hold the biggest volume of shares.

 

We have an extensive investor relations programme aimed at keeping existing and prospective investors informed. In 2018/19, we held 500 meetings or events with institutional investors (2017/18: 450).

    

This year we reduced our quarterly disclosures to encourage investors to focus on longer-term trends.

 

We keep all shareholders up to date through regular communications, including the Annual Report, AGM and our quarterly financial and trading statements.

 

Debt investors

We have an investment-grade credit rating based on the strength of our balance sheet.

 

Our relationship with debt investors, mainly financial institutions who invest in our publicly-traded bonds, is key to making sure we have access to debt capital to finance our business.

 

Suppliers

 

Our thousands of suppliers are a vital part of our value chain. Because of our size, we are also a vital part of theirs.

 

Our suppliers provide products and services that help us execute our strategy. We source from across the world and have suppliers in nearly 100 countries. Our integrated fibre and 5G network will require significant capital investment, and procurement savings are key to funding this.

 

We want to know who we’re doing business with and who’s acting on our behalf, so we:

 

• choose suppliers using principles that make sure we act ethically and responsibly

 

• check that goods and services we buy are made, delivered and disposed of in a socially and environmentally responsible way

 

• measure factors such as suppliers’ energy use, environmental impact and labour standards as well as working with them to improve these.

 

We are a signatory of the UK Prompt Payment Code and support government initiatives to encourage small business growth.

 

 

 

 

 

      

Supplier risks

There has been recent commentary on how national security could be compromised at the level of some of the foundation technologies in national communications networks. Our approach is to focus on sourcing a range of the best technologies in the core of our networks, from a wide range of places.

 

We also face a continual challenge to ensure the quality and ethical integrity of our supply chain. You can read more about our supply-related risks on page 52.

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
28         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our stakeholders continued

    

    

 

HM Government

 

We work with over 1,800 UK public sector customers and support critical services in the UK.

 

Our networks enable vital services, such as welfare, tax, health and social care, police and defence, to function – while protecting citizens’ personal data.

 

Civil resilience and other obligations

Under the Communications Act 2003, the Government can ask us (and others) to run or restore services during disasters.

 

The Civil Contingencies Act 2004 also states that the Government can impose obligations on us (and others) at times of emergency or in connection with civil contingency planning.

 

The Secretary of State for the Home Department can sometimes also oblige us to act in the interests of national security.

 

Our public affairs team is responsible for relationships with the Government on all issues of policy. Our Enterprise team is responsible for selling and maintaining public sector contracts and services.

    

Regulators

 

Communications and TV services are regulated in the UK and around the world. Regulation helps ensure that there are consistent rules and standards within each jurisdiction to protect consumers and promote competition.

 

Our main regulatory relationship is with Ofcom in the UK. Ofcom operates under the Communications Act 2003, which gave it its powers and duties and transposed the EU regulatory framework for electronic communications in the UK.

 

Under the Act, Ofcom sets conditions that communications providers must adhere to. Ofcom’s main duties in respect of communications are to further the interests of citizens and consumers, where appropriate by promoting competition. In doing so it must also have regard, where relevant, to the desirability of encouraging investment and innovation. Ofcom has general competition powers for the sector and enforces consumer law, alongside other economic regulators and the Competition and Markets Authority.

 

We aim to be leaders in full fibre and 5G, and launch a UK converged network. This will benefit our customers, as well as the UK more widely. Our dialogue with Ofcom focuses on how the regulatory regime can help its ambition for the UK, while keeping the market fair and competitive.

 

In 2018 we implemented the Commitments we gave to Ofcom to provide Openreach with greater strategic and operational independence following its Digital Communications Review. Ofcom reported it is broadly satisfied with our progress. This included incorporating Openreach Limited as a wholly owned subsidiary of BT Group plc, with its own board and greater strategic independence. It also included completing the TUPE transfer into the new Openreach Limited of 31,000 employees from BT plc.

 

 

      

We continue to monitor and provide assurance to Ofcom on our compliance with the Commitments. We are currently working to make our internal processes and information sharing between BT and Openreach more transparent.

 

Future Telecoms Infrastructure Review

In July 2018, the Government published its Future Telecoms Infrastructure Review which concluded that the most effective way to deliver nationwide fibre connectivity at pace is to promote competition and commercial investment where possible, and to intervene where necessary. Ofcom’s subsequent policy documents signalled a shift from emphasising retail competition to facilitating competitive investment in full fibre.

 

The Government’s February 2018 consultation on its statement of strategic priorities for Ofcom reiterates its ambition to see ‘gigabit capable’ networks available to 15 million premises by 2025 and nationwide by 2033. This is alongside an ambition to extend mobile coverage to 95% of the UK by 2022. This desire to see the UK as a world leader in digital infrastructure fits with our desire to invest more, and aligns with our strategic priority of building the best converged network.

 

Consumer regulation

UK regulators have consumers’ interests as a priority. One area of attention is different pricing between new and existing customers. We aim to provide all our customers with great value, with offers that are fair and right for them. We also help our EE customers make sure they are on the best value deal by telling them when it’s time to reconsider their contracts and offering them alternatives. We will be implementing end of contract notifications for all of our BT and Plusnet customers too.


Table of Contents
                  29
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

Decent broadband for all

The Government has committed to implement a Universal Service Obligation for 10Mbps broadband from 2020 and Ofcom is working to deliver this. It issued a consultation in December 2018 proposing to designate BT and KCom as Universal Service Providers. We are working with Ofcom to look at how to deliver this efficiently and in a way that provides a good experience for customers.

 

Wholesale regulation

In December, 2018 Ofcom issued a consultation on Physical Infrastructure Markets and Business Connectivity Markets setting out how it intends to regulate up to 2021. It has also started consulting on a clear, predictable and long-term framework for regulation from 2021 onwards. This framework envisages longer (five-year) market review periods (instead of the current three-year reviews). On balance, we welcome Ofcom’s approach, including its shift toward regulating passive infrastructure where it enables deregulation further downstream.

 

In its consultation on Physical Infrastructure Markets, Ofcom proposes to extend the existing access obligation applicable to BT’s ducts and poles, currently limited to mixed residential and business broadband, to deployments of any fixed networks including standalone leased lines. The proposal is for this to start one month after publication of its final statement, expected in Q1 2019/20. We understand the importance Ofcom attaches to unrestricted ducts and poles access and have indicated our willingness to work with Ofcom on the detailed implementation of the proposals, including how to ensure a sustainable long-term pricing regime ahead of the 2021 market review period.

    

In its consultation on Business Connectivity Markets, Ofcom proposed to remove regulation of legacy business connectivity products and deregulate additional BT exchanges and data centres. Ofcom also proposed to maintain stable wholesale pricing in these markets to support investment in full fibre. While positive overall, some of Ofcom’s proposals are less helpful, for example its proposed obligation on us to provide dark fibre from BT-only exchanges which in our view is not consistent with the desire for greater investment nor necessary to promote competition given passive infrastructure access. We are continuing to engage with Ofcom on this and expect it to say more in 2019.

 

Spectrum

In the mobile area, 2018’s spectrum auction gave us the bandwidth we needed to start rolling out 5G. The next auction is expected in spring 2020 which we intend to participate in.

 

Simplifying regulatory reporting

Understanding the economics of the services we provide in regulated areas of our business is important. We are working with Ofcom to improve our reporting to become relevant, transparent and more focused in order to get better quality insight.

 

EU regulation

Brexit may have a significant effect on regulation. Until we know how the UK will exit the EU, we cannot know what that effect will be, but we have made contingency plans.

 

Where we do business in EU countries, electronic communications networks and services are governed by directives and regulations set by European institutions. These create an EU-wide framework for fixed and wireless telecommunications, internet, broadcasting and transmission services.

 

 

 

 

      

The directives are there to encourage competition, leading to better investment in fixed and mobile networks, and to protect consumers. They require independent national regulators to review markets for significant market power regularly and to put in place fair and proportionate remedies. They also include rules covering spectrum authorisation, consumer protection and universal service obligations.

 

This framework was updated in 2018 in the form of a new European Electronic Communications Code (EECC). We believe the EECC is largely positive – making it easier for operators to roll out ultrafast fixed and mobile networks.

 

Other international regulation

Regulation in international markets varies widely. This can stop us competing and providing the services our customers want. We keep driving incumbent operators around the world, and their regulators, for fair, cost-related wholesale access to their networks.


Table of Contents
30         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our key performance indicators

    

    

    

      
      

 

We have achieved our customer experience target for the year, but want to go further. Our results were in line with the financial guidance we set in May 2018 for adjusted EBITDA and normalised free cash flow. We exceeded our target for change in underlying revenue. Our capital expenditure (excluding BDUK clawback) was slightly ahead of our guidance as we accelerate our network investment.

We use four key performance indicators (KPIs) to measure progress against our strategy; one non-financial and three financial. Our non-financial KPI is improvement in customer service, which is measured using our Right First Time metric. Our financial KPIs are: change in underlying revenue; adjusted earnings per share; and normalised free cash flow.

As explained on page 16 we will be evolving our Right First Time metric for 2019/20 to reflect the commitments we make to customers and providing a more reliable service. This evolved measure will be renamed Keeping Our Promises.

We also measure customer experience through Net Promoter Score (NPS). This is up 6.5 points from last year and has improved over 11 consecutive quarters. From 2019/20 we will be reporting this as one of our non-financial KPIs.

As our strategy evolves we will continue to review these KPIs to make sure they are the best measures to reflect our performance against our strategy.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

  Customer service

 

Right First Time is our main measure of customer service. It tracks how often we keep our promises to customers. This could be keeping to appointment times, completing orders in the defined timeframe or fixing faults within an agreed period. As well as improving service and the customer experience, keeping our promises should reduce the work required to fix mistakes, and so reduce our costs.

 

  

 

 

+5.4%

 

Right First Time improvement a

At 31 March

 

LOGO

 

        

 

Right First Time was up 5.4%

(2017/18: up 4.3%).

 

Improving the service we deliver is key. We’re making good progress and every customer-facing unit has improved its Right First Time score. Despite these improvements, our strategic priority is to truly differentiate ourselves on customer experience, and we will keep looking for ways to do that. You can read more about our differentiated customer experience on page 16.

 

a Cumulative improvement from 1 April 2009.

 

  Change in underlying revenue

 

Underlying revenue reflects the underlying performance of the group that will contribute to long-term sustainable growth. We exclude the impact of specific items, foreign exchange movements, acquisitions and disposals.

 

    

 

(0.9)%

 

Change in underlying revenue

Year ended 31 March

 

LOGO

        

 

Change in underlying revenue was down 0.9% (2017/18: down 1.0%) which exceeds our outlook of down c2%.

 

Change in underlying revenue was down as growth in our Consumer business was more than offset by regulated price reductions in Openreach and declines in our enterprise businesses. We explain more about the performance of our customer-facing units from page 40.

 

a Calculated as though EE was not part of the group until 1 April 2016.

 

b Calculated as though EE had been part of the group from 1 April 2015.

 

c Calculated including the impact of transit, which is no longer material.

 


Table of Contents
                  31
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

  Adjusted earnings per share

 

   

Alternative performance measures

Reconciliations of these financial measures to the closest IFRS measure are set out in the Additional Information section from page 185.

 

Adjusted earnings per share is the adjusted profit after tax attributable to shareholders excluding the impact of specific items, divided by the weighted average number of issued shares. This makes it a comparable and consistent way of measuring our business performance over time.

 

   

 

 26.3p

 

Adjusted earnings per share

Year ended 31 March

 

LOGO

 

 

  

 

Adjusted earnings per share decreased 6% to 26.3p (2017/18: down 3% to 27.9p).

 

 

Adjusted profit after tax decreased 6% to £2,611m this year, reflecting lower revenues partly offset by lower payments to telecommunications operators driven by Global Services strategy to de-emphasise low margin business.

 

 

  Normalised free cash flow

 

   
 
Normalised free cash flow is free cash flow (net cash inflow from operating activities after capital expenditure) after net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items.    
     
 

 

 £2,440m

 

 

Normalised free cash flow

Year ended 31 March

 

LOGO

    

  

We generated normalised free cash flow of £2,440m. This was down £533m from last year and is in line with our outlook of £2.3bn to £2.5bn.

 

The fall of £533m or 18% in our normalised free cash flow mainly reflects increased cash capital expenditure as we increase our investment in fibre and 5G, decrease in EBITDA and higher tax payments.

   

 


Table of Contents
32         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Our performance as a sustainable

and responsible business

    

 

Non-Financial Reporting Information Statement

Our integrated approach to reporting means that the requirements of the Non-Financial Reporting Directive are addressed throughout the Strategic report. For ease of reference, information pertaining to each of the matters addressed by the new regulation can be found on the following pages: Human rights (page 25); Our people (page 22); Social (page 24); Environmental (page 26); Anti-corruption and bribery (page 32).

 

LOGO

For more information on our codes of practice and employee policies, see btplc. com/thegroup/policyandregulation/
people

For more information on human

and digital rights, see btplc. com/digitalimpactandsustainability/ humanrights/modernslavery

Additionally, non-financial matters have long been embedded in our business model as stakeholder outcomes on page 13. Non-financial performance indicators are linked to our ambitions and foundation measures as a sustainable and responsible business and can be seen in the following table.

Anti-corruption and bribery

We follow local and international law, including anti-corruption and bribery laws. The UK Bribery Act and US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) have extraterritorial reach, so cover our global operations. We also have to make sure we follow trade sanctions and import and export controls.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

LOGO

 

Our ambitions a

 

  
By 2025, to reach 10m people in
the UK with digital skills training b
2018/19 performance    Status
N/A    Reporting to start
new ambition    in 2019/20
2017/18: N/A     

 

By 2020, to help 5m children
to receive better teaching in
computer skills

2018/19 performance    Status
2m   

To be subsumed
into above target

in 2019/20

children reached
2017/18: 1.6m

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

LOGO

 

Our ambitions

 

  
By 2045, to become a net zero
carbon emissions business C
2018/19 performance    Status
298,461    LOGO
tonnes CO 2 e    ongoing target
2017/18: 377,073     

 

By 2030, to cut our carbon emissions intensity d by 87%, compared with 2016/17 levels

  
2018/19 performance    Status
25.7%    LOGO
reduction achieved    ongoing target
2017/18: 7.1%   
(restated)   
         

 

By 2020, to enable customers to reduce their carbon emissions by at least three times the end-to-end carbon impact of our business

 

2018/19 performance    Status
2.6:1    LOGO
achieved    ongoing target
2017/18: 2.4:1   

(restated)

 

    

 

By 2020, to buy 100% of our

electricity worldwide from renewable sources, wherever markets allow

2018/19 performance    Status
87%    LOGO
bought from    ongoing target
renewable sources   
2017/18: 80%   
(restated)   
 

 

a  

As we direct our resources onto digital skills, we will no longer prioritise our fundraising ambition (by 2020, to use our skills and technology to help generate more than £1bn for good causes) but continue to report performance on page 25.

 

b  

Revised target introduced to supersede our previous aim (by 2020, to help 10m people overcome social disadvantage through the benefits our products and services can bring).

 

c  

Measured for scopes 1 and 2 greenhouse gases.

 

d  

Measures for scopes 1 and 2 greenhouse gases, per unit of gross value added.

 

e  

Senior management team: our top c600 leaders.


Table of Contents
                  33
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

                 

 

       

LOGO

 

        To find out more about our progress
        in these areas, see: bt.com
        /digitalimpactandsustainability
       

 

 

LOGO

 

Our ambitions

 

  
Societal investment: to be more than
1% of adjusted profit before tax (PBT)
2018/19 performance    Status
0.83%    LOGO
of PBT invested    ongoing target
2017/18: 1.02%   
1.02%   
5-year average   

2017/18: 1.06%

 

    

 

Volunteering: by 2020, to inspire 66% (two-thirds) of our people to volunteer

  
2018/19 performance    Status
26%    To be replaced
with new target
of BT people volunteering    in 2019/20
2017/18: 39%   

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

LOGO

 

Our ambitions

 

  
Employee engagement index:

to maintain or improve our

relationship with our employees

2018/19 performance    Status
77%    LOGO
favourable    target met

2017/18: 74%

 

    

 

Gender: By end of 2020/21, we want 40% of our senior management team e to be women

  
2018/19 performance    Status
31%    LOGO
Women on senior management team    ongoing target
2017/18: N/A   
         

 

Sickness absence rate: to maintain or reduce percentage of calendar days lost to sickness

 

2018/19 performance    Status
2.36%    LOGO
calendar days
lost to sickness
   target failed

2017/18: 2.30%

 

    

 

Ethical perception: to maintain or improve our employees’ perception of our ethical performance

2018/19 performance    Status
86%    LOGO
favourable    target met
2017/18: 83%   

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

LOGO

 

Our ambitions

 

  
Carbon emissions: by 2030, to reduce our supply chain carbon emissions by 29%, compared to 2016/17 levels.
2018/19 performance    Status
7.3%    LOGO
reduction achieved    ongoing target
2017/18: 5.1%   
(restated)   
 


Table of Contents
34         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Group performance

Introduction from our Chief Financial Officer

    

      
      

 

 

LOGO

Performance

BT delivered solid results for the year, in line with our guidance.

Reported revenue fell by 1% to £23.4bn and underlying a revenue was down 0.9% as growth in our Consumer business was more than offset by regulated price reductions in Openreach and declines in our enterprise businesses. Our reported profit before tax was up 2% to £2.7bn, reflecting one-off EE acquisition warranty costs in the prior year. Adjusted b profit before tax was down 6% at £3.2bn reflecting the lower revenue partly offset by restructuring related cost savings and lower payments to telecommunications operators driven by Global Services strategy to de-emphasise low margin business.

 

    

 

Alternative performance measures

We assess the performance of the group using various alternative performance measures. These measures are not defined under IFRS so are termed ‘non-GAAP’ or ‘alternative performance’ measures. We present a reconciliation from these to the nearest prepared measure in line with IFRS on pages 185 to 187. The alternative performance measures we use may not be directly comparable with similarly-titled measures used by other companies.

 

IFRS 15

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contacts with Customers’ replaced IAS 18 ‘Revenue’ with effect from 1 April 2018. We present current year results on the new IFRS 15 basis but prior year comparatives on an IAS 18 basis. For this reason, certain measures may not be directly comparable. See notes 1 and 2 for further information.

 

 

    

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    

Outlook provided

in May 2018

  Result    

Performance

against outlook

 

2019/20

outlook

Change in underlying a revenue   Down c2%   Down 0.9%    LOGO       

Change in adjusted revenue

              Down c2%
Adjusted b EBITDA   £7.3bn–£7.4bn   £7.4bn    LOGO      £7.2bn–£7.3bn
Capital expenditure c (excluding BDUK clawback)   c£3.7bn   £3.8bn    LOGO      £3.7bn–£3.9bn
Normalised free cash flow d   £2.3bn–£2.5bn   £2.4bn    LOGO      £1.9bn–£2.1bn

 

a  

Underlying revenue excludes specific items, foreign exchange movements, acquisitions and disposals.

b  

Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 185 for more information.

c  

Additions to property, plant and equipment and intangible assets in the period

d  

After net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items.

 

 

 

Our results were in line with the guidance we set in May 2018 for adjusted b EBITDA and normalised free cash flow c . We exceeded our target for underlying a revenue. Our capital expenditure (excluding BDUK clawback) was slightly ahead of our guidance due to acceleration of network investment.

 

Outlook for 2019/20

BT remains well positioned in a challenging market. We are taking decisive actions to further strengthen our competitive position. Specifically, we are increasing investment to: introduce new customer propositions; deliver fair, predictable and competitive pricing; accelerate migration of copper ADSL to superfast; drive the next step change in customer experience investment; ramp up FTTP to 4 million by March 2021; and accelerate 5G coverage. These actions will impact our outlook.

 

For 2019/20, we expect adjusted revenue to be down around 2%. This is mainly as a result of the challenging market conditions, regulatory pressure in both fixed and mobile markets, and the ongoing impact from our decision to de-emphasise lower margin products, particularly in our enterprise businesses.

 

Along with the flow through of lower revenue, we expect our opex investments to result in Group adjusted EBITDA for 2019/20 being in the range £7.2bn – £7.3bn. While we will sustain these opex investments into 2020/21, we continue to expect Group adjusted EBITDA for 2020/21 to be above that for 2019/20.

 

We are raising our reported capital expenditure guidance (excluding BDUK clawback) for 2019/20 to be in a range of £3.7bn – £3.9bn. We expect normalised free cash flow for 2019/20 to out-turn in the range £1.9bn – £2.1bn.

    

Dividend

We have delivered solid results for 2018/19 and are making positive progress against our core pillars; to improve customer experience, to create the best converged network; and to create a simplified, lean and agile business. This is being delivered in an increasingly competitive market environment with a number of regulatory and other headwinds. We remain confident in our ability to deliver the benefits we expect from the decisive actions we are taking to strengthen our competitive position.

 

As a result, the Board has decided to hold the dividend unchanged for 2018/19 at 15.4p per share, leading to a final dividend of 10.78p per share. The Board also expects to hold the dividend unchanged in respect of the 2019/20 financial year given our outlook for earnings and cash flow. In line with previous guidance, our interim dividend for 2019/20 will be fixed at 30% of this year’s full year dividend.

 

The Board remains committed to our dividend policy, which is to maintain or grow the dividend each year whilst taking into consideration a number of factors including underlying medium term earnings expectations and levels of business reinvestment (which would include the consideration of accelerated FTTP investment).

 

Subject to shareholder approval, the dividend will be paid on 9 September 2019 to shareholders on the register at 9 August 2019. The final dividend, amounting to approximately £1,069m (2018/19: £1,044m), will be recognised as an appropriation of the retained earnings in the quarter to 30 September 2019.

 

Simon Lowth

Chief Financial Officer

8 May 2019

 

 

 


Table of Contents
                  35
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Group performance
Summary financial performance for the year
Year ended 31 March
 

 

LOGO

 


Table of Contents
36         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Group performance continued

Summary financial performance for the year continued

    

      
      

 

Summarised income statement

 

 

Year ended 31 March    2019
£m
    2018
£m
    2017
£m
 

Revenue

     23,428       23,723       24,062  

Operating costs a

     (16,461     (16,828     (17,323

Depreciation and amortisation

 

    

 

(3,546

 

 

   

 

(3,514

 

 

   

 

(3,572

 

 

 

Operating profit

     3,421       3,381       3,167  

Net finance expense

     (756     (764     (804

Associates and joint ventures

 

    

 

1

 

 

 

   

 

(1

 

 

   

 

(9

 

 

 

Profit before tax

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,666

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,616

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,354

 

 

 

 

 

Tax

 

  

 

 

 

 

(507

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(584

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

(446

 

 

 

 

Profit for the period

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,159

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,032

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,908

 

 

 

 

 

 

Revenue

Both reported and adjusted b revenue fell by 1% as growth in our Consumer business, was more than offset by regulated price reductions in Openreach and declines in our enterprise businesses in particular in fixed voice and also reflecting our strategy to reduce low margin activity such as equipment sales. Excluding the negative impact of £35m from foreign exchange movements, underlying c revenue fell 0.9% (2017/18: fell 1%), which exceeds our expectation of down around 2%.

You can find details of revenue by customer-facing unit on pages 40 to 41. Note 6 to the consolidated financial statements shows a full breakdown of reported revenue by all our major product and service categories.

Operating costs

Reported operating costs were down 2% and adjusted b operating costs before depreciation and amortisation were down 1%. This was mainly driven by restructuring related cost savings and lower payments to telecommunications operators driven by Global Services strategy to de-emphasise low margin business, partly offset by higher costs of recruiting and training engineers to support Openreach’s ‘Fibre First’ programme and help deliver improved customer service.

Our cost transformation programme remains on track. c4,000 roles were removed in the year, with the largest elements being in Global Services and our Corporate Units. Overall savings from the programme are currently an annualised benefit of £875m with an associated cost of £386m.

Note 7 to the consolidated financial statements shows a detailed breakdown of our operating costs.

 

a  

Excluding depreciation and amortisation.

b  

Items presented as adjusted are stated before specific items. See page 185 for more information.

c  

Underlying revenue excludes specific items, foreign exchange movements, acquisitions and disposals.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Adjusted b operating costs before depreciation,

amortisation and specific items

Year ended 31 March

 

LOGO

Profit before tax

Our reported profit before tax was up 2% at £2,666m, reflecting one-off EE acquisition warranty costs in the prior year. Adjusted b profit before tax was down 6% at £3,230m reflecting the lower revenue partly offset by the lower costs and higher net finance expense from increased net debt.

Adjusted b EBITDA

Adjusted b EBITDA was down 2% at £7,392m, in line with our expectations. This is primarily driven by revenue decline partly offset by the lower costs as described above. You can find details of adjusted b EBITDA by customer-facing unit on pages 40 to 41.

Specific items

As we explain on page 185, we separately identify and disclose those items that in management’s judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence (termed ‘specific items’). Specific items are used to derive the adjusted results as presented in the consolidated income statement. Adjusted results are consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management and assists in providing an additional analysis of the reported trading results of the group.

Specific items resulted in a net charge after tax of £452m (2017/18: £741m).

During the year we incurred restructuring costs of £386m (2017/18: £287m), mainly relating to leavers. The costs reflect projects which are part of our group-wide cost transformation programme, including remaining activities related to the EE integration.

We have recognised a net charge of £27m (2017/18: £49m) relating to the completion of the majority of deemed consent compensation payments, new regulatory matters arising across a range of issues, including price and service issues, the re-assessment of other regulatory risks and in light of historical regulatory decisions by Ofcom.

 


Table of Contents
                  37
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

We have recognised a charge of £36m (2017/18: £28m) relating to the rationalisation of the Group’s property portfolio, a charge of £26m (2017/18: £nil) in relation to the high court requirement to equalise pension benefits between men and women due to guaranteed minimum pension (GMP) and net interest expense on pensions of £139m (2017/18: £218m). This decreased from 2017/18 due to the decrease in the BT Pension Scheme deficit over the year to 31 March 2018. We also released £55m (2017/18: £nil) of provisions following the settlement of various matters in our Italian business.

The tax credit on specific items was £112m (2017/18: £87m).

Note 10 to the consolidated financial statements shows the details of all revenues and costs that we have treated as a specific item.

Taxation

Our effective tax rate was 19.0% (2017/18: 22.3%) on reported profit and 19.2% (2017/18: 19.5%) on profit before specific items. We paid income taxes globally of £431m (2017/18: £473m).

We paid UK corporation tax of £317m (2017/18: £374m). We benefited from £90m of EE’s historical tax losses (2017/18: £111m) and £391m from tax deductions on employees’ pension and share schemes (2017/18: £217m).

Our tax expense recognised in the income statement before specific items was £619m (2017/18: £671m). We also recognised a £343m tax credit (2017/18: £262m expense) in the statement of comprehensive income, mainly relating to our pension scheme.

We expect our sustainable income statement effective tax rate before specific items to be around the UK rate of corporation tax, as we do most of our business in the UK.

Note 11 to the consolidated financial statements shows further details of our tax expense, along with our key tax risks.

Earnings per share

Reported earnings per share was 21.8p, up 6%, while adjusted a earnings per share decreased 6% to 26.3p.

Dividends

The Board is proposing a final dividend to shareholders of 10.78p bringing the full year dividend to 15.40p, unchanged from last year. It will be paid, subject to shareholder approval, on 9 September 2019 to shareholders on the register on 9 August 2019. The Board also expects to hold the dividend unchanged in respect of the 2019/20 financial year given our outlook for earnings and cash flow.

Note 13 to the consolidated financial statements shows details of the dividends we paid during the year.

Capital expenditure

In recent years we’ve prioritised capital expenditure to underpin our strategy, and to expand coverage and capacity whilst making our fixed and mobile networks faster and more resilient.

Capital expenditure was £3,963m (2017/18: £3,522m) including network investment of £2,083m, up 21%. This includes £213m grant funding deferral under the Broadband Delivery UK (BDUK) programme, of which £168m relates to a change in base-case assumption for customer take-up. Excluding the effect of the grant funding deferral, capital expenditure was £3,750m. The remaining increase in network investment reflects increased spend on our Fibre Cities programme, partially offset by lower mobile investment as the Emergency Services Network (ESN) passed the

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

peak deployment phase. Our BDUK Gainshare provision at the end of the year was £639m.

Other capital expenditure components were up 5% with £929m spent on customer driven investments, £747m on systems and IT, and £204m on non-network infrastructure.

Capital expenditure contracted but not yet spent was £1,432m at 31 March 2019 (2017/18: £993m).

Summarised cash flow statement

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Cash generated from operations

     4,687       5,400       6,725  

Tax paid

 

    

 

(431

 

 

   

 

(473

 

 

   

 

(551

 

 

 

Net cash inflows from operating activities

  

 

 

 

4,256

 

 

 

 

 

 

4,927

 

 

 

 

 

 

6,174

 

 

Net purchase of property, plant and equipment and software

 

    

 

(3,637

 

 

   

 

(3,341

 

 

   

 

(3,119

 

 

Free cash flow

     619       1,586       3,055  

Interest received

     23       7       7  

Interest paid

     (531     (555     (629

Add back pension deficit payments

     2,024       872       274  

Add back net cash flow from specific items

     598       828       205  

Add back net sale of non-current asset investments

     1       19       (20

Add back prepayments in respect of acquisition of spectrum licence

           325        

Remove refund on acquisition of spectrum licence

     (21            

Remove cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments

 

    

 

(273

 

 

   

 

(109

 

 

   

 

(110

 

 

 

Normalised free cash flow b

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,440

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,973

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2,782

 

 

 

 

Cash flow

We generated a net cash inflow from operating activities of £4,256m, down £671m, mainly driven by £2bn contributions to the BT Pension Scheme, offset by favourable working capital movements. In line with our outlook, normalised free cash flow b was £2,440m, down £533m or 18%, driven by increased cash capital expenditure, decrease in EBITDA and higher tax payments.

Free cash flow, which includes specific item outflows of £598m (2017/18: £828m) and a £273m (2017/18: £109m) tax benefit from pension deficit payments, was £619m (2017/18: £1,586m). Last year also included payments of £325m for the acquisition of mobile spectrum. The spectrum auction bidding took place across the 2017/18 and 2018/19 financial years. Whilst £325m was on deposit with Ofcom at 31 March 2018, we went on to acquire spectrum for a total price of £304m and the excess deposit balance has since been refunded. We made pension deficit payments of £2,024m (2017/18: £872m) and paid dividends to our shareholders of £1,504m (2017/18: £1,523m).

The net cash cost of specific items of £598m (2017/18: £828m) includes restructuring payments of £372m (2017/18: £189m) and regulatory payments of £170m (2017/18: £267m). Last year also included payments of £225m relating to the settlement of warranty claims under the 2015 EE acquisition agreement.

 

 

a Adjusted measures exclude specific items, as explained in the Additional Information on page 185.

b After net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items.


Table of Contents
38         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Group performance continued

Summary financial performance for the year continued

    

      
 

    

    

 

You can see a reconciliation to normalised free cash flow from the net cash inflow from operating activities, the most directly comparable IFRS measure, on page 186.

Summarised balance sheet

 

As at 31 March    2019
£m
     2018
(Restated a )
£m
     Movement
£m
 

Intangible assets

     14,385        14,447        (62

Property, plant and equipment

     17,835        17,000        835  

Derivative financial instruments

     1,592        1,509        83  

Cash and cash equivalents

     1,666        528        1,138  

Investments

     3,268        3,075        193  

Trade and other receivables

     3,667        4,331        (664

Contract assets

     1,602               1,602  

Deferred tax assets

     1,347        1,326        21  

Other current and non-current assets

 

    

 

925

 

 

 

    

 

626

 

 

 

    

 

299

 

 

 

 

Total assets

 

  

 

 

 

 

46,287

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

42,842

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

3,445

 

 

 

 

Loans and other borrowings

     16,876        14,275        2,601  

Derivative financial instruments

     940        837        103  

Trade and other payables

     7,269        8,494        (1,225

Contract liabilities

     1,425               1,425  

Provisions

     1,006        1,055        (49

Retirement benefit obligations

     7,182        6,847        335  

Deferred tax liabilities

     1,407        1,340        67  

Other current and non-current liabilities

 

    

 

15

 

 

 

    

 

83

 

 

 

    

 

(68

 

 

Total liabilities

 

    

 

36,120

 

 

 

    

 

32,931

 

 

 

    

 

3,189

 

 

 

Total equity

 

    

 

10,167

 

 

 

    

 

9,911

 

 

 

    

 

256

 

 

 

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Pensions

The accounting deficit, net of tax, increased during the year from £5.7bn a to £6.0bn, primarily driven by an increase in the liabilities due to a fall in the real discount rate reflecting market movements; partly offset by deficit contributions from the group and positive asset returns. The movements in the deficit for the group’s defined benefit plans are shown below:

Key movements in IAS 19 deficit

 

LOGO

Note 20 to the consolidated financial statements gives more information on our pension arrangements.

Net debt c

Net debt c increased by £1,408m to £11,035m, mainly reflecting the £2bn of contributions to the BT Pension Scheme in June 2018. We issued £2bn of bonds to the BT Pension Scheme in June 2018.

We also issued bonds of £2.0bn in September and December 2018 and repaid bonds of £1.4bn maturing in August 2018 and February and March 2019.

Gross debt translated at swap rates and excluding fair value adjustments at 31 March 2019 was £15,912m. This comprises term debt of £15,001m, finance leases of £200m and other loans of £711m.

 

 

 

a  

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2 to the consolidated financial statements.

 

b  

The actual investment return in the year to 31 March 2019 of around 6% was greater than our discount rate assumption at 31 March 2018 of 2.65%.

 

c  

Loans and other borrowings (both current and non-current), less current asset investments and cash and cash equivalents. Currency denominated balances within net debt are translated to sterling at swapped rates where hedged. Fair value adjustments and accrued interest applied to reflect the effective interest method are removed. Please refer to note 25 for reconciliation from nearest IFRS measure.


Table of Contents
                  39
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    
    

 

The graph below shows our debt maturity profile:

Debt maturity profile

 

LOGO

Note 25 to the consolidated financial statements gives more information on our debt arrangements.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Contractual obligations and commitments

We’ve shown in the table below our principal undiscounted contractual financial obligations and commitments at 31 March 2019.

 

As at 31 March 2019   

Total

£m

     Less
than 1
year
£m
    

Between
1 and

3 years
£m

    

Between
3 and

5 years
£m

     More
than
5 years
£m
 

Loans and other borrowings a

     16,624        2,084        1,289        2,396        10,855  

Finance lease obligations

     202        16        35        31        120  

Operating lease obligations

     6,619        755        1,240        1,067        3,557  

Capital commitments

     1,432        1,129        162        141         

Other commitments

     253        253                       

Programme rights commitments

     2,113        843        1,262        8         

Pension deficit obligations

 

    

 

10,351

 

 

 

    

 

1,276

 

 

 

    

 

1,817

 

 

 

    

 

1,816

 

 

 

    

 

5,442

 

 

 

 

Total

 

  

 

 

 

 

37,594

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

6,356

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

5,805

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

5,459

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

19,974

 

 

 

 

 

a  

Excludes fair value adjustments.

We have unused committed borrowing facilities totalling £2.1bn. We expect that these resources, combined with the future cash we generate, will allow us to settle our obligations as they are due.

Notes 20, 25 and 30 to the consolidated financial statements gives further information on these items.

Share buyback

We spent £9m (2017/18: £221m) on our share buyback programme. We received proceeds of £5m (2017/18: £53m) from people exercising their share options.

 


Table of Contents
40         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Group performance continued

Our customer-facing units

    

 

    

    

      

 

 

 Consumer

 

 

  Adjusted a revenue

  

 

Adjusted a operating profit

 £10,695m

 

  

£1,510m

 

 

     2019      2018               
     (IFRS  15)      (IAS 18)                Change  
Year to 31 March    £m      £m      £m     %  

Adjusted a revenue

  

 

10,695

 

  

 

10,360

 

  

 

335

 

 

 

3

 

Adjusted a operating costs

     8,161        7,984        177       2  

Adjusted a EBITDA

  

 

2,534

 

  

 

2,376

 

  

 

158

 

 

 

7

 

Depreciation & amortisation

     1,024        992        32       3  

Adjusted a operating profit

  

 

1,510

 

  

 

1,384

 

  

 

126

 

 

 

9

 

                                                        

Capital expenditure

  

 

994

 

  

 

919

 

  

 

75

 

 

 

8

 

Normalised free cash flow b

  

 

1,323

 

  

 

1,389

 

  

 

(66

 

 

(5

We continue to experience challenging trends in both the high-end smartphone market and in the broadband market. However, with leading mobile and fixed networks, improving customer experience, three strong brands and further enhancements to BT Plus, with 5G coming imminently, we are well placed for the future.

Adjusted a revenue growth of 3% for the year was driven by the continued increase in handset costs for customers, growth in the SIM-only base across all brands and the impact of price increases, partially offset by solus voice price reductions.

Adjusted a EBITDA grew 7% for the year as the revenue growth was partially offset by increased trading costs.

Capital expenditure growth of 8% was driven by increased network spend as preparations were made for the EE 5G launch in 2019. Normalised free cash flow b was £1,323m, down 5% on last year as the increase in EBITDA was offset by the settlement at the start of the year of the Phones4U dispute relating to the retail trading agreement, and increased capital expenditure.

Mobile churn c was stable at 1.2% for the year, whilst fixed churn c was up from 1.3% to 1.4% reflecting the impact of price increases in the year.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

 Enterprise d

 

 

  Adjusted a revenue

  

 

Adjusted a operating profit

 £6,292m

 

  

£1,356m

 

 

     2019      2018               
     (IFRS 15)      (IAS 18)                Change  
Year to 31 March    £m      £m      £m     %  

Adjusted a revenue

  

 

6,292

 

  

 

6,647

 

  

 

(355

 

 

(5

Adjusted a operating costs

     4,302        4,570        (268     (6

Adjusted a EBITDA

  

 

1,990

 

  

 

2,077

 

  

 

(87

 

 

(4

Depreciation & amortisation

     634        635        (1      

Adjusted a operating profit

  

 

1,356

 

  

 

1,442

 

  

 

(86

 

 

(6

                                                        

Capital expenditure

  

 

501

 

  

 

492

 

  

 

9

 

 

 

2

 

Normalised free cash flow b

  

 

1,483

 

  

 

1,587

 

  

 

(104

 

 

(7

The UK and Ireland business-to-business market remains challenging. The main headwind we face is the decline in traditional calls and lines where we have a relatively high market share. The IP Voice market is significantly more fragmented, with a large number of providers, and we are focused on expanding our share in this growing market. The mobile market remains competitive and we continue to see pressure on pricing. While overall growth in the broadband market is limited, we are seeing good demand for our premium products such as fibre and 4G Assure. Newer areas such as the Internet of Things, Cloud, SDWAN and security remain good opportunities for us over the longer term.

Adjusted a revenue decreased 5% for the year mainly due to the ongoing decline of fixed voice revenue. We continue to see a steeper than expected reduction in calls per fixed line as usage moves to mobile and IP. We continue to sell less low margin equipment and also experienced ongoing declines in some of our other legacy products such as private circuits. This was partially offset by growth in IP, Mobile and Networking. We’re also continuing to see encouraging growth in messaging volumes in Ventures.

Adjusted a operating costs reduced 6%, helped by labour cost efficiencies from our cost transformation programmes. Adjusted a EBITDA decreased 4%, with our lower cost base more than offset by the reduction in revenue.

Capital expenditure increased 2% and normalised free cash flow b decreased 7%, reflecting the reduction in EBITDA and the higher capital expenditure.

The Retail order intake decreased 15% to £2.9bn for the year due to the signing of a large contract in Republic of Ireland in the prior year. The Wholesale order intake declined 22% to £1.0bn after 2017/18 benefitted from a number of large deals, including the timing of some contract renewals.

 

 

 

a  

Adjusted measures exclude specific items, as explained in the Additional Information on page 185.

 

b  

Free cash flow after net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items.

 

c  

Number of customers who disconnect from the network, voluntarily or involuntarily, during the period, divided by the average number of customers during the period, presented as a monthly figure.

 

d  

Enterprise comparatives have been re-presented to reflect the bringing together of our Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures units into a single Enterprise unit, as well as the transfer of Northern Ireland Networks from Enterprise to Openreach.


Table of Contents
                  41
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

 

 

 Global Services

 

 

  Adjusted a revenue

  

 

Adjusted a operating profit

 £4,735m

 

  

£135m

 

 

     2019      2018               
     (IFRS 15)      (IAS 18)                Change  
Year to 31 March    £m      £m      £m     %  

Adjusted a revenue

  

 

4,735

 

  

 

5,013

 

  

 

(278

 

 

(6

Adjusted a operating costs

     4,230        4,579        (349     (8

Adjusted a EBITDA

  

 

505

 

  

 

434

 

  

 

71

 

 

 

16

 

Depreciation & amortisation

     370        424        (54     (13

Adjusted a operating profit

  

 

135

 

  

 

10

 

  

 

125

 

 

 

1,250

 

                                                        

Capital expenditure

  

 

245

 

  

 

278

 

  

 

(33

 

 

(12

Normalised free cash flow b

  

 

296

 

  

 

118

 

  

 

178

 

 

 

151

 

Global Services operates in a global market that continues to experience high levels of change driven by both rapid technology innovation and a dynamic competitive landscape. Customers’ demands continue to evolve towards more flexible, on-demand models and new cloud-based and software-defined networking solutions. We continue to execute our Digital Global Services transformation programme to focus our business, standardise our operations, transform our underlying infrastructure, and provide innovative solutions to address the changing demands of our customers. We are focused on around 800 multinational companies and financial institutions served by three global industry verticals.

Adjusted a revenue for the year was down 6%, in line with our strategy to de-emphasise low margin business and including the impact of divestments. This includes a £35m negative impact from foreign exchange movements, primarily reflecting lower IP Exchange volumes and equipment sales.

Adjusted a operating costs for the year were down 8% mainly reflecting the decline in IP Exchange volumes and equipment sales and lower labour costs from our ongoing restructuring programme. Adjusted a EBITDA for the year was up £71m reflecting the reduction in operating costs and certain one-offs, more than offsetting the impact of lower revenue.

Depreciation and amortisation was down 13% for the year due to closure of certain projects in the prior year.

Capital expenditure was down 12% for the year reflecting ongoing rationalisation and our strategy to become a more asset light business. Normalised free cash flow b for the year improved by 151% to £296m, reflecting higher EBITDA, lower capital expenditure and improved working capital.

Total order intake was £3.3bn, down 15% year on year continuing to reflect a shift in customer behaviour, including shorter contract lengths and greater prevalence of usage-based terms.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

 Openreach c

 

 

  Adjusted a revenue

  

 

Adjusted a operating profit

 £5,075m

 

  

£955m

 

 

     2019      2018               
     (IFRS 15)      (IAS 18)                Change  
Year to 31 March    £m      £m      £m     %  

Adjusted a revenue

  

 

5,075

 

  

 

5,278

 

  

 

(203

 

 

(4

Adjusted a operating costs

     2,652        2,663        (11      

Adjusted a EBITDA

  

 

2,423

 

  

 

2,615

 

  

 

(192

 

 

(7

Depreciation & amortisation

     1,468        1,401        67       5  

Adjusted a operating profit

  

 

955

 

  

 

1,214

 

  

 

(259

 

 

(21

                                                        

Capital expenditure

  

 

2,081

 

  

 

1,699

 

  

 

382

 

 

 

22

 

Normalised free cash flow b

  

 

685

 

  

 

1,100

 

  

 

(415

 

 

(38

Openreach has a UK-wide presence which is overlapped by our competitors in around half the country. This overlap is expected to grow as alternative network providers build-out new fibre footprint. Our volume discount deal, signed with the majority of our major communications provider customers, has led to another record quarter for fibre sales. We are also rapidly expanding our fibre-to-the-premises network to provide the next generation of services for our customers. We have experienced strong demand from businesses for Ethernet circuits for the second consecutive quarter.

Adjusted a revenue decline of 4% for the year was driven by regulated price reductions predominantly on FTTC and Ethernet products, non-regulated price reductions (mainly driven by communications providers signing up for fibre volume discounts), a small decline in our physical line base and a reclassification of costs to revenue. This was partly offset by 25% growth in our fibre rental base, a 9% increase in our Ethernet rental base and the impact of adopting IFRS 15.

Adjusted a operating costs were broadly flat, with higher costs from recruiting and training engineers to support our ‘Fibre First’ programme and help improve customer experience, as well as pay inflation and business rates, offset by efficiency savings and a reclassification of costs to revenue. Adjusted a EBITDA was down 7% for the year.

Capital expenditure was £2.1bn, up 22%, driven by investment in our FTTP and Gfast network build and higher year-on-year BDUK net grant funding deferrals, partly offset by efficiency savings.

Normalised free cash flow b was down 38% due to the EBITDA decline, higher underlying capital expenditure (excluding BDUK grant funding deferrals) and timing of customer receipts.

 
a  

Adjusted measures exclude specific items, as explained in the Additional Information on page 185.

 

b  

Free cash flow after net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items.

 

c  

Openreach comparatives have been re-presented to reflect the transfer of Northern Ireland Networks from Enterprise to Openreach.


Table of Contents
42         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

A message from the

Openreach Chairman

    

 

 

LOGO

 

Openreach has had a solid year of progress. We improved our customer service performance, confirmed our status as a legally separate entity, and accelerated our full fibre build programme through major investments in our people and our network.

  

Investing in our service and people

Our network is more than 173 million kilometres long and passes nearly 32 million homes and businesses. With so many customers, improving the service we offer will always be our top priority.

 

I am encouraged by the progress we’re making in reducing faults, keeping missed appointments down and fixing issues much faster. Last year we cut the total number of faults on our network by 4.4% – saving some 194,000 engineer visits. This is helping us continue to meet or exceed all of Ofcom’s 42 Minimum Service Level targets on copper and broadband services.

 

On the dedicated circuits we provide for businesses, we delivered another strong year of Ethernet orders and we are also fixing 94% of faults within just five hours.

 

We also opened more direct communication with end customers, via our website and social media, to tackle the frustration some face in contacting us.

 

But we know we need to do better, because what we do is so important to the UK’s citizens and businesses.

 

We’re continuing to invest heavily in our people, training and systems. This year we hired 3,500 more trainee engineers to help us sustain improvements and we will hire a further 2,700 next year. It is the biggest recruitment drive in our history. To consolidate it we have introduced new training and career opportunities to help us develop and keep hold of the very best engineering talent.

 

We have now opened four fibre training centres, including Peterborough, Livingston and Yarnfield. A further eight similar centres are being built or upgraded across the country. This 100,000 square-foot facility includes an ‘Open Street’ – a mock-up of a typical suburban street, to help our engineers develop their skills in an authentic and immersive environment.

 

      

Fulfilling our commitments to Ofcom

Following Ofcom’s Digital Communications Review of 2015, we have implemented a series of changes to our governance and operations to give Openreach more control of its strategy, investments and plans within a strategic and financial framework defined by BT.

 

The major milestone this year concerned our people. On 1 October 2018, more than 31,000 people transferred from BT into the new Openreach Limited – a considerable step that we believe is the largest ever one-off people transfer in UK corporate history. We also created Openreach Northern Ireland to complete the formal implementation of our commitments to Ofcom under the Review.

 

Meanwhile, our rebranding programme continues ahead of schedule. Almost 17,000 vehicles now feature the new Openreach brand, and we have updated all our external websites, templates and systems. Out of 32 Openreach buildings, we have just seven more to rebrand.

 

Ofcom recognised the progress we have made across the board in its most recent implementation report.

 

We have completed most of what I call the ‘hard wiring’ necessary to create the more independent Openreach. The ‘soft wiring’, encompassing things such as culture and behaviour, always takes longer to embed. I am, however, very encouraged at the real progress that BT and Openreach have made in this regard. There is a real consensus throughout both organisations that only by embedding this new way of working will we establish an enduring legacy. It takes time but we are on the right path.

 


Table of Contents
                  43
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

LOGO

     

 

  Highlights

 

 173m

 

    Our network is more than

    173 million kilometres long

 

 94%

 

    We are fixing 94% of network

    faults within five hours

 

 3,500

 

    In 2018 we hired

    3,500 trainee engineers

 

 26

 

    We are progressing FTTP build

    in 26 locations

 

 27.5m

 

    We have built our superfast

    network to almost 27.5 million

    premises across the UK

  

 

 

 

 

  

‘Fibre First’

FTTP is a vital technology for the UK’s future. It is fast, reliable and future-proof. We believe it is key to the future success of digital services in the UK and we believe Openreach has to underpin this. That is why our strategy is ‘Fibre First’.

 

Last year we accelerated our fibre build programme and doubled our FTTP footprint. The new network is now available to more than 1.2 million homes and businesses. As a result, we are increasing our aim of reaching three million homes to four million by March 2021. We are progressing FTTP build in 26 locations and in April announced a further 12 locations to benefit from FTTP availability in the next 12 months, bringing the total to 38. Around a third of our FTTP footprint today is in rural areas, and our continuing BDUK work is almost exclusively focused on FTTP.

 

We want to go further – to 15 million by the mid-2020s – if the right conditions to invest are in place. To help create those conditions, we are doing whatever we can to reduce the cost of rolling out fibre – including tools and techniques such as drones, micro-ducting, ribbonised cables and ‘plug-and-play’ connections.

 

We’re also working with the Government and Ofcom to deliver the enablers we need to go even further and faster. One of the biggest of these is business rates – specifically the Cumulo tax on fibre infrastructure. It is a barrier to investment for any operator wanting to build more FTTP, and we believe that action on this by the Government would boost investment across the sector.

    
    
    
    
       
       
       
       
       
    

 

 

Another hurdle is adoption. Having built our superfast network to almost 27.5 million premises across the UK, there are still more than 15.5 million homes and businesses who have not signed up to our superfast broadband.

 

That is why last year we took the unprecedented step of offering volume- related discounts to encourage more communications providers to upgrade their customers. The move is already having a positive effect on take-up.

 

 

We also continue to extend fibre into rural areas – via publicly-subsidised schemes and direct partnerships with local communities. We recently signed our 850th Community Fibre Partnership contract. Overall the scheme has helped us upgrade almost 98,000 homes and businesses in recent years.

 

Looking to the future

We are committed to openness and transparency, so we are now publishing a wide range of information about our ‘Fibre First’ programme on our website, including maps and a list of locations we will be building in over the next 12 months.

 

We also publish details of the specific exchanges where we’ve installed, are currently installing, or will soon be installing (within the next three months) FTTP. We will update this information every three months.

 

These are exciting times at Openreach. We want to get decent, reliable and future-proof broadband to as many people as we can, as fast as we can. I look forward to seeing that continue to materialise over the coming year.

 

Mike McTighe

Chairman, Openreach

8 May 2019

 

 
 
 


Table of Contents
44         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Our approach to

risk management

    

 

Like any business, we face a number of risks and uncertainties. Some come from outside our organisation, others from within. Some we can control but others we can’t, in which case we plan for the consequences. Many of our risks are similar to those faced by similar businesses.     

Principal risks and uncertainties

The principal risks and uncertainties that affect us could have an impact on our business, brand, customers, assets, revenue, profits, liquidity or capital resources.

 

Our Enterprise Risk Management framework gives reasonable (but cannot give absolute) assurance that we’ve identified and are addressing our biggest risks. But there may be some risks that are either currently unknown, or currently seen as less important but with the potential to become more important in the future.

 

Events outside BT present both risks and opportunities. We focus our efforts on predicting and managing risks while aiming to take advantage of any opportunities that may emerge.

      

We recognise the uncertainty that political and geopolitical risks present, and have continued to operate a specific Brexit programme across BT that looks at how we might be affected and what our response should be. This programme has developed contingency plans covering a range of scenarios, including the possibility that the UK leaves the EU without a deal. The programme continues to follow developments closely and reports to a steering group chaired by our chief financial officer.

 

In the section below, we explain what we’re doing to help prevent our main risks from materialising, or to limit their impact if they do. Our principal risks and uncertainties should be considered alongside our risk management process, the forward-looking statements in this document and the associated cautionary statement (see page 190).

 

 

LOGO


Table of Contents
                  45
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

 

How we manage risk

Managing risk is essential if we’re to meet our objectives, build shareholder value, become more resilient, maintain our licence to operate and promote our stakeholders’ interests. To help us, we’ve developed a group-wide risk management process with four stages:

 

 

              

 

 

 

LOGO

 

 

 

Changes over the year

In 2017/18 we improved the way we manage risk through: revisiting our three lines of defence model and how we apply it to our key areas of risk; reviewing our risk management arrangements against some external benchmarks; and continuing our cycle of war gaming. Specific improvements to our risk and assurance activities in 2018/19 included:

   

Integrated approach

This year we brought together, under new management, our risk management, compliance, internal audit and some second line assurance functions to manage risk and provide assurance in a more integrated and simplified way. To extend and sustain the benefits of this across the organisation, we’ve launched a new programme called ‘One BT Integrity and Compliance’ – see page 70 for more detail.

     

Supplier failure

We’ve been reviewing the lessons we learned following the collapse of a major supplier during the year, and have made a number of improvements to how we would pre-empt and respond to a similar event in the future.

 

Major contracts

We’ve been reviewing responsibilities across the three lines of defence for the management and governance of our major contracts, and have strengthened our assurance reporting over key contract controls.


Table of Contents
46         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Our principal risks
and uncertainties
    

 

Strategic risks

Link to strategy    Link to business model
LOGO   Best converged network    LOGO   Financial capital
LOGO   Differentiated customer experience    LOGO   Human capital
LOGO  

Simplified, lean and agile business

 

   LOGO   Manufactured capital
Trend versus prior year indicates our perception of pre-mitigation risk    LOGO   Intellectual capital

 

LOGO

  Increasing/worsening    LOGO   Social capital
LOGO   Lessening/improving    LOGO   Natural capital
LOGO   At a similar level     
 
        

 

 Competition and technology changes

 

     Trend                  

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

•  Our strategy and business model could be disrupted by technology change and/or
intensifying competition from established players and new entrants into our markets

 

  

 

Link to business model
LOGO

  

 

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 

 
 

 

 

  

 

  Potential impact

 

        Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  Loss of market share, lower revenues, and profit.

 

•  Products becoming obsolete faster.

 

•  A need for us to invest more.


    

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  The UK telecom market struggled to grow.

 

•  Competition increased in the UK as many of our competitors tried to take more market share.

 

•  Some alternative network providers announced fibre network investment plans in the UK.

 

•  UK sports rights competition increased, with Amazon winning a three-year broadcast package for the Premier League, starting in 2019.

 

•  Competitors are developing their future 5G propositions.

    

 

•  We are:

 

–  delivering a differentiated customer experience to retain existing customers and attract new customers

 

–  investing in building the best converged network to provide our customers with products and services that stand out in the marketplace

 

–  simplifying our business and processes to reduce our cost base, which is an essential enabler to deliver a differentiated customer experience and build the best converged network.

 

•  We’re keeping a close eye on and responding to technology developments and competitor activity that could have an impact on us achieving our goals.

 

 

 Communications industry regulation

 

     Trend                  

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

•  Risk of unfavourable changes to the way we operate and compete where, for
example, Ofcom raises competition concerns around market power

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

•  Also the risk of unfavourable regulatory changes outside the UK to licensing and
terms on which we access incumbent operators’ networks

 

 

        

 

  Potential impact

 

        Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  Reduced prices on products.

 

•  Increased costs of doing business due to the service standards we are required to meet.

 

•  Limitations in the scope and competitiveness of the services we can provide.

 

    

 

•  Our regulatory and policy specialists, legal experts, compliance and operational teams guard against potential risks and look for timely opportunities to support the shaping of regulation. This is underpinned by our regulatory strategy.

 

•  We push for clear, predictable and proportionate regulation, submitting evidence and analysis into market reviews, charge controls, disputes and investigations.

 

•  Regular engagement with regulators, government, consumer organisations and other key stakeholders helps us build trust and understand their outlook.

 

•  We can ask for judicial reviews of regulatory decisions and appeal to the Competition Appeal Tribunal, dispute things or complain against outcomes that we feel aren’t in the best interests of the market or our customers.

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

    

 

•  Ofcom published Digital Communications Review Implementation Reports in June and November 2018 reviewing BT’s and Openreach’s adoption of the Commitments and Governance Protocol.

 

•  The Department for Digital, Culture, Media and Sport published its Future Telecoms Infrastructure Review.

 

•  Ofcom continued its cycle of market reviews, including consultations on the business connectivity and physical infrastructure markets, and on its move to more holistic regulation of access across business and residential markets.

 

•  Consumer issues such as charges once a customer’s minimum contract term expires were part of a super-complaint by Citizens Advice to the Competition and Markets Authority (across telecommunications and financial services sectors) and has been referred back to Ofcom.

 

   


Table of Contents
                  47
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

 Political risk

 

 

     Trend                   

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

 

•  Our future strategy and investor confidence could be undermined as a result
of an uncertain or adversarial political environment

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

•  Our operations and revenues could be disrupted as a result of geopolitical risk,
in particular outside the UK

 

 

        

 

 

  Potential impact

    

       

 

Examples of how we mitigate

    

•  Direct consequences include impact of movement in foreign exchange rates, lower consumer and business confidence, cost and availability of capital, interest rates and changes in tax regimes.

 

•  Political risk can also impact upon some of our other principal risks, in particular regulation.

 

•  Outside the UK political risk impacts us through changes in regulation and competition. It could also result in social unrest or a breakdown in the rule of law, which could lead to a threat to our people and assets.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  There were continued negotiations between the EU and UK to agree Brexit terms – against a backdrop of domestic political instability.

 

•  There was high political interest and policy focus around communications – particularly fibre broadband and 5G. The Government’s Future Telecoms Infrastructure Review concluded.

 

•  There was more political focus on issues like consumer pricing and contracts, and security and competition in the communications supply chain.

      

•  We have strong relationships with the UK Government, key departments, MPs, peers, the media and business and consumer bodies. We also engage often and closely with governments and politicians in the EU and our key global markets.

 

•  We inform public debate around the communications market with campaigns explaining our role within it.

 

•  In the build up to the UK’s scheduled exit from the EU we’ve continued our contingency planning to make sure customers keep getting our services. This includes: making sure we have enough stock to mitigate any short-term disruption; making crisis management arrangements in the immediate aftermath of a ‘hard’ Brexit; reviewing how we’d keep serving EU customers; assessing what systems we need to change; and making sure our key suppliers are similarly prepared for any eventuality.

 

•  Outside the UK our public affairs and regulatory teams support governments and regulators to establish and maintain open and fair regulation of markets.

 

•  Our security and business continuity teams focus on protecting our people and assets against the consequences of geopolitical risks.

 

Financial risks

 

 

 Pensions risk

 

     Trend                   

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

•  Our defined benefit (DB) pension schemes, in particular the BT Pension Scheme
(BTPS), could become more of a financial burden as a result of future low
investment returns, high inflation, longer life expectancy and/or regulatory changes

 

 

 

  

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

  

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 
 

        

 

  Potential impact

 

       Examples of how we mitigate

•  The next BTPS valuation is due at 30 June 2020. A rise in the deficit might affect the size of payments we have to make into the scheme.

 

•  A rise in the deficit could also negatively affect our share price or credit rating, making it harder and more expensive to access funding.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  The actuarial valuation of the BTPS was agreed in May 2018. This led to a £2bn contribution in June 2018, funded by proceeds from issuing long-term bonds to the BTPS.

 

•  We reviewed pension arrangements for our UK people, closing Sections B and C of the BTPS to future benefit accrual on 30 June 2018 (representing more than 99% of active members at the time). This has largely removed the build-up of additional future liabilities in the BTPS.

 

      

•  We and the BTPS Trustee regularly review the scheme’s funding position and investment performance. We also consider associated risks and possible mitigations.

 

•  Our agreement with the BTPS Trustee following the last funding valuation helped reduce investment risk and allows for a gradual move to a low-risk investment approach over time. Our strategy also aims to mitigate the impact of liability increases (for example by investing in assets that will go up in value if future inflation expectations rise).


Table of Contents
48         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our principal risks and uncertainties continued

    

    

      
      

 

Financial risks continued

 

 

 Financial risk

 

     Trend                   

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

•  Like many other major international businesses, we’re exposed to
financial risks such as market risk (including interest rate and foreign
exchange risks), credit risk, liquidity risk and tax risks

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  
        

 

 

  Potential impact

    

       

 

Examples of how we mitigate

    

•  Interest and foreign exchange rate movements could negatively affect our profitability, cash flow and balance sheets (see note 27 to the consolidated financial statements).

 

•  If credit risks materialise they could negatively impact our liquidity and profitability.

 

•  If we don’t stick to tax rules we could face financial penalties and reputational damage.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  Earlier in the year S&P and Fitch downgraded our credit rating, due to concerns over the effect that competing pressures, including those related to our pension and our network investments, may have on our cash flows. The three main agencies now rate us Baa2/BBB with stable outlook.

 

•  As the external tax environment changes, we have to make more judgements to forecast the future tax consequences of business decisions.

 

      

•  We have a centralised treasury function whose job is to manage liquidity and funding requirements as well as our exposure to financial and market risks.

 

•  Our governance framework is at the heart of how we mitigate tax risk. This is set and agreed by the Board. We always aim to pay tax in line with the laws of the countries where we do business. We want open, constructive relationships with tax authorities worldwide, getting reputable independent advice where we need it.

 

Compliance risks

 

 

 Significant financial control failure

 

   Trend                 

 

LOGO  

 

•  Financial controls may not prevent or detect fraud, financial misstatement
or other financial loss

 

   Link to business model
LOGO

 

   Link to strategy
LOGO

 

    

 

  Potential impact

 

       Examples of how we mitigate

•  Failures in our financial control framework could result in financial misstatement, financial loss including a failure to prevent fraud, or key decisions being taken based on incorrect information.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  KPMG have become our new external auditors.

 

•  We have brought together, under new management, our risk management, compliance, internal audit and some second line assurance functions.

 

•  We commenced a significant Sarbanes-Oxley control enhancement programme which identified two particular areas requiring remediation: IT general controls and risk assessment, in particular, documentation of information used in controls. Although improvements have been made, remediation and testing of all IT general controls and risk assessment remediation plans was not complete at 31 March 2019 and will be a significant focus for 2019/20. Unremediated deficiencies in the two areas were concluded to be a ‘material weakness’ as at 31 March 2019 as defined by the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

 

      

•  We train our people (including those in high risk roles) to build awareness and understanding of controls – including our three lines of defence, fraud awareness and balance sheet reconciliation best practice courses.

 

•  We have implemented a financial controls framework with appropriate policies, processes, checks and balances – including quarterly certifications over key controls by senior leaders.

 

•  We are progressing a programme to strengthen our financial control framework, supported by a new Group Financial Controls and Assurance team.


Table of Contents
                  49
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

 Privacy, data protection and data governance

 

     Trend                   

 

 

 

 

LOGO   

 

 

 

 

 

•  We might fail to ensure that our customers’ and employees’ data are secure
and protected in compliance with data privacy laws, against internal and
external threats

 

  

 

Link to business model

LOGO

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy

LOGO

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

  Potential impact

    

       

 

Examples of how we mitigate

    

 

•  A breach of data protection regulation could result in enforcement action, significant fines, class action, prison sentences and the regulator telling us to stop processing the data.

 

•  This could also result in potential reputational damage, stopped operations and financial loss from fines and customers leaving.

    

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  EU General Data Protection Regulation (EU GDPR) came into force on 25 May 2018. Our preparations included setting out in our privacy policies what personal data we collect, what we do with it and why we process it; reviewing our contractual data obligations with suppliers; and increasing our resources to deal with data subject access requests.

 

•  A number of major corporations have fallen victim to significant data breaches this year.

 

    

 

•  We perform compliance reviews of our activities involving personal data across the business. Our focus is on protecting systems, enhancing our operational processes and training our people to protect the personal data they handle.

 

•  We provide our people with tools to make risk-based decisions in their day-to-day activities (like using Privacy Impact Assessments when they develop new products or services).

 

•  We conduct due diligence activities on third parties’ data handling and security arrangements.

 

•  We have Binding Corporate Rules agreed with the regulator to guide and support our business operations.

 

 

 Health, safety and wellbeing

 

 

     Trend                  

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

 

•  We might fail to ensure the health, safety and wellbeing of our people or
members of the public, in breach of health and safety laws and regulations

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  
        

 

 

  Potential impact

    

       

 

Examples of how we mitigate

    

 

•  Health and safety failures could mean injury to our people or members of the public, financial penalties, hindered or stopped operations and reputational damage.

 

    

 

•  We implement a company-wide and Board-endorsed health, safety and wellbeing strategy.

 

•  All our people do training in basic health and safety, overseen by their managers.

 

•  We monitor compliance through annual licensing, refresher training, competency assessments and accreditation for higher-risk groups.

 

•  We have a new IT system to help us better capture and share information on health and safety incidents.

 

•  We run wellbeing campaigns for our people.

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

    

 

•  Changes in technology and working processes helped reduce physical risks to our people.

 

•  Changes in our workforce mean we have more new recruits and they need more safeguards while they gain experience.

 

•  We’re managing the psychological impact of the pace and scale of our transformation on our people.

 

•  We’ve appointed a new director of health, safety and wellbeing.

 

 

 

 Ethical culture

 

 

     Trend                  

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

 

•  Our controls and procedures could fail to detect unethical or inappropriate
behaviour by our people or associates

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  
        

 

 

  Potential impact

    

       

 

Examples of how we mitigate

    

 

•  Unethical or inappropriate behaviour could result in fraud or a breach of regulation or legislation.

 

•  That in turn could expose BT to significant penalties, criminal prosecution and damage to our brand and reputation.

 

    

 

•  First and second line assurance teams perform risk-focused thematic reviews in addition to controls monitoring.

 

•  We have policies covering financial and non-financial controls including trade sanctions, conflicts of interest, gifts and hospitality, charitable donations and sponsorship.

 

•  We carry out due diligence on third parties like suppliers, agents, resellers and distributors.

 

•  We include anti-corruption and bribery clauses in our procurement contracts.

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

    

 

•  A steady flow of companies being prosecuted under anti-corruption and bribery laws (UK Bribery Act and the FCPA).

 

•  An increase in legislation to address and report on human rights abuses by companies.

 

•  An increase in Speak Up (BT’s confidential whistleblowing service) reports and conflict of interest registrations.

 

 

   


Table of Contents
50         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our principal risks and uncertainties continued

    

    

      
      

 

 

 

Operational risks

 

        

 

 Customer experience

 

   Trend                

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

 

•  Our customer experience may not be brand enhancing nor drive sustainable
profitable revenue growth

 

  

 

Link to business model
LOGO

  

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

  

 

  Potential impact

 

        Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  If we don’t deliver a great customer experience it could damage our brand, cause customers to leave and so reduce our revenue, or even lead to financial penalties.

 

•  It could also impact our people’s pride in working for BT.


    

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  We continued to improve our customer experience, achieving our best ever customer perception results for BT Consumer, EE, Enterprise and Global Services.

 

•  Our consumer brands came together under a new Consumer unit.

 

•  We launched our new Be There brand positioning.

    

 

•  We track a range of customer experience metrics very closely and have programmes in place to drive improvement. For example, our BT transformation plan includes a radical business process simplification workstream.

 

•  We’ve launched new and innovative products to further enhance our customers’ experience, for example, BT Plus.

 

 

 Major contracts

 

     Trend                  

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

•  There is a substantial performance risk to our complex and high-value national
and multinational customer contracts

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  
        

 

  Potential impact

 

        Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  If we don’t meet contractual commitments, or if customers’ needs change, then our expected future revenue, profitability and cash generation may reduce.

 

•  Contracts may even become loss-making through a drop in revenue, changes to customers’ businesses, business failure or contract termination.

 

•  We are delivering some particularly high-profile infrastructure contracts, notably the Emergency Services Network (ESN) and the Broadband Delivery UK programme (BDUK). If we failed to deliver these, or had an operational failure, it could lead to major reputational damage.

 

    

 

•  We have governance, risk management and reporting processes in place at both corporate function and customer-facing unit levels.

 

•  We have an independent review programme to provide checks and balances on individual contracts.

 

•  We check how we’re managing contracts against a best practice framework, based on our knowledge of running and managing major programmes.

 

•  We also train our contract managers to better identify and manage risk.

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

    

 

•  We made improvements this year, including:

 

–  learning more about why the performance of some contracts deteriorates and how to stop it happening in future

 

–  improving the process for management reviewing contracts

 

–  improving long-term forecasting

 

–  improving our contract management systems and governance processes

 

–  redefining and enhancing our controls and assurance.

 

•  On top of deploying the second and third phases of our BDUK contracts, we continued to win new BDUK work to further extend coverage of superfast broadband in rural areas.

 

•  We agreed a new ESN contract framework with the Government.

 

 

   


Table of Contents
                  51
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

 Service interruption

 

     Trend                   

 

 

 

 

LOGO   

 

 

 

 

 

•  There is a risk we are unable to prevent and respond to incidents caused by natural perils,
network and system faults, and malicious acts that threaten our network

 

•  We may also fail to prevent interruption to our services as a result of supply chain failure,
software changes, equipment faults, fire, flood, infrastructure outages and sabotage

 

  

 

Link to business model

LOGO

 

  

 

 

 

Link to strategy

LOGO

 

 

 

  

 

  Potential impact

 

        Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  A major interruption event could result in lost productivity, rework and recovery costs, loss of revenue, increased insurance costs, legal or contractual penalties, or even harm to individuals.

 

•  It could also result in customers leaving BT.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

•  Extreme weather always challenges our IT and network estate. This year we had to keep our network operating through the joint hottest UK summer on record, lightning storms and heavy rain.

 

•  We’ve particularly focused on technology lifecycle management to recognise and manage the risks associated with our systems estate over time.

 

    

 

•  We monitor our IT and network performance very closely, and have controls in place to limit interruption to service.

 

•  Our mobile, geographically dispersed, emergency response facilities help us manage incidents if they do occur.

 

•  We are continuing our programme of providing permanent flood protection for our critical assets most at risk.

 

•  We test our resilience through a number of activities, including a continual cycle of war gaming.

 

•  We review the lessons learned from major incidents in order to try to prevent such things from recurring.

 

 

 

 Cyber and information security

 

 

     Trend                  

 

 

 

 

LOGO  

 

 

 

 

•  Security risks could arise from people inside BT or from external sources like
hacktivists, criminals, terrorists or nation states attacking our infrastructure
and assets, for example through use of hacking tools, phishing scams
and disruptive malware

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 

 
 

 

  
        

 

 

  Potential impact

 

        Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  A cyber attack could result in disruption to our business or data being compromised, leading to financial loss, long-term reputational damage, loss of market share, regulatory sanctions, fines and contract penalties or termination.

 

•  It could also result in missed opportunities to grow revenue and launch new services ahead of our competitors.

 

    

 

•  We monitor and log our network and systems, and keep raising our people’s security awareness through training and mock phishing attacks.

 

•  We have compartmentalised our IT estate as we provision new cloud-based systems to limit the potential impact of a cyber attack.

 

•  ‘Red Team’ exercises run by our ethical hackers help us to keep improving security across BT, especially around upgrading our access controls.

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

    

 

 

•  Major corporates continue to fall victim to cyberattack, with a number of high-profile incidents occurring in 2018/19.

 

•  EU GDPR came into force on 25 May 2018.

 

 

   


Table of Contents
52         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our principal risks and uncertainties continued

    

    

 

    

    

      

 

Operational risks continued

 

 

 Supply chain

 

     Trend                   

 

 

LOGO     

 

•  There is a risk of disruption to the integrity and continuity of our supply chain

 

•  Global markets expose us to global supply chain risks. These include different labour
standards and environmental and climate change practices, increasing regulation
and geopolitical events

 

 

  

 

Link to business model
LOGO

 

  

 

 

 

Link to strategy
LOGO

 

 
 

    

 

  Potential impact

 

       Examples of how we mitigate

•  The impact of suppliers failing can vary. If substituting a failing supplier meant we had to disrupt our business, it could cost us a lot of time and money.

 

•  If we couldn’t find a different supplier, it might compromise the commitments we make to our customers, leading to us breaking our contract, losing revenue or incurring financial penalties.

 

•  If our supply chain doesn’t meet legal, regulatory or ethical standards it could damage our reputation and possibly lead to legal action and fines.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

    

 

 

•  With EU GDPR coming into force, we worked closely with our suppliers through the year to help protect our people and customers and incorporate privacy-by-design by default into the products and services they supply us.

 

•  We planned extensively for the potential impacts of Brexit on our supply chain.

 

•  We’ve been closely monitoring global political developments with respect to Huawei.

 

•  We started work to establish a new centralised third-party risk and control capability.

 

•  After the failure of Carillion (one of our large suppliers) last year, we strengthened our risk monitoring processes, including the ways we identify and respond to early warning signs of potential supplier failure.

 

      

•  In December 2018 we announced that, in line with our long-standing network architecture principles around the use of Huawei, we will replace the current Huawei 4G core (inherited through the EE acquisition). This will be implemented as we move to a future new and combined 4G/5G core.

 

•  For our most important suppliers, we keep a close watch on our relationships, their performance and ability to meet their obligations. We tell the business when there’s a risk of a supplier failing, and our senior leaders review our readiness for such events.

 

•  We undertake due diligence when we introduce new suppliers and in our continuing business with existing ones. That includes checks on company finances, business systems, accreditations, media reputation and ethical practices. The standards we apply are available on selling2bt.com.

 

•  We are also refining the way our three lines of defence come together to manage and assure supplier risks.

 

•  Our dealings with suppliers follow our trading, compliance and ethical policies – see page 27 for more detail.


Table of Contents
                  53
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

        

 

 Colleague engagement

 

 

     Trend                LOGO  

 

•  There is a risk that our people are not sufficiently engaged to enable us to achieve our strategic priorities

 

 

  

 

 

 

Link to business model

LOGO

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

Link to strategy

LOGO

 

 

 

  

 

  Potential impact

 

       

 

Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  Negative reactions to change might mean us losing talented people, leading to us losing important skills and needing to hire more external people, adding cost to the business.

 

•  Poor engagement also raises the risk of general industrial unrest and action.

     

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

 

•  We’ve worked constructively with our unions this year to agree a number of transformation initiatives, including changes to our defined benefit pension scheme and the TUPE transfer of our people into Openreach Limited.

 

•  As we create a simpler business, we’re also working closely with our unions to roll out a new people framework defining job families and career levels for our people.

    

 

•  We’ve undertaken extensive consultations with unions, works councils and colleague representatives to make sure we maintain a healthy and positive relationship with our people.

 

•  We’re continuing to streamline our management structure – moving responsibilities closer to front line teams and speeding up decision making to help deliver a better customer experience.

 

 

 Change management

 

     Trend                  LOGO  

 

•  Our BT transformation plan could fail to deliver its required benefits

 

•  There is also a risk that such deep and fast change can be distracting and cause uncertainty amongst our people

 

  

 

 

 

 

Link to business model

LOGO

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

Link to strategy

LOGO

 

 

 

  
        

 

  Potential impact

 

  

 

Examples of how we mitigate

 

•  If we don’t manage our change programme carefully, we may not deliver its intended benefits, it could negatively impact customer experience or affect our employee engagement.

 

•  We could potentially overspend on the change programme itself.

 

 

  Developments in 2018/19

 

 

•  We made good progress delivering our BT transformation plan, including establishing a new people framework for our management grades.

 

•  Work continued delivering a new Digital Global Services with an agreed new organisational structure.

 

•  We completed the integration of our Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures units into a single new Enterprise unit.

 

  

 

•  We apply a formal structure and governance to our key change programmes – for example our BT transformation plan has a full-time programme office and our Executive Committee reviews progress regularly. Change programmes are also supported by our business transformation team.

 

•  Close communication with our people and unions, supported by monitoring our engagement levels, helps us manage the uncertainty that the transformation may cause and to target interventions where needed.


Table of Contents
54         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Our viability statement

    

      
      

 

         

Assessment of prospects

An understanding of the group’s business model and strategy is central to assessing its prospects, and details can be found on pages 12 to 21.

 

Our business model provides resilience that is relevant to any consideration of our prospects and viability. In the UK, we benefit from diversification across a number of markets and products, which increased significantly through the acquisition of EE. We also have a broad spread of customers and suppliers across different geographic areas and market sectors, serving the needs of customers in 180 countries worldwide.

 

Our strategy of delivering great customer experience, investing in network leadership and transforming our operating model are all designed to support long-term and sustainable cash flow growth.

 

We assess our prospects on a regular basis through our financial planning process. Our Medium Term Plan forecasts the group’s profitability, cash flow and funding requirements, and is reviewed by the Board during the year. The Medium Term Plan is built from the bottom-up forecasts of each of our customer-facing units, supplemented by items managed at a group level and assumptions such as macro-economic activity and exchange rates. The performance of the group and our customer-facing units against these forecasts is monitored monthly and this is supplemented each quarter through a series of Quarterly Business Reviews of each unit conducted by the chief executive officer and chief financial officer.

 

Beyond our Medium Term Planning horizon, the group also makes investments that have business cases covering a longer time period, such as our network investments. Significant capital expenditure investment cases are approved by the chief executive officer and, where appropriate, the Board, after taking into account longer-term risks and opportunities such as the economy, technology and regulation.

 

Our business and financial planning also takes into account our longer-term obligations, including the funding of our defined benefit pension schemes.

     

Viability statement

In accordance with provision C.2.2 of the 2016 UK Corporate Governance Code, the directors have assessed the prospects and viability of the group.

 

Although the directors have no reason to believe that the Group will not be viable over a longer period, the Board has chosen to conduct this review for a period of three years to 31 March 2022. The Board believes this is an appropriate timeframe as it aligns with the primary focus of our business planning and the underpinning time cycles of a number of our principal risks: for example the pension scheme funding valuation and Ofcom’s market review cycles.

 

In support of this statement we’ve stress tested our forecast cash flow by assessing, through a probabilistic analysis, the range of potential combined impacts our most significant risks could have on these forecasts. This assessment was informed by our judgements as to the potential financial impact of these risks if they materialise, together with their likelihood of occurrence.

 

Our stress testing confirmed that existing projected cash flows and cash management activities provide us with a buffer against the impact of our most likely risks. In the most extreme scenarios we tested, we have considered the further actions we could take to mitigate the negative cash flow impact and ensure additional liquidity. These actions could include, for example, sale of assets, limiting or delaying discretionary capital expenditure and marketing activities, restricting share buy-back programmes and reducing or ceasing dividend payments.

 

In our viability assessment we’ve adopted a number of assumptions designed to stress test our resilience. For example, in making our assessments of the impact and likelihood of our risks, we’ve only taken into account the control activities that we have in place today. We’ve not factored in any of the extensive future mitigation activities that we’re undertaking to address these risks, thereby assuming such activity proves ineffective. Whilst we do not expect this to happen, we’ve adopted these pessimistic assumptions to add greater stress to our viability testing.

    

     

We’ve also assumed that, should the need arise, we would have both the ability to renew existing debt facilities which mature over the three-year period and be able to raise new debt.

 

Based on the results of this analysis, the directors have a reasonable expectation that the group will be able to continue in operation and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the three-year period of their assessment.

 
         


Table of Contents

 

LOGO

 

    

                                55
         

 

 

 

BT Group plc                                                     

   

Annual Report 2019                                                                                          

   

  Strategic report

  Governance

              

  Financial statements

              

  Additional information

              

 

  We believe that effective corporate governance is critical to delivering our strategy and creating long-term value for our shareholders. We also recognise the importance of our wider stakeholders in delivering our strategy and achieving sustainability within our business. We are always conscious of our responsibilities and duties to these stakeholders under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. We have detailed our stakeholders and their importance to our business in the Strategic report on pages 1 to 54.      

Contents

 

  
     

Governance

  
     

 

Chairman’s governance report

  

56

     

 

Our governance framework

  

57

     

 

Board of Directors

  

58

     

 

The Board

  

60

     

 

Relations with shareholders

  

64

     

 

Reports of the Board committees

  

66

     

 

• Nominations Committee  chair’s report

  

66

     

 

• Audit & Risk  Committee chair’s report

  

69

     

 

Report on directors’ remuneration

  

73

     

 

• Remuneration Committee  chair’s letter

  

73

     

 

• Focus on remuneration

  

76

     

 

• Annual remuneration report

  

79

                  

 

Directors’ information

  

92

 

 

Leadership

 

The Board is collectively responsible for the long-term success of the company. Read more about how our board leads BT on pages 60 to 63.

     

 

Effectiveness

 

We continually think about the effectiveness of our board and its committees including composition, induction and development of directors. Read more about effectiveness on pages 55 to 75.

     

 

General information

  

94

                       

 

Financial statements

 

   100
                             

Additional information

  

185

                
                
                
                
                
 

 

 Accountability

 

The Board has established the Audit & Risk Committee to oversee corporate reporting, risk management and internal control and our relationship with the company’s external auditors. Read more about this in the Audit & Risk Committee chair’s report on pages 69 to 72.

     

 

Remuneration

 

The Board has established the Remuneration Committee to develop the remuneration policy and set the remuneration for the executive directors and other senior executives. Read the Report on directors’ remuneration on pages 73 to 90.

        
                
 

Our corporate governance compliance statement

As a Premium Listed company BT is subject to the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) published by the Financial Reporting Council. For 2018/19 we are reporting against the 2016 version of the Code and the Board considers that throughout the year BT has complied with the provisions of the Code and applied the main principles of the Code as described on pages 55 to 99 of this report.

 

Directors’ report

     
 

The directors submit their report and the audited financial statements of the company, BT Group plc, and the group, which includes its subsidiary undertakings, for 2018/19. BT Group plc is the listed holding company for the BT group of companies. Its shares are listed on the London Stock Exchange, and on the New York Stock Exchange in the form of American Depositary Shares.

 

     
 

LOGO

 

The Code and associated guidance are available on the

Financial Reporting Council website at frc.org.uk

  

 

    


Table of Contents
56         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

     Chairman’s governance report
      
      
      

 

LOGO

 

We believe that effective corporate governance is critical to delivering our strategy and creating long-term value for our shareholders.

 

     

On behalf of the Board, I am pleased to present the governance report for the year ended 31 March 2019. We continue to believe that effective corporate governance is critical to delivering our strategy and creating long-term value for our shareholders.

 

Corporate Governance Code

During the year, BT has complied with the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2016 and applied its principles. Also, in preparation for our adoption of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 from 1 April 2019, we have carried out a detailed review of our governance framework. We will report on our application of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 in our 2020 Annual Report, including the mechanism we’ll have put in place to ensure effective engagement by the Board with our colleagues.

 

Board changes and activities

In June 2018, we announced that Gavin Patterson would stand down as chief executive. After an extensive external search, Philip Jansen was appointed as an executive director on 1 January 2019 and became chief executive on 1 February 2019 following a handover period with Gavin.

 

During the year, we have continued to keep under review the composition of the Board and its committees to ensure that we have the right balance of skills, independence, experience and diversity. We have welcomed Matthew Key and Allison Kirkby to the Board as non-executive directors who bring a wealth of knowledge and experience in the telecoms sector. We have reviewed the independence of Nick Rose and Jasmine Whitbread, both of whom have served more than eight years, and concluded that they continue to remain independent in character and judgement. It is the current expectation of the Board that Nick and Jasmine will step down by the end of the 2020 AGM. Nick and Jasmine bring considerable experience to the Board and by remaining in post for a further year they will provide invaluable continuity during

Philip’s first year as chief executive.

     

Streamlining governance

In line with the rest of the business, we have sought to streamline our governance processes and structures. To this end we have reviewed our governance framework and reduced the number of board committees, clarifying the lines of responsibility. We have also reviewed and refreshed the terms of reference of all board committees ensuring consistency and clarity. Details of the refreshed board committee structure and the duties of these committees are described on page 57.

 

Engaging with our stakeholders

We recognise the importance of our wider stakeholders in delivering our strategy and business sustainability. We are conscientious about our responsibilities and duties to our stakeholders under section 172 of the Companies Act 2006. We have detailed our stakeholders, their importance to our business and our engagement with them in the Strategic report on pages 1 to 54.

 

I would like to thank the Board and executive team for their ongoing support. I look forward to continuing to work together as we implement our streamlined governance processes and structures.

 

Jan du Plessis

Chairman

8 May 2019

 

LOGO

 

You can find the refreshed board committee structure and terms of reference on our website at btplc.com


Table of Contents
                  57
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Our governance framework
 
 
 

 

 

LOGO

 

LOGO

Pages 58 and 59 Board biographies

Pages 60 and 61 Board activities for the year

Pages 62 and 67 Board diversity

LOGO   btplc.com

 


Table of Contents
58         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Board of Directors
    
    
    
    

 

 

LOGO

 

 

Jan du Plessis

Chairman

Appointed chairman in November 2017 and on the Board since June 2017. Age 65.

 

Skills and experience

Jan has significant experience on the boards of major UK public companies, having served as chairman and non-executive director of various FTSE 100 companies across a range of sectors. Jan was chairman of Rio Tinto from 2009 to March 2018 and chairman of SABMiller from July 2015 until October 2016 having been with the company since 2014. He was also a director and senior independent director of Marks & Spencer from 2008 and 2012 respectively until March 2015.

 

Other appointments

None outside BT.

     

 

LOGO

 

 

Philip Jansen

Chief executive

Appointed chief executive in February 2019 and on the Board since January 2019. Age 52.

 

Skills and experience

Philip has experience of leading and growing large private and publicly-listed UK and international businesses, delivering transformational change and large technology programmes. He joined from Worldpay where he had been CEO since April 2013. Before that he was CEO and then chairman at Brakes Group between 2010 and 2015. Philip spent the previous six years at Sodexo where he was group chief operating officer and chief executive, Europe, South Africa and India. Prior to that he was chief operating officer at MyTravel Group from 2002 to 2004 and managing director of Telewest Communications (now Virgin Media) from 2000 to 2002 after starting his career at Procter & Gamble.

 

Other appointments include

Senior adviser at Bain Capital and a trustee of Wellbeing of Women.

     

 

LOGO

 

 

Simon Lowth

Chief financial officer

Appointed to the Board as chief financial officer in July 2016. Age 57.

 

Skills and experience

Simon has experience in finance, accounting, risk, corporate strategy and mergers and acquisitions. He was CFO and executive director of BG Group before the takeover by Royal Dutch Shell in February 2016. Simon was CFO and an executive director of AstraZeneca from 2007 to 2013. Prior to that, he was an executive director of ScottishPower from 2003 to 2007 and was appointed finance director in 2005. Before 2003, Simon was a director of McKinsey

& Company.

 

Other appointments

None outside BT.

   

 

LOGO

 

 

Mike Inglis

Independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in September 2015. Age 59.

 

Skills and experience

Mike’s technology experience includes serving as non-executive chairman of Ilika until January 2019 and on the board of ARM Holdings from 2002 to 2013. His roles there included chief commercial officer, executive vice president and general manager of the processor division and executive vice president of sales and marketing. Prior to joining ARM, Mike worked in management consultancy with AT Kearney and held a number of senior operational and marketing positions at Motorola. Mike was previously a director of Pace and an independent director of Advanced Micro Devices.

 

Other appointments

None outside BT.

     

 

LOGO

 

Matthew Key

Independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in October 2018. Age 56.

 

Skills and experience

Matthew’s telecoms experience includes various positions at Telefónica from 2007 to 2014 including chairman and CEO of Telefónica Europe and chairman and CEO of Telefónica Digital. From 2002 to 2004 he was the CFO, strategy and regulation director of O2 UK before becoming CEO in 2004. Matthew has also served as finance director at Vodafone UK and chairman of Tesco Mobile. He has previously held positions at companies including Kingfisher, Coca Cola and Schweppes Beverages and Grand Metropolitan.

 

Other appointments include

Non-executive director of Burberry and chairman of the Dallaglio Foundation.

     

 

LOGO

 

 

Allison Kirkby

Independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in March 2019. Age 51.

 

Skills and experience

Allison has valuable experience in the international telecoms sector and in driving performance, improving customer service and delivering shareholder value. Allison was previously group CFO and then president and group CEO of Tele2 AB, positions she held from 2014 and 2015 respectively. Allison was a non-executive director of Greggs until May 2019 and has also held roles within 21st Century Fox, Virgin Media, Procter & Gamble and Guinness.

 

Other appointments include

President and Group CEO of TDC Group.


Table of Contents
                  59
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Key to membership of committees

 

     
LOGO   Audit & Risk    LOGO    Executive    LOGO      Remuneration

LOGO

 

 

BT Compliance

 

  

LOGO

 

  

Investigatory Powers Governance

 

   LOGO      Committee chair
LOGO   Digital Impact & Sustainability    LOGO    Nominations      

 

 

LOGO

 

Iain Conn

Independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in June 2014. Age 56.

 

Skills and experience

Iain has international experience and an understanding of technology, energy and regulated consumer markets. Iain joined Centrica as chief executive in January 2015, having been with BP since 1986. From 2004 to 2014 Iain was executive director of BP and chief executive downstream from 2007 to 2014. Until May 2014, Iain was a non-executive director of Rolls-Royce for nine years and senior independent director.

 

Other appointments include

Member of the CBI President’s Committee, chairman of the advisory board of the Imperial College Business School and member of the Imperial College Council.

     

LOGO

 

Tim Höttges

Non-independent, non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in January 2016. Age 56.

 

Skills and experience

Tim has international telecoms experience having been CEO of Deutsche Telekom since January 2014, and with the company since 2000. From 2009 until his appointment as CEO, he was a member of the board of management responsible for finance and controlling. From 2006 to 2009 he was a member of the board of management responsible for the T-Home unit. In this position, he was in charge of fixed network and broadband business, as well as integrated sales and service in Germany.

 

Other appointments include

Chairman of T-Mobile US and supervisory board member of FC Bayern München AG and Henkel AG & Co. KGaA.

 

     

LOGO

 

Isabel Hudson

Independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in November 2014. Age 59.

 

Skills and experience

Isabel has experience in the financial sector as well as pensions, risk, control, governance and international business. Isabel was previously a non-executive director of The Pensions Regulator, MGM Advantage, QBE Insurance, Standard Life and an executive director of Prudential Assurance Company in the UK.

 

Other appointments include

Non-executive chair of National House Building Council and senior independent director of RSA Insurance. Isabel is also an ambassador for the disability charity, SCOPE.

LOGO

 

Nick Rose

Senior independent director and independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in January 2011 and senior independent director since March 2014. Age 61.

 

Skills and experience

Nick brings experience in finance, risk, control, governance and international business. He was chief financial officer of Diageo prior to his retirement in December 2010, having joined the board in 1999.

 

Other appointments include

Chairman of Williams Grand Prix Holdings, senior independent director of BAE Systems and non-executive chairman of Loch Lomond Scotch Whisky.

     

LOGO

 

Jasmine Whitbread

Independent non-executive director

Appointed to the Board in January 2011. Age 55.

 

Skills and experience

Jasmine has experience in transforming large complex organisations in the UK and internationally and brings an understanding of corporate social responsibility and sustainable business. She was previously chief executive of Save the Children International and has a background in technology marketing.

 

Other appointments include

Chief executive of London First and non-executive director of Standard Chartered.

     

 

LOGO

 

Rachel Canham

Company secretary & general

counsel, governance

Rachel joined BT in 2011 and was

appointed company secretary & general

counsel, governance in

November 2018.

 

        

 

    

 

    

 

    

 

 

           
           
           


Table of Contents
60         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

The Board
Leadership
 
 
 

Board activities

The Board is responsible for managing the group, agreeing strategy, setting the budget, overseeing performance and discharging certain legal responsibilities. It passes day-to-day management to the chief executive, but certain matters are reserved to the Board, including the approval of major acquisitions and other strategically important issues. The Board sets the strategic direction for the company, shapes the organisational culture, promotes corporate governance and plays a key role in creating sustainable growth in shareholder value.

The table below describes the Board’s activities throughout the year. It is not an exhaustive list; instead it provides a high-level overview of discussions held during board meetings and the wide range of factors that the directors consider in order to help the company achieve its goals.

 

    Agenda item

 

  

Discussions, decisions and actions

 

 

 Strategy and transformation

 

 

Strategic priorities

  

 

At the start of the year, the Board discussed the key themes and actions arising from the 2017/18 strategy day. They agreed a programme of strategic discussions to be covered at meetings throughout 2018/19. The Board revisited strategic priorities throughout the year, as detailed below.

 

Spectrum strategy

  

The Board approved BT’s bidding strategy and financial envelope for Ofcom’s 3.4GHz spectrum auction. BT secured 40MHz of 3.4GHz spectrum suitable for 5G services, strengthening EE’s mobile network leadership.

 

Network strategy

  

The Board discussed the development of BT’s integrated, long-term network strategy, including investment in ultrafast fixed network technologies and plans to lead the market to 5G.

 

 

 Performance and risk

 

Financial performance

  

 

BT’s financial performance and outlook was considered at each meeting throughout the year and the Board approved the Medium Term Plan for the group.

 

At each quarter-end the Board approved the financial statements and results announcements and at year-end they approve the Annual Report and Form 20-F.

 

Enterprise risk management

  

The Board conducted their annual review of the Group Risk Register. They discussed the principal risks and uncertainties facing the group, which are set out on pages 46 to 53 of the Strategic report . Each risk owner will report to the Board on their area of risk during 2019/20.

 

Board risk oversight

  

The Board reviewed their oversight of BT’s risk management and internal control systems, and their assessment of principal risks. The Board concluded that these risks were appropriately monitored by the Board and its committees.

 

 

 Organisation, people and culture

 

Health, safety

and wellbeing

  

 

The Board received reports on the health, safety and wellbeing of our people. They discussed how we support our people during times of change and transformation and the importance of promoting a strong culture of safety across BT.

 

Better workplace

  

BT’s workplace transformation for UK desk-based employees will focus on around 30 modern, strategic sites to create a more collaborative, open and customer focused working culture. The Board received updates on this initiative throughout the year.

 

People framework

  

The Board discussed the programme to transform BT’s operating model and build a lean, agile organisation that delivers sustained improvement in customer experience and productivity.

 

Talent and culture

  

The Board reviewed succession plans for members of the Executive Committee, discussed talent and diversity initiatives and discussed BT’s organisational culture and aspirations.

 

Chief executive succession

  

The Board agreed that Gavin Patterson should step down as chief executive, and approved the appointment of Philip Jansen as his successor. Philip joined the Board as an executive director on 1 January 2019 and, following a handover period with Gavin Patterson, became chief executive on 1 February 2019.

 


Table of Contents
                  61
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

 Stakeholders

 

Customer experience

  

The Board considered and endorsed our customer experience ambition, performance and plans for the business.

 

Investor relations

 

  

The Board received reports on market perspectives from investor relations and the external brokers.

 

Political and regulatory

engagement

   The Board endorsed the political and regulatory strategy for the group.

 

 Governance and compliance

 

Secretary’s report

  

The company secretary reported on key governance developments and recommendations at each board meeting, including proposed changes to board committee membership and terms of reference.

 

Committee reports

  

Committee chairs reported back to the Board on matters discussed at committee meetings.

 

Corporate governance

  

The Board received briefings on developments in corporate governance, including the new Corporate Governance Code 2018, and refresher training on the Market Abuse Regulation and BT’s disclosure obligations.

 

Board evaluation

  

More details can be found on page 63. The chairman conducted individual evaluations of each director to make sure they continued to contribute effectively and demonstrated commitment to the role. The senior independent director led the chairman’s performance evaluation, taking into account the views of other directors.

 

Time commitment

All directors are expected to attend all meetings of the Board and any committees of which they are members, as well as the AGM and any board away days. Directors are also expected to devote sufficient time to prepare for each board and/or committee meeting and to take part in at least one visit to one of BT’s offices or other sites each year. By accepting their appointment each non-executive director has confirmed that they are able to allocate sufficient time to the company to discharge their responsibilities effectively. Non-executive directors are also required to obtain the agreement of the chairman before accepting any additional commitments that might affect the time they are able to devote to their role as non-executive director of BT. In accordance with the new Corporate Governance Code 2018 for the financial year 2019/20 onwards, directors must seek prior approval of the Board before accepting additional external appointments.

Attendance at meetings

The table below summarises members’ attendance at board meetings in 2018/19. If directors are unable to attend a meeting, they are encouraged to offer their views and comments on the topics and board papers to the chairman in advance of the meeting.

Board members and attendance

 

   

Member

 

 

  

 

    

Eligible
      to attend      

 

  

      Attended      

 

   

 

 

Jan du Plessis (chairman)

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Philip Jansen a

     2    2  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Gavin Patterson b

     9    9  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Simon Lowth

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Tony Ball c

     4    3  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Iain Conn

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Tim Höttges

     10    9  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Isabel Hudson

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Mike Inglis

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Matthew Key d

     4    4  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Allison Kirkby e

     0    0  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Karen Richardson c

     4    3  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Nick Rose

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Jasmine Whitbread

 

     10

 

   10

 

 

a Philip was appointed to the Board as an executive director on 1 January 2019 and became chief executive on 1 February 2019.

b Gavin stepped down from the Board at midnight on 31 January 2019.

c Tony and Karen retired from the Board on 11 July 2018.

d Matthew was appointed to the Board on 25 October 2018.

e Allison was appointed to the Board on 15 March 2019.


Table of Contents
62         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

The Board continued
Leadership continued
 

 

Director induction

On appointment, directors are provided with an induction programme to ensure they gain a thorough overview of the business. This includes meetings with the chairman, chief executive, senior independent director and company secretary, as well as other board and Executive Committee members and senior members of management. We encourage directors to visit BT sites, for example Adastral Park, the BT Sport studio, contact centres and EE shops. Directors can also spend a day with an Openreach engineer.

The programme provides new directors with details of the role and responsibilities of the Board and BT’s governance framework. New directors also receive key information such as recent financial data and the policies supporting our business practices, including our ethics code.

Division of responsibilities

The division of responsibilities between the chairman and the chief executive are clearly documented in written job descriptions, and are summarised below:

 

 

  The chairman

 

 

•  leads the Board and creates a culture of openness characterised by robust, respectful debate and appropriate challenge

 

•  promotes the highest standards of corporate governance

 

•  ensures the Board understands the nature and extent of any significant risks BT is willing to take to implement its strategy

 

•  makes sure the Board receives accurate, timely and clear information and is consulted on all relevant matters

 

•  monitors the contribution and performance of board members

 

•  makes sure BT communicates clearly with shareholders and discusses their views and concerns with the Board

 

•  acts as a key contact for important stakeholders, as well as working with the chief executive and the senior independent director to represent BT in key strategic and government relationships.

 

 

  The independent non-executive directors

 

•  bring experience and independent judgement to the Board

 

•  develop and constructively challenge strategy proposals.

 


Each non-executive director is appointed for an initial three-year term but is subject to annual re-election by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting.

 

 

 

  The non-independent, non-executive director

 

 

After acquiring EE, Deutsche Telekom’s nominated director Tim Höttges was appointed to the Board. As a non-independent, non-executive director, Tim has the same responsibilities as the other directors. Tim owes a fiduciary duty to both BT and Deutsche Telekom. We set up the Conflicted Matters Committee to identify potential or actual conflicts of interest.

 

 

  The chief executive

 

 

•  leads the group’s performance and management

 

•  proposes strategies, business plans and policies to the Board

 

•  implements board decisions, policies and strategies

 

•  develops and promotes compliance with BT’s policies on conducting business around the world

 

•  maintains an effective framework of internal control and risk management

 

•  leads the Executive Committee in the day-to-day running of every part of the business

 

•  leads, motivates and monitors the performance of BT’s senior management team, as well as overseeing succession planning for roles on the Executive Committee.

 

 

  The senior independent director

 

 

•  meets with BT’s major institutional shareholders and shareholder representative bodies to discuss matters that would not be appropriate for discussion with the chairman or the chief executive

 

•  acts as a sounding board for the chairman and as an intermediary between the chairman and other directors

 

•  reviews the chairman’s performance during the year, taking account of feedback from other board members.

 

 

 

 

 

Independence of directors

The majority of the Board are independent non-executive directors. BT judged the chairman to be independent at the time of his appointment, and considers all other non-executive directors to be independent under the terms of the Code with the exception of Tim Höttges, Deutsche Telekom’s nominated director who owes a fiduciary duty to both BT and Deutsche Telekom. Our Conflicted Matters Committee identifies potential or actual conflicts of interest for Tim.

  

 

Balance of board membership

 

LOGO

 

 


Table of Contents
                  63
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

Training and information

We encourage all directors to keep their skills and knowledge up to date, and we give the Board and individual directors any training they may need. Agendas and accompanying papers are distributed to the Board and committee members in advance of each board or committee meeting. These include reports from members of senior management and external advisers. During board meetings the chief executive provides regular updates. These are designed to give directors a good understanding of operational issues and the competitive and regulatory environment that affects BT and the wider communications industry, as well as group and business unit performance, investor relations matters and corporate responsibility. The company secretary provides briefings on any significant legal and governance developments. During the year these briefings have included updates on the new UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 and refresher training on the Market Abuse Regulation.

 

The information supplied to the Board and its committees is kept under review and formally assessed on an annual basis as part of the Board evaluation exercise. This ensures it is fit for purpose and supports the directors in effectively discharging their duties under the Companies Act, the Listing Rules, the Disclosure Guidance & Transparency Rules and the Code.

      

The chairman works with individual directors to identify any specific training they need to successfully fulfil their role. Non-executive directors regularly meet with management, enhancing their understanding of the business through briefing sessions. The chairman typically holds private sessions with our independent non-executive directors before board meetings and holds dinners before most board meetings for all board members. We hold a dinner at least once a year for members of the Board and the Executive Committee.

 

Election and re-election of directors

Matthew Key, Philip Jansen and Allison Kirkby (appointed to the Board on 25 October 2018, 1 January 2019 and 15 March 2019 respectively) will be proposed for election by shareholders at the 2019 AGM. All other directors will be proposed for annual re-election in line with the Code.

 

The Board believes that each director brings considerable knowledge and wide ranging skills and experience to the Board as a whole and continues to make an effective and valuable contribution to the deliberations of the Board. Each director has continued to perform effectively and demonstrate commitment to their role.

 

We include details of all directors’ contracts/letters of appointment in the Report on directors’ remuneration on page 90.

Board evaluation

In 2017 the Board engaged an external facilitator to carry out a review of the Board and its committees. The main actions and outcomes from the 2017/18 external evaluation are set out below:

 

 

Action

Further clarifying the allocation of risk oversight responsibilities across the Board and its committees to ensure the directors effectively discharge their duties.

 

     

 

Action

Prioritising discussions to spend more time on the most important issues facing the company and spending more time with management on strategic issues.

 

     

 

Action

Increasing attention on succession planning for senior management including the Executive Committee.

 

     

 

Action

Devoting more time to monitoring the evolution of culture.

Outcome

The most significant risks facing BT are allocated to the Board or one of its committees. The governance framework was reviewed and we reduced the number of board committees, clarifying the lines of responsibility. We also reviewed and refreshed the terms of reference of each of the committees.

 

     

Outcome

The length of board meetings has been extended and more time has been allocated to strategic matters. The annual board programme is under review to ensure that the Board has sufficient time for discussion of these issues.

     

Outcome

The Nominations Committee is now the forum which considers executive succession planning. During the year the committee has spent a considerable amount of time in connection with the appointment of the chief executive.

     

Outcome

The Board has spent time during the year on talent and culture and will continue to do so in the year ahead.

During 2018/19 we carried out an internal evaluation of the Board and its committees led by the chairman and the company secretary. Members, attendees and external advisers completed questionnaires, the output of which was discussed and debated by the Board and the respective committees. The output was positive overall. In particular the relationship between board members is positive and board discussions are viewed as open, rigorous and constructive. Our key areas of focus for 2019/20 are set out below:

 

 

Key areas of focus

 

  

 

Suggested actions

 

 

Strategy setting and

  

 

  Further time during meetings for discussion of strategic priorities, in particular, network strategy

strategic priorities

  

  Management to include external perspectives, benchmarking and insight into competitors in

    

proposals, where possible and appropriate.

 

Cultural transformation

  

 

  The Board should receive regular updates to track progress of our cultural transformation

    

  Board visits to include engagement with colleagues at all levels within the organisation.

 

Talent management

  

 

  Greater focus on senior executive succession planning at the Nominations Committee

and succession planning

  

  Regular reporting on how senior executives are performing and their development needs

for executives

 

  

  More visibility of key talent at board meetings and visits.

 


Table of Contents
64         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Relations with shareholders

    

 

Individual shareholders

We have over 829,000 individual shareholders. As well as using our website, they receive regular communications and are all invited to attend our AGM. The company secretary oversees communications with individual shareholders, making sure we respond as appropriate to any matters regarding their shareholding. A dedicated team at Equiniti (our share registrar) also looks after their needs. We encourage direct payment of dividends and e-communications; this improves the security and efficiency of our communications and reduces the amount of paper we use.

       

Institutional shareholders

Our executive management team regularly meets with institutional investors. The chairman, senior independent director and other board members also meet with investors where appropriate. We do this via an investor relations programme that includes one-to-one meetings, roadshows, group meetings, conferences and industry events. During 2018/19 we held around 500 meetings with investors, covering a wide range of topics including our strategy, financial and operational performance, capital investment, pension, remuneration, capital allocation policy and relations with government and our regulator. We gather feedback from our main shareholders, which is regularly considered by management and the Board.

In addition to the institutional shareholder programme, the following table describes some of the other ways we engage with our shareholders:

 

       AGM    The AGM provides an opportunity for directors to engage with shareholders, answer their questions and meet them informally. The 2019 AGM will take place on Wednesday 10 July in London. We invite all shareholders to attend and use the opportunity to ask questions. We encourage those who cannot attend to vote by proxy on all the resolutions put forward. All votes (with the exception of procedural resolutions) are taken on a poll. In 2018, voting levels at the AGM were over 70% of the company’s issued share capital, the same level as in 2017.   
    

Whilst the overall voting outcome was over 90% in favour of most resolutions at last year’s AGM, the 2018 Annual Remuneration Report received an overall voting outcome of 65.84% in favour. When we announced the results of this vote, we explained what actions we intended to take to consult with shareholders on this result and we provided a follow up announcement on 18 December 2018. Further details of our consultations with shareholders are contained in the Remuneration Committee chair’s letter on pages 73 to 75.

 

  
   
  Annual Report   

We publish a full annual report and accounts each year that contains a strategic report, governance section, financial statements and additional information. The report is available online and in paper format.

 

  
   
  Press releases   

We issue press releases for all substantive news relating to BT’s financial and operational performance. You can find press releases on our website.

 

  
   
  Results announcements   

We release a full set of financial and operational results at the interim and full year stage. We release trading statements at the first and third quarter with reduced disclosure, while still providing sufficient information to allow investors to model and value our business. The full year results are accompanied by a presentation hosted by senior management, and the first, second and third quarter results are webcast. All our results events provide an opportunity for investors to ask questions of management.

 

  
  Website   

Our website contains a comprehensive range of information on our company. There is a section dedicated to investors, which includes our investor calendar, financial results, presentations, press releases and contact details. The area dedicated to individual shareholders is an essential communications channel that includes information on administration services, contact information and information for our shareholders.

 

LOGO btplc.com

 

  


Table of Contents
                  65
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Substantial shareholdings

At 8 May 2019, BT had received notice, under the Financial Conduct Authority’s Disclosure Guidance & Transparency Rules, in respect of the following holdings of shares:

 

                    % of total
      Date of notification    Shares      voting rights

BlackRock Inc

   28 November 2018      497,990,721      5.01%

At 31 March 2019, BlackRock’s interest was 569,835,476 shares representing 5.74% of total voting rights. No requirement to notify the company of any increase or decrease would have arisen unless the holding moved up or down a whole number percentage level. The percentage level may decrease on the transfer of treasury shares for any of the company’s share plans.

In addition, T-Mobile Holdings Limited holds 1,196,175,322 shares representing 12% of total voting rights.

Annual General Meeting

Resolutions

As part of our policy to involve shareholders fully in the affairs of the company, our AGM gives them the opportunity to ask questions about BT’s activities. We also give shareholders the opportunity to vote on every important issue by proposing a separate resolution for each.

Before the AGM, we count the proxy votes for and against each resolution, as well as votes withheld, and make the results available at the meeting. As at previous AGMs, we will take votes on all matters at the 2019 AGM on a poll, except procedural issues.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

The separate Notice of meeting 2019, which we send to all shareholders who have requested shareholder documents by post, contains the 21 resolutions (with explanatory notes) we will propose at the 2019 AGM on 10 July in London. We notify all shareholders of the publication of these documents, which we send out in the most cost-effective way. We aim to give as much notice of our AGM as possible and at least 21 clear days’ notice, as required by our Articles of Association. In practice, we send these documents to shareholders more than 20 working days before the AGM. (For other general meetings this should be at least 14 working days in advance.)

At the AGM we will propose resolutions to re-appoint KPMG as BT’s auditors and to authorise the Audit  & Risk Committee to agree their remuneration. We will also ask our shareholders to vote on both the Annual Report and the Report on directors’ remuneration.

Authority to purchase shares

The authority given at last year’s AGM for BT to purchase in the market 992 million of its shares, representing 10% of the issued share capital, expires on 10 July 2019. We will ask shareholders to give a similar authority at the 2019 AGM.

During 2018/19, no shares were purchased under this authority. During 2018/19, we transferred 916,407 treasury shares to meet BT’s obligations under our employee share plans. At 8 May 2019, we held a total of 45.2 million shares as treasury shares.

The BT Group Employee Share Ownership Trust (the Trust) purchased 4.3 million BT shares for a total consideration of £9.5m. The Trust continued to hold 9 million shares at 8 May 2019.

 


Table of Contents
66         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

 

Nominations Committee
Chair’s report
 
 

 

Membership and key responsibilities

The committee comprises all of the company’s non-executive directors. The company secretary attends the meetings, as does the chief executive where appropriate.

We are responsible, on behalf of the Board, for keeping under review the balance of executive and non-executive directors, together with the composition of the Board and board committees in terms of members’ skills, experience, diversity, independence and knowledge.

We receive reports from the chief executive on Executive Committee succession planning. We also consider and agree appointments to and removals from the Executive Committee.

 

Attendance

    

     Member        

 

Eligible
to attend

         Attended           
 

Jan du Plessis (chair)

 

    

   6    6  
 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Tony Ball a

     2    1  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Iain Conn

     6    6  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Tim Höttges b

     5    5  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Isabel Hudson

     6    6  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Mike Inglis c

     6    6  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Matthew Key d

     2    2  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Allison Kirkby e

     0    0  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Nick Rose

     6    6  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Jasmine Whitbread c

     6    5  

a Tony stepped down from the committee on 11 July 2018.

b Tim was appointed to the committee on 1 May 2018.

c Mike and Jasmine were appointed to the committee on 1 April 2018.

d Matthew was appointed to the committee on 25 October 2018.

e Allison was appointed to the committee on 15 March 2019.

 

 

Activities in 2018/19

Succession has been the key area of focus this year. The committee oversaw the appointments of the new chief executive (following the announcement in June 2018 that Gavin Patterson would step down), and two new non-executive directors.

 

For the chief executive position, the committee agreed a role specification and undertook a detailed review of candidates suggested by both committee members and MWM Consulting (an external search organisation with no connection to BT), leading to a shortlist of potential candidates. Following a comprehensive review process, the committee made a clear recommendation to the Board, culminating in the appointment of Philip Jansen as chief executive. Philip is a proven leader with outstanding experience in managing large, complex businesses.

 

The committee also reviewed the company’s need for non-executive directors throughout the year. As with the chief executive succession process described above, MWM Consulting was engaged to identify potential new non-executive directors. Following a review of its long list of possible candidates, a shortlist of particularly promising individuals were invited to meet members of the committee and the chief executive. Following this process, the committee recommended to the Board the appointment of Matthew Key and Allison Kirkby as non-executive directors.

 

Matthew has hugely valuable and relevant experience from his time at O2 UK, Telefónica and Vodafone UK. As well as strategic skills and experience as a non-executive, Allison brings valuable and recent experience in the international telecoms sector and has experience in driving performance, improving customer service and delivering shareholder value. Both are excellent additions to the Board.

 

As well as the new appointments to the Board, the committee also recommended that Mike Inglis’s appointment as an independent non-executive director be extended for a further three-year term from 1 September 2018. Mike has a wealth of technology experience and makes a valuable and broad-ranging contribution to the Board and the committees of which he is a member.

 

 

 

 


Table of Contents
                  67
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

The committee discussed whether or not Nick and Jasmine remain independent after eight years on the Board and considered that they do, taking into account:

 

  their personal qualities and circumstances, including that there are no relevant relationships or circumstances to suggest that they do not remain independent and they have other directorships outside of BT, further evidencing that they remain independent

 

  the context of the proposed re-appointments, namely the ongoing refresh of the Board with two new non-executive directors appointed within the last 12 months and a new chief executive appointed in February 2019.

Both recommendations to the Board followed a rigorous review of Nick and Jasmine’s performance, and we continue to believe that they make a valuable and broad ranging contribution to both the Board and the committees of which they are members. This will also bring invaluable continuity during Philip’s first year as chief executive. We also reviewed their other roles to assess if they have sufficient time available to discharge their board responsibilities effectively. Our findings lead us to believe these other roles do not prevent them from making a full contribution as BT non-executive directors.

It is the current expectation of the Board that Nick and Jasmine will step down by the end of the 2020 AGM.

During the year we also conducted a review of members of the Executive Committee. 2018/19 has been a year of significant change in the business as we continued to transform BT while transitioning to a new chief executive. We consider that the Executive Committee has performed well over the year.

Board diversity

We consider the diversity of board and board committee members carefully to ensure we benefit from the right balance of skills, range of experience, knowledge and diversity (including gender). We currently have three female board members out of eleven, equivalent to 27% female representation.

We continue to work towards achieving the Hampton-Alexander review target of at least 33% female board representation by 2020, and the Parker review target of at least one director of colour by 2021. We challenge our external search consultants where necessary to ensure that diversity is always considered when drawing up candidate shortlists. However, while taking these important considerations into account, we will continue to recommend appointments to the Board based on merit and the individual skills and experience of each candidate.

 

 

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

Governance structure and effectiveness

The committee reviewed the composition, remit and terms of reference of each board committee, and recommended to the Board simplification of the governance framework.

The composition of the committees has been refreshed to take into account the new board members and the skills that they bring to the Board. The streamlining of the governance framework has reduced the number of board committees, simplifying the lines of responsibility and the operation of this framework. The BT Pensions Committee has been disbanded and overall responsibility for pensions continues to rest with the Board. Day-to-day authority and accountability for pensions is delegated via the chief executive to the chief financial officer. The Technology Committee has also been disbanded, with the duties of this committee being covered by the Board and management.

As part of the simplification of our committee structure, the Nominating  & Governance Committee has been renamed the Nominations Committee, retaining all existing duties with regards to nominating and succession for non-executive directors, executive directors and members of the Executive Committee. Responsibility for governance continues to rest with the Board.

The committee has also considered recent corporate governance developments and their implications for BT. The new UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 and the Companies (Miscellaneous Reporting) Regulations 2018 apply to BT for the financial year 2019/20. An implementation plan is in place for these new requirements and we will report on this in our 2020 Annual Report.

 


Table of Contents
68         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Nominations Committee continued

Chair’s report continued

 

Board changes 2018/19

 

  June           July          October          October          March  
  2018           2018          2018          2018          2019  
  LOGO           LOGO          LOGO          LOGO          LOGO  
  Announced that Gavin Patterson would step down as chief executive later in the year.           Karen Richardson and Tony Ball stepped down from the Board at the end of the AGM on 11 July 2018.          Matthew Key joined the Board, Audit  & Risk and Nominations Committees with effect from 25 October 2018.         

Philip Jansen announced as successor to Gavin Patterson. Appointed from 1 January 2019 as an executive director and as chief executive from 1 February 2019.

 

         Allison Kirkby joined the Board, Audit  & Risk and Nominations Committees with effect from 15 March 2019.  

The chief executive appointment process

 

       Candidate requirements        
  LOGO  
 

The committee agreed a detailed candidate profile setting out the capabilities and experience required.

 

 
                
  Process      Search       Interviews  
  LOGO      LOGO       LOGO  
  The process to appoint the new chief executive was led by the chairman, with MWM Consulting appointed to facilitate the process. The committee as a whole was closely involved in identifying and agreeing a shortlist of candidates.     

The chairman considered a full list of candidates with MWM Consulting. The full list was shared with the committee, who also considered candidates put forward independently by committee members. A shortlist of candidates to be invited for interview was agreed.

 

      Following initial interviews with the chairman and a further review with committee members, the number of candidates was reduced. The remaining committee members met with the shortlisted candidates.  
                               
  New chief executive announced  
  LOGO  
 

Following their interviews, each committee member provided feedback on the candidates to the chairman.

The committee discussed the relative merits of each candidate and agreed that Philip Jansen should be proposed

to the Board for appointment as chief executive. The Board approved his appointment as an executive director

from 1 January 2019 and as chief executive from 1 February 2019.

 

 

Committee evaluation 2018/19

We carried out an internal evaluation led by the chairman and the company secretary. This entailed questionnaires completed by members and attendees, the output of which was discussed and debated by the committee.

 

     
    Key areas of focus    Suggested actions
  Non-executive succession   

• Review the skills and experience of non-executive directors

        

• Discuss plan and next steps for non-executive succession.

 

  Talent management and succession   

• Greater focus on senior executive succession planning

    planning for executives   

• Regular reporting on how senior executives are performing and their development needs.

 

  Board diversity   

• Continue to review the composition of the Board and discuss plans to improve diversity in all its forms.

 

Jan du Plessis

Chair of the Nominations Committee

8 May 2019


Table of Contents
                  69
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

Audit & Risk Committee

Chair’s report

      
      

 

 

 

Membership and key responsibilities

 

The committee acts independently of the executive. Its members are all independent non-executive directors of the company, with diverse skills and experiences. The committee as a whole has competence relevant to the sector. Matthew Key, Allison Kirkby and I have recent and relevant financial experience, as required by the provisions of the Code and we are the designated financial experts for Sarbanes-Oxley Act purposes.

 

Attendance

  Member            

 

Eligible
to attend

         Attended           

  Nick Rose (chair)

           9    9  

 

     

 

  Iain Conn

      9    9  

 

     

 

  Matthew Key a

      3    3  

 

     

 

  Allison Kirkby b

      0    0  

 

     

 

  Karen Richardson c

      4    3  

 

     

 

  Jasmine Whitbread

      9    9  

 

a Matthew was appointed to the committee on 25 October 2018.

 

b Allison was appointed to the committee on 15 March 2019.

 

c Karen stepped down from the committee on 11 July 2018.

 

The company secretary is secretary to the committee and attends all meetings. The chairman and chief executive have attended the majority of Audit  & Risk Committee meetings during the year. Other attendees include:

 

                 Regular
attendee
   Attends as  
required  
    

  Chief financial officer

 

    

 

     

 

    

 

       

 

 

  Director, group finance

       

 

    

 

       

 

 

  Director of risk, compliance & assurance

       

 

    

 

       

 

 

  External auditors a

       

 

    

 

       

 

 

  Group general counsel

       

 

    

 

       

 

 

  External reporting & financial controls director

          

 

 

 

       

 

 

  Enterprise risk management director

          

 

 

 

       

 

 

  Ethics & compliance director

            

 

a  PwC attended the April, May and June 2018 meetings in their capacity as auditors for the 2017/18 financial year. KPMG also observed these meetings and were appointed as BT’s external auditors at the conclusion of the 2018 AGM.

 

The committee met nine times during the year. Meetings are scheduled in line with the financial reporting timetable. As chair of the Audit  & Risk Committee, I meet with the regular attendees ahead of meetings to discuss key areas of committee focus. After each meeting, reports are made to the Board on the committee’s activity, the main issues discussed and matters of particular relevance, with the Board receiving copies of the committee minutes. The external auditors were not present at meetings where their performance and/or remuneration was discussed.

 

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

During the year, we held several separate sessions with BT’s internal and external auditors, in the absence of management.

 

The Audit  & Risk Committee’s key responsibilities are set out in the committee’s terms of reference available on our website.

 

Activities in 2018/19

 

Pension valuation

In July 2018, the group announced that it had been alerted to an error made by its independent external actuary in the actuary’s calculation of the IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations at 31 March 2018. The error resulted from the incorrect application of changes to demographic assumptions.

 

The committee focused on understanding and challenging management on their assessment of this error, including whether it required restatement of published financials and re-filing of the 2017/18 financial statements on Form 20-F, and that the error constituted a material weakness in the operation of the group’s internal controls. Subsequently, the committee has overseen management’s actions in strengthening their internal controls to ensure they appropriately addressed the previously identified material weakness. Further detail on the restatement of the group’s results can be found on page 118.

 

Internal control status

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining an adequate system of internal control. The committee is responsible for overseeing the effectiveness of these controls. Last year, I reported on management’s implementation of a number of enhancements to processes and controls across the group, in response to the internal control deficiencies related to our Italian business. I also reported that management was creating a new central financial controls and assurance team, who would set and maintain controls, policies and standards going forward.

 

During the year, management continued the improvements and commenced a significant Sarbanes-Oxley control enhancement programme. The new second line of defence financial controls and assurance team is leading on this group-wide programme, with support from Deloitte and Ernst & Young. This involved documenting our in-scope end-to-end processes and related Sarbanes-Oxley controls. As a result, a greater number of processes and controls, operating to lower materiality, are now within our Sarbanes-Oxley control scope.

 

The committee has monitored the ongoing implementation of this enhancement programme, including overseeing the key risk areas. The programme identified two particular areas requiring remediation, partly associated with the wider scope: IT general controls and risk assessment, in particular, documentation of information used in controls. Although significant improvements have been made, remediation and testing of all remediating plans was not complete at 31 March 2019. Management has therefore concluded that our internal control over financial reporting was not effective as at 31 March 2019, under Sarbanes-Oxley, in relation to IT general controls and risk assessment. Management has detailed remediation plans which are intended to be completed

 

 


Table of Contents
70         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Audit & Risk Committee continued

Chair’s report continued

    

      
      

 

 

in financial year 2019/20. The committee will continue to monitor management’s progress in their remediation activities.

 

The committee has monitored the status of management’s remediation and overseen the steps taken to conclude that these material weaknesses do not result in any identified misstatements in the current period financial statements nor any prior year financial statements.

 

Management has also carried out an assessment of our close procedures, which resulted in more detailed and holistic quarterly reviews, improved quality and timeliness of reviews, as well as reduced duplication and increased standardisation. The committee continues to focus on monitoring and overseeing management on these improvements to governance, compliance and financial safeguards.

           

The new financial controls and compliance team has continued the programme of detailed balance sheet reviews, previously undertaken by Ernst & Young, including in our operations outside the UK. All actions resulting from these reviews have been tracked and monitored and the reviews have not identified significant issues or areas of concern.

 

One BT Integrity and Compliance programme

In September, management brought together, under new leadership, our risk management, compliance, internal audit and some second line assurance functions, with the intent of managing risk and providing assurance in a more co-ordinated and simplified way.

 

To extend and sustain the benefits of this across the organisation, management has launched a new programme called ‘One BT Integrity and Compliance’. This programme is designed to ensure the organisation has the optimal framework of risk management, controls

Key matters considered by the Audit & Risk Committee

 

    

April 2018

–  Openreach board audit risk & compliance committee (OBARCC) report

–  External audit and non-audit fees

–  Sarbanes-Oxley

–  Update on full year results and draft Annual Report & Form 20-F 2018

–  External auditor report

–  Internal audit plan and internal audit charter

–  Ethics & compliance and Speak Up cases.

 

May 2018 (two meetings)

–  Risk management, internal control and compliance enhancements

–  Sarbanes-Oxley

–  2017/18 full year results

–  Annual Report & Form 20-F 2018, including a review to ensure the report was fair, balanced and understandable

–  Going concern and viability statement

–  Pensions accounting

–  External and internal audit reports

–  Major litigation, competition and regulatory law

–  Financial commitments and liabilities

–  General Data Protection Regulation compliance.

 

June 2018

–  Review of the year end

–  Finance transformation programme

–  IT general controls and IT asset management

–  Regulatory financial statements 2017/18

–  Security risk management

–  Ethics & compliance, including ethical culture and controls and Speak Up cases.

 

July 2018

–  Openreach internal audit

–  FRC audit quality review

–  First quarter results

–  Pension valuation

–  External and internal audit reports

–  Regulatory financial statements 2017/18

–  Risk management, internal control and compliance enhancements

–  Sarbanes-Oxley

–  Non-audit fees

–  Major litigation, competition and regulatory law.

 

September 2018

–  Risk updates from the chief executive and the CEOs of the customer-facing units and Technology.

 

October 2018

–  Openreach board audit risk & compliance committee (OBARCC) report

–  External auditors’ engagement letter

–  One BT Integrity and Compliance programme

–  External audit and non-audit fees

–  Half year results

–  External and internal audit reports

–  Going concern assessment

–  External audit plan 2018/19

–  Ethics & compliance

–  Financial commitments and liabilities

–  Corporate income tax accounting

–  Major competition, regulatory law and litigation

–  Annual Report process review

–  Sarbanes-Oxley.

 

December 2018

–  IT user access management, IT asset management and payment card industry data security standard (PCI DSS)

–  Privacy and data governance

–  Supplier risk and assurance

–   BT Compliance Committee chair report

–  Sarbanes-Oxley

–  Ethics & compliance, regional governance committees update and Speak Up cases

–  International audit coverage and trend analysis.

 

January 2019

–  Third quarter results

–  Sarbanes-Oxley

–  External and internal audit reports

–  Developments in financial reporting, statutory audit and regulatory oversight

–  India regional governance committee

–  Financial commitments and liabilities

–  PCI DSS

–  Non-audit fees

–  Litigation, employment, competition and regulatory law.

 

April 2019 (two meetings)

–  2018/19 full year results

–  Annual Report 2019, including a review to ensure the report was fair, balanced and understandable

–  Viability and going concern statements

–  Tax and pension matters

–  Sarbanes-Oxley

–  External and internal audit reports

–  Internal Audit Charter

–  Committee evaluation

–  External auditor effectiveness

–  External audit and non-audit fees

–  Major litigation, competition and regulatory law

–  One BT Integrity and Compliance programme

–  Openreach internal audit

–  Annual Relevant Turnover Returns

–  Data Subject Access Requests.

 

    


Table of Contents
                  71
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

and assurance for dealing with our landscape of risk and uncertainty; and the right culture to support it. Improvements to date include the launch of a new code of conduct and the BT Way, as well as new training on fraud and the three lines of defence. The committee will continue to receive updates on the programme’s progress.

BT Compliance Committee

The BT Compliance Committee, a sub-committee of the Audit  & Risk Committee, oversees BT’s compliance with the Commitments made as part of the 2017 Digital Communications Review (DCR) with Ofcom. The committee met six times in 2018/19. As chair of the Audit  & Risk Committee, I have sight of agendas and minutes of BT Compliance Committee meetings.

Isabel Hudson, chair of the BT Compliance Committee, provided an update to the Audit  & Risk Committee during the year on the work undertaken in its first full year of operation, in relation to BT’s financial planning process, the strategic framework, culture and behaviours and DCR outcomes.

The BT Compliance Committee will publish a separate report on its activities for 2018/19 and this will be available on our website.

Financial reporting

The committee considered and assessed:

 

  the Annual Report and the annual, half year and quarterly trading announcements for recommendation to the Board

 

  the quality and appropriateness of accounting policies and practices, as well as critical accounting estimates and key judgements

 

  whether the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the group’s position and performance, business model and strategy. This assessment formed the basis of the advice given to the Board.

Significant issues considered in relation to the financial statements

 

 

Group accounting policies, critical accounting estimates and judgements

 

The committee considered the accounting policies and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements that relate to critical accounting estimates and judgements, the key judgements and assumptions in relation to provisions, including restructuring, regulatory risks and litigation, the assumed level of take-up in the BDUK programme (which affects the value of our potential obligation to re-invest or repay grant funding), the implementation processes for the adoption of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers, and IFRS 16, Leases, and the impacts and key judgements on the group’s accounting when adopted.

 

 

Going concern

 

Management’s forecasts of group cash flows and net debt, as well as our liquidity requirements and the borrowing facilities available to the group were considered. Following this review and a discussion of the sensitivities, we confirmed that the going concern basis of accounting continues to be an appropriate basis of preparation for the financial statements. Further detail on the basis of the going concern assessment by the directors is set out on page 92.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

Viability statement

 

The process and assessment of the group’s prospects, the time horizon and how this aligned with the group’s long-term forecasts, taking into account the company’s current position and principal risks, was assessed. The committee also considered the group risks included in management’s stress testing model. The committee was satisfied that the viability statement could be provided, and endorsed the continued selection of a three-year time horizon as a basis for the statement and the approach to its development. Further detail on the assessment of viability and the viability statement are set out on page 54.

 

 

Regulatory reporting

 

We were supportive of the changes across people, processes and systems that were put in place to ensure that we met our 2018/19 regulatory financial reporting obligations.

 

 

Pensions

 

The assumptions underlying the valuation of the pension liabilities in the financial statements, the financial assumptions as summarised in note 20 to the financial statements, the sensitivities around the assumptions and the impact of the assumptions on the balance sheet, income statement and related disclosures were considered.

 

 

Goodwill impairment

 

We considered and were satisfied with the key assumptions, including operating cash flow forecasts, resulting headroom and the sensitivity analysis performed by management and agreed that no goodwill impairment charges were required this year.

 

 

Major contracts

 

The performance of major contracts in Enterprise, Global Services, the Emergency Services Network contract and EE, specifically, were considered. Management regularly monitors BT’s exposure to major contracts and the updates to the committee included overviews of the trading and operational performance of the contracts, assessments of the recoverability of dedicated contract assets, assessments of the future performance of the contracts and any requirement for loss provisions.

 

 

Asset verification and asset lives

 

The results of management’s annual asset life review, asset verification exercise and review of fully depreciated assets were considered and we were satisfied that the judgements taken and the methodology applied were appropriate.

 

 

Other matters

 

Specific items were reviewed quarterly, and we considered whether they were appropriately categorised. We also considered management’s view of the quality of earnings and of the effective tax rate. At the half year and full year, we considered a detailed assessment of provisions and at each quarter and the full year, the committee was satisfied with the analysis provided in relation to the results.

 

 

External audit

Last year, I reported on the external audit tender process we had undertaken. Following the audit tender process, KPMG were appointed as our external auditors at the conclusion of the 2018 AGM. A change in our external auditors has provided additional challenge and a fresh perspective through which to assess our controls. Tony Cates is the lead audit partner for KPMG, and commenced his tenure on the appointment of KPMG. The company confirms that it complied with the provisions of the Competition

 


Table of Contents
72         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Audit & Risk Committee continued
 
Chair’s report continued

 

and Markets Authority’s Order for the financial year under review. The committee reviewed with the auditors the scope of work and the risk informing this, external audit findings and the letter of engagement. The committee approved KPMG’s audit plan and the letter of representation. Further information can be found in the Independent auditors’ report on pages 101 to 109.

 

Auditor independence, objectivity and effectiveness

The committee discussed independence matters and areas that could give rise to a conflict of interest and safeguards that the external auditors have in place to prevent compromising their independence and objectivity. BT has policies in place detailing non-audit services that can be provided by the external auditors. The external auditors are not permitted to perform any work which they may later be required to audit or which might affect their objectivity and independence, or create a conflict of interest. Internal procedures describe the approval process for work performed by the external auditors. This applied to KPMG throughout the year and to PwC until they stepped down. The committee monitored compliance with the policies and procedures and considered business relationships with the external auditors, and the level and appropriateness of non-audit services and fees. Further details of the non-audit services that are prohibited and allowed under the policy can be found on our website. Details of non-audit services carried out by the external auditors are described in note 9 to the consolidated financial statements. Audit-related assurance services, including the audit of the regulatory financial statements, are considered a low threat to auditor independence. The proportion of other non-audit services to total services is therefore considered the most suitable measure of the non-audit services provided. These represented 6% of the total fees (2017/18: 6%).

 

The committee also reviewed the quality of the audit and the performance of the external auditors. We concluded they were independent and recommended to the Board that they be re-appointed.

 

In addition, during the year, the Financial Reporting Council’s Audit Quality Review Team (AQRT) reviewed PwC’s audit of the group’s 2017/18 financial statements as part of their annual inspection of audit firms. I received and reviewed the final report from the AQRT which indicated that there were no significant areas of concern.

 

 

  

Internal audit

The committee:

•  reviewed and approved the annual internal audit plan at the start of the year and received regular updates on audit activities, progress against the plan, details of unsatisfactory audits and action plans to address these

•  reviewed the performance of the function twice during the year. We commissioned an external effectiveness review of internal audit in 2018/19. This was conducted, in accordance with our five-year cycle of such reviews, by the Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors

•  reviewed overdue recommendations and ensured these are tracked through to completion and subject to close monitoring by management.

 

Risk management

Each quarter, all customer-facing units certify the adequacy and effectiveness of their risk management processes and the operation of their Sarbanes-Oxley controls. BT’s risk management processes, which have been in place throughout the period under review, identify and monitor the risks facing the group. The Executive Committee and the Board regularly review the risks that are considered material.

 

During the year, the chief executive and the CEOs of each customer-facing unit and Technology (or their delegates), presented to the committee on the enterprise-wide risk management process, the key risks facing the group and the units, and the operation of the three lines of defence. The escalation of issues and how material risks are identified, evaluated and managed were also discussed.

 

The Board is ultimately responsible for the group’s system of risk management and internal control. See page 96 for further details. See US Regulation on page 94 for details on internal controls assessment for the purposes of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act.

 

Governance and compliance

We received and considered reports from management on BT’s ethics and compliance priorities, including Speak Up. We ensure that arrangements are in place for the proportionate and independent investigation of these and other matters, including privacy and data governance and anti-corruption and bribery.

Committee evaluation 2018/19

We carried out an internal evaluation of the committee led by the chairman and the company secretary. This entailed questionnaires completed by members, attendees and KPMG (our external auditors); the output of which was discussed and debated by the committee.

 

   
      Key areas of focus   

Suggested actions

 

    Risk management   

•  Further review of the quality, reliability and resilience of key controls, especially financial and IT controls, and to verify our risks

    

•  Refresh and maintain knowledge levels; increase ‘deep dive’ reviews across our key risks and financial controls.

 

    Meetings   

•  Further time for debate and challenge at meetings.

 

    Composition   

•  Continue to keep the committee composition under review.

 

Nick Rose

Chair of the Audit & Risk Committee

8 May 2019


Table of Contents
                  73
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

Report on Directors’ remuneration

Chair’s letter

      
      

 

 

LOGO

This is my first report since taking over as chair of the committee in July 2018. On behalf of the committee, I would like to thank my predecessor, Tony Ball, for his leadership and contribution. There is no doubt that this is a particularly challenging time for all remuneration committees to balance the legitimate views of all stakeholders in the area of executive remuneration and associated governance.

 

The contents of this report

are as follows:

Chair’s letter

Review of the year; committee decisions; key

outturns and plans for the year ahead

pages 73 to 75

Focus on remuneration

The key aspects of our remuneration structure, risk

management, how we have performed, how we

applied the Remuneration Policy during 2018/19

and application in 2019/20

pages 76 to 78

Annual Remuneration Report

More detail on how we have applied our

Remuneration Policy during 2018/19 including

the single figure of remuneration for each director

How we intend to apply the Remuneration Policy in 2019/20

pages 73 to 90

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Membership and key responsibilities

 

Determine the salary and benefits for the executive directors, members of the Executive Committee and the company secretary, and monitor the relationship between pay and benefits of other employees

Operation of the annual bonus scheme, including setting performance targets and objectives for the year ahead

Determine awards under the annual bonus scheme for executive directors and review the awards of other senior executives

Governance of the long-term incentive plans, including target setting

Review and approve the Annual Remuneration Report for inclusion in the Annual Report

Review, approve and ensure operation within the Remuneration Policy including seeking shareholder approval, on a binding basis, at least every three years.

 

Attendance

    

     Member         Eligible
to attend
         Attended           
 

Nick Rose (chair) a

 

    

   10    10  
 

 

    

 

 

 

 

Tony Ball b

     3    3  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Isabel Hudson

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Mike Inglis

     10    10  
 

 

    

 

 
 

Karen Richardson c

     3    2  

a Nick was appointed chair of the committee on 12 July 2018.

b Tony stepped down as chair of the committee on 11 July 2018.

c Karen stepped down as a member of the committee on 11 July 2018.

In addition to the committee members, the chairman and chief executive are invited to attend meetings, except in instances where their own remuneration is discussed or other circumstances where their attendance would not be appropriate.

The committee regularly consults the chief executive, the group HR director, and the director of reward.

The company secretary is secretary to the committee and attends all meetings.

    

    

 

 

 


Table of Contents
74         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Report on Directors’ remuneration continued

Chair’s report continued

 

 

Listening to shareholders

The interests of our shareholders underpin the committee’s oversight of our Remuneration Policy and payments to executive directors. The committee was therefore disappointed with the vote against our Annual Remuneration Report at the 2018 AGM. Following that meeting, I met with some of our shareholders and prominent proxy advisory bodies to understand why they voted against our Annual Remuneration Report. It was reassuring to hear that shareholders did not have any material concerns with our overall Remuneration Policy. Rather, some shareholders felt that the annual bonus pay-out last year did not align with the overall share price performance. In addition, there was concern around the amount of annual bonus paid to Gavin Patterson given the Board’s announcement, shortly after its bonus decision, that Gavin would be stepping down.

I explained to shareholders that, in line with best practice, the committee had applied its discretion to reduce bonuses for all executive directors down to target levels despite the formulaic results yielding a higher bonus. However, given the significant share price fall over 2017/18, some shareholders felt the reduction in bonus was not sufficient. The committee discussed shareholders’ feedback at length. In response, we have implemented a new process whereby, in reviewing performance against the formulaic targets under our various incentive plans, we will give greater weight to a broader range of performance factors and circumstances, including share price performance, when determining the overall outcome.

I have continued the dialogue with some of our shareholders, particularly in relation to the 2018/19 bonus outcomes. I’d like to thank those shareholders who have taken the opportunity to engage with me. The committee has carefully considered these views when making its final decisions.

Business performance

This year has once again been difficult for the committee in balancing the performance achieved with remuneration outcomes. Although reported numbers indicate a broadly flat performance year-on-year, management has had to overcome significant headwinds impacting EBITDA including regulatory price reductions of £252m, cost inflation (including the effect of cumulo rate increases) of £362m and declines in fixed voice of £179m. The final outcome for the year as a whole was therefore very creditable and allowed us to report numbers at the top end of market expectations.

The committee noted further progress this year in meeting our year-on-year customer service targets, with Group Net Promoter Score up 6.5 points and Right First Time up 5.4%, continuing improvement over eleven consecutive quarters. Customer complaints to Ofcom reduced by a third for both BT’s consumer broadband and EE’s mobile customers.

Investment and delivery in our core networks have significantly improved with accelerated fibre-to-the-premises (FTTP) build and ambition, doubling the number of premises passed to 1.2 million at the lower end of the cost range (£300-£400), and achieving around 2 million premises passed with G Fast. EE has retained the ‘best mobile network’ position for the fifth consecutive year in the 2018 RootMetrics survey and we are on track to launch 5G in 16 cities in 2019 with a range of device partners.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

All of this has been achieved against a backdrop of very significant organisational change as part of the first phase of transformation. The restructuring programme has achieved annualised cost savings of £875m and enabled us to simplify our business and systems and to de-layer our organisation. Ofcom has recognised the ‘significant progress’ made in its reports of June and November 2018 and the committee recognised that much has been done in the year to rebuild our relationship with Ofcom to put us on a better footing for future strategic discussions.

And we have navigated the additional challenge of a chief executive transition, with an orderly and well controlled handover, and with real progress on delivery of our transformation agenda, which is critical to building the foundations for growth and success in the future.

The committee also recognises that despite much good work during the year, as I write this letter our share price has remained essentially flat this year, albeit marginally outperforming the sector.

Reward outcomes for the year

Performance relative to our financial and customer experience targets led to a formulaic annual bonus outcome of just over 146% of target for the executive directors. However, considering the overall shareholder experience, the broadly flat earnings performance and the insufficient progress we have made in closing the customer service gap versus our competition, the committee exercised its discretion to reduce the annual bonus outturn relative to the financial and customer experience targets to 115% of target. This resulted in Philip Jansen and Simon Lowth receiving an annual bonus of 134% and 137% of salary, respectively. More information on the 2018/19 annual bonus is on pages 80 and 81.

In the three-year period 1 April 2016 to 31 March 2019, the group performed below threshold against the revenue, free cashflow and relative total shareholder return targets under the 2016 Incentive Share Plan (ISP) award. This resulted in no payment being made under the 2016 ISP. More information on the 2016 ISP is on page 81.

Chief executive changes

Departure of Gavin Patterson

When we announced Gavin’s departure from BT last June, the Board felt we did not have an internal successor and wanted the opportunity to conduct an extensive external search to identify the best possible candidate to lead the company in the next phase of its development. The Board therefore concluded at that time that it was in the company’s best interests to ask Gavin to remain in place to ensure the best continuity and the smoothest transition possible to a new chief executive. As part of Gavin’s commitment to do this, the committee agreed that he would be eligible for a bonus based on the overall financial outcomes and his personal objectives including delivery of key strategic programmes (eg 5G and FTTP to plan), rebuilding trust and reputation with the regulator, developing and implementing a new operating model, the delivery of the digital communications review with Ofcom and ensuring a seamless transition to the new chief executive.

 


Table of Contents
                  75
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

The committee has reviewed Gavin’s overall performance for the year in the light of these objectives and concluded that the personal element of his bonus would merit an on target outcome. This reflects the role Gavin played in a seamless transition to Philip as our new chief executive, and the momentum sustained in progressing our transformation programme. However, having concluded on the formulaic outcomes for Gavin, the committee was keen to get input from some of our major shareholders, knowing full well that shareholders and society at large expect remuneration committees to exercise discretion more frequently, especially when an executive is leaving an organisation.

We received a broad range of views representing some of our largest shareholders, including our largest shareholder Deutsche Telekom. Having listened carefully to this feedback and after discussion with Gavin, the committee and Gavin agreed that a reduction of the total bonus outcome by 50% would be the right thing to do and in the best interests of all stakeholders. This resulted in Gavin receiving an annual bonus of 56% of target. Further details can be found on page 81. In addition, the committee exercised its discretion and, with Gavin’s agreement, decided that his 2017 ISP should lapse in full. (Gavin was not awarded a 2018 ISP.) This has been a difficult decision and a difficult year for the committee to balance all the relevant factors.

Appointment of Philip Jansen

During the year we welcomed our new chief executive, Philip Jansen, a proven leader with exceptional experience in managing large and complex businesses. In considering Philip’s remuneration package, the committee sought to balance the desire to secure his services with adherence to our Remuneration Policy. Throughout, we were guided by the views of shareholders and the provisions of the new UK Corporate Governance Code (the new Code) published by the Financial Reporting Council in July 2018. Philip has made a really excellent start as chief executive. However as detailed on page 81 the committee felt that the personal element of his bonus should be capped at 50% of maximum given the short period in question.

As detailed in the appointment announcement on 25 October 2018, Philip’s base salary is £1,100,000, which is fixed for five years. He receives our standard executive benefits package and a cash allowance in lieu of pension of 15% of salary in line with the wider management population in the UK. Philip’s incentive opportunities are in line with our Remuneration Policy, with a maximum annual bonus of 240% of salary and a maximum ISP award of 400% of salary. His annual bonus for 2018/19 has been pro-rated to reflect his period of service. He was awarded a 2018 ISP in February 2019. This recognises that he will be leading BT’s progress towards these targets for most of the three-year performance period. The award was made at a reduced level of 300% of salary to recognise that he joined part-way through the first year.

Philip also received an award with a face value of £895,848 to compensate him for his loss in shares forfeited from Worldpay, his previous employer. The buy-out award mirrors the value and terms of the original award forfeited. Following the announcement that FIS will acquire Worldpay, Worldpay has confirmed the original award will vest in full. Therefore, Philip’s BT buy-out award will also vest in full on 20 March 2020, subject to continued employment. Philip has voluntarily agreed to hold any vested shares for a further year.

As communicated at the time of appointment, Philip invested nearly £2m in purchasing BT shares in November 2018.

 

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

2019 remuneration

We are not proposing any major changes to our executive director remuneration in 2019. Our chief financial officer, Simon Lowth, will receive a salary increase of 2.5%, in line with that for the wider workforce, while Philip Jansen is not eligible for an increase as the committee agreed on his appointment to fix his base pay for five years.

In terms of the 2019 ISP awards, the committee has reviewed the level of ISP award for Philip Jansen and Simon Lowth and agreed awards of 400% and 350% respectively in line with our Remuneration Policy. Recognising the need to ensure that our remuneration arrangements support the delivery of BT’s strategy under Philip’s stewardship, the committee has delayed agreeing the ISP 2019 performance conditions. The intention is that awards will be granted in June 2019 and full details of the performance conditions will be disclosed in advance of the AGM.

Corporate governance

The committee welcomes the new Code. We are already aligned with the new provisions in several areas. For example, approval of remuneration for the Executive Committee already falls within our remit. We also now consider a broader range of performance factors and wider circumstances when determining incentive pay-outs and do not simply follow the formulaic outcome. Finally, we took the opportunity to align the pension provision for our new chief executive to that of the wider management population in the UK, reflecting society’s sentiment in this area.

We have also chosen to disclose our chief executive pay ratio for 2018/19. This is set out on page 87.

Looking ahead

2019 will be another busy year for the committee. Our primary aim is to ensure that executive pay continues to support the delivery of our business strategy, and that outcomes are appropriately aligned with shareholders’ interests.

We will put our Remuneration Policy to shareholders for approval at the 2020 AGM. Ahead of this, we will carry out a thorough review of our remuneration framework and metrics, recognising the need to ensure that our arrangements support the delivery of BT’s strategy under Philip Jansen’s stewardship and best align executive rewards with shareholder rewards and any new Code provisions. We will consult with shareholders on any proposals during the year, and I look forward to an open and constructive dialogue.

We will further develop our compliance with the new Code, with a close eye on wider market practice, the expectations of our stakeholders and, of course, what is in the best interests of BT.

Finally, I would like to thank our shareholders for taking the time to engage with us over the course of the year and I look forward to seeing you at our 2019 AGM.

 

Nick Rose

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

8 May 2019

 


Table of Contents
76         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Focus on remuneration

How we align our remuneration policy with shareholders’

interests and risk management

    

      

 

 

  Base salary and core benefits

 

   
Alignment with shareholders’ interests     Risk management

 

   

 

•  Forms a key part of the remuneration framework required to attract, retain and motivate the calibre of executives needed to shape and execute our strategy and generate shareholder value.

   

•  Loss of existing talent and an inability to recruit new talent would represent a risk to the business

 

•  Mitigated by setting salary and benefits at a level that is competitive against relevant businesses and recognises breadth of the role and individual experience.

 

 

   

 

Application in 2018/19     Application for 2019/20

 

   

 

•  An increase of 2.5% for Gavin Patterson and Simon Lowth was applied in June 2018

 

•  Base salary for Gavin Patterson of £1,022,000 and for Simon Lowth £717,500

 

•  Gavin Patterson and Simon Lowth received a cash pensions allowance of 30% of salary

 

•  Philip Jansen’s remuneration package was agreed upon appointment with a base salary of £1,100,000 fixed for five years and a cash pension allowance of 15% of salary

 

•  Benefits include company car, fuel or driver, personal telecommunication facilities and home security, medical and dental cover (for the directors and immediate family), life cover, professional subscriptions, personal tax advice and financial counselling.

 

      

• An increase of 2.5% for Simon Lowth to be applied in June 2019

 

• No change to Philip Jansen’s base salary

 

• There are no changes being proposed to the benefit framework or pension arrangements for 2019/20 for Philip Jansen or Simon Lowth.

 

  Annual bonus

 

   
Alignment with shareholders’ interests     Risk management

 

   

 

•  Financial and personal objectives are set with reference to our business strategy approved by the Board

 

•  Focused on KPIs for the business, including:

–  EPS, free cash flow and revenue (excluding transit)

–  Delivering great customer service

–  Strategic objectives linked to key operational and strategic projects

 

•  Deferral of one-third of the bonus for three years provides retention and alignment over the longer term.

      

•  The Board seeks to ensure that the budget balances achievable goals without encouraging undue risk, with incentive targets aligned with delivering the budget

 

•  The financial metrics reflect how well management mitigates our principal business risks

 

•  The committee retains absolute discretion to reduce variable compensation in light of risk and the group’s overall performance and circumstances

 

•  Bonus deferral encourages a focus on long-term outcomes

 

•  Malus and clawback provisions are in place.

 

 

   

 

Application in 2018/19     Application for 2019/20

 

   

 

•  The maximum level of bonus opportunity was 240% for Gavin Patterson and Philip Jansen, and 180% for Simon Lowth

 

•  Performance relative to our financial and customer experience targets led to formulaic annual bonus outcome of 146.5% of target for the executive directors

 

•  The committee exercised its discretion to reduce the financial and customer experience annual bonus outturn to 115% of target. This resulted in an annual bonus of 56% of maximum for Philip Jansen and 76% of maximum for Simon Lowth

 

•  Having concluded on the formulaic outcome for Gavin Patterson, listened carefully to shareholder feedback, and following discussion with Gavin, the committee and Gavin agreed that a reduction of the total bonus outcome by 50% would be the right thing to do and in the best interests of all stakeholders. This resulted in an annual bonus of 28% of maximum for Gavin Patterson.

 

   

•  No changes are being proposed to the maximum bonus opportunities or to the overall structure of the annual bonus

 

•  Minor changes are being made to the way some of our performance metrics are measured to ensure that they remain fully aligned with the business’ main areas of focus

 

•  Change to revenue measure to be inclusive of transit revenue, to reflect how we are reporting in our quarterly financial statements

 

•  Introduction of Keeping Our Promises measure in place of Right First Time to reflect that this provides a better measure of meeting the commitments we make and providing more reliable services for our customers.

    

 


Table of Contents
                  77
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

  Incentive Share Plan (ISP)

 

   
Alignment with shareholders’ interests     Risk management

 

   

 

•  Based on performance against free cash flow, revenue (excluding transit) and total shareholder return

 

•  Total shareholder return (TSR) metric provides a direct measure of our relative performance against peers.

      

•  Metrics balance internal and external financial performance, producing a rounded view of performance and effective risk management over the longer term

 

•  Two year holding period ensures individuals retain exposure to the share price for at least five years in total.

 

 

   

 

Application in 2018/19     Application for 2019/20

 

   

 

•  No award for Gavin Patterson

 

•  Philip Jansen received an award of 300% of salary in February 2019, reduced from 400% to reflect his joining part way through the three-year performance period

 

•  Simon Lowth received an award of 350% of salary.

 

   

•  At the time of going to print, the ISP 2019 targets had not been set by the committee

 

•  Full details of the performance measures will be disclosed in advance of the AGM in July.

  Shareholding guidelines    
Alignment with shareholders’ interests     Risk management

 

   

 

•  Shareholding guidelines ensure appropriate alignment between executives and investors

 

•  Current shareholding levels are set out on page 83.

   

•  Encourages executives to build and hold a material, personal stake in the business

 

•  Ensures that they have significant equity at stake in the event of adverse risk-related events.

 

 

   

 

Application in 2018/19     Application for 2019/20

 

   

 

•  Gavin Patterson: equivalent to 300% of salary

   

•  No changes are being proposed.

•  Philip Jansen: equivalent to 300% of salary

   

•  Simon Lowth: equivalent to 250% of salary.

 

   

 

Our remuneration principles are to maintain a competitive remuneration package that promotes the long-term success of the business, avoids excessive or inappropriate risk taking and aligns management’s interests with those of shareholders.

We believe in pay for performance against challenging targets and stretching goals for the annual bonus and long-term incentive shares. A significant proportion of the total remuneration package is therefore variable and linked to corporate performance.

In applying these principles, the committee determines the remuneration policy for the executive directors and the chairman.

The chairman is not a member of the committee.

The committee:

 

  reviews the performance targets regularly to ensure that they are both challenging and closely linked to the group’s strategic priorities. Furthermore, because a large part of the remuneration package is delivered in shares and senior executives are required to build up a significant shareholding themselves, they are directly exposed to the same gains or losses as all other shareholders.

 

  takes account of the pay and employment conditions of all our employees, the performance of the group and the individual, the current views and guidelines of shareholders and their representatives, and general market conditions. Remuneration arrangements at other companies of a similar size and complexity are also reviewed for guidance.

 

  continues to keep under review the relationship of risk to remuneration. The chair of the Audit  & Risk Committee is chair of the Remuneration Committee.

 

  ensures that the incentive structure for senior executives does not raise environmental, social or governance risks by inadvertently motivating irresponsible behaviour. Part of the annual bonus depends upon an assessment of each senior executive’s personal contribution which typically includes the environmental, social and governance agenda.

 

  retains absolute discretion to reduce variable compensation in light of risk and the group’s overall performance and any other factor it deems relevant.
 

    

 


Table of Contents
78         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

     Focus on remuneration continued   The Remuneration Report is colour-coded as follows:
          Fixed pay    Annual bonus    Incentive
             Annual bonus,      Share Plan  (ISP)
        deferred bonus  

 

Pay breakdown

The pay breakdown for the executive directors in 2017/18 and 2018/19 is set out below.

 

Gavin Patterson a

 

Former chief executive

LOGO

 

      

Philip Jansen

 

Current chief executive

LOGO

 

      

Simon Lowth

 

Chief financial officer

LOGO

 

 

a  

Gavin stood down from the Board at midnight on 31 January 2019.

 

b  

The group returned below threshold performance against all of the performance measures for the 2015 ISP. No payment was made.

 

c  

The group returned below threshold performance against all of the performance measures for the 2016 ISP. No payment was made.

 

d  

Philip was appointed to the Board on 1 January 2019 and became chief executive on 1 February 2019. His first ISP award was made in February 2019.

 

 

Annual bonus for 2018/19

 

The resulting bonus outcomes as a percentage of base salary were:

 

Gavin Patterson (pro-rated to reflect the period he was in full-time employment during the year)

 

LOGO

 

 

Philip Jansen (pro-rated to reflect the period he was in full-time employment during the year)

 

LOGO

 

 

Simon Lowth

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

Vesting of 2016 ISP award

The ISP is a conditional share award with three performance conditions measured over a three-year performance period. The group returned below-threshold performance against all of the performance measures for the 2016 ISP. This resulted in no payment being made.

 

LOGO

    

 


Table of Contents
                  79
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Annual remuneration report

 

    

This section summarises all elements of the directors’ remuneration in 2018/19.

References to ‘audited’ refer to an audit performed in accordance with UK statutory reporting requirements. For US purposes, disclosures have not been audited from a Public Company Accounting Oversight Board perspective.

Single total figure of remuneration (audited)

The following sets out all emoluments received by directors for the financial years 2018/19 and 2017/18, including bonus and deferred bonus, long-term incentive share plans (ISP) and pension arrangements.

 

     

Base salary

and fees

(2018/19)

£000

    

Base salary

and fees

(2017/18)

£000

    

 

Benefits

excluding

pension

(2018/19)

£000

    

Benefits

excluding

pension

(2017/18)

£000

    

Pension a

(2018/19)

£000

    

Pension

(2017/18)

£000

    

Annual

Bonus b

(2018/19)

£000

    

Annual

Bonus

(2017/18)

£000

    

ISP c

(2018/19)

£000

    

ISP d

(2017/18)

£000

    

Malus e

2017/18

    

Total

2018/19

£000

    

Total

2017/18

£000

 
     

Chairman

                                                                                                                    

Jan du Plessis

     700        322        24        43                                                                       724        365  
     

Executive directors

                                                                                                                    

Philip Jansen f

     275               39               41               370                                    725        0  

Simon Lowth

     715        700        23        23        214        210        982        907                             1,934        1,840  
     

Non-executive directors

                                                                                                                    

Iain Conn

     124        122                                                                                         124        122  

Tim Höttges g

                                                                                                    0        0  

Isabel Hudson h

     157        188        3        1                                                                       160        189  

Mike Inglis h

     126        105        2        2                                                                       128        107  

Matthew Key h,i

     39                 1                                                                                40        0  

Allison Kirkby j

     3                                                                                                  3        0  

Nick Rose h

     171        173        1        2                                                                       172        175  

Jasmine Whitbread

     134        107                                                                                         134        107  
     

Sub-total

     2,444        1,717        93        71        255        210        1,352        907                             4,144        2,905  
     

Former directors

                                                                                                                    

Gavin Patterson k

     847        997        46        57        254        299        572        1,292                      -338        1,719        2,307  

Tony Ball h,l

     36        138        1        2                                                                       37        140  

Karen Richardson h,m,n

     36        127        8        31                                                                       44        158  
     

Total

     3,363        2,979        148        161        509        509        1,924        2,199                      -338        5,944        5,510  

 

a  

Pension allowance paid in cash for the financial year – see ‘Total pension entitlement’ on page 81.

b  

Annual bonus shown includes both the cash and deferred share element. The deferred element of the 2018/19 bonus includes the value of deferred shares to be granted in June 2019. Further details of the deferred element are set out on page 81.

c  

The ISP 2016 granted in June 2016 will lapse in full. Further details are provided on page 81.

d  

The ISP 2015 granted in June 2015 lapsed in full in May 2018.

e  

As a result of investigations into improper accounting practices in BT’s Italian business, the committee exercised its discretion and applied the malus provisions under the deferred bonus plan. This was applied in May 2017 and the figure was calculated based on the share price at the original grant.

f  

Philip was appointed as a director on 1 January 2019 and became chief executive from 1 February 2019.

g  

Under the terms of the Relationship Agreement between BT and Deutsche Telekom and Tim’s letter of appointment, no remuneration is payable for this position.

h  

Value shown relates to reimbursement of reasonable travelling and other expenses (including any relevant tax) incurred in carrying out their duties.

i  

Matthew was appointed as a director on 25 October 2018.

j  

Allison was appointed as a director on 15 March 2019.

k  

Gavin stood down as a director at midnight on 31 January 2019.

l  

Tony retired as a director on 11 July 2018.

m  

Karen retired as a director on 11 July 2018.

n  

Includes an additional fee for regular travel to Board and board committee meetings.

 


Table of Contents
80         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Annual remuneration report continued

    

    

      
      

 

Additional disclosures relating

to the single figure table (audited)

Salaries

Executive directors’ salaries are reviewed annually, with increases typically effective from 1 June. We reviewed the salaries for Gavin Patterson and Simon Lowth during the year and agreed a 2.5% increase in line with increases for the UK management population and a lower increase than that given to team members. The new base salaries were £1,022,000 and £717,500 respectively. We agreed Philip Jansen’s salary of £1,100,000 (fixed for five years) at the time of his appointment in January 2019.

The annualised pay settlement for our team members in the UK in 2018/19 was 3.1%.

Benefits

Benefits provided to the executive directors and the chairman include company car, fuel or driver, personal telecommunication facilities and home security, medical and dental cover (for the directors and immediate family), life cover (executive directors only), professional subscriptions, personal tax advice and financial counselling.

Annual bonus

The annual bonus opportunities (expressed as a percentage of salary) for the executive directors in 2018/19 were as follows:

Chief executive

 

LOGO

Chief financial officer

 

LOGO

The annual bonus opportunities for the chief executive applied to Gavin Patterson and Philip Jansen during their respective time in the role as chief executive.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

We set out below the weighting of the annual bonus structure for the executive directors in 2018/19.

 

LOGO

The annual bonus is based on performance against key financial and non-financial metrics, and personal objectives. Key measures under the financial and non-financial elements include adjusted earnings per share, cash flow, revenue (excluding transit) and customer experience.

As set out in the table below, the formulaic results against targets produced an above-target outcome across all of the measures. However, considering the overall shareholder experience, the broadly flat earnings performance and the insufficient progress we have made in closing the customer service gap versus our competition, the committee exercised its discretion to reduce the annual bonus outturn relative to the financial and customer experience targets to 115% of target.

 

Measure    Threshold      Target      Stretch      Actual      Outcome  

Adjusted EPS (p) a

     24.6        25.9        27.8        26.3       

Between
target and
stretch
 
 
 

Normalised

free cash flow (£m) b

     2,270        2,389        2,569        2,440       

Between
target and
stretch
 
 
 

Revenue (excluding

transit) (£m)

     22,848        23,079        23,425        23,300       

Between
target and
stretch
 
 
 

Customer

experience

     50        100        200        164.13       

Between
target and
stretch
 
 
 

 

a  

Adjusted EPS is defined on page 31.

b  

Normalised free cash flow is defined on page 31.

 


Table of Contents
                  81
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

The assessment of performance against personal objectives was carried out by the chairman for Gavin Patterson and Philip Jansen, and by Gavin Patterson for Simon Lowth. In addition, the Nominations Committee reviewed the performance of the executive directors as part of a wider Executive Committee performance review. These assessments were based on a number of factors including BT’s regular employee surveys and performance against personal objectives set at the start of the year.

Gavin Patterson achieved 50% of maximum for his personal contribution score. This reflected Gavin’s progress against the delivery of key strategic programmes (eg 5G and FTTP to plan), rebuilding trust and reputation with the regulator, developing and implementing a new operating model, the delivery of the digital communications review with Ofcom and ensuring a seamless transition to Philip Jansen. Having concluded on the formulaic outcomes for Gavin, listened carefully to shareholder feedback, and following discussion with Gavin, the committee and Gavin agreed that a reduction of the total bonus outcome by 50% would be the right thing to do and in the best interests of all stakeholders.

Philip Jansen achieved 50% of maximum for his personal contribution score. Philip has made an excellent start in the role as chief executive. However, given that he is new to the role, the committee felt that target level of achievement was appropriate and consistent with how we treat other new joiners in the company.

Simon Lowth achieved 90% of maximum for his personal contribution score. In addition to successfully delivering this year’s financial outturns, Simon has demonstrated stand-out leadership in transforming the finance function. This has included improving our risk management processes, strengthening our controls, and bolstering the team with new skills and experience. He has also helped with the transition of the Strategy & Transformation function to Michael Sherman. As a member of the Openreach board, he played an important role in delivering the Digital Communications Review.

The table below sets out the total bonus outturns:

 

   

Financial and customer

service measures

(80% weighting)

 

Personal

objectives

(20% weighting)

   
    

 

Formulaic

outcome

 

Following

discretion

 

Formulaic

outcome

 

Following

discretion

  Overall bonus

Gavin

Patterson

 

146.5%

of target    

 

57.5%

of target    

 

100%

of target    

 

50%

of target    

 

28% of maximum

67% of salary

£381,547 cash/

£190,773 shares

Philip

Jansen

 

146.5%

of target

 

115%

of target

 

100%

of target

 

100%

of target

 

56% of maximum

134% of salary

£246,400 cash/

£123,200 shares

Simon

Lowth

 

146.5%

of target

 

115%

of target

 

140%

of target

 

140%

of target

 

76% of maximum

137% of salary

£654,360 cash/

£327,180 shares

For executive directors, one-third of any bonus paid is deferred into shares for three years with the remaining two-thirds paid in cash. Deferred shares are not subject to performance conditions.

Gavin Patterson’s bonus, paid both in cash and deferred shares, represented 67% of salary (pro-rated to reflect the period he was chief executive during the year) (2017/18: 130%) and 28% of the maximum bonus opportunity (2017/18: 54%).

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Philip Jansen’s bonus, paid both in cash and deferred shares, represented 134% of salary (pro-rated to reflect the period he was in full-time employment during the year) (2017/18: N/A) and 56% of the maximum bonus opportunity (2017/18: N/A).

Simon Lowth’s bonus, paid both in cash and deferred shares, represented 137% of salary (2017/18: 130%) and 76% of the maximum bonus opportunity (2017/18: 70%).

The deferred shares will be granted in June 2019.

Incentive share plan 2016 (audited)

The ISP is a conditional share award. The committee assesses the performance conditions to 31 March 2019 and the awards would ordinarily vest in May 2019. The performance conditions are based 40% on relative TSR, 40% on normalised free cash flow, and 20% on growth in underlying revenue (excluding transit) over a three-year performance period.

As set out in the table below, the threshold performance target in respect of each measure was not met and therefore no payment was made.

 

     

40% Total Shareholder

Return

 

40% Normalised

free cash flow

 

20% Underlying

revenue growth

(excluding transit)

Performance

Threshold

12th

 

Outcome

20th =

threshold

not met

 

 

Performance

Threshold

£10.70bn

 

Outcome

£8.19bn =

threshold

not met

 

Performance

Threshold

2.1%

 

Outcome

(2.19)% =

threshold

not met

Total pension entitlements (audited)

We closed the BT Pension Scheme (BTPS) to new entrants on 31 March 2001. None of the executive directors participate in future service accrual in the BTPS.

New UK employees are eligible to join a defined contribution scheme, typically a personal pension plan. For executive directors, the company agrees to pay a fixed percentage of the executive’s salary each year which can be put towards the provision of retirement benefits.

Philip Jansen receives an annual allowance equal to 15% of salary in lieu of pension provision as set out in the table on page 79. Philip has not previously been a member of any of the company pension schemes. BT also provides death in service cover consisting of a lump sum equal to four times his salary.

Gavin Patterson receives an annual allowance equal to 30% of salary in lieu of pension provision as set out in the table on page 79. Gavin has previously been a member of the BT Retirement Saving Scheme (BTRSS) but neither he nor the company has made any contribution to the scheme during 2018/19. BT also provides death in service cover consisting of a lump sum equal to four times his salary plus a dependant’s pension equal to 30% of his capped salary.

Simon Lowth receives an annual allowance equal to 30% of salary in lieu of pension provision as set out in the table on page 79. Simon has not previously been a member of any of the company pension schemes. BT also provides death in service cover consisting of a lump sum equal to four times his salary plus a dependant’s pension equal to 30% of his capped salary.

Jan du Plessis is not a member of any of the company pension schemes. The company has made no payments towards his retirement provision and provided no life cover benefit.

 


Table of Contents
82         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Annual remuneration report continued

    

    

      
      

 

Awards granted during the year (audited)

2018 ISP awards

The 2018 ISP awards were made in June 2018 and February 2019 as set out below and on page 85. Despite serving as chief executive for almost a year of the performance period, no award was made to Gavin Patterson on the basis of him stepping down as chief executive at the end of January 2019.

The award for Simon Lowth was 350% of salary.

To reflect his joining part way through the three-year performance period, an award of 300% of salary was made to Philip Jansen.

 

Director

 

  

Date of award

 

  

ISP award

(shares)

 

  

Face value
of award

 

Philip Jansen a

   1 February 2019    1,412,872    £3,299,056

Simon Lowth b

   19 June 2018    1,190,071    £2,511,248

 

a  

Face value based on share price at the date of grant of 233.56p. The grant price is calculated using the average middle-market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant.

b  

Face value based on share price at the date of grant of 211.02p. The grant price is calculated using the average middle-market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant.

The ISP is a conditional share award. Performance conditions attached to the awards are based on: 40% relative TSR, 40% normalised free cash flow, and 20% growth in underlying revenue excluding transit over a three-year performance period from 1 April 2018 to 31 March 2021. The performance conditions are the same for both directors. The table below sets out the pay-out ranges for TSR, the normalised free cash flow and underlying revenue growth excluding transit for the three-year performance period 2018/19 to 2020/21.

 

TSR position  

Proportion vesting
(of TSR portion of award)

 

 

Proportion vesting
(of overall award)

 

1-5

  100.0%   40.0%

6

  81.3%   32.5%

7

  62.50%   25.0%

8

  43.75%   17.5%

9

  25.00%   10.0%

10-17

  0.00%   0.0%

As disclosed in the 2018 Directors’ Remuneration Report, the committee agreed a revised comparator group of 16 other companies for the 2018 awards as set out below.

 

 

Centrica

 

   Proximus    Telecom Italia

 

Deutsche Telekom

 

   Sky    Telefónica

 

KPN

 

   SSE    Telenor

 

Liberty Global

 

   Swisscom    Telia Company

 

National Grid

 

   TalkTalk    Vodafone

 

Orange

 

         

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Financial targets

 

Measure

2018/19–2020/21

 

  

Threshold

 

    

Level of
vesting

 

    

Maximum

 

    

Level of
vesting a

 

 

Normalised free cash flow

   £ 6.4bn        25%      £ 7.4bn        100%  
Underlying revenue growth (excluding transit)      0.2%        25%        1.9%        100%  

 

a  

Vesting levels between threshold and maximum will be on a straight line basis.

When setting the targets, the committee takes into account the budget, medium-term plan and consensus at the time. The committee believes the performance ranges for free cash flow and revenue measures are challenging, and the financial performance necessary to achieve the upper end of the range for each measure is stretching.

When ISP awards vest, additional shares representing the value of reinvested dividends on the underlying shares are added.

The awards are subject to a further holding period of two years, commencing from the end of the performance period and applied to the net number of shares received after tax and other statutory deductions. During the holding period, no further performance measures will apply.

2018 deferred shares (DBP)

We awarded a proportion of the 2017/18 annual bonus in deferred shares. The table below provides further details.

 

Director

 

  

Date of award

 

    

DBP award
(shares)

 

    

Face value 
of award a

 

 

Gavin Patterson

     19 June 2018        204,072      £ 430,626  

Simon Lowth

     19 June 2018        143,306      £ 302,400  

 

a  

Face value based on share price at grant of 211.02p. The grant price is calculated using the average middle-market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant.

The DBP is a conditional share award. Deferred shares are not subject to performance conditions and have a three-year vesting period. Details of all interests in deferred shares are set out on page 85.

When DBP awards vest, additional shares representing the value of reinvested dividends on the underlying shares are added.

Joining arrangements for Philip Jansen

During the year we welcomed our new chief executive, Philip Jansen, a proven leader with exceptional experience in managing large and complex businesses. In considering Philip’s remuneration package, the committee sought to balance the desire to secure his service with adherence to our Remuneration Policy. Throughout, we were guided by the views of shareholders and the provisions of the new Code.

 


Table of Contents
                  83
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Philip’s base salary is £1,100,000, which is fixed for five years. He receives our standard executive benefits package and a cash allowance in lieu of pension of 15% of salary in line with our wider management population in the UK. Philip’s incentive opportunities are in line with our Remuneration Policy, with a maximum annual bonus of 240% of salary and a maximum ISP award of 400% of salary. His annual bonus for 2018/19 has been pro-rated to reflect his period of service. He was awarded a 2018 ISP in February 2019. This recognises that he will be leading BT’s progress towards the targets for most of the three-year performance period. To recognise that he joined part-way through the first year, the award was made at a reduced level of 300% of salary.

Philip also received an award with a face value of £895,848 to compensate him for his loss in shares forfeited from Worldpay, his previous employer. The buy-out award mirrors the value and terms of the award forfeited. Following the announcement that FIS will acquire Worldpay, Worldpay have confirmed the original award will vest in full. Therefore, Philip’s BT buy-out award will also vest in full on 20 March 2020, subject to continued employment. Philip has voluntarily agreed to hold any vested shares for a further year until 20 March 2021.

 

Director    Date of award      RSP award
(shares)
     Face value
of award a
 

Philip Jansen

     1 February 2019        370,798      £ 895,848  

 

a  

Face value based on share price at grant of 241.6p. The grant price is calculated using the closing share price on 17 October 2018.

Payments for loss of office (audited)

Gavin Patterson stood down as a director at midnight on 31 January 2019. Under the terms of his service contract, he will continue to receive his salary and contractual benefits until the end of his notice period, being 25 October 2019. These pro-rated payments will total £777,489 salary and fees, £15,000 benefits and £225,000 pension allowance. Gavin will receive no compensation or payment for the termination of his service contract or his ceasing to be a director of the company or any other group company, although BT will pay outplacement fees of up to £40,000 and legal fees of up to £9,000.

Former directors (audited)

Phil Hodkinson retired as a non-executive director on 31 January 2016 and was a member of the Committee for Sustainable and Responsible Business until standing down on 31 January 2019. He received an annual fee of £10,000 as a member of this committee.

Directors’ share ownership (audited)

The committee believes that the interests of the executive directors should be closely aligned with those of shareholders.

The chief executive is required to build up a shareholding equal to 300% of salary, and the chief financial officer 250% of salary. The aim is to encourage the build up of a meaningful shareholding in the company over time by retaining shares received under an executive share plan (other than shares sold to meet tax and other statutory deductions) or from purchases in the market.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

We use the average BT share price over the preceding 12 months (or the share price at acquisition date if higher) to determine whether the minimum shareholding requirement has been reached.

The table below sets out the shareholding position as at 31 March 2019. As a new director, Philip has not yet received any vested shares under the executive share plans. Details of his buy-out are included on page 86 the award will vest in full on 20 March 2020 and Philip has voluntarily agreed to hold the shares for a further one year until 20 March 2021. Philip invested nearly £2m in purchasing shares in the market in November 2018.

Gavin Patterson is required to maintain a shareholding equivalent to 300% of salary until the end of his notice period, being 25 October 2019.

 

Executive director   

Personal shareholding

as a percentage of salary

 

Gavin Patterson a

     919

Philip Jansen

     180

Simon Lowth

     51

 

a  

Gavin stood down from the Board at midnight on 31 January 2019 and the percentage reflects his personal shareholding at that date.

The following table shows the total unvested interests held by the executive directors in the ISP and DBP, and for Philip Jansen the RSP. The numbers represent the maximum possible vesting levels. The ISP awards will only vest to the extent the performance conditions are met over the three-year period. Full details of all ISP and DBP awards, including performance periods and vesting conditions, are set out on page 85.

Unvested interests in shares (audited)

 

   

ISP (subject to

performance)

       

DBP (not subject to

performance)

   

RSP (subject to

Worldpay performance)

 
    

1 April

2018

   

 

Total

number

of award

shares

31 March

2019

        

1 April

2018

   

Total

number

of award

shares

31 March

2019

   

1 April

2018

   

Total

number

of award

shares

31 March

2019

 

Gavin Patterson a

    3,354,841       2,537,389           127,638       253,742              

Philip Jansen b

          1,441,160                             378,221  

Simon Lowth

    1,568,600       2,947,475           44,397       200,548              

 

a  

Gavin stood down from the Board at midnight on 31 January 2019 and the number reflects his awards at that date.

b  

Philip joined the Board in January 2019 and will be granted his first DBP award in June 2019.

During the period 1 April 2019 to 8 May 2019, there were no movements in unvested interests in shares.

 


Table of Contents
84         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Annual remuneration report continued

    

    

      
      

 

Directors’ interests at 31 March 2019 or date of retirement, if earlier (audited)

The following table shows the beneficial interests of directors holding office at the end of the year (or at the point of leaving for directors who retired during the year), and their families, in the company’s shares at 31 March 2019 and 1 April 2018, or at date of appointment if later.

 

     Number of shares  
Beneficial holdings    31 March 2019      1 April 2018  

Jan du Plessis

     501,599        400,000  

Gavin Patterson a,b

     2,958,405        2,943,453  

Philip Jansen c

     771,313        770,500  

Simon Lowth

     157,379        10,536  

Tony Ball d

     193,871        193,871  

Iain Conn

     19,442        19,442  

Tim Höttges

             

Isabel Hudson

     24,090        15,090  

Allison Kirkby e

             

Mike Inglis

     29,091        4,599  

Matthew Key f

     31,000         

Karen Richardson g,h

     13,525        13,525  

Nick Rose

     400,000        300,000  

Jasmine Whitbread

     11,832        11,289  

Total

     5,111,547        4,682,305  

 

a  

Gavin stood down as a director at midnight on 31 January 2019 and the number reflects his holding at that date.

b  

Includes shares purchased under directshare and free shares awarded under UK allshare. Directshare is an HMRC approved plan that allows BT employees to buy shares out of gross pay. Prior to 2008 BT awarded free shares to UK employees (UK allshare).

c  

Philip was appointed as a director on 1 January 2019. He purchased 770,500 shares in the market in November 2018.

d  

Tony retired as a director on 11 July 2018 and the number reflects his holding at that date.

e  

Allison was appointed as a director on 15 March 2019.

f  

Matthew was appointed as a director on 25 October 2018.

g  

Karen retired as a director on 11 July 2018 and the number reflects her holding at that date.

h  

Shares are held as 2,705 American Depositary Shares (ADS). One ADS equates to five BT ordinary shares.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

During the period 1 April 2019 to 8 May 2019, there were no movements in directors’ beneficial holdings. The directors, as a group, beneficially own less than 1% of the company’s shares.

The company encourages the chairman and independent non-executive directors to purchase, on a voluntary basis, BT shares with an aggregate value of £5,000 on average each year to further align the interests of non-executive directors with those of our shareholders. The directors are asked to hold these shares until they retire from the Board. This policy is not mandatory.

This policy does not apply to Tim Höttges who was appointed to the Board as a non-independent, non-executive director following completion of the EE acquisition in January 2016. This helps avoid any conflict of interest in relation to Tim’s ongoing employment as CEO of Deutsche Telekom.

 


Table of Contents
                  85
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Deferred bonus plan awards at 31 March 2019 (audited)

The following DBP awards have been granted to the directors. These shares will normally be transferred to participants at the end of the three-year deferral period. Philip Jansen joined the Board on 1 January 2019 and is due to be granted his first DBP award in June 2019.

 

      1 April 2018      Awarded a     

Dividends

re-invested

     Vested      Lapsed      Total number
of award shares
31 March 2019
     Vesting date      Price at
grant
     Market price
at vesting
     Monetary
value of
vested award
£000
 

Simon Lowth

                                                                                         

DBP 2017

     44,397               3,038                      47,435        01/08/2020        286.40p                

DBP 2018

            143,306        9,807                      153,113        01/08/2021        211.01p                
                                                                                           

Former director

                                                                                         

Gavin Patterson

                                                                                         

DBP 2015

     94,220                      94,220                      01/08/2018        449.50p        230.68p        217  

DBP 2016

     33,418                 2,286                      35,704        01/08/2019        403.18p                

DBP 2017 b

                                                                     

DBP 2018

            204,072        13,966                      218,038        01/08/2021        211.01p                

 

a  

Awards granted on 19 June 2018. The number of shares subject to awards was calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to the grant. Awards of deferred shares in respect of 2019 will be calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant.

b  

The committee exercised its discretion and determined that no bonus would be awarded to Gavin in respect of 2016/17. This resulted in no DBP award being granted in 2017.

Share awards under long-term incentive share plan (ISP) held at 31 March 2019 (audited)

Details of the company’s ordinary shares under conditional share awards made to directors, as participants under the ISP are as follows:

 

      1 April 2018      Awarded     

Dividends

re-invested

     Vested      Lapsed    

Total number

of award shares

31 March 2019

    

Performance

period end

    

Price on

grant

    

Market price

at vesting

    

Monetary

value of

vested

award

£000

 

Philip Jansen

                                                                                        

ISP 2018 a

            1,412,872        28,288                     1,441,160        31/03/2021        233.56p                

Simon Lowth

                                                                                        

ISP 2016 b

     664,614               45,486                     710,100        31/03/2019        405.38p                

ISP 2017 c

     903,986               61,869                     965,855        31/03/2020        286.4p                

ISP 2018 d

            1,190,071        81,449                     1,271,520        31/03/2021        211.01p                
                                                                                          

Former director

                                                                                        

Gavin Patterson

                                                                                        

ISP 2015 e

     979,988                               (979,988            31/03/2018        449.5p                

ISP 2016 f

     1,087,543               74,432                     1,161,975        31/03/2019        403.18p                

ISP 2017 c

     1,287,310               88,014                     1,375,324        31/03/2020        286.4p                

ISP 2018 g

                                                                    

 

a  

Award granted on 1 February 2019. The number of shares subject to award was calculated using the average middle-market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant of 233.56p. 40% of each award is linked to TSR compared with a group of 17 companies, 40% is linked to a three-year normalised free cash flow measure and 20% to a measure of underlying revenue growth (excluding transit) over three years.

b  

Award granted on 29 July 2016. The number of shares subject to award was calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant of 405.38p. 40% of each award is linked to TSR compared with a group of 21 companies, 40% is linked to a three-year normalised free cash flow measure and 20% to a measure of underlying revenue growth (excluding transit) over three years.

c  

Award granted on 22 June 2017. The number of shares subject to award was calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant of 286.40p. 40% of each award is linked to TSR compared with a group of 21 companies, 40% is linked to a three-year normalised free cash flow measure and 20% to a measure of underlying revenue growth (excluding transit) over three years.

d  

Award granted on 19 June 2018. The number of shares subject to award was calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant of 211.01p. 40% of each award is linked to TSR compared with a group of 17 companies, 40% is linked to a three-year normalised free cash flow measure and 20% to a measure of underlying revenue growth (excluding transit) over three years.

e  

Award granted on 18 June 2015. The number of shares subject to award was calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant of 449.50p. 40% of each award is linked to TSR compared with a group of 21 companies, 40% is linked to a three-year normalised free cash flow measure and 20% to a measure of underlying revenue growth (excluding transit) over three years.

f  

Award granted on 20 June 2016. The number of shares subject to award was calculated using the average middle market price of a BT share for the three days prior to grant of 403.18p. 40% of each award is linked to TSR compared with a group of 21 companies, 40% is linked to a three-year normalised free cash flow measure and 20% to a measure of underlying revenue growth (excluding transit) over three years.

g  

The committee exercised its discretion and determined that no ISP would be awarded to Gavin in respect of 2018/19.

 


Table of Contents
86         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

  

  

  

  

  Annual remuneration report continued

Retention share plan awards at 31 March 2019 (audited)

The following RSP award was granted to Philip Jansen. This is a buy-out award to compensate Philip for the loss in shares that he forfeited on leaving Worldpay to join BT. In accordance with our approved Remuneration Policy, the buy-out mirrors the value and terms of the award forfeited. The shares will vest on 20 March 2020 subject to continued employment and will only vest to the extent that the forfeited award meets the original performance targets set by Worldpay. Following the announcement that FIS will acquire Worldpay, Worldpay has confirmed the original award will vest in full. Philip has voluntarily agreed to hold any vested shares for a further one year until 20 March 2020.

 

                                        Total number of                              
                                        award shares                    Market      Monetary  
     1 April             Dividends                                  Price      price      value of vested  
      2018      Awarded      re-invested      Vested      Lapsed      31 March 2019      Vesting date      at grant      at vesting      award £000  

Philip Jansen

                                                                                         

RSP 2018

            370,798        7,423                      378,221        20/03/2020        241.6p                
                                                                                           

Share options held without performance conditons (saveshare) at 31 March 2019 (audited)

The directors exercised no saveshare options during the year. There were no vested but unexercised options at year-end.

Number of shares under option:

 

                                              Market price      Usual date         
                                       Option price      at date of      from which      Usual expiry  
      1 April 2018     Granted      Lapsed      Exercised      31 March 2019      per share      exercise      exercisable      date  

Former director

                                                                               

Gavin Patterson a

     5,642 b                            5,642        319p               01/08/2019        01/02/2020  
                                                                                 

All of the above options were granted for nil consideration.

a Gavin stood down from the Board at midnight on 31 January 2019 and the number reflects the number of shares under option at that date. The options are exercisable up to 31 July 2019.

b Option granted on 26 June 2014 under the employee sharesave scheme, in which all employees of the company are entitled to participate.

 

Comparison of chief executive remuneration to total shareholder return (unaudited)

Total shareholder return (TSR) is the measure of the returns that a company has provided for its shareholders, reflecting share price movements and assuming reinvestment of dividends. The graph opposite illustrates the performance of BT Group plc measured by TSR relative to a broad equity market index over the past ten years. We consider the FTSE 100 to be the most appropriate index against which to measure performance, as BT has been a member of the FTSE 100 throughout the nine-year period, and the index is widely-used.

      

BT’s TSR performance vs the FTSE 100

 

LOGO

      

Source: Datastream

The graph shows the relative TSR performance

of BT and the FTSE 100 over the past ten years.


Table of Contents
                  87
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

History of chief executive remuneration

 

Year end   Chief Executive  

Total rem

£000

    

Annual bonus

(% of max)

    

ISP vesting

(% of max)

 

2019

  Philip Jansen a     725        56%        N/A  
    Gavin Patterson b     1,719        28%        0%  

2018

  Gavin Patterson     2,307        54%        0%  

2017

  Gavin Patterson     1,345        0%        0%  

2016 b

  Gavin Patterson     5,396        45%        82.01%  

2015

  Gavin Patterson     4,562        58%        67.4%  

2014 c

  Gavin Patterson     2,901        62%        78.7%  
    Ian Livingston d     4,236        35%        63.4%  

2013

  Ian Livingston     9,402        65%        100%  

2012

  Ian Livingston     8,520        73%        100%  

2011

  Ian Livingston     4,009        79%        0%  

2010

  Ian Livingston     3,556        71%        0%  

 

a  

Philip was appointed as a director on 1 January 2019 and became chief executive from 1 February 2019. His first ISP award was made in February 2019.

b  

Gavin stood down as chief executive at midnight on 31 January 2019 and Philip took over from 1 February 2019.

c  

The total remuneration figure includes the ISP award as CEO BT Retail and the first award as chief executive, granted in 2013.

d  

Ian stepped down on 10 September 2013 and Gavin took over from that date.

Percentage change in chief executive remuneration (unaudited)

The table below illustrates the increase in salary, benefits and annual bonus for Gavin Patterson and Philip Jansen in the role as chief executive and that of a representative group of the company’s employees. For these purposes, we’ve used the UK management and technical employee population representing around 24,607 people. We believe this broad group provides the most meaningful comparison as they have similar performance related pay arrangements as our executive directors.

 

      Salary      Benefits a      Bonus b  

% Change in chief executive remuneration

     13%        49%        (27)%  

% Change in comparator group c

     2.5%        0%        15%  

 

a  

The increase in benefits for the chief executive was around £28,000.

b  

The bonus comparator is based on cash bonus only to give a better like-for-like comparison.

c  

Comparator group is the UK management and technical employee population representing around 24,607 individuals.

Chief executive pay ratio

The table below sets out the chief executive pay ratio as at 31 March 2019. The report will build up over time to show a rolling 10-year period.

The ratios compare the single total figure of remuneration of the chief executive with the equivalent figures for the lower quartile (P25), median (P50) and upper quartile (P75) employees.

 

Chief executive remuneration

     £2,444,000  

P25 employee remuneration

     £34,281  

P50 employee remuneration

     £41,477  

P75 employee remuneration

     £51,594  

P25 employee pay ratio

     71 : 1  

P50 employee pay ratio

     59 : 1  

P75 employee pay ratio

     47 : 1  

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

A significant proportion of the chief executive’s remuneration is delivered through long term incentives, where awards are linked to company performance and share price movements over the longer term. This means that the ratios will depend significantly on long-term incentive outcomes and may fluctuate from year to year. None of the employees in the previous table participated in long-term incentive plans.

 

Chief executive base pay

     £1,122,000  

P25 employee base pay

     £30,090  

P50 employee base pay

     £35,918  

P75 employee base pay

     £41,740  

P25 employee base pay ratio

     37 : 1  

P50 employee base pay ratio

     31 : 1  

P75 employee base pay ratio

     27 : 1  

Methodology

We have used ‘Option B’ (based on gender pay reporting).

The P25, P50 and P75 employees were identified from the company’s gender pay report, together with the 80 employees below and above each of the ‘P’ points to form enlarged groups. This was to guard against volatility in the underlying data.

The total FTE remuneration of each employee in each of the groups was calculated for the year ended 31 March 2019.

A median total remuneration figure for each ‘P’ group was calculated, to produce a more representative result than relying on a single employee from the company’s gender pay reporting.

Relative importance of spend on pay (unaudited)

The table below shows the change in total remuneration paid to all employees and dividends paid and share buyback paid.

 

Area    2018/19 (£m)      2017/18 (£m)      % change  

Remuneration paid to all employees

     5,382        5,400        (0.3)%  

Dividends/share buybacks

     1,513        1,746        (13.3)%  

Implementation of remuneration

policy in 2019/20 (unaudited)

Base salary

The committee considered the base salary for Simon Lowth. In line with the increases agreed for our managerial employees, we agreed a 2.5% salary increase effective in June 2019.

Philip Jansen’s base salary of £1,100,000 was agreed on appointment and is fixed for five years. Therefore no increase will be applied in 2019/20.

 

    

2019/20

 

 
      Base salary      % change  

Philip Jansen a

     £1,100,000        0%  

Simon Lowth

     £735,438        2.5%  

 

a  

Philip was appointed as a director on 1 January 2019 and became chief executive on

 

1 February 2019. His base salary is fixed for five years.

 


Table of Contents
88         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

     Annual remuneration report continued
      
      

 

 

Benefits

The committee has set benefits in line with the Remuneration Policy. We propose no changes to the benefit framework for 2019/20.

Pension

The table below sets out the level of pension provision for 2019/20 for both executive directors. As a new joiner, Philip’s pension provision is in line with that of the wider management population in the UK. We will review the pension provision for existing executive directors in advance of our 2020 Remuneration Policy review.

 

      % of salary
Philip Jansen    15% of salary in lieu of pension provision
Simon Lowth    30% of salary in lieu of pension provision

Annual bonus

The table below describes the level of bonus opportunity (expressed as a percentage of salary) for Philip Jansen and Simon Lowth in 2019/20. One third of any bonus will be deferred into shares for a period of three years.

 

 

LOGO

The 2019/20 annual bonus structure and weighting is set out below.

 

 

LOGO

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Adjusted earnings per share, normalised free cash flow, and revenue (including transit) have a direct impact on shareholder value. Customer experience (measured through Customer Perception and Keeping Our Promises) is vital to the company’s long-term health and growth. All four of these measures are KPIs for BT and are defined on pages 30 to 31.

We do not publish details of the financial targets in advance as these are commercially confidential. We will publish achievement against these targets at the same time as we disclose bonus payments in the 2020 Directors’ Remuneration Report so shareholders can evaluate performance against those targets.

The strategic objectives are aligned to our strategy and are assessed by the chairman for the chief executive and by the chief executive for the chief financial officer and each senior executive. Performance against the strategic objectives element is assessed individually and is based on achievement against individual objectives, organisational culture and growth measures.

Incentive share plan

Recognising the need to ensure that our remuneration arrangements support the delivery of BT’s strategy under Philip’s stewardship, at the time of going to print the ISP 2019 targets had not been set by the committee. Full details of the performance measures will be disclosed in advance of the AGM in July so that shareholders have a full understanding when voting.

Chairman and non-executive director remuneration

The fees for non-executive directors were reviewed during the year. The last review of non-executive director fees was in January 2018. In accordance with the Articles of Association, the chairman and executive directors conducted the review, and considered the role and requirements of BT, together with the fees paid to non-executive directors at companies of a similar size and complexity. Following the review, it was agreed to increase the basic non-executive fee to £77,000 per year (from £75,000) from 1 June 2019. Other changes agreed as part of the review were:

 

  An increase to £8,000 (from £5,000) for membership of the Digital Impact  & Sustainability Committee (formerly named the Committee for Sustainable and Responsible Business) and an increase to £14,000 (from £12,000) for the Digital Impact  & Sustainability Committee chair
  An increase to £30,000 (from £28,000) for the Remuneration Committee chair
  A fee of £8,000 for membership of the Investigatory Powers Governance Committee
  An increase to £5,000 (from £4,000) for the fee paid per trip to those non-executive directors travelling on an intercontinental basis to Board and board committee meetings.

These increases reflect the responsibilities of the roles and ensures we remain competitive in the marketplace and are able to recruit directors with international telecoms experience where required.

 


Table of Contents
                  89
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

The BT Pensions and Technology Committees were disbanded on 3 April 2019. See page 67 for further detail.

The table below sets out the fees for membership of, or chairing a board committee (including the changes agreed during the year):

 

Committee    Chair’s fee      Member’s fee  
Audit & Risk      £35,000        £25,000  
BT Compliance a      £25,000        £12,000  
Digital Impact & Sustainability      £14,000        £8,000  
Investigatory Powers Governance      n/a b        £8,000  
Nominations      n/a b        £10,000  
Remuneration      £30,000        £15,000  

 

a  

A sub-committee of the Audit  & Risk Committee.

b  

Where the chairman or chief executive acts as chair of a board committee, no additional committee chair fee is payable.

The senior independent director receives an additional fee of £27,000 a year for that position.

No element of non-executive director remuneration is performance-related. Non-executive directors do not participate in BT’s bonus or employee share plans and are not members of any of the company pension schemes.

No review of the chairman’s fee was undertaken. The committee agreed a five year fixed fee of £700,000 per year, on Jan du Plessis’s appointment as chairman in November 2017.

Other remuneration matters

Advisers

During the year, the committee received independent advice on executive remuneration matters from Deloitte LLP. Deloitte received £204,295 in fees for these services. The fees are charged on a time-spent basis in delivering advice. That advice materially assisted the committee in their consideration of matters relating to executive remuneration.

Deloitte is a founder member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and as such, voluntarily operates under the code of conduct in relation to executive remuneration consulting in the UK. The committee appointed Deloitte to the role of independent advisers to the committee in 2012 following a competitive tender exercise conducted by the committee.

The committee is comfortable that the Deloitte engagement partner and team, who provide remuneration advice to the committee, have no connections with BT that may impair their independence or objectivity.

In addition, during 2018/19, Deloitte provided the company with advice on corporate and indirect taxes, assistance with regulatory, risk and compliance issues and additional consultancy services.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Dilution

For a number of years we generally used treasury shares to satisfy the exercise of share options and the vesting of share awards under our employee share plans. We intend to use both treasury shares and shares purchased by the BT Group Employee Share Ownership Trust (the Trust) for share option exercises, and shares purchased by the Trust for the vesting of executive share awards in 2019/20. Shares held in the Trust do not have any voting rights.

At the end of 2018/19, shares equivalent to 2.83% (2017/18: 1.76%) of the issued share capital (excluding treasury shares) would be required for all share options and awards outstanding.

Of these, we estimate that for 2019/20, shares equivalent to approximately 0.39% (2018/19: 0.28%) of the issued share capital

(excluding treasury shares) will be required for the all-employee share plans.

Outside appointments

The Nominations Committee determines the policy for, considers, and if thought fit agrees the taking up of external directorships and other external interests by members of the Executive Committee, and other senior direct reports to the chief executive. In accordance with the new Code for the financial year 2019/20 onwards, directors must seek prior approval of the Board before accepting additional external appointments.

Gavin Patterson is a non-executive director of British Airways for which he receives an annual fee of £50,000 and the benefit of free BA flights.

Voting at the 2018 Annual General Meeting

The table below sets out the votes cast in respect of the Annual Remuneration Report at the Annual General Meeting held on 11 July 2018.

 

     Votes cast in                       
      favour      %      Votes cast against      %  
Approve Annual Remuneration Report      4,419,598,193        65.84        2,292,952,264        34.16  

235,781,388 votes were withheld against approving the Annual Remuneration Report. Withheld votes are not counted when calculating voting outcomes. We set out details of our response in the remuneration committee chair’s letter on pages 73 to 75.

Committee evaluation 2018/19

We carried out an internal evaluation led by the chairman and company secretary. This entailed questionnaires completed by committee members and attendees; the output of which was discussed and debated by the committee.

 

 

   Key area of focus

  

 

Suggested actions

    

Incentive and reward

structure

  

•  Review the structure of executive incentives and reward, in the context of the strategy refresh and the new chief executive’s priorities.

 

Target setting

  

•  Ensure that when setting targets they are appropriately stretching.

 
 


Table of Contents
90         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

     Annual remuneration report continued
      
      

 

Independent non-executive directors’ letters of appointment

Each independent non-executive director has an appointment letter setting out the terms of his or her appointment. They do not have service contracts. The letter includes membership of any board committees, the fees to be paid and the time commitment expected. We ask each non-executive director to allow a minimum commitment of 22 days each year, subject to committee responsibilities, and to allow slightly more in the first year in order to take part in the induction programme. The actual time commitment required in any year may vary depending on business. We make clear that additional time may be required during periods of increased activity.

 

Appointments are for an initial period of three years. During that period, either party can give the other at least three months’ notice of termination. All Board appointments automatically terminate

 

 

 

 

 

  

in the event of a director not being elected or re-elected by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting. The appointment of a non-executive director is terminable on notice by the company without compensation. At the end of the period, the appointment may be continued by mutual agreement. The appointment letter also covers matters such as confidentiality, data protection and BT’s share dealing code.

 

See below for further details of appointment arrangements for independent non-executive directors.

 

Tim Höttges was appointed as a non-independent, non-executive director in January 2016 following Deutsche Telekom’s nomination, and his appointment letter reflects the terms of the Relationship

Agreement between BT and Deutsche Telekom.

Directors’ service agreements and letters of appointment

The following table sets out the dates on which directors’ service agreements/initial letters of appointment commenced and the current expiry dates:

 

  Chairman and executive directors
     Commencement date   Expiry date of current service agreement or letter of appointment
  Jan du Plessis    1 June 2017   Terminable by the company on 12 months’ notice and by the director on six months’ notice.
  Philip Jansen    1 January 2019   Terminable by the company on 12 months’ notice and by the director on six months’ notice.
  Simon Lowth    6 July 2016   Terminable by the company on 12 months’ notice and by the director on six months’ notice.
  Non-executive directors
     Commencement date   Expiry date of current service agreement or letter of appointment
  Iain Conn    1 June 2014   Letter of appointment was for an initial period of three years. The appointment was extended for a further three years in May 2017.
  Tim Höttges    29 January 2016   Appointed as a non-independent, non-executive director under the terms of the Relationship Agreement between BT and Deutsche Telekom. The appointment is terminable immediately by either party.
  Isabel Hudson    1 November 2014   Letter of appointment was for an initial period of three years. The appointment was extended for a further three years in October 2017.
  Mike Inglis    1 September 2015   Letter of appointment was for an initial period of three years. The appointment was extended for a further three years in August 2018.
  Matthew Key    25 October 2018   Letter of appointment is for an initial period of three years.
  Allison Kirkby    15 March 2019   Letter of appointment is for an initial period of three years.
  Nick Rose    1 January 2011   Letter of appointment was for an initial period of three years. The appointment was extended for a further three years in December 2016 following extension in 2013.
  Jasmine Whitbread    19 January 2011   Letter of appointment was for an initial period of three years. The appointment was extended for a further three years in December 2016 following extension in 2013.

There are no other service agreements, letters of appointment or material contracts, existing or proposed, between the company and any of the directors. There are no arrangements or understandings between any director or executive officer and any other person pursuant to which any director or executive officer was selected to serve. There are no family relationships between the directors.

Inspection by the public

The service agreements and letters of appointment are available for inspection by the public at BT’s registered office. They will also be available for inspection commencing one hour prior to the start of our AGM, to be held in London on 10 July 2019.

Nick Rose

Chair of the Remuneration Committee

8 May 2019


Table of Contents
                  91
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

            

 Governance

       

 

            

 Financial statements

       

 

            

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

 

Remuneration policy

 

The directors’ remuneration policy (the ‘Policy’) which was approved by shareholders at the AGM on 12 July 2017 in accordance with section 439A of the Companies Act 2006, can be found online at bt.com/downloadcentre

 

Legacy matters

 

The committee reserves the right to make any remuneration payments and/or payments for loss of office (including exercising any discretions available to it in connection with such payments) notwithstanding that they are not in line with the Policy where the terms of the payment were agreed (i) before the AGM in 2014 (the date the company’s first shareholder-approved directors’ remuneration policy came into effect); (ii) before this Policy came into effect, provided that the terms of the payment were consistent with the shareholder-approved directors’ remuneration policy in force at the time they were agreed; or (iii) at a time when the

          

relevant individual was not a director of the company and, in the opinion of the committee, the payment was not in consideration for the individual becoming a director of the company. For these purposes “payments” includes the committee satisfying awards of variable remuneration and, in relation to an award over shares, the terms of the payment are “agreed” at the time the award is granted. Any legacy payments would be disclosed in the Annual Remuneration Report for the relevant year.

 

Minor amendments

 

The committee may make minor amendments to the arrangements for the directors as described in the Policy, for regulatory, exchange control, tax or administrative purposes, or to take account of a change in legislation.

 


Table of Contents
92         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Directors’ information

    

    

      
      

 

Statement of directors’ responsibilities in respect of the annual report and the financial statements

The directors are responsible for preparing the Annual Report and the Group and parent company financial statements in accordance with applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the directors to prepare Group and parent company financial statements for each financial year. Under that law they are required to prepare the Group financial statements in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union (IFRSs as adopted by the EU) and applicable law and have elected to prepare the parent company financial statements on the same basis.

Under company law the directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the state of affairs of the Group and parent company and of their profit or loss for that period. In preparing each of the Group and parent company financial statements, the directors are required to:

 

  select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently

 

  make judgements and estimates that are reasonable, relevant and reliable

 

  state whether they have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the EU

 

  assess the Group and parent company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern

 

  use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that are sufficient to show and explain the parent company’s transactions and disclose with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the parent company and enable them to ensure that its financial statements comply with the Companies Act 2006 (the 2006 Act). They are responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and have general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.

Under applicable law and regulations, the directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance Statement that complies with that law and those regulations.

The directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the corporate and financial information included on the company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Responsibility statement of the directors in respect of the annual financial report

We confirm that to the best of our knowledge:

 

  the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole

 

  the strategic report includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the issuer and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

We consider the annual report and accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess the group’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

Critical accounting estimates, key judgements and significant accounting policies

Our critical accounting estimates, key judgements and significant accounting policies conform with IFRSs, as adopted by the European Union and IFRSs issued by IASB, and are set out on pages 120 and 121 of the consolidated financial statements. The directors have reviewed these policies and applicable estimation techniques, and have confirmed they are appropriate for the preparation of the 2018/19 consolidated financial statements.

Disclosure of information to auditors

As far as each of the directors is aware, there is no relevant audit information (as defined by section 418(3) of the 2006 Act) that hasn’t been disclosed to the auditors. Each of the directors believes that all steps have been taken that ought to have been taken to make them aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the auditors have been made aware of that information.

Going concern

The Strategic report on pages 1 to 54 includes information on the group structure, strategy and business model, the performance of each customer-facing unit, the impact of regulation and competition, and principal risks and uncertainties. The Group performance section on pages 34 to 41 includes information on our group financial results, financial outlook, cash flow and net debt, and balance sheet position. Notes 23, 24, 25 and 27 of the consolidated financial statements include information on the group’s investments, cash and cash equivalents, borrowings, derivatives, financial risk management objectives, hedging policies and exposure to interest, foreign exchange, credit, liquidity and market risks.

In line with IAS 1 ‘Presentation of financial statements’, and revised FRC guidance on ‘risk management, internal control and related financial and business reporting’, management has taken into account all available information about the future for a period of at least, but not limited to, 12 months from the date of approval of the financial statements when assessing the group’s ability to continue as a going concern.

 


Table of Contents
                  93
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    
    

 

The directors carried out a robust assessment of the principal risks affecting the group, including any that could threaten our business model, future performance, insolvency or liquidity. Details of those risks and how we manage and mitigate them are set out in Our principal risks and uncertainties on pages 46 to 53.

Having assessed the principal risks, the directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting when preparing the financial statements. This assessment covers the period to May 2020, which is consistent with the FRC guidance.

Independent advice

The Board has a procedure that allows directors to seek independent professional advice at BT’s expense.

All directors also have access to the advice and services of the company secretary.

Directors’ and officers’ liability insurance and indemnity

For some years, BT has bought insurance cover for directors, officers and employees in positions of managerial supervision of BT Group plc and its subsidiaries. This is intended to protect against defence costs, civil damages and, in some circumstances, civil fines and penalties following an action brought against them in their personal capacity. The policy also covers individuals serving as directors of other companies or of joint ventures, or on boards of trade associations or charitable organisations at BT’s request. The insurance protects the directors and officers directly in circumstances where, by law, BT cannot provide an indemnity. It also provides BT, subject to a retention, with cover against the cost of indemnifying a director or officer. One layer of insurance is ring-fenced for the directors of BT Group plc.

As at 8 May 2019, and throughout 2018/19, the company’s wholly-owned subsidiary, British Telecommunications plc, has provided an indemnity for a group of people similar to the group covered by the above insurance. Neither the insurance nor the indemnity provides cover where the individual is proven to have acted fraudulently or dishonestly.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Interest of management in certain transactions

During and at the end of 2018/19, none of BT’s directors were materially interested in any material transaction in relation to the group’s business. None are materially interested in any currently proposed material transactions.

As set out below, Tim Höttges is a member of the Board as well as the CEO of Deutsche Telekom.

Power to authorise conflicts

All directors have a duty under the 2006 Act to avoid a situation in which he or she has, or can have, a direct or indirect interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict, with the interests of the company. The company’s Articles of Association include provisions for dealing with directors’ conflicts of interest in accordance with the 2006 Act. The company has procedures in place, which it follows, to deal with such situations. These require the Board to:

 

  consider each conflict situation separately on its particular facts

 

  consider the conflict situation in conjunction with its other duties under the 2006 Act

 

  keep records and board minutes on any authorisations granted by directors and the scope of any approvals given

 

  regularly review conflict authorisation.

We also have a Conflicted Matters Committee. Tim Höttges owes duties to both BT and Deutsche Telekom, and the Conflicted Matters Committee helps Tim comply with his fiduciary duties, although ultimate responsibility rests with him.

 


Table of Contents
94         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

General information

    

    

      
      

 

US regulation

New York Stock Exchange

As a foreign issuer with American Depositary Shares listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), BT is obliged to disclose any significant ways in which its corporate governance practices differ from the corporate governance listing standards of the NYSE.

We have reviewed the NYSE listing standards and believe that our corporate governance practices are consistent with them, with the following exceptions which do not meet the strict requirements in the standards.

The NYSE listing standards state that companies must have a nominating/corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors and with written terms of reference which, in addition to identifying individuals qualified to become board members, develops and recommends to the Board a set of corporate governance principles applicable to the company.

We have a Nominations Committee (see Nominations Committee chair’s report on pages 66 to 68). The Nominations Committee’s terms of reference were amended in 2019 such that it will not ‘‘develop and recommend to the Board a set of corporate governance guidelines applicable to the corporation’’. These duties will be discharged by the Board, in compliance with the rules and regulations of BT’s home country of England & Wales. This is, however, a technical non-compliance with the NYSE listing standards. The Nominations Committee is chaired by BT’s chairman, Jan du Plessis who is not considered independent under the NYSE listing standards. Tim Höttges, our non-independent, non-executive director, joined the committee on 1 May 2018. The Board and the Nominations Committee are made up of a majority of independent non-executive directors.

The US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002 (Sarbanes-Oxley Act), the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and the NYSE listing standards all require companies to comply with certain provisions relating to their audit committee. These include the independence of audit committee members and procedures for the treatment of complaints regarding accounting or auditing matters. We comply fully with these requirements.

US Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002

BT has securities registered with the SEC. As a result, we must comply with those provisions of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act which apply to foreign issuers. We comply with the legal and regulatory requirements introduced under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, in so far as they apply.

The Audit  & Risk Committee includes Nick Rose, Allison Kirkby and Matthew Key who, in the opinion of the Board, are ‘audit committee financial experts’ and are independent (as defined for this purpose). The Board considers that the committee’s members have broad commercial knowledge and extensive business leadership experience, having held between them various prior roles in major business, financial management, and financial function supervision and that this constitutes a broad and suitable mix of business and financial experience on the committee.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

The code of ethics we have adopted for the purposes of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act applies to the chief executive, chief financial officer and senior finance managers.

Controls and procedures

Prior year material weakness

Background to the prior year material weakness in relation to the calculation of our IAS19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations

In July 2018, we announced that we had been alerted to an error made by our independent external actuary in the actuary’s calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations at 31 March 2018. Our independent external actuary is employed as an expert to calculate the IAS 19 accounting valuation on behalf of management. The error resulted from the incorrect application of changes to demographic assumptions and led to an increase in our net pension deficit of £0.4bn at 31 March 2018. Management determined that the error was material with respect to our group statement of comprehensive income and required the group to restate its previously issued consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2018. The group restated its comparative balance sheet and statement of comprehensive income in the next published financial report at Q2 2018/19. The restated figures can also be found on page 119. Also, in accordance with US financial reporting requirements, we filed restated financial statements as amendment 2 to our Form 20-F for the year ended 31 March 2018 on 20 September 2018.

We reassessed the effectiveness of the company’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2018 following the identification of this error. A material weakness is a deficiency, or a combination of deficiencies, in internal control over financial reporting, such that there is a reasonable possibility that a material misstatement of our consolidated financial statements will not be prevented or detected on a timely basis.

Management determined that, whilst there was a failure in the operation of controls at our independent external actuary (acting on behalf of management as an expert), our monitoring control did not identify the failure.

This monitoring control failure resulted in a material misstatement of the account balances and disclosures relating to our retirement benefit obligations in our annual consolidated financial statements that was not prevented or detected. Accordingly, management determined that this control deficiency constituted a material weakness which was reported in the amendment 2 to our 20-F for the year ended 31 March 2018.

Remediation of material weakness in relation to the calculation of our IAS19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations

During the year, management has undertaken a number of actions to strengthen our internal control over our oversight procedures in respect of this and have enhanced controls in operation as of 31 March 2019, which will continue to operate going forwards. Specifically:

 

  obtaining independent confirmation of the operation of controls within our independent external actuary
 


Table of Contents
                  95
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

 

    

    

      
      

 

  increased provision of documentation from our independent external actuary to allow us to verify changes to data and demographic assumptions

 

  the certification to us of independent checks of changes to non-financial assumptions performed within our independent external actuary

 

  utilising this additional information to enhance and remediate our monitoring control.

These enhanced controls operated as of 31 March 2019 and management has concluded the previously reported material weakness has been appropriately remediated.

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting for the group. Internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of consolidated financial statements for external reporting purposes in accordance with IFRS as issued by the IASB and IFRS as adopted by the EU.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Therefore even those systems determined to be effective can provide only reasonable assurance with respect to financial statement preparation and presentation. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Management conducted an assessment of the effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019 based on the criteria established in “Internal Control – Integrated Framework” (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

While we are satisfied that we have remediated the material weakness reported in 2018 in respect of our IAS19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations, described above, management has concluded that our internal control over financial reporting was not effective as of 31 March 2019 due to the material weaknesses in relation to IT General Controls and Risk Assessment, described below.

In 2018/19 management undertook a continuous improvement and enhancement programme in relation to its framework of internal control over financial reporting. This programme identified two areas requiring remediation, specifically, IT General Controls and Risk Assessment.

Although this did not result in any identified misstatements in the current period consolidated financial statements, nor in any restatements of consolidated financial statements previously reported by the company, and there are no changes to previously released financial results as a result of these matters, it created a reasonable possibility that a material misstatement would not have been prevented or detected on a timely basis during the year ended 31 March 2019.

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

While management has commenced the implementation of its remediation plans, these material weaknesses existed as of 31 March 2019.

Material weaknesses in IT General Controls and Risk Assessment Background to IT General Controls

We did not design and maintain effective controls over certain information systems that are relevant to the preparation of our consolidated financial statements, principally including the following deficiencies:

 

  During the year, additional IT applications were brought into the scope of management’s framework of internal control over financial reporting. These additional IT applications were not identified for inclusion in the scope of management’s framework of internal control over financial reporting by our risk assessment procedures with sufficient time to allow the IT General Controls supporting these additional applications to operate in accordance with COSO 2013.

 

  Within EE, SAP privileged user access was granted for short periods of time during the year ended 31 March 2019 related to development activity but logs of activity free from potential manipulation by these users were not retained and changes implemented by privileged users were not directly monitored.

 

  While management have a process in place to approve changes to IT dependent business process controls, this process did not ensure that all changes during the year ended 31 March 2019 received an appropriate level of approval testing.

Other deficiencies that management has identified in relation to IT General Controls include: the strength of passwords in legacy systems and an inappropriate policy related to the timely removal of application access for leavers.

Although these control deficiencies did not result in a misstatement in our consolidated financial statements the pervasive nature of these IT General Control deficiencies across our significant classes of transactions, including the consequential potential impact on automated controls and dependent manual business controls, has led management to conclude that a reasonable possibility of a material misstatement related to these IT General Controls existed as of 31 March 2019. While remediation activities related to the above IT General Control deficiencies commenced during the year ended 31 March 2019, management concluded that these were not fully remediated as of 31 March 2019.

Background to Risk Assessment

Secondly, we identified aspects of our risk assessment processes requiring remediation. Specifically:

 

  Management have not appropriately addressed the risks of material misstatement associated with certain outsourced service organisations, including pension asset valuation services and a significant IT outsourced provider.

 

  Exceptions were noted during our enhancement programme and subsequent management testing that indicated that certain ‘Information Produced by the Entity’ (being information presented in reports used in the operation of a control) was not itself subject to sufficient controls to ensure that such information was complete and accurate.
 


Table of Contents
96         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

General information continued

    

    

      
      

 

  Additionally, we identified sub-processes with inadequate identification and linkage between risk points and their related controls including management review controls.

Although these control deficiencies did not result in a misstatement in our consolidated financial statements, as a result of the potentially pervasive impact of these deficiencies on our financial statement accounts, we have concluded that there is a reasonable possibility of material misstatements arising. While remediation activities related to the above issues commenced during the year ended 31 March 2019, management concluded that these issues were not remediated as of 31 March 2019.

Audit of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting

Our independent registered public accounting firm, KPMG LLP, who audited the consolidated financial statements included within the Form 20-F, has expressed an adverse report on the design and operating effectiveness of our internal control over financial reporting, as stated in their report as of 31 March 2019, which is included within the Form 20-F.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

Changes in our internal control over financial reporting that occurred during 2018/19, which have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting are described above under Remediation of material weakness in relation to the calculation of our IAS19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations, on page 94, and in relation to the material weaknesses described under Material weaknesses in IT General Controls and Risk Assessment and related remediation thereof as described therein. To the extent not yet implemented, other changes described under Remediation of IT General Controls and Remediation of Risk Assessment are expected to impact our internal control over financial reporting during 2019/2020.

Disclosure controls and procedures

We maintain disclosure controls and procedures that are designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in our reports under the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Exchange Act), and the rules and regulations thereunder, is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the SEC’s rules and forms and that such information is accumulated and communicated to our management, including our chief executive and chief financial officer to allow for timely decisions regarding required disclosure. In designing and evaluating the disclosure controls and procedures, management recognises that any controls and procedures, no matter how well designed and operated, can provide only reasonable assurance of achieving their objectives and management necessarily applies its judgement and makes assumptions about the likelihood of future events. There can be no assurance that any design will succeed in achieving its stated goals under all potential future conditions, regardless of how remote.

We have evaluated the effectiveness of our disclosure controls and procedures. Based upon that evaluation, our chief executive and chief financial officer concluded that, as a result of the material weaknesses in relation to IT General Controls and Risk Assessment described above, as of 31 March 2019, our disclosure controls and procedures were not effective to provide reasonable assurance

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

that information required to be disclosed by us in the reports that we file or furnish under the Exchange Act is recorded, processed, summarised and reported, within the time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms.

Remediation of the Material weaknesses in IT General Controls and Risk Assessment

Remediation of IT General Controls

A programme has been operating since the beginning of the fourth quarter of 2018/19 to implement controls over the additionally identified applications to the required standard. We have detailed remediation plans for the other specific items identified which we intend to complete in our financial year 2019/20.

Remediation of Risk Assessment

A programme has been operating since the beginning of the fourth quarter of 2018/19 to document the mapping of risks in outsourced service organisations, to support the identification and testing of the completeness and accuracy of certain Information Produced by the Entity and to continue to document the identification and linkage between risk points and their related controls. It is intended that this will be completed in our financial year 2019/20.

UK internal control and risk management

The Board is responsible for the group’s systems of internal control, risk management and assurance and for reviewing the effectiveness of those systems each year. These systems are designed to manage, rather than eliminate, risks we face that may prevent us achieving our business objectives; any system can provide only reasonable, and not absolute, assurance against material misstatement or loss.

For details of our assessment of our internal controls for the purposes of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act, see US Regulation on page 94. The Board also takes account of significant social, environmental and ethical matters that relate to BT’s businesses, and reviews BT’s corporate responsibility policy every year. We describe our workplace practices, specific environmental, social and ethical risks and opportunities, and details of underlying governance processes on pages 1 to 54 in the Strategic report.

We have enterprise-wide risk management processes for identifying, evaluating and managing the principal risks faced by the group. These processes have been in place throughout the year and have continued up to the date on which this document was approved. The processes are in accordance with the FRC guidance on risk management, internal control and related financial and business reporting.

Risk assessment and evaluation are an integral part of BT’s annual strategic review cycle. We have a detailed risk management process which identifies the key risks facing the group, our customer-facing units and Technology.

The key features of our enterprise-wide risk management and internal control process (covering financial, operational and compliance controls) are as follows:

 

  senior executives collectively review the group’s key risks, and have created a Group Risk Register describing the risks, their owners and associated mitigation strategies. The Group Risk
 


Table of Contents
                  97
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    
    

 

Panel and the Executive Committee reviews this before it’s reviewed and approved by the Board

 

  our customer-facing units and Technology carry out risk assessments of their operations, create risk registers relating to those operations and ensure that the key risks are addressed

 

  senior executives with responsibility for major group operations report quarterly on their opinion on the effectiveness of the operation of internal controls in their areas of responsibility

 

  the group’s internal auditors carry out ongoing assessments of the quality of risk management and control, report to management and the Audit  & Risk Committee on the status of specific areas identified for improvement, and promote effective risk management in customer-facing units and Technology

 

  the Audit  & Risk Committee, on behalf of the Board, considers the effectiveness of the group’s internal control procedures during the financial year. It reviews reports from the internal and external auditors, and reports its conclusions to the Board. The Audit  & Risk Committee has carried out these actions for 2018/19

 

  the Audit  & Risk Committee, on behalf of the Board, reviews the effectiveness of risk management arrangements across the group. In support of this, the chief executive and the CEOs of each customer-facing unit and Technology or their delegates hold an annual review meeting.

We have not included joint ventures and associates, which BT does not control, as part of the group risk management process. Third parties we enter into joint ventures with are responsible for their own internal control assessment.

We have set out our significant accounting policies on pages 120 to 121. The consistent application of those policies is subject to ongoing verification through management review and independent review by internal and external auditors.

The processes supporting the preparation and consolidation of the financial statements have been documented and are subject to annual verification through the programme of testing completed by our internal auditors. This serves to confirm the operation of internal controls over financial reporting, as well as compliance with the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. The Audit  & Risk Committee reviews BT’s published financial results, related disclosures and accounting judgements. The committee’s activities for 2018/19 are set out on pages 69 to 72.

Capital management and funding policy

The objective of our capital management policy is to target an overall level of debt consistent with our credit rating objectives, while investing in the business, supporting the pension fund and paying dividends.

The Board reviews the group’s capital structure regularly. Management proposes actions which reflect the group’s investment plans and risk characteristics, as well as the macro-economic conditions in which we operate.

Our funding policy is to raise and invest funds centrally to meet the group’s anticipated requirements. We use a combination of capital

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

market bond issuance, commercial paper borrowing and committed borrowing facilities to fund the group. When issuing debt, in order to avoid refinancing risk, group treasury will take into consideration the maturity profile of the group’s debt portfolio as well as forecast cash flows.

See note 27 to the consolidated financial statements for details of our treasury policy.

Financial instruments

Details of the group’s financial risk management objectives, policies of the group and exposure to interest risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and foreign exchange are given in note 27 to the consolidated financial statements.

Credit risk management policy

We take proactive steps to minimise the impact of adverse market conditions on our financial instruments. In managing investments and derivative financial instruments, the group’s central treasury function monitors the credit quality across treasury counterparties and actively manages any exposures that arise. Management within the business units also actively monitors any exposures arising from trading balances.

Off-balance sheet arrangements

Other than the financial commitments and contingent liabilities disclosed in note 30 to the consolidated financial statements, there are no off-balance sheet arrangements that have, or are reasonably likely to have, a current or future material effect on:

 

  our financial condition

 

  changes in financial condition

 

  revenues or expenses

 

  results of operations

 

  liquidity

 

  capital expenditure

 

  capital resources.

Legal proceedings

The group is involved in various legal proceedings, including actual or threatened litigation and government or regulatory investigations. For further details of legal and regulatory proceedings to which the group is party please see note 30 to the consolidated financial statements on pages 171 to 172.

Apart from the information disclosed in note 30 to the consolidated financial statements, the group does not currently believe that there are any legal proceedings, government or regulatory investigations that may have a material adverse impact on the operations or financial condition of the group. In respect of each of the claims described in note 30, the nature and progression of such proceedings and investigations can make it difficult to predict the impact they will have on the group. Many factors prevent us from making these assessments with certainty, including that the proceedings or investigations are in early stages, no damages or remedies have been specified, and/or the frequently slow pace of litigation.

 


Table of Contents
98         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

General information continued

    

    

      
      

 

Other information - Listing Rules

For the purposes of LR 9.8.4CR, the information required to be disclosed by LR 9.8.4R is on the following pages:

 

     
      Section Information    Page
 

(1)  Interest capitalised

  

Not material

for the group

 

 

 

(2)  Publication of unaudited financial information

   Not applicable  
 

(4)  Details of unusual long-term incentive schemes

   86    
 

(5)  Waiver of emoluments by a director

   Not applicable  
 

(6)  Waiver of future emoluments by a director

   Not applicable  
 

(7)  Non pre-emptive issues of equity for cash

   Not applicable  
 

(8)  Non pre-emptive issue by a major subsidiary undertaking

   Not applicable  
 

(9)  Parent participation in a placing by a listed subsidiary

   Not applicable  
 

(10)  Contracts of significance involving a director or controlling shareholder

   Not applicable  
 

(11)  Provision of services by a controlling shareholder

   Not applicable  
 

(12)  Shareholder waiver of dividends

   See below  
 

(13)  Shareholder waiver of future dividends

   See below  
 

(14)  Agreements with controlling shareholders

   Not applicable  

In respect of LR 9.8.4R (12) and (13), the Trustee of the BT Group Employee Share Ownership Trust agrees to waive dividends payable on the BT shares it holds for satisfying awards under various BT executive share plans. Under the rules of these share plans, the dividends are reinvested in BT shares that are added to the relevant share awards.

Other statutory information – Companies Act 2006

Certain provisions of the 2006 Act require us to make additional disclosures. These are described on the pages listed below:

 

     
      Information    Page
  Structure of BT’s share capital (including the rights and obligations attaching to the shares)    113 and 98 to 99  
  Restrictions on the transfer of BT shares and voting rights    98 to 99    
  Significant direct or indirect shareholdings    65  
  Appointment and replacement of directors    63, 90 and 98  
  Significant agreements to which BT Group plc is a party that take effect, alter or terminate upon a change of control following a takeover    Not applicable  
  Branches    177 to 184  

The following disclosures are not covered elsewhere in this Annual Report:

 

  BT has two employee share ownership trusts that hold BT shares

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   

for satisfying awards under our various employee share plans. The Trustee of the BT Group Employee Share Investment Plan may invite participants, on whose behalf it holds shares, to direct it how to vote in respect of those shares. If there is an offer for the shares or other transaction that would lead to a change of control of BT, participants may direct the Trustee to accept the offer or agree to the transaction. In respect of shares held in the BT Group Employee Share Ownership Trust, the Trustee abstains from voting those shares

 

  if there is an offer for the shares, the Trustee does not have to accept or reject the offer but will have regard to the interests of the participants, may consult them to obtain their views on the offer, and may otherwise take any action with respect to the offer it thinks fair

 

  no person holds securities carrying special rights with regard to control of the company

 

  the registrars must receive proxy appointment and voting instructions not less than 48 hours before a general meeting (see also pages 98 and 99)

 

  any amendment of BT’s Articles of Association requires shareholder approval in accordance with applicable legislation

 

  the powers of BT directors are determined by UK legislation and the Articles of Association. The directors are authorised to issue and allot shares, and to undertake purchases of BT shares subject to shareholder approval at the AGM

 

  we have no agreements with directors providing for compensation for loss of office or employment as a result of a takeover. Similarly, there is no provision for this in our standard employee contracts

 

  we are not aware of any agreements between shareholders that may result in restrictions on the transfer of shares or on voting rights.

Articles of Association

The company’s current Articles of Association were adopted pursuant to a resolution passed at the Annual General Meeting of the company held on 15 July 2015 and contain, amongst others, provisions on the rights and obligations attaching to the company’s shares. The Articles of Association may only be amended by special resolution at a general meeting of the shareholders.

Directors’ appointment and retirement

The company’s Articles of Association regulate the appointment and removal of directors, as does the 2006 Act and related legislation. The Board and shareholders (by ordinary resolution) may appoint a person who is willing to be elected as a director, either to fill a vacancy or as an additional director. At every annual general meeting, all directors must automatically retire. A retiring director is eligible for re-election. In addition to any power of removal under the 2006 Act, the shareholders can pass an ordinary resolution to remove a director.

Share rights

(a)   Voting rights

Subject to the restrictions described below, on a show of hands, every shareholder present in person or by proxy at any general meeting has one vote and, on a poll, every shareholder present in person or by proxy has one vote for each share which they hold.

 


Table of Contents
                  99
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    
    

 

Voting at any meeting of shareholders is by a show of hands unless a poll is demanded by the chairman of the meeting or by at least five shareholders at the meeting who are entitled to vote (or their proxies), or by one or more shareholders at the meeting who are entitled to vote (or their proxies) and who have, between them, at least 10% of the total votes of all shareholders who have the right to vote at the meeting.

No person is, unless the Board decides otherwise, entitled to attend or vote at any general meeting or to exercise any other right conferred by being a shareholder if they or any person appearing to be interested in those shares has been sent a notice under section 793 of the 2006 Act (which confers upon public companies the power to require information with respect to interests in their voting shares) and they or any interested person has failed to supply the company the information requested within 14 days after delivery of that notice. These restrictions end seven days after the earlier of the date the shareholder complies with the request satisfactorily or the company receives notice that there has been an approved transfer of the shares.

(b)    Variation of rights

Whenever the share capital of the company is split into different classes of shares, the special rights attached to any of those classes can be varied or withdrawn either: (i) with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class; or (ii) with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal value of the issued shares of that class. The company can issue new shares and attach any rights and restrictions to them, as long as this is not restricted by special rights previously given to holders of any existing shares. Subject to this, the rights of new shares can take priority over the rights of existing shares, or existing shares can take priority over them, or the new shares and the existing shares can rank equally.

(c)    Changes in capital

The company may by ordinary resolution: (i) divide all or any of its share capital into shares with a smaller nominal value; and (ii) consolidate and divide all or part of its share capital into shares of a larger nominal value. The company may also: (i) buy back its own shares; and (ii) by special resolution reduce its share capital, any capital redemption reserve and any share premium account.

Transfer of shares

Certificated shares of the company may be transferred in writing either by an instrument of transfer in the usual standard form or in another form approved by the Board. The transfer form must be signed or made effective by or on behalf of the person making the transfer. The person making the transfer will be treated as continuing to be the holder of the shares transferred until the name of the person to whom the shares are being transferred is entered in the register of members of the company. The Board may refuse to register any transfer of any share held in certificated form: (i) which is in favour of more than four joint holders; or (ii) unless the transfer form to be registered is properly stamped to show payment of any applicable stamp duty and delivered to the company’s registered office or any other place the Board decide. The transfer must have with it: any other evidence which the Board asks for to prove that the person wanting to make the transfer is entitled to do this; and if the transfer form is executed by another person on behalf of the

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

person making the transfer, evidence of the authority of that person to do so. Transfers of uncertificated shares must be carried out using a relevant system (as defined in the Uncertificated Securities Regulations 2001 (the Regulations)). The Board can refuse to register a transfer of an uncertificated share in the circumstances stated in the Regulations. If the Board decides not to register a transfer of a share, the Board must notify the person to whom that share was to be transferred giving reasons for its decision. This must be done as soon as possible and no later than two months after the company receives the transfer or instruction from the operator of the relevant system.

Political donations

Our policy is that no company in the group will make contributions in cash or in kind to any political party, whether by gift or loan. However, the definition of political donations used in the 2006 Act is very much broader than the sense in which these words are ordinarily used. For example, it could cover making members of parliament and others in the political world aware of key industry issues and matters affecting the company, enhancing their understanding of BT.

The authority for political donations requested at the AGM is not intended to change this policy. It will, however, ensure that the group continues to act within the provisions of the 2006 Act requiring companies to obtain shareholder authority before they make donations to EU political parties and/or political organisations as defined in the 2006 Act. During 2018/19, the company’s wholly owned subsidiary, British Telecommunications plc, paid the costs of attending corporate days of (i) the Conservative party conference; (ii) the Labour party conference; and (iii) the Scottish National party conference. These costs totalled £4,616 (2017/18: £3,829). No company in the BT Group made any loans to any political party.

Cross reference to the Strategic report

In line with the 2006 Act, we have chosen to include the following information in the Strategic report (required by law to be included in the Report of the Directors):

 

  The final dividend proposed by the Board (page 13)

 

  An indication of likely future developments in the business of the company (see the Strategic report on pages 1 to 54)

 

  An indication of our R&D activities (pages 12 and 19)

 

  Information about our people (pages 22 to 24)

 

  Information about greenhouse gas emissions (pages 26 and 27).

By order of the Board

Rachel Canham

Company Secretary & General Counsel, Governance

8 May 2019

 


Table of Contents

LOGO

 

    

 

100           

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

            
          
          
          
          

 

Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts,
independently audited and providing in-depth
disclosure on the financial performance
and position of the group.
  

Financial statements

  
  

 

Independent auditors’ report

     101  
  

 

Group income statement

     110  
  

 

Group statement of comprehensive income

     111  
  

 

Group balance sheet

     112  
  

 

Group statement of changes in equity

     113  
  

 

Group cash flow statement

     114  
  

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

  
  

 

Basis of preparation

     115  
  

 

Prior year restatement and opening balance adjustments

     118  
  

 

Critical accounting estimates and key judgements

     120  
  

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to the overall financial statements

     120  
  

 

Segment information

     122  
  

 

Revenue

     125  
  

 

Operating costs

     128  
  

 

Employees

     129  
  

 

Audit, audit related and other non-audit services

     130  
  

 

Specific items

     130  
  

 

Taxation

     132  
  

Earnings per share

     135  
  

Dividends

     135  
  

Intangible assets

     136  
  

Property, plant and equipment

     138  
  

Programme rights

     141  
  

Trade and other receivables

     141  
  

Trade and other payables

     143  
  

Provisions

     143  
  

Retirement benefit plans

     145  
  

Own shares

     155  
  

Share-based payments

     155  
  

Investments

     157  
  

Cash and cash equivalents

     159  
  

Loans and other borrowings

     159  
  

Finance expense

     163  
  

Financial instruments and risk management

     163  
  

Other reserves

     170  
  

Related party transactions

     171  
  

Financial commitments and contingent liabilities

     171  
  

Financial statements of BT Group plc

 

    

 

173

 

 

 

  

 

Related undertakings

     177  
  

Additional information

     185  

 

 

 


Table of Contents
                  101
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

Report of Independent Registered
Public Accounting Firm

To the Stockholders and Board of Directors

BT Group plc:

Opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying group balance sheet of BT Group plc and subsidiaries (the Company) as of 31 March 2019, the related group income statement, group statement of comprehensive income, group statement of changes in equity, and group cash flow statement for the year ended 31 March 2019, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of 31 March 2019, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year ended 31 March 2019, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and IFRS as adopted by the European Union.

We also have audited the adjustments to the 2018 and 2017 consolidated financial statements to:

 

 

retrospectively apply the transfer of the Northern Ireland Networks business between reportable segments, as described in Notes 2, 5, and 8,

 

 

retrospectively apply the reclassification of internal revenue generated by the Ventures business within the Enterprise segment, as described in Note 5,

 

 

retrospectively apply the re-presentation of product costs and commissions; provision and installation; and marketing and sales; and other operating costs as described in Note 7, and

 

 

retrospectively apply the re-presentation of disclosures required resulting from the adoption of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments, with respect to items designated as hedging instruments, as described in Note 27.

In our opinion, such adjustments are appropriate and have been properly applied. We were not engaged to audit, review, or apply any procedures to the 2018 or 2017 consolidated financial statements of the Company other than with respect to those adjustments and, accordingly, we do not express an opinion or any other form of assurance on the 2018 or 2017 consolidated financial statements taken as a whole.

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the Company’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 March 2019, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, and our report dated May 8, 2019 expressed an adverse opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting.

Changes in Accounting Principles

As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, the Company has changed its method of accounting for revenue from contracts with customers in 2019 due to the adoption of IFRS 15, Revenue from Contracts with Customers , and its method of accounting for financial instruments in 2019 due to the adoption of IFRS 9, Financial Instruments .

Basis for Opinion

These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. Our audit included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audit also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audit provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

We have served as the Company’s auditor since 2018.

/s/ KPMG LLP

London, United Kingdom

8 May 2019


Table of Contents
102         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Stockholders and Board of Directors

BT Group plc

Opinion on Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

We have audited BT Group plc’s and subsidiaries’ (the Company) internal control over financial reporting as of March 31, 2019, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission. In our opinion, because of the effect of the material weaknesses, described below, on the achievement of the objectives of the control criteria, the Company has not maintained effective internal control over financial reporting as of March 31, 2019, based on criteria established in Internal Control - Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO).

We also have audited, in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (PCAOB), the consolidated balance sheet of the Company as of March 31, 2019, the related group income statement, group statement of comprehensive income, group statement of changes in equity, and group cash flow statement for the year ended 31 March 2019, and the related notes (collectively, the consolidated financial statements), and our report dated May 8, 2019 expressed an unqualified opinion on those consolidated financial statements.

A material weakness is a deficiency, or a combination of deficiencies, in internal control over financial reporting, such that there is a reasonable possibility that a material misstatement of the company’s annual or interim financial statements will not be prevented or detected on a timely basis. Material weaknesses related to General IT Controls and Risk Assessments have been identified and included in management’s assessment.

The material weaknesses were considered in determining the nature, timing, and extent of audit tests applied in our audit of the 2019 consolidated financial statements, and this report does not affect our report on those consolidated financial statements.

Basis for Opinion

The Company’s management is responsible for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in the accompanying Management’s Report on Internal Control over Financial Reporting as of March 31, 2019. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s internal control over financial reporting based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the PCAOB and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audit also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorizations of management and directors of the company; and (3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorized acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

/s/ KPMG LLP

London, United Kingdom

May 8, 2019


Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Table of Contents


Table of Contents

110

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Group income statement

Year ended 31 March 2019

 

 

      Notes  

Before

specific items

(‘Adjusted’)

£m

   

Specific

items a

£m

   

Total

(Reported)

£m

 

Revenue

     5, 6       23,459       (31     23,428  

Operating costs

     7       (19,613     (394     (20,007
                                  

Operating profit (loss)

     5       3,846       (425     3,421  
                                  

Finance expense

     26       (651     (139     (790

Finance income

       34             34  
                                  

Net finance expense

       (617     (139     (756

Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures

       1             1  
                                  

Profit (loss) before taxation

       3,230       (564     2,666  

Taxation

     11       (619     112       (507
                                  

Profit (loss) for the year

       2,611       (452     2,159  
                                  

Earnings per share

     12        

Basic

           21.8p  

Diluted

           21.6p  
                                  

Year ended 31 March 2018

 

      Notes  

Before

specific items

(‘Adjusted’)

£m

   

Specific

items a

£m

   

Total

(Reported)

£m

 

Revenue

     5, 6       23,746       (23     23,723  

Operating costs

     7       (19,755     (587     (20,342
                                  

Operating profit (loss)

     5       3,991       (610     3,381  
                                  

Finance expense

     26       (558     (218     (776

Finance income

       12             12  
                                  

Net finance expense

       (546     (218     (764

Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures

       (1           (1
                                  

Profit (loss) before taxation

       3,444       (828     2,616  

Taxation

     11       (671     87       (584
                                  

Profit (loss) for the year

       2,773       (741     2,032  
                                  

Earnings per share

     12        

Basic

           20.5p  

Diluted

           20.4p  
                                  

 

a

For a definition of specific items, see page 185. An analysis of specific items is provided in note 10.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

111

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

 

Group income statement

Year ended 31 March 2017

 

 

      Notes  

Before

specific items

(‘Adjusted’)

£m

   

Specific

items a

£m

   

Total

(Reported)

£m

 

Revenue

     5, 6       24,082       (20     24,062  

Operating costs

     7       (19,947     (948     (20,895
                                  

Operating profit (loss)

     5       4,135       (968     3,167  
                                  

Finance expense

     26       (607     (210     (817

Finance income

       13             13  
                                  

Net finance expense

       (594     (210     (804

Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures

       (9           (9
                                  

Profit (loss) before taxation

       3,532       (1,178     2,354  

Taxation

     11       (663     217       (446
                                  

Profit (loss) for the year

       2,869       (961     1,908  
                                  

Earnings per share

     12        

Basic

           19.2p  

Diluted

           19.1p  
                                  

 

a  

For a definition of specific items, see page 185. An analysis of specific items is provided in note 10.

Group statement of comprehensive income

Year ended 31 March

 

      Notes   

2019

£m

    

2018

(Restated) a

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Profit for the year

        2,159        2,032       1,908  
                                

Other comprehensive income (loss)

          

Items that will not be reclassified to the income statement

          

Remeasurements of the net pension obligation

   20      (2,102      1,684       (2,789

Tax on pension remeasurements

   11      384        (263     416  

Items that have been or may be reclassified to the income statement

          

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

   28      64        (188     237  

Fair value movements on available-for-sale assets

   28             11       (3

Fair value movements on assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

   28      3               

Movements in relation to cash flow hedges:

          

net fair value gains (losses)

   28      176        (368     884  

recognised in income and expense

   28      (18      277       (938

Tax on components of other comprehensive income that have been or may be reclassified

   11, 28      (41      1       29  
                                

Other comprehensive income (loss) for the year, net of tax

        (1,534      1,154       (2,164
                                

Total comprehensive income (loss) for the year

        625        3,186       (256
                                

 

a  

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2 to the consolidated financial statements.


Table of Contents

112

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Group balance sheet

At 31 March

 

 

      Notes     

2019

£m

    

2018

(Restated) a

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Non-current assets

          

Intangible assets

     14        14,385        14,447       15,029  

Property, plant and equipment

     15        17,835        17,000       16,498  

Derivative financial instruments

     27        1,481        1,312       1,818  

Investments

     23        54        53       44  

Associates and joint ventures

        47        38       31  

Trade and other receivables

     17        445        317       360  

Contract assets b

     6        249               

Deferred tax assets

     11        1,347        1,326       1,717  
                                    
        35,843        34,493       35,497  
                                    

Current assets

          

Programme rights

     16        310        272       264  

Inventories

        369        239       227  

Trade and other receivables

     17        3,222        4,014       3,835  

Contract assets b

     6        1,353               

Assets held for sale

        89               

Current tax receivable

        110        77       73  

Derivative financial instruments

     27        111        197       428  

Investments

     23        3,214        3,022       1,520  

Cash and cash equivalents

     24        1,666        528       528  
                                    
        10,444        8,349       6,875  
                                    

Current liabilities

          

Loans and other borrowings

     25        2,100        2,281       2,632  

Derivative financial instruments

     27        48        50       34  

Trade and other payables

     18        5,790        7,168       7,437  

Contract liabilities b

     6        1,225               

Current tax liabilities

        15        83       197  

Provisions

     19        424        603       625  
                                    
        9,602        10,185       10,925  
                                    

Total assets less current liabilities

        36,685        32,657       31,447  
                                    

Non-current liabilities

          

Loans and other borrowings

     25        14,776        11,994       10,081  

Derivative financial instruments

     27        892        787       869  

Contract liabilities b

     6        200               

Retirement benefit obligations

     20        7,182        6,847       9,088  

Other payables

     18        1,479        1,326       1,298  

Deferred tax liabilities

     11        1,407        1,340       1,240  

Provisions

     19        582        452       536  
                                    
        26,518        22,746       23,112  
                                    

Equity

          

Share capital

        499        499       499  

Share premium

        1,051        1,051       1,051  

Own shares

     21        (167      (186     (96

Merger reserve

        4,147        6,647       6,647  

Other reserves

     28        718        534       884  

Retained earnings

        3,919        1,366       (650
                                    

Total equity

        10,167        9,911       8,335  
                                    
        36,685        32,657       31,447  
                                    

 

a  

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2 to the consolidated financial statements.

b  

Contract assets and contract liabilities arise following adoption of IFRS 15 on 1 April 2018. See notes 1 and 2 to the consolidated financial statements.

The consolidated financial statements on pages 110 to 184 were approved by the Board of Directors on 8 May 2019 and were signed on its behalf by:

 

Jan du Plessis

Chairman

 

Philip Jansen

Chief Executive

 

Simon Lowth

Chief Financial Officer


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

113

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

 

Group statement of changes in equity

 

 

     Notes  

Share

capital a

£m

   

Share

premium b

£m

   

Own

shares c

£m

   

Merger

reserve d

£m

   

Other

reserves e

£m

   

Retained

(loss)

earnings

(Restated) f

£m

   

Total

equity

(deficit)

(Restated)

£m

 

At 1 April 2016

      499       1,051       (115     8,422       685       (430     10,112  
                                                             

Profit for the year

                                    1,908       1,908  

Other comprehensive income (loss) – before tax

                              1,108       (2,779     (1,671

Tax on other comprehensive income (loss)

  11                             29       416       445  

Transferred to the income statement

                              (938           (938
                                                             

Total comprehensive income (loss) for the year

                              199       (455     (256

Transfers to realised profit

                        (1,775           1,775        

Dividends to shareholders

  13                                   (1,436     (1,436

Share-based payments

  22                                   57       57  

Tax on share-based payments

  11                                   (6     (6

Net buyback of own shares

  21                 19                   (155     (136
                                                             

At 1 April 2017

      499       1,051       (96     6,647       884       (650     8,335  
                                                             

Profit for the year

                                    2,032       2,032  

Other comprehensive income (loss) – before tax

                              (545     2,160       1,615  

Tax on other comprehensive income (loss)

  11                             1       (346     (345

Transferred to the income statement

                              277             277  
                                                             

Total comprehensive income (loss) for the year

                              (267     3,846       3,579  

Dividends to shareholders

  13                                   (1,524     (1,524

Share-based payments

  22                                   84       84  

Tax on share-based payments

  11                                   (2     (2

Net buyback of own shares

  21                 (90                 (78     (168

Transfer to realised profit

                              (83     83        
                                                             

At 31 March 2018 – as previously reported

      499       1,051       (186     6,647       534       1,759       10,304  
                                                             

Pension restatement f

                                    (393     (393
                                                             

At 31 March 2018 – restated

      499       1,051       (186     6,647       534       1,366       9,911  

IFRS opening balance adjustment g

                                    1,308       1,308  

Tax on IFRS opening balance adjustment g

                                    (248     (248
                                                             

At 1 April 2018

      499       1,051       (186     6,647       534       2,426       10,971  

Profit for the year

                                    2,159       2,159  

Other comprehensive income (loss) – before tax

                              243       (2,102     (1,859

Tax on other comprehensive income (loss)

  11                             (41     384       343  

Transferred to the income statement

                              (18           (18
                                                             

Total comprehensive income (loss) for the year

                              184       441       625  

Dividends to shareholders

  13                                   (1,503     (1,503

Unclaimed Dividend over 10 years

                                    14       14  

Share-based payments

  22                                   67       67  

Tax on share-based payments

  11                                          

Net buyback of own shares

  21                 19                   (23     (4

Transfer to realised profit

                        (2,500           2,500        

Other movements

                                    (3     (3
                                                             

At 31 March 2019

      499       1,051       (167     4,147       718       3,919       10,167  
                                                             

 

a  

The allotted, called up, and fully paid ordinary share capital of BT Group plc at 31 March 2019 was £499m comprising 9,968,127,681 ordinary shares of 5p each (2018: £499m comprising 9,968,127,681 ordinary shares of 5p each).

b  

The share premium account, comprising the premium on allotment of shares, is not available for distribution.

c  

For further analysis of own shares, see note 21.

d  

The merger reserve balance at 1 April 2016 includes £998m related to the group reorganisation that occurred in November 2001 and represented the difference between the nominal value of shares in the new parent company, BT Group plc, and the aggregate of the share capital, share premium account and capital redemption reserve of the prior parent company, British Telecommunications plc. In addition, on 29 January 2016, the company issued 1,594,900,429 ordinary shares of 5p at 470.7p per share. These shares were used as part consideration for the acquisition of EE. As a result of this transaction the merger reserve was credited with £7,424m net of £3m issue costs. Following settlement of intercompany loans by qualifying consideration of £1,775m (2016/17) and £2,500m (2018/19), equivalent balances were transferred from merger reserve to realised profit.

e  

For further analysis of other reserves, see note 28.

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2 to the consoliated financial statements.

g  

Opening retained earnings adjusted following adoption of IFRS 15 on 1 April 2018. See notes 1 and 2 to the consolidated financial statements.


Table of Contents

114

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Group cash flow statement

Year ended 31 March

 

 

      Notes   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Cash flow from operating activities

          

Profit before taxation

        2,666        2,616       2,354  

Share of post tax (profit) loss of associates and joint ventures

        (1      1       9  

Net finance expense

        756        764       804  
                                

Operating profit

        3,421        3,381       3,167  

Other non-cash charges

        (112      33       20  

Loss (profit) on disposal of businesses

        5        (1     (16

Depreciation and amortisation

        3,546        3,514       3,572  

Increase in inventories

        (138      (14     (33

Decrease (increase) in programme rights

        49        (34     (95

(Increase) decrease in trade and other receivables a

        (58      (156     168  

Decrease in contract assets b

        15               

Increase (decrease) in trade and other payables

        57        (345     (152

Decrease in contract liabilities b

        (72             

Decrease in other liabilities c

        (1,934      (775     (307

(Decrease) increase in provisions

        (92      (203     401  
                                

Cash generated from operations

        4,687        5,400       6,725  
                                

Income taxes paid

        (431      (473     (551
                                

Net cash inflow from operating activities

        4,256        4,927       6,174  
                                

Cash flow from investing activities

          

Interest received

        23        7       7  

Dividends received from associates and joint ventures

                     2  

Acquisition of subsidiaries d

               (16     18  

Proceeds on disposal of subsidiaries d , associates and joint ventures

        23        2       46  

Acquisition of joint ventures

        (9      (9     (13

Proceeds on disposal of current financial assets e

        12,887        11,134       10,834  

Purchases of current financial assets e

        (13,088      (12,629     (9,411

Proceeds on disposal of non-current asset investments f

        1        19        

Purchases of non-current asset investments

                     (22

Proceeds on disposal of property, plant and equipment

        41        21       26  

Purchases of property, plant and equipment and software

        (3,678      (3,362     (3,145
                                

Net cash outflow from investing activities

        (3,800      (4,833     (1,658
                                

Cash flow from financing activities

          

Equity dividends paid

        (1,504      (1,523     (1,435

Interest paid

        (531      (555     (629

Repayment of borrowings g

        (1,423      (1,401     (1,805

Proceeds from bank loans and bonds

        3,972        3,760       3  

Cash flows from derivatives related to net debt

        124        (188     119  

Repayment of acquisition facility

                     (181

Repayment of EE revolving credit facility

                     (438

Proceeds from issue of own shares

        5        53       70  

Repurchase of ordinary share capital

        (9      (221     (206
                                

Net cash inflow (outflow) from financing activities

        634        (75     (4,502
                                

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

        1,090        19       14  
                                

Opening cash and cash equivalents h

        499        511       459  

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

        1,090        19       14  

Effect of exchange rate changes

        5        (31     38  
                                

Closing cash and cash equivalents h

   24      1,594        499       511  
                                

 

a  

Includes a prepayment of £nil (2017/18: £325m, 2016/17: £nil) in respect of the acquisition of Spectrum.

b  

Contract assets and contract liabilities arise following adoption of IFRS 15 on 1 April 2018. See notes 1 and 2 to the consolidated financial statements.

c

Includes pension deficit payments of £2,024m (2017/18: £872m, 2016/17: £274m).

d  

Acquisitions and disposals of subsidiaries are shown net of cash acquired or disposed of and in 2017 included £20m true-up of consideration following the audit of the completion balance sheet relating to the acquisition of EE.

e  

Primarily consists of investment in and redemption of amounts held in liquidity funds.

f  

Relates to sale of fair value through equity investment in 2018/19 and assets held for sale classified within trade and other receivables in 2017/18.

g  

Repayment of borrowings includes the impact of hedging and repayment of lease liabilities.

h  

Net of bank overdrafts of £72m (2017/18: £29m, 2016/17: £17m).


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

115

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements

 

 

1. Basis of preparation

Preparation of the financial statements

These consolidated financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS), Article 4 of the IAS Regulation and International Accounting Standards (IAS) and IFRS and related interpretations, as adopted by the European Union. The consolidated financial statements are also in compliance with IFRS as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (the IASB) and interpretations as issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee. The consolidated financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis.

These financial statements consolidate BT Group plc, the parent company, and its subsidiaries (together the ‘group’, ‘us’, ‘we’ or ‘our’).

The consolidated financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis, except for certain financial and equity instruments that have been measured at fair value. The consolidated financial statements are presented in sterling, the functional currency of BT Group plc.

New and amended accounting standards effective during the year

The following standards have been adopted during the year and have a significant impact on the financial statements.

IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’

Background

IFRS 15 sets out the requirements for recognising revenue and costs from contracts with customers and includes extensive disclosure requirements. It replaced IAS 18 ‘Revenue’ and related interpretations. The standard requires us to apportion revenue earned from contracts to individual promises, or performance obligations, on a relative stand-alone selling price basis, based on a five-step model.

Transition

We chose to adopt IFRS 15 using the cumulative effect method. Under this transition method:

 

the standard has been applied only to contracts in progress but not completed as at 1 April 2018

 

for contracts that were modified before 1 April 2018, the aggregate effect of all of the modifications that occurred before this date are reflected as at 1 April 2018

 

prior year comparatives have not been restated for the effect of IFRS 15 and continue to be reported under IAS 18. Instead our 1 April 2018 opening retained earnings have been adjusted for the full cumulative impact of adopting the standard.

Financial Impact

In the prior year Annual Report we estimated that the likely impact on transition at 1 April 2018 would produce a cumulative increase in retained earnings of between £1.1bn and £1.5bn before tax. The actual increase of £1.3bn before tax (£1.1bn

after tax) has primarily been recorded as a contract asset and has led to an additional one-off cash tax payment equally split between 2018/19 and 2019/20.

The cumulative increase in retained earnings is mainly due to the acceleration of handset revenues and, to a lesser extent, deferral of costs, notably third-party contract acquisition costs primarily associated with post pay contracts.

The financial impact of each business area is as follows:

 

Under our previous accounting policy, mobile handset revenue was recognised based on the amount the customer pays for the handset when it is delivered to the customer. Generally mobile handsets are either provided free or for a small upfront charge. Under IFRS 15, additional revenue is allocated to the mobile handset at the start of the contract. This is calculated with reference to its relative standalone value within the contract, regardless of the contract pricing. For each mobile handset contract, the revenue recognition profile changes with greater day one recognition of revenue for the handset and a corresponding reduction in ongoing mobile service revenue over the contract period. The difference between the mobile handset revenue recognised and the amounts charged to the customer has been recognised as a contract asset. Over time, we expect the contract asset generated to remain at similar levels as old contracts expire and new ones are signed. However, we will see short-term volatility, for example around key handset launches. This primarily impacted Consumer, and to a lesser extent, mobile handset revenues in Enterprise in respect of the legacy EE business division. There is a similar effect in respect of subsidised equipment although this had a less significant impact due to its lower relative standalone value.

 

Previously, sales commissions and other third-party acquisition costs resulting directly from securing contracts with customers were expensed when incurred. Under IFRS 15, these costs are recognised as an asset, and amortised over the period in which the corresponding benefit is received, resulting in earlier profit recognition. The impact is greatest in Consumer in respect of third-party acquisition costs partially associated with post-pay contracts.

 

The above two impacts are partly offset by the change in accounting for connections revenue. Previously, the group recognised connections revenue upon performance of the connection activity. Under IFRS 15, connections revenue is deferred and recognised on a straight-line basis over the associated line/circuit contractual period. This means that revenue and profits are recognised later. On transition this created a contract liability as revenue and profits are deferred to future periods. Openreach and Enterprise deliver the majority of this service and therefore experienced the majority of the impact. Over time, this liability is expected to remain at similar levels as old contracts expire and new ones are signed.

 

We will provide for expected lifetime losses on contract assets as required by IFRS 9 as set out below.

 

The IFRS 15 impact on other areas was not material. This included certain contract fulfilment costs which are recognised as an asset and amortised over the period in which benefit is received and certain expenses that are recognised as a deduction from revenue.

 


Table of Contents

116

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

1. Basis of preparation  continued

 

The impact of the adoption of IFRS 15 on opening retained earnings at 1 April 2018 is shown in note 2. The following tables show, for the year ended 31 March 2019, the impact had the IFRS 15 standard not been adopted on the financial statement line items affected for the income statement and balance sheet. There was no net impact on the key cash flow captions (net cash flow from operating activities, net cash flow from investing activities or net cash flow from financing activities).

Group income statement

 

Year ended 31 March 2019   

As
reported

(IFRS 15)

£m

   

Adjustments

£m

   

Without
adoption
of IFRS 15

(IAS 18)

£m

 

Revenue

     23,428       (252     23,176  

Operating costs

     (20,007     1       (20,006

Operating profit

     3,421       (251     3,170  

Profit before tax

     2,666       (251     2,415  

Tax

     (507     48       (459

Profit for the year

     2,159       (203     1,956  

Earnings per share – basic

     21.8p       (2.1p     19.7p  

Earnings per share – diluted

     21.6p       (2.0p     19.6p  
                          

Group balance sheet

 

As at 31 March 2019   

As
reported

(IFRS 15)

£m

    

Adjustments

£m

   

Without
adoption
of IFRS 15

(IAS 18)

£m

 

Non-current assets

       

Contract assets

     249        (249      

Trade and other receivables

     445        (149     296  

Current assets

       

Contract assets

     1,353        (1,353      

Trade and other receivables

     3,222        180       3,402  

Current tax receivable

     110        296       406  

Current liabilities

       

Trade and other payables

     5,790        1,313       7,103  

Contract liabilities

     1,225        (1,225      
                           

Total assets less current liabilities

     36,685        (1,363     35,322  
                           

Non-current liabilities

       

Other payables

     1,479        102       1,581  

Contract liabilities

     200        (200      

Equity

       

Retained earnings

     3,919        (1,265     2,654  
                           

Total equity and non-current liabilities

     36,685        (1,363     35,322  
                           

Disclosures

IFRS 15 requires additional disclosures in our Annual Report. To reflect these expanded requirements we have added a dedicated revenue note (note 6). The key disclosure changes are as follows:

 

we have changed our revenue disclosures to comply with the requirements to disaggregate revenue recognised from contracts with customers into categories that depict how the

  nature, amount, timing and uncertainty of revenue and associated cash flows are affected by economic factors

 

we have provided further detail around contract balances and their movements in the year

 

we have provided an aggregate amount of the transaction price allocated to performance obligations that are unsatisfied as at the end of the reporting period and an explanation of when these are expected to be recognised as revenue.

IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’

IFRS 9 sets out requirements for classification, measurement, impairment and de-recognition of financial assets and liabilities, and includes a new hedge accounting model. It replaces IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement’. The standard has not had a material impact on our results, with the key impacts set out below.

Impairment of financial assets

We have revised the methodologies we use to impair financial assets to reflect the forward-looking ‘expected credit loss’ model introduced by IFRS 9, in contrast to the backward-looking ‘incurred credit loss’ model used under IAS 39. As a result we now recognise a loss allowance for all expected credit losses on initial recognition of financial assets, including trade receivables and the contract assets recognised on transition to IFRS 15. Providing for loss allowances on our existing financial assets has not had a material impact on the financial statements.

Classification of financial instruments

IFRS 9 introduces new categories of financial instrument: fair value through profit and loss, fair value through other comprehensive income, and amortised cost. These replace the IAS 39 categories of fair value through profit and loss, available-for-sale, loans and receivables, and held-to-maturity.

We have reclassified our financial instruments based on these new categories. Certain investments in liquidity funds, disclosed in note 23, were classified as available-for-sale under IAS 39 but have been reclassified to amortised cost under IFRS 9, because they are held to collect contractual cash flows. All other financial instruments classified as available-for-sale under IAS 39, including all equity instruments, have been reclassified as fair value through other comprehensive income under IFRS 9. All financial instruments previously classified as loans and receivables and held-to-maturity under IAS 39 have been reclassified as amortised cost under IFRS 9, and the classification of all instruments classified as fair value through profit and loss under IAS 39 is unchanged under IFRS 9.

Reclassification of liquidity fund investments has not had a material impact on the accounting as they are short-term in nature and amortised cost can reasonably be expected to equate to fair value. The reclassifications have not changed the accounting for any other instruments and therefore their carrying amounts are unchanged under IFRS 9.

Hedging

We have chosen to adopt the IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements because they enable us to align our hedge accounting more closely with our risk management activities in

 


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

117

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

1. Basis of preparation  continued

 

the future. Adoption of the revised requirements has had no impact on the effectiveness of our existing hedges, however, it has been necessary for us to revise hedge documentation to ensure compliance with enhanced IFRS 9 documentation requirements.

We have taken the exemption not to restate comparative information for prior periods with respect to classification and measurement requirements, including the move to the expected credit loss model. Consequently, we have not restated prior period comparatives on adoption of IFRS 9.

Other standards

The following amended standards and interpretations were also effective during the year, however, they have not had a significant impact on our consolidated financial statements.

 

Classification and Measurement of Share-based Payment Transactions (Amendments to IFRS 2).

 

Applying IFRS 9 Financial Instruments with IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts (Amendments to IFRS 4).

 

Transfers of investment property (Amendments to IAS 40).

 

Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2014–2016 Cycle – various standards.

 

IFRIC 22 Foreign currency transactions and advance consideration.

New and amended accounting standards that have been issued but are not yet effective

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ is effective for the accounting period starting 1 April 2019 and will have a material impact on our financial statements.

Background

IFRS 16 was published in January 2016 and replaces IAS 17 ‘Leases’ and related interpretations. The standard requires lessees to recognise a right-of-use asset and lease liability for all leases meeting the lease definition set out by the standard unless certain exemptions are available. Accounting for lessors is largely unchanged.

Transition

We will adopt IFRS 16 on a modified retrospective basis. On transition, remaining payments payable under lease arrangements will be discounted using an appropriate incremental borrowing rate and recognised as lease liabilities. Right-of-use assets will be recognised equivalent to the lease liability, adjusted for any pre-existing prepaid lease payments, accrued lease expenses, and related onerous lease and decommissioning provisions.

We will recognise the cumulative effect of initially applying the standard as an adjustment to the opening balance of retained earnings at 1 April 2019, ie the date of initial application. Results in the 2019/20 financial year will be reported under IFRS 16 and the Annual Report 2020 will be the first Annual Report to include the results on this basis.

We have made significant progress in implementing the standard. A cross-functional project team has been engaged in identifying arrangements in scope of IFRS 16, determining appropriate accounting policies and judgements, and implementing a system solution capable of quantifying the impact of the standard and processing accounting entries on a business-as-usual basis.

Practical expedients and judgements

We have elected to make use of the following practical expedients and exemptions available under IFRS 16:

 

low-value leases and short-term leases will be excluded from IFRS 16 accounting, ie they will be accounted for in the same manner as operating leases currently are

 

onerous lease provisions in existence at the date of initial adoption will be derecognised and applied against the corresponding right-of-use asset as a proxy for impairment

 

leases of intangible assets such as software licenses will continue to be accounted for under IAS 38 ‘Intangible Assets’

 

where we are lessee in a contract containing both lease components and non-lease components, we will account for the arrangement as though it comprises a single lease component

 

initial direct costs will be excluded when measuring the right-of-use asset

 

hindsight will be used when assessing the lease term.

Anticipated impact

BT as lessee

All arrangements previously disclosed as operating lease commitments will now be recognised on the balance sheet. A key driver will be group’s portfolio of leased land and buildings, the majority of which is currently recognised off balance sheet following a sale and operating leaseback transaction in 2001. Cell and switch site leases represent another material element, due to the long lease terms associated with these arrangements.

On the basis of progress made in implementing the standard, we expect the following impact on adoption:

 

lease liabilities of between £5.6bn – £6.6bn will be recognised as a result of bringing operating lease commitments onto the balance sheet. Corresponding right-of-use assets will be recognised, adjusted for accrued lease payments and provisions currently recognised as liabilities. We do not anticipate a material impact on retained earnings due to the transition options selected

 

the increase in liabilities will have a corresponding impact on net debt and gearing ratios

 

depreciation expense and interest expense will replace the current operating lease expense, resulting in increased EBITDA

 

profit after tax will see a reduction in the periods immediately following transition to IFRS 16, driven by interest expense charged in respect of the new leases being ‘frontloaded’ when compared to the previous straight-line operating lease expense

 

within the cash flow statement, lease payments will now be presented within cash flows from operating activities and cash flows from financing activities in respect of depreciation and interest expense respectively. The timing of cash flows will remain unchanged.

BT as lessor

Lessor accounting is substantially unchanged under IFRS 16 and we do not expect the standard to have a material impact on the accounting for arrangements currently identified as leases. However, “last mile” arrangements provided by Openreach to communications providers and currently accounted for as service contracts meet the revised IFRS 16 lease definition, with Openreach as lessor.

Connection fees received will now be deferred over the lease term, which is longer than the current contractual deferral period as it also covers the duration that we are ‘reasonably certain’ that communications providers will retain the use of the line beyond the contractual period. We have determined that this is six months for all last mile arrangements with the exception of

 


Table of Contents

118

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

1. Basis of preparation  continued

 

FTTP, which is unchanged. Additional deferred income will be recognised in respect of active arrangements at the transition date, with a corresponding adjustment to retained earnings. This is not expected to have a material impact on the balance sheet or income statement.

Other standards

The following standards and interpretations are applicable in future periods but are not expected to have a significant impact on the consolidated financial statements.

 

IFRIC 23 Uncertainty over Tax Treatments

 

IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts

Presentation of specific items

Our income statement and segmental analysis separately identify trading results before specific items (‘adjusted’). The directors believe that presentation of our results in this way is relevant to an understanding of our financial performance, as specific items are identified by virtue of their size, nature or incidence.

This presentation is consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management and reported to the Board and the Executive Committee and assists in providing a meaningful analysis of our trading results. In determining whether an event or transaction is specific, management considers quantitative as well as qualitative factors such as the frequency or predictability of occurrence.

Furthermore, we consider a columnar presentation to be appropriate, as it improves the clarity of the presentation and is consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management and reported to the Board and the Executive  Committee.

Specific items may not be comparable to similarly titled measures used by other companies. Examples of charges or credits meeting the above definition and which have been presented as specific items in the current and/or prior years include acquisitions/disposals of businesses and investments, regulatory settlements, historical insurance or litigation claims, business restructuring programmes, asset impairment charges, property rationalisation programmes, net interest on pensions and the settlement of multiple tax years. In the event that other items meet the criteria, which are applied consistently from year to year, they are also treated as specific items.

Specific items for the current and prior years are disclosed in note 10.

2. Prior year restatement and opening balance adjustments

Revision of segment results

During the year we reduced the number of our customer-facing units with a corresponding impact on reportable segments. Our BT Consumer and EE customer-facing units were brought together on 1 April 2018, and our Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures customer-facing units were combined on

1 October 2018. The group now has four customer-facing units:

 

Consumer (formerly BT Consumer and EE)

 

Enterprise (formerly Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures)

 

Global Services

 

Openreach.

During the year we also transferred our Northern Ireland Networks business from Enterprise to Openreach.

Where appropriate, comparative results for all four customer-facing units have been revised to be presented on a consistent basis. This affects the segment information and employees disclosures. See notes 5 and 8 respectively.

Restatement of previously issued financial statements for IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations

On 27 July 2018 we announced that we had been alerted to an error made by our independent external actuary in the actuary’s calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations at 31 March 2018. Our independent external actuary is employed as an expert to calculate the IAS 19 accounting valuation on behalf of management. The error resulted from the incorrect application of changes to demographic assumptions. Management determined that the error was material with respect to the statement of comprehensive income and would require us to restate the previously issued consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2018.

The accounting error understated the net pension obligation, after tax, at 31 March 2018 by £393m (£476m gross of deferred tax) and overstated total equity in the balance sheet by £393m. The re-measurement gain of the net pension obligation recorded within the statement of comprehensive income for the year ended 31 March 2018 was overstated by £476m and tax expense on the pension re-measurement was overstated by £83m.

The error has no effect on the income statement or the cash flow statement or any amounts included in the financial statements for the year ending 31 March 2017. It also has no effect on the 2017 triennial funding valuation of the BT Pension Scheme, associated cash contributions or on the pension scheme members.

Opening balance adjustments resulting from the implementation of IFRS 15 and IFRS 9

The transition methods we have chosen in applying IFRS 9 and IFRS 15 mean we do not restate comparative information for the impact of these standards. We have instead adjusted the 1 April 2018 balance sheet to reflect the impact on opening retained earnings of recognition of the IFRS 15 contract asset and liability, and for the IFRS 9 expected loss allowance.

Impact of restatement and opening balance adjustments

Set out below is the impact of these items on the group statement of comprehensive income and balance sheet. They are reflected in the group statement of changes in equity as presented on page 113.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

119

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

2. Prior year restatement and opening balance adjustments  continued

 

Group statement of comprehensive income

 

     

Year ended
31 March

2018

(as published)

£m

   

Pension

restatement

£m

   

Year ended
31 March

2018

(restated)

£m

 

Profit for the period

     2,032             2,032  
                          

Other comprehensive income (loss)

      

Items that will not be reclassified to the income statement:

      

Remeasurements of the net pension obligation

     2,160       (476     1,684  

Tax on pension remeasurements

     (346     83       (263

Items that have been or may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement:

      

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

     (188           (188

Fair value movements on available-for-sale assets

     11             11  

Movements in relation to cash flow hedges:

          

net fair value (losses) gains

     (368           (368

recognised in income and expense

     277             277  

Tax on components of other comprehensive income that have been or may be reclassified

     1             1  
                          

Other comprehensive profit (loss) for the period, net of tax

     1,547       (393     1,154  
                          

Total comprehensive income (loss) for the period

     3,579       (393     3,186  
                          

Group balance sheet

 

     

At 31 March

2018

(as published)

£m

    

Pension

restatement

£m

   

At 31 March

2018

(restated)

£m

    

IFRS 9 & 15
opening
balance

adjustment

£m

   

At 1 April

2018

£m

 

Non-current assets

            

Intangible assets

     14,447              14,447              14,447  

Property, plant and equipment

     17,000              17,000              17,000  

Trade and other receivables

     317              317        114       431  

Contract assets

                         198       198  

Deferred tax assets

     1,243        83       1,326              1,326  

Other non-current assets

     1,403              1,403              1,403  
                                            
     34,410        83       34,493        312       34,805  
                                            

Current assets

            

Trade and other receivables

     4,014              4,014        (337     3,677  

Contract assets

                         1,417       1,417  

Cash and cash equivalents

     528              528              528  

Other current assets

     3,807              3,807              3,807  
                                            
     8,349              8,349        1,080       9,429  
                                            

Current liabilities

            

Loans and other borrowings

     2,281              2,281              2,281  

Trade and other payables

     7,168              7,168        (1,409     5,759  

Contract liabilities

                         1,406       1,406  

Current tax liabilities

     83              83        248       331  

Other current liabilities

     653              653              653  
                                            
     10,185              10,185        245       10,430  
                                            

Total assets less current liabilities

     32,574        83       32,657        1,147       33,804  
                                            

Non-current liabilities

            

Loans and other borrowings

     11,994              11,994              11,994  

Contract liabilities

                         87       87  

Retirement benefit obligations

     6,371        476       6,847              6,847  

Other non-current liabilities

     3,905              3,905              3,905  
                                            
     22,270        476       22,746        87       22,833  
                                            

Equity

            

Share capital

     499              499              499  

All other reserves

     8,046              8,046              8,046  

Retained earnings

     1,759        (393     1,366        1,060       2,426  
                                            

Total equity

     10,304        (393     9,911        1,060       10,971  
                                            
     32,574        83       32,657        1,147       33,804  
                                            


Table of Contents

120

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

3. Critical accounting estimates and key judgements

The preparation of financial statements in conformity with IFRS requires the use of accounting estimates and assumptions. It also requires management to exercise its judgement in the process of applying our accounting policies. We continually evaluate our estimates, assumptions and judgements based on available information and experience. As the use of estimates is inherent in financial reporting, actual results could differ from these estimates. Management has discussed its critical accounting estimates and associated disclosures with the Audit and Risk Committee . The areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity are described in the applicable notes to the financial statements. Critical accounting estimates and key judgements can be identified throughout the notes by the following symbol LOGO .

We have the following critical accounting estimates (E) and key judgements (J):

 

Current and deferred income tax, see note 11 (E, J).

 

Goodwill impairment, see note 14 (E, J).

 

Government grants relating to Broadband Delivery UK (BDUK) contracts, see note 15 (J).

 

Provisions and contingent liabilities, see note 19 (E, J).

 

Pension obligations, see note 20 (E, J).

4. Significant accounting policies that apply to the overall financial statements

The significant accounting policies applied in the preparation of our consolidated financial statements are set out below. Other significant accounting policies applicable to a particular area are disclosed in the most relevant note. We have applied all policies consistently to all the years presented, unless otherwise stated.

Basis of consolidation

The group financial statements consolidate the financial statements of BT Group plc and its subsidiaries, and include its share of the results of associates and joint ventures using the equity method of accounting. The group recognises its direct rights to (and its share of) jointly held assets, liabilities, revenues and expenses of joint operations under the appropriate headings in the consolidated financial statements.

All business combinations are accounted for using the acquisition method regardless of whether equity instruments or other assets are acquired. No material acquisitions were made in the year.

A subsidiary is an entity that is controlled by another entity, known as the parent or investor. An investor controls an investee when the investor is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

Non-controlling interests in the net assets of consolidated subsidiaries, which consist of the amounts of those interests at the date of the original business combination and non-controlling share of changes in equity since the date of the combination, are not material to the group’s financial statements.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the year are consolidated from and up to the date of change of control. Where necessary, accounting policies of subsidiaries have been aligned with the policies adopted by the group. All intra-group transactions including any gains or losses, balances, income or expenses are eliminated in full on consolidation.

When the group loses control of a subsidiary, the profit or loss on disposal is calculated as the difference between (i) the aggregate of the fair value of the consideration received and the fair value of any retained interest and (ii) the previous carrying amount of the assets (including goodwill), and liabilities of the subsidiary and any non-controlling interests. The profit or loss on disposal is recognised as a specific item.

Inventories

Network maintenance equipment and equipment to be sold to customers are stated at the lower of cost or net realisable value, taking into account expected revenue from the sale of packages comprising a mobile handset and a subscription. Cost corresponds to purchase or production cost determined by either the first in first out (FIFO) or average cost method.

Government grants

Government grants are recognised when there is reasonable assurance that the conditions associated with the grants have been complied with and the grants will be received.

Grants for the purchase or production of property, plant and equipment are deducted from the cost of the related assets and reduce future depreciation expense accordingly. Grants for the reimbursement of operating expenditure are deducted from the related category of costs in the income statement. Estimates and judgements applied in accounting for government grants received in respect of the BDUK programme and other rural superfast broadband contracts are described in note 15.

Once a government grant is recognised, any related deferred income is treated in accordance with IAS 20 ‘Accounting for Government Grants and Disclosure of Government Assistance’.

Foreign currencies

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency using the exchange rates prevailing at the date of the transaction. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of transactions and the translation of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at period end exchange rates are recognised in the income statement line which most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction.

On consolidation, assets and liabilities of foreign undertakings are translated into sterling at year end exchange rates. The results of foreign undertakings are translated into sterling at average rates of exchange for the year (unless this average is not a reasonable approximation of the cumulative effects of the rates prevailing on the transaction dates, in which case income and expenses are translated at the dates of the transactions). Foreign exchange differences arising on the retranslation of foreign undertakings are recognised directly in a separate component of equity, the translation reserve.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

121

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

4. Significant accounting policies that apply to the overall financial statements  continued

 

In the event of the disposal of an undertaking with assets and liabilities denominated in a foreign currency, the cumulative translation difference associated with the undertaking in the translation reserve is charged or credited to the gain or loss on disposal recognised in the income statement.

Research and development

Research expenditure is recognised in the income statement in the period in which it is incurred. Development expenditure, including the cost of internally developed software, is recognised in the income statement in the period in which it is incurred unless it is probable that economic benefits will flow to the group from the asset being developed, the cost of the asset can be reliably measured and technical feasibility can be demonstrated, in which case it is capitalised as an intangible asset on the balance sheet.

Capitalisation ceases when the asset being developed is ready for use. Research and development costs include direct and indirect labour, materials and directly attributable overheads.

Leases

Under IAS 17, the determination of whether an arrangement is, or contains, a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement and requires an assessment of whether the fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets and whether the arrangement conveys the right to use the asset.

Leases of property, plant and equipment where we hold substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as finance leases. Finance lease assets are capitalised at the commencement of the lease term at the lower of the present value of the minimum lease payments or the fair value of the leased asset. The obligations relating to finance leases, net of finance charges in respect of future periods, are recognised as liabilities. Leases are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

Leases where a significant portion of the risks and rewards are held by the lessor are classified as operating leases. Rentals are charged to the income statement on a straight line basis over the period of the lease.

Termination benefits

Termination benefits (leaver costs) are payable when employment is terminated before the normal retirement date, or when an employee accepts voluntary redundancy in exchange for these benefits. We recognise termination benefits when they are demonstrably committed to the affected employees leaving the group.

 


Table of Contents

122

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

5. Segment information

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to segment information

Operating and reportable segments

Our operating segments are reported based on financial information provided to the Executive Committee, which is the key management committee and represents the ‘chief operating decision maker’.

Our organisational structure reflects the different customer groups to which we provide communications products and services via our customer-facing units: Consumer, Enterprise, Global Services and Openreach. The customer-facing units are supported by an internal service unit, Technology, and corporate units including procurement and property management.

The customer-facing units are our reportable segments and generate substantially all of our revenue. Technology and the group’s corporate units are not reportable segments as they did not meet the quantitative thresholds as set out in IFRS 8 ‘Operating Segments’ for any of the years presented.

We aggregate the remaining operations and include within the ‘Other’ category to reconcile to the consolidated results of the group. The ‘Other’ category includes unallocated Technology costs and our corporate units.

Allocation of certain items to segments

Provisions for the settlement of significant legal, commercial and regulatory disputes, which are negotiated at a group level, are initially recorded in the ‘Other’ segment. On resolution of the dispute, the full impact is recognised in the results of the relevant customer-facing unit and offset in the group results through the utilisation of the provision previously charged to the ‘Other’ segment. Settlements which are particularly significant or cover more than one financial year may fall within the definition of specific items as detailed in note 10.

The costs incurred by Technology and corporate units are recharged to the customer-facing units to reflect the services it provides to them. Depreciation and amortisation incurred by Technology in relation to the networks and systems it manages and operates on behalf of the customer-facing units is allocated to the customer-facing units based on their respective utilisation. Capital expenditure incurred by Technology for specific projects undertaken on behalf of the customer-facing units is allocated based on the value of the directly attributable expenditure incurred. Where projects are not directly attributable to a particular customer-facing unit, capital expenditure is allocated between them based on the proportion of estimated future economic benefits.

Specific items are detailed in note 10 and are not allocated to the reportable segments as this reflects how they are reported to the Executive Committee. Finance expense and income are not allocated to the reportable segments, as the central treasury function manages this activity, together with the overall net debt position of the group.

Measuring segment performance

Performance of each reportable segment is measured based on adjusted EBITDA. EBITDA is defined as the group profit or loss before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation. Adjusted EBITDA is defined as EBITDA before specific items, net non-interest related finance expense, and share of profits or losses of associates and joint ventures. Adjusted EBITDA is considered to be a useful measure of the operating performance of the customer-facing units because it approximates the underlying operating cash flow by eliminating depreciation and amortisation and also provides a meaningful analysis of trading performance by excluding specific items, which are disclosed separately by virtue of their size, nature or incidence.

Revenue recognition

Our revenue recognition policy is set out in the following note.

Internal revenue and costs

Most of our internal trading relates to Openreach and arises on rentals, and any associated connection or migration charges, of the UK access lines and other network products to the customer-facing units, including the use of BT Ireland’s network. This occurs both directly, and also indirectly, through Technology which is included within the ‘Other’ segment. Enterprise internal revenue arises from Consumer for mobile Ethernet access and Technology for transmission planning services. Internal revenue arising in Consumer relates primarily to employee broadband and wi-fi services. Intra-group revenue generated from the sale of regulated products and services is based on market price. Intra-group revenue from the sale of other products and services is agreed between the relevant customer-facing units and therefore the profitability of customer-facing units may be impacted by transfer pricing levels.

Geographic segmentation

The UK is our country of domicile and we generate the majority of our revenue from external customers in the UK. The geographic analysis of revenue is based on the country of origin in which the customer is invoiced. The geographic analysis of non-current assets, which exclude derivative financial instruments, investments and deferred tax assets, is based on the location of the assets.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

123

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

5. Segment information  continued

 

Segment revenue and profit

As explained in note 2, our reportable segments changed during the year as a result of a reduction in the number of our customer-facing units. The BT Consumer and EE segments disclosed in last year’s accounts have been combined into a single reportable segment named ‘Consumer’, and the Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures segments now form a single reportable segment, ‘Enterprise’. We also transferred our Northern Ireland Networks business from Enterprise to Openreach and reclassified certain internal revenues generated by our Ventures businesses as segmental revenue rather than as an internal recovery of cost. The prior year comparatives presented in this note have been restated to reflect these changes.

 

Year ended 31 March 2019 (IFRS 15)   

Consumer

£m

   

Enterprise

£m

   

Global

Services

£m

   

Openreach

£m

   

Other

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Segment revenue

     10,695       6,292       4,735       5,075       3       26,800  

Internal revenue

     (107     (359           (2,875           (3,341
                                                  

Revenue from external customers a

     10,588       5,933       4,735       2,200       3       23,459  
                                                  

Adjusted EBITDA b

     2,534       1,990       505       2,423       (60     7,392  

Depreciation and amortisation a

     (1,024     (634     (370     (1,468     (50     (3,546
                                                  

Operating profit (loss) a

     1,510       1,356       135       955       (110     3,846  
                                                  

Specific items (note 10)

               (425

Operating profit

               3,421  

Net finance expense c

               (756

Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures

               1  
                                                  

Profit before tax

               2,666  
                                                  

 

Year ended 31 March 2018 (restated) (IAS 18)   

Consumer

£m

   

Enterprise d

£m

   

Global

Services

£m

   

Openreach d

£m

   

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Segment revenue

     10,360       6,647       5,013       5,278       8        27,306  

Internal revenue

     (103     (441           (3,016            (3,560
                                                   

Revenue from external customers a

     10,257       6,206       5,013       2,262       8        23,746  
                                                   

Adjusted EBITDA b

     2,376       2,077       434       2,615       3        7,505  

Depreciation and amortisation a

     (992     (635     (424     (1,401     (62      (3,514
                                                   

Operating profit (loss) a

     1,384       1,442       10       1,214       (59      3,991  
                                                   

Specific items (note 10)

                (610

Operating profit

                3,381  

Net finance expense c

                (764

Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures

                (1
                                                   

Profit before tax

                2,616  
                                                   

 

Year ended 31 March 2017 (restated) (IAS 18)   

Consumer

£m

   

Enterprise d

£m

   

Global

Services

£m

   

Openreach d

£m

   

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Segment revenue

     10,024       6,975       5,479       5,250       10        27,738  

Internal revenue

     (100     (480           (3,076            (3,656
                                                   

Revenue from external customers a

     9,924       6,495       5,479       2,174       10        24,082  
                                                   

Adjusted EBITDA b

     2,168       2,261       495       2,734       (13      7,645  

Depreciation and amortisation a

     (989     (613     (439     (1,414     (55      (3,510
                                                   

Operating profit (loss) a

     1,179       1,648       56       1,320       (68      4,135  
                                                   

Specific items (note 10)

                (968

Operating profit

                3,167  

Net finance expense c

                (804

Share of post tax profit (loss) of associates and joint ventures

                (9
                                                   

Profit before tax

                2,354  
                                                   

 

a  

Before specific items.

b  

Adjusted EBITDA is defined in the alternative performance measures section on page 185.

c  

Net finance expense includes specific item expense of £139m (2017/18: £218m, 2016/17: £210m). See note 10.

d  

On 1 October 2018 we transferred our Northern Ireland Networks business from Enterprise to Openreach which resulted in an increase in segment revenue, Adjusted EBITDA and Operating profit in Openreach of £155m, £95m, and £54m and a decrease in segment revenue, Adjusted EBITDA and Operating profit in Enterprise of £117m, £95m, and £54m for the year ended 31 March 2018 and an increase in segment revenue, Adjusted EBITDA and Operating profit in Openreach of £152m, £101m, and £56m and a decrease in segment revenue, Adjusted EBITDA and Operating profit in Enterprise of £112m, £101m, and £56m for the year ended 31 March 2017. Additionally, within the Enterprise segment, we reclassified £224m and £242m of internal revenue generated by our Ventures businesses as segmental revenue rather than as an internal recovery of cost for the years ended 31 March 2018 and 2017, respectively.


Table of Contents

124

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

5. Segment information  continued

 

Internal revenue and costs

 

     Internal cost recorded by  
Year ended 31 March 2019   

Consumer

£m

    

Enterprise

£m

    

Global

Services

£m

    

Openreach

£m

    

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Internal revenue recorded by

                 

Consumer

            69        20               18        107  

Enterprise

     63               51        177        68        359  

Global Services

                                         

Openreach

     920        401        112               1,442        2,875  
                                                       

Total

     983        470        183        177        1,528        3,341  
                                                       

 

     Internal cost recorded by  
Year ended 31 March 2018   

Consumer

£m

    

Enterprise

£m

    

Global

Services

£m

    

Openreach

£m

    

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Internal revenue recorded by

                 

Consumer

            65        20               18        103  

Enterprise a

     130               51        173        87        441  

Global Services

                                         

Openreach a

     896        480        125               1,515        3,016  
                                                       

Total

     1,026        545        196        173        1,620        3,560  
                                                       

 

     Internal cost recorded by  
Year ended 31 March 2017   

Consumer

£m

    

Enterprise

£m

    

Global

Services

£m

    

Openreach

£m

    

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Internal revenue recorded by

                 

Consumer

            62        20               18        100  

Enterprise a

     148               71        165        96        480  

Global Services

                                         

Openreach a

     910        536        158               1,472        3,076  
                                                       

Total

     1,058        598        249        165        1,586        3,656  
                                                       

 

a  

On 1 October 2018 we transferred our Northern Ireland Networks business from Enterprise to Openreach and we reclassified certain internal revenues generated by our Ventures businesses as segmental revenue rather than an internal recovery of cost. This increases internal revenue recorded by Enterprise by £224m in the year ended 31 March 2018 and £242m in the year ended 31 March 2017. Internal revenue for Openreach has increased by £38m in the year ended 31 March 2018 and £40m in the year ended 31 March 2017.

Capital expenditure

 

Year ended 31 March 2019   

Consumer

£m

    

Enterprise

£m

    

Global

Services

£m

    

Openreach

£m

    

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Intangible assets a

     276        180        93        82        49        680  

Property, plant and equipment b

     718        321        152        1,999        93        3,283  
                                                       

Capital expenditure

     994        501        245        2,081        142        3,963  
                                                       

Acquisition of spectrum a

                                 304        304  
                                                       

Capital expenditure including spectrum

     994        501        245        2,081        446        4,267  
                                                       

 

Year ended 31 March 2018 (restated)   

Consumer

£m

    

Enterprise

£m

    

Global

Services

£m

    

Openreach

£m

    

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Intangible assets a

     236        180        92        70        64        642  

Property, plant and equipment b,c

     683        312        186        1,629        70        2,880  
                                                       

Capital expenditure

     919        492        278        1,699        134        3,522  
                                                       

 

Year ended 31 March 2017 (restated)   

Consumer

£m

    

Enterprise

£m

    

Global

Services

£m

    

Openreach

£m

    

Other

£m

    

Total

£m

 

Intangible assets a

     225        141        126        74        55        621  

Property, plant and equipment b,c

     628        313        235        1,546        111        2,833  
                                                       

Capital expenditure

     853        454        361        1,620        166        3,454  
                                                       

 

a  

Additions to intangible assets as presented in note 14.

b  

Additions to property, plant and equipment as presented in note 15, inclusive of movement on engineering stores.

c  

On 1 October 2018 we transferred our Northern Ireland Networks business from Enterprise to Openreach. This decreased property, plant and equipment in Enterprise and increased property, plant and equipment in Openreach by £41m and £47m in the years ended 31 March 2018 and 31 March 2017 respectively.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

125

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

5. Segment information  continued

 

Geographic segmentation

Revenue from external customers

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

UK

     19,683        19,687        19,421  

Europe, Middle East and Africa, excluding the UK

     2,280        2,489        2,841  

Americas

     936        996        1,148  

Asia Pacific

     560        574        672  
                            

Revenue a

     23,459        23,746        24,082  
                            

 

a  

Before specific items.

Non-current assets

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

UK

     30,049        28,835        28,810  

Europe, Middle East and Africa, excluding the UK

     2,217        2,527        2,535  

Americas

     336        331        424  

Asia Pacific

     110        109        149  
                            

Non-current assets a

     32,712        31,802        31,918  
                            

 

a

Comprising the following balances presented in the group balance sheet: intangible assets; property, plant and equipment; investments in associates and joint ventures; and trade and other receivables.

6. Revenue

We adopted IFRS 15 on 1 April 2018. The impact of initial application of the standard is described in notes 1 and 2.

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to revenue

On inception of the contract we identify a “performance obligation” for each of the distinct goods or services we have promised to provide to the customer. The consideration specified in the contract with the customer is allocated to each performance obligation identified based on their relative standalone selling prices, and is recognised as revenue as they are satisfied.

The table below summarises the performance obligations we have identified for our major service lines and provides information on the timing of when they are satisfied and the related revenue recognition policy. Also detailed in this note is revenue expected to be recognised in future periods for contracts in place at 31 March 2019 that contain unsatisfied performance obligations.

 

Service line    Performance obligations    Revenue recognition policy
ICT and managed networks    Provision of networked IT services, managed network services, and arrangements to design and build software solutions. Performance obligations are identified for each distinct service or deliverable for which the customer has contracted, and are considered to be satisfied over the time period that we deliver these services or deliverables. Commitments to provide hardware to customers that are distinct from the other promises are considered to be satisfied at the point in time that control passes to the customer.    Revenue for services is recognised over time using a measure of progress that appropriately reflects the pattern by which the performance obligation is satisfied. For time and material contracts, revenue is recognised as the service is received by the customer. Where performance obligations exist for the provision of hardware, revenue is recognised at the point in time that the customer obtains control of the promised asset. For long-term fixed price contracts revenue recognition will typically be based on the achievement of contract milestones and customer acceptance.


Table of Contents

126

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

6. Revenue  continued

 

Service line    Performance obligations    Revenue recognition policy
Fixed access subscriptions    Provision of broadband, TV and fixed telephony services including local, national and international calls, connections, line rental, and calling features. Performance obligations exist for each ongoing service provided to the customer and are satisfied over the period that the services are provided. Installation services are recognised as distinct performance obligations if their relationship with the other services in the contract is purely functional. These are satisfied when the customer benefits from the service. Connection services are not distinct performance obligations and are therefore combined with the associated service performance obligation.    Fixed subscription charges are recognised as revenue on a straight line basis over the period that the services are provided. Upfront charges for non-distinct connection and installation services are deferred as contract liabilities and are recognised as revenue over the same period. Variable charges such as call charges are recognised when the related services are delivered. Where installation activities are distinct performance obligations, revenue is recognised at the point in time that the installation is completed.
Mobile subscriptions    Provision of mobile postpaid and prepaid services, including voice minutes, SMS, and data services. Performance obligations exist for each ongoing service provided to the customer and are satisfied over the period that the services are provided.    Subscription fees, consisting primarily of monthly charges for access to broadband and other internet access or voice and data services, are recognised as the service is provided. One-off services such as calls outside of plan and excess data usage are recognised when the service is used.
Equipment and other services    Provision of equipment and other services, including mobile phone handsets and hardware such as set top boxes and broadband routers provided as part of customer contracts. Performance obligations are satisfied at the point in time that control passes to the customer. For other services, performance obligations are identified based on the distinct goods and services we have committed to provide.    Revenue from equipment sales is recognised at the point in time that control passes to the customer. Where payment is not received in full at the time of the sale, such as with equipment provided as part of mobile and fixed access subscriptions, contract assets are recognised for the amount due from the customer that will be recovered over the contract period. Revenue to be recognised is calculated by reference to the relative standalone selling price of the equipment. For other services, revenue is recognised when the related performance obligations are satisfied, which could be over time or at a point in time depending on the nature of the service.

We recognise revenue based on the relative standalone selling price of each performance obligation. Determining the standalone selling price often requires judgement and may be derived from regulated prices, list prices, a cost-plus derived price, or the price of similar products when sold on a standalone basis by BT or a competitor. In some cases it may be appropriate to use the contract price when this represents a bespoke price that would be the same for a similar customer in a similar circumstance.

The fixed element of fixed access and mobile subscription arrangements sold by our Consumer business is typically payable in advance, with any variable or one-off charges billed in arrears. Payment is received immediately for direct sales of equipment to customers. Where equipment is provided to customers under mobile and fixed access subscription arrangements, payment for the equipment is received over the course of the contract term. For sales by our enterprise businesses, invoices are issued in line with contractual terms. Payments received in advance are recognised as contract liabilities, amounts billed in arrears are recognised as contract assets.

We do not have any material obligations in respect of returns, refunds or warranties. Where we act as an agent in a transaction, we recognise commission net of directly attributable costs. Where the actual and estimated costs to completion of the contract exceed the estimated revenue, a loss is recognised immediately.

We exercise judgement in assessing whether the initial set-up, transition and transformation phases of long-term contracts are distinct from the other services to be delivered under the contract and therefore represent distinct performance obligations. This determines whether revenue is recognised in the early stages of the contract, or deferred until delivery of the other services promised in the contract begins.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

127

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

6. Revenue  continued

 

We recognise immediately the entire estimated loss for a contract when we have evidence that the contract is unprofitable. If these estimates indicate that any contract will be less profitable than previously forecast, contract assets may have to be written down to the extent they are no longer considered to be fully recoverable. We perform ongoing profitability reviews of our contracts in order to determine whether the latest estimates are appropriate. Key factors reviewed include:

 

 

Transaction volumes or other inputs affecting future revenues which can vary depending on customer requirements, plans, market position and other factors such as general economic conditions.

 

 

 

Our ability to achieve key contract milestones connected with the transition, development, transformation and deployment phases for customer contracts.

 

 

 

The status of commercial relations with customers and the implications for future revenue and cost projections.

 

 

 

Our estimates of future staff and third-party costs and the degree to which cost savings and efficiencies are deliverable.

 

Disaggregation of revenue from contracts with customers

The following table disaggregates revenue from contracts with customers by our major service lines and by reportable segment. The prior year comparatives have been presented consistent with the presentation in last year’s Annual Report under IAS 18.

 

Year ended 31 March 2019 (IFRS 15)   Consumer
£m
    Enterprise
£m
    Global
Services
£m
   

Openreach

£m

    Other
£m
     Total
£m
 

ICT and managed networks

          2,236       2,613                    4,849  

Fixed access subscriptions

    4,564       2,181       362       2,135              9,242  

Mobile subscriptions

    3,866       1,277       130                    5,273  

Equipment and other services

    2,158       239       1,630       65       3        4,095  
                                                  

Revenue before specific items

    10,588       5,933       4,735       2,200       3        23,459  
                                                  

Specific items (note 10)

               (31

Revenue

               23,428  
                                                  

 

Year ended 31 March (IAS 18)   

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

ICT and managed networks

     5,530       5,927  

Broadband and TV

     4,655       4,477  

Mobile

     6,451       6,358  

Calls, lines and connections

     5,126       5,069  

Transit

     265       404  

Other products and services

     1,719       1,847  
                  

Revenue before specific items

     23,746       24,082  
                  

Specific items (note 10)

     (23     (20

Revenue

     23,723       24,062  
                  

Revenue expected to be recognised in future periods for performance obligations that are not complete (or are partially complete) as at 31 March 2019 is £14,296m. Of this, £9,425m relates to ICT and managed services contracts and equipment and other services which will substantially be recognised as revenue within five years. Fixed access and mobile subscription services typically have shorter contract periods and so £4,871m will substantially be recognised as revenue within two years. Revenue recognised this year relating to performance obligations that were satisfied, or partially satisfied, in previous years was not material.

Contract assets and liabilities

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to contract assets and liabilities

We recognise contract assets for goods and services for which control has transferred to the customer before consideration is due. These assets mainly relate to mobile handsets provided upfront but paid for over the course of a contract. Contract assets are reclassified as receivables when the right to payment becomes unconditional and we have billed the customer.

Contract liabilities are recognised when we have received advance payment for goods and services that we have not transferred to the customer. These primarily relate to fees received for connection and installation services that are not distinct performance obligations.

Where the initial set-up, transition or transformation phase of a long-term contract is considered to be a distinct performance obligation we recognise a contract asset for any work performed but not billed. Conversely a contract liability is recognised where these activities are not distinct performance obligations and we receive upfront consideration. In this case eligible costs associated with delivering these services are capitalised as fulfilment costs, see note 17.

We provide for expected lifetime losses on contract assets following the policy set out in note 17.


Table of Contents

128

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

6. Revenue  continued

 

Contract assets and liabilities recognised at 31 March 2019 are as follows:

 

     

31 March 2019

£m

    

1 April 2018

£m

Contract assets

     

Current

     1,353        1,417  

Non-current

     249        198  
                   
     1,602        1,615  
                   

Contract liabilities

     

Current

     1,225        1,406  

Non-current

     200        87  
                   
     1,425        1,493  
                   

£1,216m of the contract liability recognised at 1 April 2018 was recognised as revenue during the year. Impairment losses of £36m were recognised on contract assets during the year. Other than business-as-usual movements there were no significant changes in contract asset and liability balances during the year.

7. Operating costs

 

Year ended 31 March    Notes   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Operating costs by nature

          

Staff costs:

          

Wages and salaries

        4,264        4,229       4,134  

Social security costs

        440        461       477  

Other pension costs

     20        611        624       521  

Share-based payment expense

     22        67        84       57  
                                    

Total staff costs

        5,382        5,398       5,189  

Own work capitalised

        (834      (798     (813
                                    

Net staff costs

        4,548        4,600       4,376  

Net indirect labour costs a

        267        315       399  
                                    

Net labour costs

        4,815        4,915       4,775  

Product costs and sales commissions b

        4,464        4,429       4,588  

Payments to telecommunications operators

        2,059        2,306       2,653  

Property and energy costs

        1,325        1,285       1,202  

Network operating and IT costs

        1,026        963       983  

TV programme rights charges

        841        763       714  

Provision and installation b

        624        657       669  

Marketing and sales b

        322        317       365  

Other operating costs b

        831        830       675  

Other operating income

        (240      (224     (187

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

          

Owned assets

     15        2,390        2,381       2,382  

Held under finance leases

     15        2        10       10  

Amortisation of intangible assets c

     14        1,154        1,123       1,118  
                                    

Total operating costs before specific items

        19,613        19,755       19,947  
                                    

Specific items

     10        394        587       948  
                                    

Total operating costs

        20,007        20,342       20,895  
                                    

Operating costs before specific items include the following:

          

Leaver costs d

        17        50       86  

Research and development expenditure e

        643        632       638  

Operating lease charges

        801        732       692  

Foreign currency gains

        (11      0       (12

Inventories recognised as an expense

        2,388        2,588       2,680  

Government grants

        (3      (3     (5
                                    

 

a  

Net of capitalised indirect labour costs of £672m (2017/18: £612m, 2016/17: £463m).

b  

Included within ‘other operating costs’ in prior years were costs relating to product costs and commissions; provision and installation; and marketing and sales. These are now presented separately. The ‘other operating costs’ comparative for 2017/18 and 2016/17 has been re-presented for consistency.

c  

Excludes £nil (2017/18: £nil, 2016/17: £62m) of amortisation presented as specific items which relate to a write-off of software costs as a result of the integration of EE.

d  

Leaver costs are included within wages and salaries, except for leaver costs of £257m (2017/18: £168m, 2016/17: £37m) associated with restructuring and EE integration costs, which have been recorded as specific items.

e  

Research and development expenditure reported in the income statement includes amortisation of £581m (2017/18: £573m, 2016/17: £577m) in respect of internally developed computer software and operating expenses of £62m (2017/18: £59m, 2016/17: £61m). In addition, the group capitalised software development costs of £472m (2017/18: £450m, 2016/17: £457m).


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

129

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

7. Operating costs  continued

 

Who are our key management personnel and how are they compensated?

Key management personnel comprise executive and non-executive directors and members of the Executive Committee.

Compensation of key management personnel is shown in the table below:

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Short-term employee benefits

     13.5        11.8        10.5  

Post employment benefits a

     1.2        1.3        1.3  

Share-based payments

     5.0        6.2        5.6  

Termination benefits

     0.6        2.2         
                            
     20.3        21.5        17.4  
                            

 

a  

Post employment benefits comprise cash pensions allowances paid to the Chief Executive Officer and Chief Financial Officer. The group does not contribute to defined contribution or defined benefit pension schemes on behalf of key management personnel.

Key management personnel are compensated solely in the form of cash and share-based payments. During the current and prior years, key management personnel made no gains from exercise of share options.

8. Employees

 

     2019            2018            2017  
Number of employees in the group a   

Year end

000

    

Average

000

           

Year end

000

    

Average

000

           

Year end

000

    

Average

000

 

UK

     84.3        83.4          82.2        82.5          82.8        82.2  

Non-UK

     22.4        23.1          23.6        23.7          23.6        22.8  
                                                                       

Total employees

     106.7        106.5          105.8        106.2          106.4        105.0  
                                                                       

As explained in note 2, we reduced the number of our customer-facing units during the year. BT Consumer and EE have been combined into ‘Consumer’, and Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures have been combined into ‘Enterprise’. We also transferred c700 employees in our Northern Ireland Networks business from Enterprise to Openreach. The prior year comparatives presented in the table below have been restated to reflect these changes.

 

     2019            2018            2017  
Number of employees in the group a   

Year end

000

    

Average

000

           

Year end

000

    

Average

000

           

Year end

000

    

Average

000

 

Consumer

     19.7        19.0          18.2        18.0          17.9        16.8  

Enterprise b

     13.4        13.8          13.2        13.5          13.4        13.2  

Global Services

     16.6        16.8          16.9        17.3          17.5        17.4  

Openreach b

     33.2        31.9          31.2        31.1          30.9        31.6  

Other

     23.8        25.0          26.3        26.3          26.7        26.0  
                                                                       

Total employees

     106.7        106.5          105.8        106.2          106.4        105.0  
                                                                       

 

a  

These reflect the full-time equivalent of full and part-time employees.

b  

The 2018 and 2017 comparatives have been restated to reflect the change in segments and the transfer of Northern Ireland Networks as described above.


Table of Contents

130

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

9. Audit, audit related and other non-audit services

The following fees were paid or are payable to the company’s auditors, KPMG LLP and other firms in the KPMG network, for the year ended 31 March 2019. Figures in the table below for the years ended 31 March 2017 and 2018 are in respect of fees paid to the company’s previous auditors, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£000

    

2018

£000

    

2017

£000

 

Fees payable to the company’s auditors and its associates for:

        

Audit services a,b

        

The audit of the parent company and the consolidated financial statements

     8,165        5,418        4,316  

The audit of the company’s subsidiaries

     6,061        5,877        5,675  
                            
     14,226        11,295        9,991  

Audit related assurance services c

     2,236        1,771        1,865  
                            

Other non-audit services

        

Taxation compliance services d

                   366  

Taxation advisory services e

                   111  

All other assurance services f

     748        211        200  

All other services g

     210        592        2,332  
                            
     958        803        3,009  
                            

Total services

     17,420        13,869        14,865  
                            

 

a  

Services in relation to the audit of the parent company and the consolidated financial statements, including fees for reports under section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. This also includes fees payable for the statutory audits of the financial statements of subsidiary companies. This excludes amounts for the audit of BT Group Employee Share Ownership Trust and Ilford Trustees (Jersey) Limited amounting to £32,000.

b  

During the year a further £446,000 of fees were payable to PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in relation to the audit of 2017/18 subsidiary accounts and the audit of our restated IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations, which have not been included in the 2019 balances in the above table.

c  

Services in relation to other statutory filings or engagements that are required by law or regulation to be carried out by an appointed auditor. This includes fees for the review of interim results, the accrued fee for the audit of the group’s regulatory financial statements and reporting associated with the group’s US debt shelf registration.

d  

Services relating to tax returns, tax audits, monitoring and enquiries.

e  

Fees payable for all taxation advisory services not falling within taxation compliance.

f  

All other assurance services include fees payable to KPMG LLP for agreed upon procedures performed on the estimated impact of the new IFRS 15 revenue accounting standard, which took effect from 1 April 2018 for the 2017/18 audit.

g  

Fees payable for all non-audit services not covered above, principally comprising other advisory services.

The BT Pension Scheme is an associated pension fund as defined in the Companies (Disclosure of Auditor Remuneration and Liability Limitation Agreements) (Amendment) Regulations 2011. In the year ended 31 March 2019 KPMG LLP received total fees from the BT Pension Scheme of £1.1m (PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP: 2017/18: £2.1m, 2016/17: £2.1m) in respect of the following services:

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£000

    

2018

£000

    

2017

£000

 

Audit of financial statements of associates

     1,005        345        251  

Audit-related assurance services

     53                

Taxation compliance services

            153        210  

Taxation advisory services

            1,074        493  

Other non-audit services

     62        565        1,168  
                            

Total services

     1,120        2,137        2,122  
                            

10. Specific items

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to specific items

We separately identify and disclose those items that in management’s judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence (termed ‘specific items’). Specific items are used to derive the adjusted results as presented in the consolidated income statement presented on page 110. Adjusted results are consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management and assists in providing an additional analysis of the reporting trading results of the group. Specific items may not be comparable to similarly titled measures used by other companies.

In determining whether an event or transaction is specific, management considers quantitative as well as qualitative factors. Examples of charges or credits meeting the above definition and which have been presented as specific items in the current and/or prior years include acquisitions/disposals of businesses and investments, retrospective regulatory matters, historical insurance or litigation claims, business restructuring programmes, asset impairment charges, property rationalisation programmes, net interest on pensions and the settlement of multiple tax years. In the event that items meet the criteria, which are applied consistently from year to year, they are treated as specific items.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

131

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

10. Specific items  continued

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Revenue

       

Italian business investigation

                  22  

Retrospective regulatory matters

     31        23       (2
                           
     31        23       20  
                           

Operating costs

       

EE acquisition warranty claims

            225        

Restructuring charges

     386        241        

EE integration costs

            46       215  

Property rationalisation costs

     36        28        

Pension equalisation costs

     26               

Retrospective regulatory matters

     (4      26       481  

Italian business investigation

     (55      22       238  

Out of period irrecoverable VAT

                  30  

Profit (loss) on disposal of businesses

     5        (1     (16
                           
     394        587       948  
                           

Operating loss

     425        610       968  
                           

Net finance expense

       

Interest expense on retirement benefit obligation

     139        218       209  

Interest on out of period irrecoverable VAT

                  1  
                           
     139        218       210  
                           

Net specific items charge before tax

     564        828       1,178  
                           

Taxation

       

Tax credit on specific items above

     (112      (87     (154

Tax credit on re-measurement of deferred tax

                  (63
                           
     (112      (87     (217
                           

Net specific items charge after tax

     452        741       961  
                           

Restructuring charges

During the year we incurred charges of £386m (2017/18: £241m, 2016/17: £nil), primarily relating to leaver costs. These costs reflect projects within our group-wide cost transformation programme and include costs related to the remaining integration of EE and £23m costs to close the BT Pension Scheme and provide transition payments to affected employees.

EE integration costs

EE integration costs incurred in prior years (2017/18: £46m, 2016/17: £215m) relate to EE related restructuring and leaver costs. In 2016/17, this also included a £62m amortisation charge relating to the write-off of IT assets as we integrated the EE and BT IT infrastructure. In the current year remaining EE integration activities have been combined into the wider restructuring programme.

Retrospective regulatory matters

We have recognised a net charge of £27m (2017/18: £49m, 2016/17: £479m) in relation to regulatory matters in the year. This reflects the completion of the majority of compensation payments to other communications providers in relation to Ofcom’s March 2017 findings of its investigation into our historical practices on Deemed Consent by Openreach, and new matters arising. Of this, £31m is recognised in revenue offset by £4m in operating costs.

Pension equalisation costs

During the year we recognised a charge of £26m (2017/18: £nil, 2016/17: £nil) in relation to the high court requirement to equalise pension benefits between men and women due to guaranteed minimum pension (GMP).

Property rationalisation costs

We have recognised a charge of £36m (2017/18: £28m, 2016/17: £nil) relating to the rationalisation of the group’s property portfolio and a reassessment of lease-end obligations.

Italian business investigation

During the year we have released £(55)m provisions relating to settlement of various matters in our Italian business (2017/18: a charge of £22m, 2016/17: a charge of £238m).

Interest expense on retirement benefit obligation

During the year we incurred £139m (2017/18: £218m, 2016/17: 209m) of interest costs in relation to our defined benefit pension obligations. See note 20 for more details.

Tax on specific items

A tax credit of £112m (2017/18: £87m, 2016/17: 154m) was recognised in relation to specific items.


Table of Contents

132

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

10. Specific items  continued

 

EE acquisition warranty claims

In the prior year we reached settlements with Deutsche Telekom and Orange in respect of any warranty claims under the 2015 EE acquisition agreement, arising from the issues previously announced regarding our operations in Italy. This represents a full and final settlement of these issues and resulted in a specific item charge of £225m.

11. Taxation

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to taxation

Current income tax is calculated on the basis of the tax laws enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date in the countries where the group’s subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures operate and generate taxable income. We periodically evaluate positions taken in tax returns with respect to situations in which applicable tax regulation is subject to interpretation, and establish provisions where appropriate on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to tax authorities.

Deferred tax is recognised, using the liability method, in respect of temporary differences between the carrying amount of our assets and liabilities and their tax base. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates that are expected to apply in the periods in which the asset is realised or liability settled, based on tax rates and laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred income tax assets and liabilities are offset when there is a legally enforceable right to offset current tax assets against current tax liabilities and when the deferred income tax assets and liabilities relate to income taxes levied by the same taxation authority on either the taxable entity or different taxable entities where there is an intention to settle the balances on a net basis. Any remaining deferred tax asset is recognised only when, on the basis of all available evidence, it can be regarded as probable that there will be suitable taxable profits, within the same jurisdiction, in the foreseeable future against which the deductible temporary difference can be utilised. Deferred tax balances for which there is a right of offset within the same jurisdiction are presented net on the face of the group balance sheet as permitted by IAS 12, with the exception of deferred tax related to our pension schemes which is disclosed within deferred tax assets.

 

 

LOGO Critical accounting judgements and key estimates made in accounting for taxation

We seek to pay tax in accordance with the laws of the countries where we do business. However, in some areas these laws are unclear, and it can take many years to agree an outcome with a tax authority or through litigation. We estimate our tax on country-by-country and issue-by-issue bases. Our key uncertainties are whether EE’s tax losses will be available to us, whether our intra-group trading model will be accepted by a particular tax authority and whether intra-group payments are subject to withholding taxes. We provide for the most likely outcome where an outflow is probable, but the agreed amount can differ materially from our estimates. Approximately 85% by value of the provisions are under active tax authority examination and are therefore likely to be re-estimated or resolved in the coming 12 months. £252m (2017/18: £240m) is included in current tax liabilities in relation to these uncertainties.

Under a downside case an additional amount of £556m could be required to be paid, of which £474m would relate to EE losses. This amount is not provided as we don’t consider this outcome to be probable.

Deciding whether to recognise deferred tax assets is judgemental. We only recognise them when we consider it is probable that they can be recovered. In making this judgement we consider evidence such as historical financial performance, future financial plans and trends, the duration of existing customer contracts and whether our intra-group pricing model has been agreed by the relevant tax authority.

The value of the group’s income tax assets and liabilities is disclosed on the group balance sheet on page 112. The value of the group’s deferred tax assets and liabilities is disclosed below.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

133

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

11. Taxation  continued

 

Analysis of our taxation expense for the year

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

United Kingdom

       

Corporation tax at 19% (2017/18: 19%, 2016/17: 20%)

     (434      (578     (555

Adjustments in respect of earlier years

     (9      37       33  

Non-UK taxation

       

Current

     (74      (66     (109

Adjustments in respect of earlier years

     15        23        
                           

Total current tax expense

     (502      (584     (631
                           

Deferred taxation

       

Origination and reversal of temporary differences

     (20      46       96  

Adjustments in respect of earlier years

     2        (57     26  

Impact of change in UK corporation tax rate to 17% (2017/18: 17%, 2016/17: 17%)

                  63  

Remeasurement of temporary differences

     13        11        
                           

Total deferred taxation (expense) credit

     (5            185  
                           

Total taxation expense

     (507      (584     (446
                           

Factors affecting our taxation expense for the year

The taxation expense on the profit for the year differs from the amount computed by applying the UK corporation tax rate to the profit before taxation as a result of the following factors:

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Profit before taxation

     2,666        2,616       2,354  
                           

Expected taxation expense at UK rate of 19% (2017/18: 19%, 2016/17: 20%)

     (506      (497     (471

Effects of:

       

(Higher) lower taxes on non-UK profits

     (7      (8     (29

Net permanent differences between tax and accounting a

     (36      (100     (183

Adjustments in respect of earlier years b

     8        3       59  

Prior year non-UK losses used against current year profits

     21        16       120  

Non-UK losses not recognised c

            (9     (8

Other deferred tax assets not recognised

                   

Lower taxes on profit on disposal of business

                  3  

Re-measurement of deferred tax balances

     13        11       63  

Other non-recurring items

                   
                           

Total taxation expense

     (507      (584     (446

Exclude specific items (note 10)

     (112      (87     (217
                           

Total taxation expense before specific items

     (619      (671     (663
                           

 

a  

Includes income that is not taxable or UK income taxable at a different rate, and expenses for which no tax relief is received. Examples include some types of depreciation and amortisation and the benefit of R&D tax incentives.

b  

Reflects the differences between initial accounting estimates and tax returns submitted to tax authorities, including the release and establishment of provisions for uncertain tax positions.

c  

Reflects losses made in countries where it has not been considered appropriate to recognise a deferred tax asset, as future taxable profits are not probable.

Tax components of other comprehensive income

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

Tax credit

(expense)

£m

    

2018

Tax credit

(expense)

(Restated)

£m

   

2017

Tax credit

(expense)

£m

 

Tax on items that will not be reclassified to the income statement

       

Pension remeasurements a

     384        (263     416  

Tax on items that have been or may be reclassified subsequently to the income statement

       

Exchange differences on translation of foreign operations

     (4      (9     21  

Fair value movements on cash flow hedges

       

net fair value gains or losses

     (37      57       (131

recognised in income and expense

            (47     139  
                           
     343        (262     445  
                           

Current tax credit b

     395        203       122  

Deferred tax (expense) credit

     (52      (465     323  
                           
     343        (262     445  
                           

 

a  

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2.

b  

Includes £391m (2017/18: £212m, 2016/17: £110m) relating to cash contributions made to reduce retirement benefit obligations.


Table of Contents

134

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

11. Taxation  continued

 

Tax (expense) credit recognised directly in equity

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Tax (expense) credit relating to share-based payments

            (2     (6
                           

Deferred taxation

 

    

Fixed asset

temporary

differences

£m

   

Retirement

benefit

obligations b

£m

   

Share-

based

payments

£m

   

Tax

losses

£m

   

Other

£m

   

Jurisdictional

offset

£m

   

Total

(Restated)

£m

 

At 1 April 2017

    1,432       (1,537     (17     (270     (85           (477

Expense (credit) recognised in the income statement

    11       (104     4       89                    

Expense (credit) recognised in other comprehensive income (restated) a

          475                   (10           465  

Expense (credit) recognised in equity

                6                         6  

Exchange differences

                      (2     5             3  

Transfer to current tax

    17                                     17  
                                                         

At 31 March 2018

    1,460       (1,166     (7     (183     (90           14  
                                                         

Non-current

             

Deferred tax asset

    (41     (1,166     (7     (183     (90     161       (1,326

Deferred tax liability

    1,501                               (161     1,340  
                                                         

At 1 April 2018

    1,460       (1,166     (7     (183     (90           14  
                                                         

Expense (credit) recognised in the income statement

    (60     (59     1       114       (1           (5

Expense (credit) recognised in other comprehensive income

          15                   37             52  

Expense (credit) recognised in equity

                (1                       (1

Exchange differences

                1       (1                  
                                                         

At 31 March 2019

    1,400       (1,210     (6     (70     (54           60  
                                                         

Non-current

             

Deferred tax asset

    (27     (1,210     (6     (70     (54     20       (1,347

Deferred tax liability

    1,427                               (20     1,407  
                                                         

At 31 March 2019

    1,400       (1,210     (6     (70     (54           60  
                                                         

 

a

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2.

b  

Includes a deferred tax asset of £2m (2017/18: £2m) arising on contributions payable to defined contribution pension plans.

The majority of the deferred tax assets and liabilities noted above are anticipated to be realised after more than 12 months.

What factors affect our future tax charges?

The rate of UK corporation tax will change from 19% to 17% on 1 April 2020. As deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the rates that are expected to apply in the periods of the reversal, deferred tax balances at 31 March 2019 have been calculated at the rate at which the relevant balance is expected to be recovered or settled.

What are our unrecognised tax losses and other temporary differences?

At 31 March 2019 we had operating losses and other temporary differences carried forward in respect of which no deferred tax assets were recognised amounting to £4.2bn (2017/18: £4.1bn). Our other temporary differences have no expiry date restrictions. The expiry date of operating losses carried forward is dependent upon the tax law of the various territories in which the losses arose. A summary of expiry dates for losses in respect of which restrictions apply is set out below:

 

At 31 March 2019    £m      Expiry  

Restricted losses

     

Europe

     16        2019–2038  

Americas

     205        2019–2038  

Other

     3        2019–2038  
                   

Total restricted losses

     224     
                   

Unrestricted operating losses

     3,905        No expiry  
                   

Other temporary differences

     108        No expiry  
                   

Total

     4,237     
                   


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

135

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

11. Taxation  continued

 

At 31 March 2019 we had UK capital losses carried forward in respect of which no deferred tax assets were recognised amounting to £16.9bn (2017/18: £16.9bn). These losses have no expiry date, but we consider the future utilisation of significant amounts of these losses to be remote.

At 31 March 2019 the undistributed earnings of non-UK subsidiaries were £2.5bn (2017/18: £2.4bn). No deferred tax liabilities have been recognised in respect of these unremitted earnings because the group is in a position to control the timing of any dividends from subsidiaries and hence any tax consequences that may arise. Under current tax rules, tax of £18.2m (2017/18: £23.0m) would arise if these earnings were to be repatriated to the UK. On 29 March 2017, the UK Government notified the EU of its intention to withdraw membership from the EU. Depending on the outcome of negotiations we could cease to benefit from the EU Parent Subsidiary directive on dividends paid by our EU subsidiaries. In this event, additional tax of up to £27.5m could arise if the undistributed earnings of EU subsidiaries of £970m were to be repatriated to the UK.

12. Earnings per share

How are earnings per share calculated?

Basic earnings per share is calculated by dividing the profit after tax attributable to equity shareholders by the weighted average number of shares in issue after deducting the own shares held by employee share ownership trusts and treasury shares.

In calculating the diluted earnings per share, share options outstanding and other potential shares have been taken into account where the impact of these is dilutive. Options over 36m shares (2017/18: 23m shares, 2016/17: 27m shares) were excluded from the calculation of the total diluted number of shares as the impact of these is antidilutive.

 

Year ended 31 March    2019      2018      2017  

Basic weighted average number of shares (millions)

     9,912        9,911        9,938  

Dilutive shares from share options (millions)

     6        2        27  

Dilutive shares from executive share awards (millions)

     57        48        29  
                            

Diluted weighted average number of shares (millions)

     9,975        9,961        9,994  
                            

Basic earnings per share

     21.8p        20.5p        19.2p  

Diluted earnings per share

     21.6p        20.4p        19.1p  
                            

The earnings per share calculations are based on profit after tax attributable to equity shareholders of the parent company which excludes non-controlling interests. Profit after tax was £2,159m (2017/18: £2,032m, 2016/17: £1,908m) and profit after tax attributable to non-controlling interests was £3m (2017/18: £4m, 2016/17: £1m). Profit attributable to non-controlling interests is not presented separately in the financial statements as it is not material.

13. Dividends

What dividends have been paid and proposed for the year?

The Board recommends that a final dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 of 10.78p per share will be paid to shareholders on 9 September 2019 (2017/18: 10.55p paid to shareholders on 3 September), taking the full year proposed dividend per share in respect of 2018/19 to 15.4p (2017/18: 15.4p, 2016/17: 15.4p) which amounts to approximately £1,527m (2017/18: £1,524m, 2016/17: £1,532m). This final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and therefore the liability of approximately £1,069m (2017/18: £1,044m, 2016/17: £1,050m) has not been included in these financial statements. The proposed dividend will be payable to all shareholders on the Register of Members on 9 August 2019. The election date for participation in BT’s Dividend Investment Plan in respect of this dividend is 23 August 2019.

The amount of £1,503m (2017/18: £1,524m, 2015/16: £1,436m) for the final and interim dividends is disclosed in our statement of changes in equity and analysed below. This value may differ from the amount shown for equity dividends paid in the group cash flow statement, which represents the actual cash paid in relation to dividend cheques that have been presented over the course of the financial year.

 

     2019            2018            2017  
Year ended 31 March   

pence

per share

     £m            

pence

per share

     £m            

pence

per share

     £m  

Final dividend in respect of the prior year

     10.55        1,045          10.55        1,044          9.60        954  

Interim dividend in respect of the current year

     4.62        458          4.85        480          4.85        482  
                                                                       
     15.17        1,503          15.40        1,524          14.45        1,436  
                                                                       


Table of Contents

136

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

14. Intangible assets

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to intangible assets

We recognise identifiable intangible assets where we control the asset, it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the asset will flow to the group, and we can reliably measure the cost of the asset. We amortise all intangible assets, other than goodwill, over their useful economic life. The method of amortisation reflects the pattern in which the assets are expected to be consumed. If the pattern cannot be determined reliably, the straight line method is used.

Goodwill

Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the group’s share of the identifiable net assets (including intangible assets) of the acquired business. Our goodwill impairment policy is set out later in this note.

Acquired intangible assets – customer relationships and brands

Intangible assets such as customer relationships or brands acquired through business combinations are recorded at fair value at the date of acquisition and subsequently carried at amortised cost. Assumptions are used in estimating the fair values of these relationships or brands and include management’s estimates of revenue and profits to be generated by them.

Telecommunications licences

Licence fees paid to governments, which permit telecommunications activities to be operated for defined periods, are initially recorded at cost and amortised from the time the network is available for use to the end of the licence period or where our usage can extend beyond the initial licence period, over the period we expect to benefit from the use of the licences, which is typically 20 years. Licences acquired through business combinations are recorded at fair value at the date of acquisition and subsequently carried at amortised cost. The fair value is based on management’s assumption of future cash flows using market expectations at acquisition date.

Computer software

Computer software comprises computer software licences purchased from third parties, and also the cost of internally developed software. Computer software licences purchased from third parties are initially recorded at cost. We only capitalise costs directly associated with the production of internally developed software, including direct and indirect labour costs of development, where it is probable that the software will generate future economic benefits, the cost of the asset can be reliably measured and technical feasibility can be demonstrated, in which case it is capitalised as an intangible asset on the balance sheet. Costs which do not meet these criteria and research costs are expensed as incurred.

Our development costs which give rise to internally developed software include upgrading the network architecture or functionality and developing service platforms aimed at offering new services to our customers.

Other

Other intangible assets include website development costs and other licences. Items are capitalised at cost and amortised on a straight line basis over their useful economic life or the term of the contract.

Estimated useful economic lives

The estimated useful economic lives assigned to the principal categories of intangible assets are as follows:

 

      

• Computer software

   2 to 10 years

• Telecommunications licences

   2 to 20 years

• Customer relationships and brands

   1 to 15 years
      

Impairment of intangible assets

Intangible assets with finite useful lives are tested for impairment if events or changes in circumstances (assessed at each reporting date) indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. When an impairment test is performed, the recoverable amount is assessed by reference to the higher of the net present value of the expected future cash flows (value in use) of the relevant cash generating unit and the fair value less costs to dispose.

Goodwill is reviewed for impairment at least annually as described below. Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement, as a specific item. If a cash generating unit is impaired, impairment losses are allocated firstly against goodwill, and secondly on a pro-rata basis against intangible and other assets.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

137

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

14. Intangible assets  continued

 

    

Goodwill

£m

   

Customer

relationships

and brands

£m

   

Telecoms

licences

and other

£m

   

Internally

developed

software

£m

   

Purchased

software

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Cost

           

At 1 April 2017

    8,034       3,422       2,945       4,363       1,853       20,617  

Additions

                      517       125       642  

Acquisitions

    14             3                   17  

Disposals and adjustments a

    (3           (3     (55     (413     (474

Exchange differences

    (100     (12     6       (3     9       (100
                                                 

At 31 March 2018

    7,945       3,410       2,951       4,822       1,574       20,702  

Additions

                304       520       160       984  

Disposals and adjustments a

    (2           (3     (945     (141     (1,091

Transfers

                4       120       (80     44  

Exchange differences

    63       7       (4     1       (8     59  
                                                 

At 31 March 2019

    8,006       3,417       3,252       4,518       1,505       20,698  
                                                 

Accumulated amortisation

           

At 1 April 2017

          813       280       3,193       1,302       5,588  

Charge for the year

          379       141       525       78       1,123  

Disposals and adjustments a

                (3     (36     (426     (465

Exchange differences

          (1     3       (2     9       9  
                                                 

At 31 March 2018

          1,191       421       3,680       963       6,255  

Charge for the year

          377       142       525       110       1,154  

Disposals and adjustments a

                (3     (941     (147     (1,091

Transfers

                3       (43     43       3  

Exchange differences

          3       (3           (8     (8
                                                 

At 31 March 2019

          1,571       560       3,221       961       6,313  
                                                 
           
                                                 

Carrying amount

           

At 31 March 2019

    8,006       1,846       2,692       1,297       544       14,385  
                                                 

At 31 March 2018

    7,945       2,219       2,530       1,142       611       14,447  
                                                 

 

a  

Fully depreciated assets in the group’s fixed asset registers were reviewed during the year, as part of the group’s annual asset verification exercise, and certain assets that were no longer in use have been written off, reducing cost and accumulated depreciation by £1.0bn (2017/18: £0.4bn).

Impairment of goodwill

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to impairment of goodwill

We perform an annual goodwill impairment review.

Goodwill recognised in a business combination does not generate cash flows independently of other assets or groups of assets. As a result, the recoverable amount, being the value in use, is determined at a cash generating unit (CGU) level. These CGUs represent the smallest identifiable groups of assets that generate cash inflows that are largely independent of the cash inflows from other groups of assets. Our CGUs are deemed to be legacy BT Consumer, legacy EE, Enterprise, and Global Services.

We allocate goodwill to each of the Cash Generating Units (CGUs) that we expect to benefit from the business combination. Each CGU to which goodwill is allocated represents the lowest level within the group at which the goodwill is monitored for internal management purposes.

The value in use of each CGU is determined using cash flow projections derived from financial plans approved by the Board covering a five-year period. They reflect management’s expectations of revenue, EBITDA growth, capital expenditure, working capital and operating cash flows, based on past experience and future expectations of business performance. Cash flows beyond the fifth year have been extrapolated using perpetuity growth rates.

 

 

LOGO Critical accounting estimates and key judgements made in reviewing goodwill for impairment

Determining our CGUs

The determination of our CGUs is judgemental. The identification of CGUs involves an assessment of whether the asset or group of assets generate largely independent cash inflows. This involves consideration of how our core assets are operated and whether these generate independent revenue streams. During the year we reviewed our CGUs and have brought together Business and Public Sector and Wholesale and Ventures into ‘Enterprise’, aligning our CGUs to our customer-facing units. The legacy BT Consumer and EE CGUs remain as two separate CGUs due to their having independent cash flows.


Table of Contents

138

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

14. Intangible assets  continued

 

Estimating value in use

Our value in use calculations require estimates in relation to uncertain items, including management’s expectations of future revenue growth, operating costs, profit margins, operating cash flows, and the discount rate for each CGU. Future cash flows used in the value in use calculations are based on our latest Board-approved five-year financial plans. Expectations about future growth reflect the expectations of growth in the markets to which the CGU relates. The future cash flows are discounted using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money. The discount rate used in each CGU is adjusted for the risk specific to the asset, including the countries in which cash flow will be generated, for which the future cash flow estimates have not been adjusted.

We tested our goodwill for impairment as at 31 December 2018. The carrying value of goodwill and the key assumptions used in performing the annual impairment assessment and sensitivities are disclosed below.

 

Cost  

Legacy BT
Consumer

£m

   

Legacy EE

£m

   

Enterprise

£m

    Business and
Public Sector
    Wholesale and
Ventures
   

Global

Services

£m

   

Total

£m

 

At 1 April 2017

    1,183       2,768             2,570       942       571       8,034  

Exchange differences

                      (8           (92     (100

Acquisitions and disposals

                                  11       11  
                                                         

At 31 March 2018

    1,183       2,768             2,562       942       490       7,945  

Transfer

                3,504       (2,562     (942            

Exchange differences

                5                   58       63  

Acquisitions and disposals

                                  (2     (2
                                                         

At 31 March 2019

    1,183       2,768       3,509                   546       8,006  
                                                         

What discount rate have we used?

The pre-tax discount rates applied to the cash flow forecasts are derived from our post-tax weighted average cost of capital. The assumptions used in the calculation of the group’s weighted average cost of capital are benchmarked to externally available data. The pre-tax discount rate used in performing the value in use calculation in 2018/19 was 8.2% (2017/18: 8.4%). We’ve used the same discount rate for all CGUs except Global Services where we have used 8.7% (2017/18: 8.8%) reflecting higher risk in some of the countries in which Global Services operates.

What growth rates have we used?

The perpetuity growth rates are determined based on the forecast market growth rates of the regions in which the CGU operates, and they reflect an assessment of the long-term growth prospects of that market. The growth rates have been benchmarked against external data for the relevant markets. None of the growth rates applied exceed the expected long-term average growth rates for those markets or sectors. We used a perpetuity growth rate of 2.4% (2017/18: 2.3%) for Global Services and 2.0% (2017/18: 2.0%) for Enterprise and our legacy BT Consumer and EE CGUs.

What sensitivities have we applied?

There is significant headroom in our Enterprise and legacy BT Consumer and EE CGUs. For Global Services, the value in use exceeds the carrying value of the CGU by approximately £1,198m (2017/18: £776m). Any of the following changes in assumptions in isolation would cause the recoverable amount for the CGU to equal its carrying amount:

 

a reduction in the perpetuity growth rate from our 2.4% assumption to a revised assumption of a perpetuity decline rate of 4.1%;

 

an increase in the discount rate from our 8.7% assumption to a revised assumption of 13.6%; or

 

shortfalls in trading performance against forecast resulting in operating cash flows decreasing by 42% each year and in perpetuity.

15. Property, plant and equipment

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply property, plant and equipment

Our property, plant and equipment is included at historical cost, net of accumulated depreciation, government grants and any impairment charges. Property, plant and equipment acquired through business combinations are initially recorded at fair value and subsequently accounted for on the same basis as our existing assets. We derecognise items of property, plant and equipment on disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected to arise from the continued use of the asset. The difference between the sale proceeds and the net book value at the date of disposal is recognised in operating costs in the income statement.

Included within the cost of network infrastructure and equipment are direct and indirect labour costs, materials and directly attributable overheads.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

139

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

15. Property, plant and equipment  continued

 

We depreciate property, plant and equipment on a straight line basis from the time the asset is available for use, to write off the asset’s cost over the estimated useful life taking into account any expected residual value. Freehold land is not depreciated.

Estimated useful economic lives

The estimated useful lives assigned to principal categories of assets are as follows:

 

      
 

Land and buildings

    
 

• Freehold buildings

   14 to 50 years  
 

• Short-term leasehold improvements

   Shorter of 10 years or lease term  
 

• Leasehold land and buildings

   Unexpired portion of lease or 40 years, whichever is the shorter  
          
 

Network infrastructure

    
 

Transmission equipment

    
 

• Duct

   40 years  
 

• Cable

   3 to 25 years  
 

• Fibre

   5 to 20 years  
 

Exchange equipment

   2 to 13 years  
 

Other network equipment

   2 to 20 years  
          
 

Other assets

    
 

• Motor vehicles

   2 to 9 years  
 

• Computers and office equipment

   3 to 7 years  
          

Assets held under finance leases are depreciated over the shorter of the lease term or their useful economic life. Residual values and useful lives are reassessed annually and, if necessary, changes are recognised prospectively.

Network share assets

Certain assets have been contributed to a network share arrangement by both EE and Hutchison 3G UK Limited, with legal title remaining with the contributor. This is considered to be a reciprocal arrangement. Our share of the assets on acquisition of EE were recognised at fair value within tangible assets, and depreciated in line with policy. Subsequent additions are recorded at cost.

Impairment of property, plant and equipment

We test property, plant and equipment for impairment if events or changes in circumstances (assessed at each reporting date) indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. When an impairment test is performed, we assess the recoverable amount by reference to the higher of the net present value of the expected future cash flows (value in use) of the relevant asset and the fair value less costs to dispose. If it is not possible to determine the recoverable amount for the individual asset then we assess impairment by reference to the relevant cash generating unit as described in note 14.

 

 

LOGO Key judgements made in accounting for our BDUK contracts

We receive government grants in relation to the Broadband Delivery UK (BDUK) programme and other rural superfast broadband contracts. Where we have achieved certain service levels, or delivered the network more efficiently than anticipated, we have an obligation to either re-invest or repay grant funding. Where this is the case, we assess and defer the income with a corresponding increase in capital expenditure.

Assessing the timing of whether and when we change the estimated take-up assumption is judgemental as it involves considering information which is not always observable. Our consideration on whether and when to change the base case assumption is dependent on our expectation of the long-term take-up trend.

Our assessment of how much grant income to defer includes consideration of the difference between the take-up percentage agreed with the local authority and the likelihood of actual take-up. The value of the government grants deferred is disclosed in note 18.


Table of Contents

140

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

15. Property, plant and equipment  continued

 

    

Land and

buildings a

£m

   

Network

infrastructure a

£m

   

Other b

£m

   

Assets in

course of

construction

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Cost

         

At 31 March 2017

    1,302       49,372       1,938       1,413       54,025  

Additions c

    12       193       92       2,597       2,894  

Transfers

    36       2,793       16       (2,845      

Disposals and adjustments d

    (82     (1,540     (119     (48     (1,789

Exchange differences

    (6     (35     (13     1       (53
                                         

At 31 March 2018

    1,262       50,783       1,914       1,118       55,077  
                                         

Additions c

    12       97       119       3,034       3,262  

Transfers

    13       2,988       18       (3,063     (44

Disposals and adjustments d

    (178     (1,943     (333     102       (2,352

Exchange differences

    (2     (32     4             (30
                                         

At 31 March 2019

    1,107       51,893       1,722       1,191       55,913  
                                         

Accumulated depreciation

         

At 31 March 2017

    817       35,214       1,554             37,585  

Charge for the year

    57       2,213       121             2,391  

Disposals and adjustments d

    (96     (1,613     (107           (1,816

Exchange differences

    (5     (24     (10           (39
                                         

At 31 March 2018

    773       35,790       1,558             38,121  
                                         

Charge for the year

    51       2,236       105             2,392  

Transfers

    1       (4                 (3

Disposals and adjustments d

    (104     (1,940     (296           (2,340

Exchange differences

    (1     (30     4             (27
                                         

At 31 March 2019

    720       36,052       1,371             38,143  
                                         
         
                                         

Carrying amount

         

At 31 March 2019

    387       15,841       351       1,191       17,770  

Engineering stores

                      65       65  
                                         

Total at 31 March 2019

    387       15,841       351       1,256       17,835  
                                         

At 31 March 2018

    489       14,993       356       1,118       16,956  

Engineering stores

                      44       44  
                                         

Total at 31 March 2018

    489       14,993       356       1,162       17,000  
                                         

 

a  

The carrying amount of the group’s property, plant and equipment includes an amount of £34m (2017/18: £53m) in respect of assets held under finance leases, comprising land and buildings of £34m (2017/18: £42m) and network infrastructure of £nil (2017/18: £11m). The depreciation expense on those assets in 2018/19 was £2m (2017/18: £10m), comprising land and buildings of £2m (2017/18: £3m) and network infrastructure of £nil (2017/18: £7m).

b  

Other mainly comprises motor vehicles, computers and fixtures and fittings.

c  

Net of grant deferral of £63m (2017/18: £74m net grant funding).

d  

Fully depreciated assets in the group’s fixed asset registers were reviewed during the year, as part of the group’s annual asset verification exercise, and certain assets that were no longer in use have been written off, reducing cost and accumulated depreciation by £1.9bn (2017/18: £1.3bn). Disposals and adjustments also reflect the reclassification of the BT Centre property to held for sale (£89m), and £124m of adjustments resulting from changes in assumptions used in calculating lease-end obligations where the corresponding asset is capitalised.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

 

The carrying amount of land and buildings, including leasehold improvements, comprised:

     

Freehold

     158        261  

Leasehold

     229        228  
                   

Total land and buildings

     387        489  
                   

Network infrastructure

Some of our network assets are jointly controlled by EE Limited with Hutchison 3G UK Limited. These relate to shared 3G network and certain elements of network for 4G rural sites. The net book value of the group’s share of assets controlled by its joint operation MBNL is £584m (2017/18: £526m) and is recorded within network infrastructure. Included within this is £125m (2017/18: £132m), being the group’s share of assets owned by its joint operation MBNL.

Within network infrastructure are assets with a net book value of £9.0bn (2017/18: £8.3bn) which have useful economic lives of more than 18 years.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

141

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

16. Programme rights

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to programme rights

Programme rights are recognised on the balance sheet from the point at which the legally enforceable licence period begins. They are initially recognised at cost and are amortised from the point at which they are available for use, on a straight line basis over the programming period, or the remaining licence term, as appropriate, which is generally 12 months. Programme rights are tested for impairment in accordance with our impairment policy as set out in note 14.

Additions reflect TV programme rights for which the legally enforceable licence period has started during the year. Rights for which the licence period has not started are disclosed as contractual commitments in note 30. Payments made to receive commissioned or acquired programming in advance of the legal right to broadcast the programmes are classified as prepayments (see note 17).

Programmes produced internally are charged to the income statement over the period of the related broadcast.

 

     

Total

£m

 

At 1 April 2017

     264  

Additions

     771  

Amortisation

     (763

At 1 April 2018

     272  

Additions

     879  

Amortisation

     (841

At 31 March 2019

     310  

17. Trade and other receivables

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to trade and other receivables

We initially recognise trade and other receivables at fair value, which is usually the original invoiced amount. They are subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method. The carrying amount of these balances approximates to fair value due to the short maturity of amounts receivable.

We provide services to consumer and business customers, mainly on credit terms. We know that certain debts due to us will not be paid through the default of a small number of our customers. Because of this, we recognise an allowance for doubtful debts on initial recognition of receivables, which is deducted from the gross carrying amount of the receivable. The allowance is calculated by reference to credit losses expected to be incurred over the lifetime of the receivable. In estimating a loss allowance we consider historical experience and informed credit assessment alongside other factors such as the current state of the economy and particular industry issues. We consider reasonable and supportable information that is relevant and available without undue cost or effort.

Once recognised, trade receivables are continuously monitored and updated. Allowances are based on our historical loss experiences for the relevant aged category as well as forward-looking information and general economic conditions. Allowances are calculated by individual customer-facing units in order to reflect the specific nature of the customers relevant to that customer-facing unit.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Current

        

Trade receivables

     1,732        1,741        1,774  

Prepayments a

     698        1,103        733  

Accrued income b

     34        777        955  

Deferred contract costs c

     417                

Other receivables d

     341        393        373  
                            
     3,222        4,014        3,835  
                            
At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Non-current

        

Other assets e

     173        317        360  

Deferred contract costs c

     272                
                            
     445        317        360  
                            

 

a  

2017/18 includes £325m in respect of the acquisition of Spectrum.

b  

Accrued income recognised in prior years has been substantially reclassified to contract assets on adoption of IFRS 15. See notes 1 and 2.

c  

Deferred contract costs arise following adoption of IFRS 15 on 1 April 2018. See notes 1 and 2.

d  

Other receivables includes assets held for sale of £nil (2017/18: £nil, 2016/17: £22m). £89m assets held for sale as at 31 March 2019 are presented separately on the face of the balance sheet.

e  

Other assets comprise prepayments and leasing debtors. Included in prior year comparatives are costs relating to the initial set-up, transition or transformation phase of long-term networked IT services contracts (2017/18: £145m, 2016/17: £163m), which are presented within deferred contract costs following adoption of IFRS 15.


Table of Contents

142

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

17. Trade and other receivables  continued

 

Trade receivables are stated after deducting allowances for doubtful debts, as follows:

 

     

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

At 1 April

     375        303       195  

Expense

     95        129       211  

Utilised

     (165      (61     (114

Exchange differences

     (6      4       11  
                           

At 31 March

     299        375       303  
                           

Included within the 2016/17 expense above are amounts for exposures relating to the Italian business investigation.

Note 27 provides further disclosure regarding the credit quality of our gross trade receivables. Trade receivables are due as follows:

 

                Past due and not specifically impaired        
At 31 March  

Not past due

£m

   

Trade

receivables

specifically

impaired net

of provision

£m

   

Between

0 and 3

months

£m

   

Between

3 and 6

months

£m

   

Between

6 and 12

months

£m

   

Over 12

months

£m

   

Total

£m

 

2019

    1,229       34       371       42       40       16       1,732  

2018

    1,251       61       293       44       25       67       1,741  

2017

    1,184       146       292       17       41       94       1,774  
                                                         

Gross trade receivables which have been specifically impaired amounted to £57m (2017/18: £124m, 2016/17: £238m).

Trade receivables not past due and accrued income are analysed below by customer-facing unit.

 

     Trade receivables not past due            Accrued income  
At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

           

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Consumer

     457                        32                

Enterprise

     274                        2                

Global Services

     498        477        444                 222        297  

Openreach

            61        1                 67        78  

BT Consumer

            157        128                 86        90  

EE

            206        335                 122        170  

Business and Public Sector

            253        200                 134        151  

Wholesale and Ventures

            92        75                 145        167  

Other

            5        1                 1        2  
                                                               

Total

     1,229        1,251        1,184          34        777        955  
                                                               

Given the broad and varied nature of our customer base, the analysis of trade receivables not past due and accrued income by customer-facing unit is considered the most appropriate disclosure of credit concentrations. Cash collateral held against trade and other receivables amounted to £9m (2017/18: £6m, 2016/17: £4m).

Deferred contract costs

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to deferred contract costs

We capitalise certain costs associated with the acquisition and fulfilment of contracts with customers and amortise them over the period that we transfer the associated services.

Connection costs are deferred as contract fulfilment costs because they allow satisfaction of the associated connection performance obligation and are considered recoverable. Sales commissions and other third party contract acquisition costs are capitalised as costs to acquire a contract unless the associated contract term is less than 12 months, in which case they are expensed as incurred. Capitalised costs are amortised over the minimum contract term. A portfolio approach is used to determine contract term.

Where the initial set-up, transition and transformation phases of long-term contractual arrangements represent distinct performance obligations, costs in delivering these services are expensed as incurred. Where these services are not distinct performance obligations, we capitalise eligible costs as a cost of fulfilling the related service. Capitalised costs are amortised on a straight line basis over the remaining contract term, unless the pattern of service delivery indicates a more appropriate profile. To be eligible for capitalisation, costs must be directly attributable to specific contracts, relate to future activity, and generate future economic benefits. Capitalised costs are regularly assessed for recoverability.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

143

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

17. Trade and other receivables  continued

 

The following table shows the movement on deferred costs:

 

    

Deferred
connection
costs

£m

   

Deferred
contract
acquisition
costs –
commissions

£m

   

Deferred
contract
acquisition
costs – dealer
incentives

£m

   

Transition and
transformation

£m

   

Total

£m

 

At 1 April 2018

    7       85       416       161       669  

Additions

    15       76       446       32       569  

Amortisation

    (14     (76     (426     (53     (569

Impairment

          (5     (4     (1     (10

Other

    23       6             1       30  
                                         

At 31 March 2019

    31       86       432       140       689  
                                         

18. Trade and other payables

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to trade and other payables

We initially recognise trade and other payables at fair value, which is usually the original invoiced amount. We subsequently carry them at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Current

        

Trade payables

     4,141        3,991        4,205  

Other taxation and social security

     564        704        704  

Other payables

     387        456        672  

Accrued expenses

     630        492        382  

Deferred income a

     68        1,525        1,474  
                            
     5,790        7,168        7,437  
                            

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Non-current

        

Other payables b

     873        871        885  

Deferred income a

     606        455        413  
                            
     1,479        1,326        1,298  
                            

 

a  

Deferred income recognised in prior periods has substantially been reclassified to contract liabilities on adoption of IFRS 15, see notes 1 and 2. The remaining balance includes £51m (2017/18: £132m, 2016/17: £71m) current and £586m (2017/18: £404m, 2016/17: £375m) non-current liabilities relating to the Broadband Delivery UK programme, for which grants received by the group may be subject to re-investment or repayment depending on the level of take-up.

b  

Other payables relate to operating lease liabilities and deferred gains on a 2001 sale and finance leaseback transaction.

19. Provisions

Our provisions principally relate to obligations arising from property rationalisation programmes, restructuring programmes, asset retirement obligations, network assets, insurance claims, litigation and regulatory risks.

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to provisions

We recognise provisions when the group has a present legal or constructive obligation as a result of past events, it is probable that an outflow of resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount can be reliably estimated. Provisions are determined by discounting the expected future cash flows at a pre-tax rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the liability. Financial liabilities within provisions are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method. We measure onerous lease provisions at the lower of the cost to fulfil or to exit the contract.

 

 

LOGO Critical accounting estimates and key judgements made in accounting for provisions

We exercise judgement in determining the timing and quantum of all provisions to be recognised. Our assessment includes consideration of whether we have a present obligation, whether payment is probable and if so whether the amount can be estimated reliably.

As part of this assessment, we also assess the likelihood of contingent liabilities occurring in the future which are not recognised as liabilities on our balance sheet. By their nature, contingencies will be resolved only when one or more uncertain future events occur or fail to occur. We assess the likelihood that a potential claim or liability will arise and also quantify the possible range of financial outcomes where this can be reasonably determined. We’ve disclosed our assessment of contingent liabilities in note 30.


Table of Contents

144

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

19. Provisions  continued

 

Restructuring programmes involve estimation of the direct cost necessary for the restructuring and exclude items that are associated with ongoing activities. The amounts below exclude restructuring costs for which the timing and amount are certain. These are recognised as part of trade and other payables.

Under our property rationalisation programmes we’ve identified a number of surplus leased properties. Although efforts are being made to sublet this space, this is not always possible. Estimates have been made of the cost of vacant possession and of any shortfall arising from any potential sub-lease income being lower than the lease costs. Any such shortfall is recognised as a provision. We have also made estimates of the costs to restore properties upon vacation where this is required under the lease agreements.

Asset retirement obligations (AROs) involve an estimate of the cost to dismantle equipment and restore network sites upon vacation and the timing of the event. The provision represents the group’s best estimate of the amount that may be required to settle the obligation.

Network asset provisions represent our future operational costs and vacant site rentals arising from obligations relating to network share agreements. Costs are expected to be incurred over a period of up to 20 years.

Our regulatory provision represents our best estimate of the cost to settle our present obligation in relation to historical regulatory matters. The charge for the year represents the outcome of management’s re-assessment of the estimates and regulatory risks across a range of issues, including price and service issues. The prices at which certain services are charged are regulated and may be subject to retrospective adjustment by regulators. Estimates are used in assessing the likely value of the regulatory risk.

For all risks, the ultimate liability may vary materially from the amounts provided and will be dependent upon the eventual outcome of any settlement.

 

    

Restructuring

£m

   

Property

£m

   

Network

ARO

£m

   

Network

share

£m

   

Regulatory

£m

   

Litigation

£m

   

Other

£m

   

Total

£m

 

At 31 March 2017

    11       292       83       50       479       69       177       1,161  

Additions

    4       37       2             51       6       33       133  

Unwind of discount

          11       2       2                         15  

Utilised or released

    (2     (46     (16     (19     (210     (11     (32     (336

Transfers

                                        85       85  

Exchange differences

    (1                                   (2     (3
                                                                 

At 31 March 2018

    12       294       71       33       320       64       261       1,055  
                                                                 

Additions

          84       102       2       58       3       66       315  

Unwind of discount

          11       2       1                         14  

Utilised or released

          (71     (13     (9     (196     (9     (109     (407

Transfers

    (12     21                         27       (7     29  

Exchange differences

                                  (1     1        
                                                                 

At 31 March 2019

          339       162       27       182       84       212       1,006  
                                                                 

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Analysed as:

        

Current

     424        603        625  

Non-current

     582        452        536  
                            
     1,006        1,055        1,161  
                            

In 2016/17 we recognised a £300m charge in relation to estimated deemed consent compensation payments. In 2016/17 a related fine of £42m was imposed and was recognised as a payable rather than as a provision. The provision movement in the year reflects the completion of the majority of deemed consent compensation payments, and new matters arising across a range of issues, including price and service issues, and the re-assessment of other regulatory risks and in light of historic regulatory decisions by Ofcom. The movement has been recorded as a specific item.

Included within ‘Other’ provisions are contract loss provisions of £25m (2017/18: £38m) relating to the anticipated total losses in respect of certain contracts. It is expected that the majority of these provisions will be utilised in the next few years. Although there is a short period remaining to the finalisation of these contracts, there remains uncertainty as to whether potential future changes to key assumptions made when estimating their future losses could have a significant impact. There is no single change in key variables that


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

145

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

19. Provisions  continued

 

could materially affect future expected losses on these contracts, but it is reasonably possible there will be a combination of changes in key variables that could have a material impact. Also included in ‘Other’ are amounts provided for constructive obligations arising from insurance claims which will be utilised as the obligations are settled.

During the year we have updated property provisions to reflect our reassessment of lease-end obligations to reflect the group’s property strategy announced in May 2018, and to update the rate used to discount these provisions. Where additions to the provision relate to capitalised assets there has been a corresponding increase in the asset (see note 15). Other amounts have been charged to the income statement as specific items.

During the year we have updated provisions relating to asset retirement obligations to reflect our latest assessment of the cost to dismantle equipment and restore the sites, and to update the rate used to discount the provisions. The increase in the provision has been reflected in an increase in the corresponding capitalised asset (see note 15).

20. Retirement benefit plans

Background to BT’s pension plans

The group has both defined benefit and defined contribution retirement benefit plans. The group’s main plans are in the UK and the largest by membership is the BT Pension Scheme (BTPS) which is a defined benefit plan that was closed to new entrants on 31 March 2001. After that date new entrants to BT in the UK have been able to join a defined contribution plan, currently the BT Retirement Saving Scheme (BTRSS), a contract-based arrangement operated by Standard Life.

Sections B and C of the BTPS were closed to future benefit accrual on 30 June 2018 (which represented over 99% of the BTPS active membership at the time) and affected employees have been able to join the BTRSS for future pension accrual. Non-management employees will be eligible to join a new hybrid pension arrangement, the BT Hybrid Scheme, between 1 April 2019 and 30 September 2019. This new arrangement combines elements of both defined benefit and defined contribution pension schemes.

EE Limited operates the EE Pension Scheme (EEPS), which has a defined benefit section that was closed to future benefit accrual in 2014 and a defined contribution section which is open to new joiners.

We also have retirement arrangements around the world in line with local markets and culture.

 

      What are they?    How do they impact BT’s financial statements?

Defined contribution plans

  

Benefits in a defined contribution plan are linked to:

 

• contributions paid

 

• the performance of each individual’s chosen investments

 

• the form in which individuals choose to take their benefits.

 

Contributions are paid into an independently administered fund.

  

The income statement charge in respect of defined contribution plans represents the contribution payable by the group based upon a fixed percentage of employees’ pay.

 

The group has no exposure to investment and other experience risks.

Defined benefit plans

  

Benefits in a defined benefit plan are:

 

• determined by the plan rules, dependent on factors such as age, years of service and pensionable pay

 

• not dependent upon actual contributions made by the company or members.

  

The income statement service cost in respect of defined benefit plans represents the increase in the defined benefit liability arising from pension benefits earned by active members in the current period.

 

The group is exposed to investment and other experience risks and may need to make additional contributions where it is estimated that the benefits will not be met from regular contributions, expected investment income and assets held.

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to retirement benefits

Defined benefit plans

Our net obligation in respect of defined benefit pension plans is the present value of the defined benefit obligation less the fair value of the plan assets.

The income statement expense is allocated between an operating charge and net finance income or expense.

 

 

The operating charge reflects the increase in the defined benefit obligation resulting from the pension benefit earned by active employees in the current period, the costs of administering the plans and any past service costs/credits such as those arising from curtailments or settlements.


Table of Contents

146

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

 

 

The net finance income or expense reflects the interest on the net retirement benefit obligations recognised in the group balance sheet, based on the discount rate at the start of the year.

Remeasurements of the net pension obligation are recognised in full in the group statement of comprehensive income in the year in which they arise. These comprise the impact on the defined benefit obligation of changes in demographic and financial assumptions compared with the start of the year, actual experience being different to those assumptions and the return on plan assets being above or below the amount included in the net pension interest expense.

Defined contribution plans

The income statement expense for the defined contribution pension plans we operate represents the contributions payable for the year.

Amounts in the financial statements

Group income statement

The expense or income arising from all group retirement benefit arrangements recognised in the group income statement is shown below.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Recognised in the income statement before specific items

       

Service cost (including administration expenses & PPF levy):

       

defined benefit plans

     135        376       281  

defined contribution plans

     476        265       240  

Past service credit a

            (17      

Subtotal

     611        624       521  

Recognised in the income statement as specific items (note 10)

       

Costs to close BT Pension Scheme and provide transition payments b for affected employees

     23               

Cost to equalise benefits between men and women due to guaranteed minimum pension (GMP) c

     26               

Net interest expense on pensions deficit included in specific items

     139        218       209  

Subtotal

     188        218       209  
                           

Total recognised in the income statement

     799        842       730  
                           

 

a  

Relates to the removal of future indexation obligations following changes to the benefits provided under certain pension plans operating outside the UK in 2017/18.

b  

All employees impacted by the closure of the BTPS receive transition payments into their BTRSS pot for a period linked to the employee’s age. There was no past service cost or credit on closure due to the assumed past service benefit link as an active member being the same as that assumed for a deferred member.

c  

In October, a High Court judgment involving the Lloyds Banking Group’s defined benefit pension schemes was handed down, resulting in the group needing to recognise additional liability to equalise benefits between men and women due to GMPs, in common with most UK defined benefit schemes.

Group balance sheet

The net pension obligation in respect of defined benefit plans reported in the group balance sheet is set out below. The prior year retirement benefit obligation has been restated as a result of a prior period accounting error, refer to note 2 for more details.

 

    2019           2018  
At 31 March  

Assets

£m

   

Present value

of liabilities

£m

   

Deficit

£m

          

Assets

£m

   

Present value

of liabilities

(Restated)

£m

   

Deficit

(Restated)

£m

 

BTPS

    52,186       (58,855     (6,669       49,894       (56,259     (6,365

EEPS

    816       (997     (181       763       (920     (157

Other plans a

    362       (694     (332       299       (624     (325
                                                         

Retirement benefit obligation

    53,364       (60,546     (7,182       50,956       (57,803     (6,847

Adjustments due to effect of asset ceiling (IFRIC 14)

                     

Deferred tax asset

        1,208             1,164  
                                                         

Net pension obligation

        (5,974           (5,683
                                                         

 

a  

Included in the present value of obligations of other plans is £101m (2017/18: £97m) related to unfunded pension arrangements.

Included within trade and other payables in the group balance sheet is £42m (2017/18: £17m) in respect of contributions payable to defined contribution plans.

BT is not required to limit any pensions surplus or recognise additional pensions liabilities in individual plans as economic benefits are available in the form of either future refunds or reductions to future contributions. This is on the basis that IFRIC 14 applies enabling a refund of surplus following the gradual settlement of the liabilities over time until there are no members remaining in the scheme.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

147

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

Movements in defined benefit plan assets and liabilities

The table below shows the movements on the pension assets and liabilities and shows where they are reflected in the financial statements. The prior year retirement benefit obligation has been restated as a result of a prior period accounting error, refer to note 2 for more details.

 

     

Assets

£m

   

Liabilities

£m

   

Deficit

£m

 

At 31 March 2017

     51,112       (60,200     (9,088

Service cost (including administration expenses and PPF levy)

     (67     (309     (376

Past service credit

           17       17  

Interest on pension deficit

     1,201       (1,419     (218
                          

Included in the group income statement

         (577
                          

Return on plan assets above the amount included in the group income statement

     10             10  

Actuarial gain arising from changes in financial assumptions a

           2,251       2,251  

Actuarial loss arising from changes in demographic assumptions a (Restated)

           (697     (697

Actuarial gain arising from experience adjustments b

           120       120  
                          

Included in the group statement of comprehensive income

         1,684  
                          

Regular contributions by employer

     264             264  

Deficit contributions by employer

     872             872  
                          

Included in the group cash flow statement

         1,136  
                          

Contributions by employees

     2       (2      

Benefits paid

     (2,449     2,449        

Foreign exchange

     11       (13     (2
                          

Other movements

         (2
                          

At 31 March 2018 (Restated)

     50,956       (57,803     (6,847
                          

Service cost (including administration expenses and PPF levy)

     (49     (86     (135

Costs to close BT Pension Scheme

     (6           (6

Cost to equalise benefits between men and women due to guaranteed minimum pension (GMP)

           (26     (26

Interest on pension deficit

     1,356       (1,495     (139
                          

Included in the group income statement

         (306
                          

Return on plan assets above the amount included in the group income statement

     1,607             1,607  

Actuarial loss arising from changes in financial assumptions a

           (3,920     (3,920

Actuarial gain arising from changes in demographic assumptions a

           247       247  

Actuarial loss arising from experience adjustments b

           (36     (36
                          

Included in the group statement of comprehensive income

         (2,102
                          

Regular contributions by employer

     43             43  

Deficit contributions by employer

     2,024             2,024  
                          

Included in the group cash flow statement

         2,067  
                          

Contributions by employees

     1       (1      

Benefits paid

     (2,564     2,564        

Foreign exchange

     (4     10       6  
                          

Other movements

         6  
                          

At 31 March 2019

     53,364       (60,546     (7,182
                          

 

a  

The actuarial gain or loss arises from changes in the assumptions used to value the defined benefit liabilities at the end of the year compared with the assumptions used at the start of the year. This includes both financial assumptions, which are based on market conditions at the year end, and demographic assumptions such as life expectancy.

b  

The actuarial loss or gain arising from experience adjustments on defined benefit liabilities represents the impact on the liabilities of differences between actual experience during the year compared with the assumptions made at the start of the year. Such differences might arise, for example, from members choosing different benefit options at retirement, actual salary increases being different from those assumed or actual benefit increases being different to the pension increase assumption.

How do we value our retirement benefit plans?

Valuation methodology

The IAS 19 liabilities are measured as the present value of the estimated future benefit cash flows to be paid by each scheme, calculated using the projected unit credit method. These calculations are performed for the group by professionally qualified actuaries.

The expected future benefit payments are based on a number of assumptions including future inflation, retirement ages, benefit options chosen and life expectancy and are therefore inherently uncertain. Actual benefit payments in a given year may be higher or lower, for example if members retire sooner or later than assumed, or take a greater or lesser cash lump sum at retirement than assumed.

 

 

LOGO Critical accounting judgements and key estimates made when valuing our retirement benefit plans

The accounting cost of these benefits and the present value of our pension liabilities involve judgements about uncertain events including the life expectancy of the members, price inflation and the discount rate used to calculate the net present value of the future pension payments. We use estimates for all of these uncertain events in determining the pension costs and liabilities in our financial statements. Our assumptions reflect historical experience, external advice and our judgement regarding future expectations. Financial assumptions are based on market expectations at the balance sheet date.


Table of Contents

148

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

The fair value of our pension asset is made up of quoted and unquoted investments. The latter require more judgement as their values are not directly observable. The assumptions used in valuing unquoted investments are affected by current market conditions and trends which could result in changes in fair value after the measurement date.

How do we value the assets?

Under IAS 19, plan assets must be valued at the bid market value at the balance sheet date. For the main asset categories:

 

 

Equities listed on recognised stock exchanges are valued at closing bid prices.

 

 

 

Properties are valued on the basis of open market value.

 

 

 

Bonds are measured using a combination of broker quotes and pricing models making assumptions for credit risk, market risk and market yield curves.

 

 

 

Holdings in investment funds are valued at fair value which is typically the Net Asset Value provided by the investment manager.

 

 

 

Certain unlisted investments are valued using a model based valuation such as a discounted cash flow.

 

 

 

The value of the longevity insurance contract held by the BTPS is measured by discounting the projected cash flows payable under the contract (projected by an actuary, consistent with the terms of the contract).

 

Overview and governance of the BTPS

What is the profile of the BTPS?

At 31 March 2019 there were 288,000 members of the BTPS. Members belong to one of three sections depending upon the date they first joined the BTPS. The membership is analysed below.

Analysis of BTPS

     

Active

members

   

Deferred

members

     Pensioners      Total  

Sections A and B liabilities (£bn) a

           9.0        31.5        40.5  

Section C liabilities (£bn)

           14.1        4.3        18.4  
                                    

Total IAS 19 liabilities (£bn)

           23.1        35.8        58.9  
                                    

Total number of members

     b       83,000        205,000        288,000  
                                    

 

a  

Sections A and B have been aggregated in this table as Section A members have typically elected to take Section B benefits at retirement.

b  

At 31 March 2019 there are around 50 active members in the BTPS.

The estimated duration of the BTPS liabilities, which is an indicator of the weighted average term of the liabilities, is around 16 years although the benefits payable by the BTPS are expected to be paid over more than 70 years. Whilst benefit payments are expected to increase over the earlier years, the value of the liabilities is expected to reduce.

The chart below illustrates the estimated benefits payable from the BTPS forecast using the IAS 19 assumptions.

Forecast benefits payable by the BTPS at 31 March 2019 (unaudited)

 

LOGO

 

a

Based on accrued benefits to 30 June 2018.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

149

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

What are the benefits under the BTPS?

Benefits earned for pensionable service prior to 1 April 2009 are based upon a member’s final salary and a normal pensionable age of 60.

Between 1 April 2009 and 30 June 2018, Section B and C active members accrued benefits based upon a career average re-valued earnings (CARE) basis and a normal pensionable age of 65. On a CARE basis benefits are built up based upon earnings in each year and the benefit accrued for each year is increased by the lower of inflation or the individual’s actual pay increase in each year to retirement.

Under the Scheme rules the determination of the rate of inflation for statutory minimum rates of revaluation and indexation for the majority of benefits is based upon either the Retail Price Index (RPI) or the Consumer Price Index (CPI) which apply to each category of member as shown below.

 

     Active members   Deferred members   Pensioners

Section B a

  Benefits accrue on a CARE basis increasing at the lower of RPI or the individual’s actual pensionable pay increase  

Preserved benefits are revalued before

retirement based upon CPI

  Increases in benefits in payment are currently based upon CPI

Section C

  Increases in benefits in payment are currently based upon RPI up to a maximum of 5%
             

 

a  

Section A members have typically elected to take Section B benefits at retirement.

In December 2018, the Court of Appeal upheld the High Court’s ruling that it is currently not possible to change the index used to calculate pension increases paid in the future to members of Section C of the BTPS from RPI to another index. BT is seeking permission to appeal the decision from the Supreme Court.

How is the BTPS governed and managed?

BT Pension Scheme Trustees Limited (the Trustee) has been appointed by BT as an independent trustee to administer and manage the BTPS on behalf of the members in accordance with the terms of the BTPS Trust Deed and Rules and relevant legislation (principally the Pension Schemes Act 1993, the Pensions Act 1995 and the Pensions Act 2004).

Under the terms of the Trust Deed there are nine Trustee directors, all of whom are appointed by BT, as illustrated below. Trustee directors are usually appointed for a three-year term but are then eligible for re-appointment.

 

LOGO

BTPS assets

Asset allocation

The allocation of assets between different classes of investment is reviewed regularly and is a key factor in the Trustee’s investment policy. The allocations reflect the Trustee’s views on the appropriate balance to be struck between seeking returns and incurring risk, and on the extent to which the assets should be allocated to match liabilities. Current market conditions and trends are regularly assessed which may lead to adjustments in the asset allocation.


Table of Contents

150

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

The fair value of the assets of the BTPS analysed by asset category are shown below. These are subdivided by assets that have a quoted market price in an active market and those that do not (such as investment funds).

 

         2019 a          2018 a  
          

Total
assets

£bn

    

of which

quoted b

£bn

    

Total

%

         

Total
assets

£bn

   

of which

quoted b

£bn

    

Total

%

 

Growth

                    

Equities

  UK      0.5        0.4        1          0.5       0.5        1  
  Overseas developed      7.7        7.3        15          7.8       7.3        16  
  Emerging markets      1.1        1.1        2          0.5       0.4        1  

Private Equity

       1.5               3          1.9              4  

Property

  UK      3.5               7          3.9              8  
  Overseas      1.1               2          1.2              2  

Other growth assets

  Absolute Return c      1.2               2          1.5              3  
  Non Core Credit d      3.8        1.1        7          3.4       1.0        7  
  Mature Infrastructure      1.4               3          1.4              3  
                                                                  

Liability matching

                    

Government bonds

  UK Index Linked      13.2        13.2        25          12.5       12.5        25  

Investment grade credit

  Global      14.3        10.1        27          10.0       8.0        20  
                                                                  

Cash, derivatives and other

                    

Cash balances

       2.7               5          3.8              7  

Longevity insurance contract e

       (0.7             (1        (0.4            (1

Other f

       0.9               2          1.9              4  
                                                                  

Total

       52.2        33.2        100          49.9       29.7        100  
                                                                  

 

a  

At 31 March 2019, the Scheme did not hold any equity issued by the group (2017/18: £3m). The Scheme also held £2,154m (2017/18: £10m) of bonds issued by the group, reflecting the BTPS fully subscribing to £2bn of bonds issued by BT in June 2018 following agreement of the 2017 funding valuation.

b  

Assets with a quoted price in an active market.

c  

This allocation seeks to generate returns irrespective of the direction of markets. Managers within this allocation will typically manage their portfolios without close regard to a specific market benchmark.

d  

This allocation includes a range of credit investments, including emerging market, sub-investment grade and unrated credit. The allocation seeks to exploit investment opportunities within credit markets using the expertise of a range of specialist investment managers.

e  

The Trustee has hedged some of the Scheme’s longevity risk through a longevity insurance contract which was entered into in 2014. The value reflects experience to date on the contract from higher than expected deaths. This amount partly offsets a reduction which would be recognised in the Scheme’s liabilities over time.

f  

Includes collateral posted in relation to derivatives held by the Scheme.

IAS 19 assumptions

The table below summarises the approach used to set the key IAS 19 assumptions for the BTPS.

 

      Approach to set the assumption
Discount rate   

IAS 19 requires that the discount rate is determined by reference to market yields at the reporting date on high quality corporate bonds. The currency and term of these should be consistent with the currency and estimated term of the pension obligations.

 

The assumption is calculated by applying the projected BTPS benefit cash flows to a corporate bond yield curve constructed by our external actuary based on the yield on AA-rated corporate bonds.

 

In setting the yield curve, judgement is required on the selection of appropriate bonds to be included in the universe and the approach used to then derive the yield curve.

      
RPI inflation    The RPI inflation assumption is set using an inflation curve derived from market yields on government bonds, weighted by projected BTPS benefit cash flows, and making an adjustment for an inflation risk premium (to reflect the extra premium paid by investors for inflation protection), which is currently assumed to be 20bps.
      
CPI inflation    CPI is assessed at a margin below RPI taking into account market forecasts and independent estimates of the expected difference.
      
Pension increases    Benefits are assumed to increase in line with the RPI or CPI inflation assumptions, based on the relevant index for increasing benefits, as prescribed by the rules of the BTPS and summarised above.
      


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

151

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

      Approach to set the assumption
Longevity   

The longevity assumption takes into account:

 

• the actual mortality experience of the BTPS pensioners, based on a formal review conducted at the 2014 triennial funding valuation

 

• future improvements in longevity based on a model published by UK actuarial profession’s Continuous Mortality Investigation (using the CMI 2017 Mortality Projections model with a 1.25% per year long-term improvement parameter).

      

The key financial assumptions used to measure the liabilities of the BTPS are shown below.

 

     Nominal rates (per year)      Real rates (per year) a  
At 31 March   

2019

%

    

2018

%

    

2017

%

    

2019

%

    

2018

%

    

2017

%

 

Rate used to discount liabilities

     2.35        2.65        2.40        (0.87      (0.44      (0.78

Inflation – increase in RPI

     3.25        3.10        3.20                       

Inflation – increase in CPI

     2.25 b        2.00 c        2.00 d        (1.0 ) b        (1.1 ) c        (1.2 ) d  
                                                       

 

a  

The real rate is calculated relative to RPI inflation.

b  

Assumed to be 0.1% lower until 31 March 2023.

c  

Assumed to be 0.1% higher until 31 March 2023.

d  

Assumed to be 0.5% higher until 31 March 2019.

The BTPS represents over 97% of the group’s retirement benefit obligation. While the financial assumptions may vary for each plan, the nominal financial assumptions weighted by liabilities across all plans are equal to the figures shown in the table above (to the nearest 0.05%).

Based on the IAS 19 longevity assumptions, the forecast life expectancies for BTPS members aged 60 are as follows:

 

At 31 March   

2019

Number of

years

    

2018

Number of

years

 

Male in lower pay bracket

     25.7        25.8  

Male in medium pay bracket

     27.0        27.1  

Male in higher pay bracket

     28.5        28.5  
                   

Female in lower pay bracket

     28.5        28.5  

Female in higher pay bracket

     28.7        28.7  
                   

Average improvement for a member retiring at age 60 in 10 years’ time

     0.7        0.7  
                   

Risks underlying the assumptions

Background

The BTPS faces similar risks to other UK DB schemes: things like future low investment returns, high inflation, longer life expectancy and regulatory changes may all mean the BTPS becomes more of a financial burden. Further details are set out on page 47.

Changes in external factors, such as interest rates, can have an impact on the IAS 19 assumptions, impacting the measurement of BTPS liabilities. These factors can also impact the Scheme assets. The BTPS hedges some of these risks, including longevity and currency using financial instruments and insurance contracts.

Some of the key financial risks, and mitigations, for the BTPS are set out in the table below.

 

Changes in bond yields

  

A fall in yields on AA-rated corporate bonds, used to set the IAS 19 discount rate, will lead to an increase in the IAS 19 liabilities.

 

The BTPS’s assets include corporate bonds, government bonds and interest rate derivatives which are expected to partly offset the impact of movements in the discount rate. However, yields on these assets may diverge compared with the discount rate in some scenarios.

      

Changes in inflation

expectations

  

A significant proportion of the benefits paid to members are currently increased in line with RPI or CPI inflation. An increase in long-term inflation expectations will lead to an increase in the IAS 19 liabilities.

 

The BTPS’s assets include index-linked government bonds and inflation derivatives which are expected to largely offset the impact of movements in inflation expectations.

      

Changes in life expectancy

  

An increase in the life expectancy of members will result in benefits being paid out for longer, leading to an increase in the BTPS liabilities.

 

The BTPS holds a longevity insurance contract which covers around 25% of the BTPS’s total exposure to improvements in longevity, providing long-term protection and income to the BTPS in the event that members live longer than currently expected.

      

Other risks include: volatile asset returns (ie where asset returns differ from the discount rate); changes in legislation or regulation which impact the value of the liabilities or assets; and member take-up of options before and at retirement to reshape their benefits.


Table of Contents

152

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

Quantification

BT’s independent actuary has assessed the potential negative impact of the key risks that might occur no more than once in every 20 years illustrated as the following four scenarios:

 

           1-in-20 events  
Scenario    2019      2018  

1. Fall in discount rate a

     1.1      1.1

2. Increase to inflation rate b

     0.7      0.7

3. Fall in equity markets c

     30.0       

4. Increase to life expectancy

     1.25  years       1.35  years 
                   

 

a  

Scenario assumes a fall in the yields on both government and corporate bonds.

b  

Assuming RPI, CPI, pension increases and salary increases all increase by the same amount.

c  

Scenario ignores any potential benefit from derivatives held by the scheme.

The impact shown under each scenario looks at each event in isolation – in practice a combination of events could arise.

Sensitivity analysis of the principal assumptions to 1-in-20 events used to measure BTPS IAS 19 liabilities

 

LOGO

The sensitivity of the deficit allows for both the change in the liabilities and the assumed change in the assets. For example, the increase in the deficit under the life expectancy scenario incorporates the expected movement in the value of the insurance contract held to hedge longevity risk.

The sensitivities have been prepared using the same approach as 2017/18 which involves calculating the liabilities and deficit using the alternative assumptions stated.

BTPS funding

Triennial funding valuation

The triennial valuation is carried out for the Trustee by a professionally qualified independent actuary. The purpose of the valuation is to design a funding plan to ensure that the BTPS has sufficient funds available to meet future benefit payments. The latest funding valuation was performed as at 30 June 2017. The next funding valuation will have an effective date of no later than 30 June 2020.

The valuation methodology for funding purposes, which is based on prudent assumptions, is broadly as follows:

 

Assets are valued at market value at the valuation date.

 

Liabilities are measured on an actuarial funding basis using the projected unit credit method and discounted to their present value.

The results of the two most recent triennial valuations are shown below.

 

     

June

2017

valuation

£bn

   

June

2014

valuation

£bn

 

BTPS liabilities

     (60.4     (47.2

Market value of BTPS assets

     49.1       40.2  
                  

Funding deficit

     (11.3     (7.0
                  

Percentage of accrued benefits covered by BTPS assets at valuation date

     81.3     85.2

Percentage of accrued benefits on a solvency basis covered by the BTPS assets at the valuation date

     62.2     63.0
                  


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

153

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

Key assumptions – funding valuation

These valuations were determined using the following prudent long-term assumptions.

 

     Nominal rates (per year)            Real rates (per year) a  
     

June

2017

valuation

%

    

June

2014

valuation

%

           

June

2017

valuation

%

   

June

2014

valuation

%

 

Average single equivalent discount rate

     2.6        4.5          (0.8     1.0  

Average long-term increase in RPI

     3.4        3.5                 

Average long-term increase in CPI

     2.4        2.5          (1.0     (1.0
                                            

 

a  

The real rate is calculated relative to RPI inflation and is shown as a comparator.

The discount rate at 30 June 2017 was derived from prudent return expectations above a risk-free yield curve based on gilt and swap rates. The discount rate reflects views of future returns at the valuation date, allowing for the Scheme to hold 45% of its investments in growth assets initially, before de-risking to a low risk investment approach by 2034. This gives a prudent discount rate of 1.4% per year above the yield curve initially, trending down to 0.7% per year above the curve in the long-term. The assumption is equivalent to using a flat discount rate of 1.0% per year above the yield curve at the valuation date.

The average life expectancy assumptions at the valuation dates, for members 60 years of age, are as follows.

 

Number of years from valuation date   

June

2017

assumptions

  

June

2014

assumptions

Male in lower pay bracket

     25.9        26.1  
                   

Male in medium pay bracket

     27.2        27.5  

Male in high pay bracket

     28.6        29.0  
                   

Female in lower pay bracket

     28.6        28.9  

Female in high pay bracket

     28.9        29.2  
                   

Average improvement for a member retiring at age 60 in 10 years’ time

     0.9        1.3  
                   

Payments made to the BTPS

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

Ordinary contributions

     33        248  

Deficit contributions

     2,000        850  
                   

Total contributions in the year

     2,033        1,098  
                   

Future funding obligations and recovery plan

Under the terms of the Trust Deed, the group is required to have a funding plan, determined at the conclusion of the triennial funding valuation, which is a legal agreement between BT and the Trustee and should address the deficit over a maximum period of 20 years.

In May 2018, the 2017 triennial funding valuation was finalised, agreed with the Trustee and certified by the Scheme Actuary. The funding deficit at 30 June 2017 was £11.3bn. The deficit was agreed to be met over a 13 year period, with the remaining payments shown in the table below.

BT is scheduled to make future deficit payments to the BTPS in line with the table below.

 

Year to 31 March   2020     2021     2022     2023     2024     2025     2026     2027     2028     2029     2030  

Deficit contribution (£m)

    1,250 a       900 b       900 c       907       907       907       907       907       907       907       907  
                                                                                         

 

a

payable by 30 June 2019.

b

£400m payable by 30 June 2020.

c

£200m payable by 30 June 2021.

Based on the 2017 funding valuation agreement, the group expects to make contributions of approximately £1,310m to the BTPS in 2019/20, comprising of contributions of approximately £60m for expenses and future accrual and deficit contributions of £1,250m.

Other protections

The 2017 funding agreement with the Trustee included additional features for BT to provide support to the BTPS. These include:

 

Feature    Detail
Shareholder distributions   

BT will provide additional payments to the BTPS by the amount that shareholder distributions exceed a threshold. The threshold allows for 10% per year dividend per share growth plus £200m per year of share buybacks on a cumulative basis.

 

This will apply until 30 June 2021, or until the finalisation of the next valuation if earlier.

 

BT will also consult with the Trustee if it considers share buybacks in excess of £200m per year or making a special dividend. This obligation is on-going until otherwise terminated.


Table of Contents

154

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

20. Retirement benefit plans  continued

 

Feature    Detail
Material
corporate events
  

In the event that BT generates net cash proceeds greater than £1.0bn from disposals (net of acquisitions) in any 12-month period ending 30 June, BT will make additional contributions to the BTPS equal to one third of those net cash proceeds. This obligation applies until the next valuation is signed.

 

BT will consult with the Trustee if:

 

• it considers making acquisitions with a total cost of more than £1.0bn in any 12-month period; or

 

• it considers making disposals of more than £1.0bn; or

 

• it considers making a Class 1 transaction (acquisition or disposal); or

 

• it is subject to a takeover offer.

 

This obligation is on-going until otherwise terminated.

 

BT will advise the Trustee should there be other material corporate events which would materially impact BT’s covenant to the BTPS. This obligation is on-going until otherwise terminated.

Negative pledge   

A negative pledge that future creditors will not be granted superior security to the BTPS in excess of a £1.5bn threshold, to cover both British Telecommunications plc and BT Group plc.

 

This provision applies until the deficit reduces to below £2.0bn at any subsequent funding valuation.

In the highly unlikely event that the group were to become insolvent there are additional protections of BTPS members’ benefits:

 

Feature    Detail
Crown Guarantee   

The Crown Guarantee was granted by the Government when the group was privatised in 1984 and would only come into effect upon the insolvency of BT.

 

The Trustee brought court proceedings to clarify the scope and extent of the Crown Guarantee. The Court of Appeal judgment on 16 July 2014 established that:

 

• the Crown Guarantee covers BT’s funding obligation in relation to the benefits of members of the BTPS who joined post-privatisation as well as those who joined pre-privatisation (subject to certain exceptions)

 

• the funding obligation to which the Crown Guarantee relates is measured with reference to BT’s obligation to pay deficit contributions under the rules of the BTPS.

 

The Crown Guarantee is not taken into account for the purposes of the actuarial valuation of the BTPS and is an entirely separate matter, only being relevant in the highly unlikely event that BT became insolvent.

Pension
Protection Fund (PPF)
  

The Pension Protection Fund (PPF) may take over the BTPS and pay benefits not covered by the Crown Guarantee to members.

 

There are limits on the amounts paid by the PPF and the PPF would not provide exactly the same benefits as those provided under the BTPS Rules.

Other benefit plans

In addition to the BTPS, the group maintains benefit plans around the world with a focus on these being appropriate for the local market and culture.

EE Pension Scheme (EEPS)

The EEPS is the second largest defined benefit plan sponsored by the group. It has a defined benefit section that is closed to future accrual, with liabilities of around £1.0bn, and a defined contribution section with around 11,000 members.

At 31 March 2019, the defined benefit section’s assets are invested across a number of asset classes including global equities (23%), property & illiquid alternatives (22%), an absolute return portfolio (25%) and a liability driven investment portfolio (30%).

The triennial valuation of the defined benefit section was performed as at 31 December 2015, and agreed in March 2017. This showed a funding deficit of £141m. The group is scheduled to contribute £1.875m each month between 1 April 2019 and November 2020. The next funding valuation is taking place as at 31 December 2018 and is underway.

BTRSS

The BTRSS is the largest defined contribution scheme maintained by the group with around 69,000 active members. In the year to 31 March 2019, the group contributed £388m to the BTRSS.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

155

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

21. Own shares

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to own shares

Own shares are recorded at cost and deducted from equity. When shares vest unconditionally or are cancelled they are transferred from the own shares reserve to retained earnings at their weighted average cost.

 

     Treasury shares a            Employee share ownership
trust a
           Total  
      millions      £m             millions      £m             millions      £m  

At 31 March 2017

     8        (35        14        (61        22        (96

Own shares purchased b

     43        (125        32        (96        75        (221

Share options exercised b

     (1      2          (29      100          (30      102  

Transfer of shares to satisfy US share scheme

     (4      13                          (4      13  

Executive share awards vested

                     (5      16          (5      16  
                                                                       

At 1 April 2018

     46        (145        12        (41        58        (186
                                                                       

Own shares purchased b

                     5        (9        5        (9

Share options exercised b

     (1      2                          (1      2  

Executive share awards vested

                     (8      26          (8      26  
                                                                       

At 31 March 2019

     45        (143        9        (24        54        (167
                                                                       

 

a  

At 31 March 2019, 45,308,559 shares (2017/18: 46,224,966) with an aggregate nominal value of £2m (2017/18: £2m) were held at cost as treasury shares and 9,021,714 shares (2017/18: 12,855,378) with an aggregate nominal value of £nil (2017/18: £1m) were held in the Trust.

b  

See group cash flow statement on page 114. In 2018/19 the cash paid for the repurchase of ordinary share capital was £9m (2017/18: £221m). The cash received for proceeds on the issue of treasury shares was £5m (2017/18: £53m).

The treasury shares reserve represents BT Group plc shares purchased directly by the group. The BT Group Employee Share Ownership Trust (the Trust) also purchases BT Group plc shares.

The treasury shares and the shares in the Trust are being used to satisfy our obligations under employee share plans. Further details on Employee Saveshare Plans and Executive share plans are provided in note 22.

22. Share-based payments

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to share-based payments

We operate a number of equity-settled share-based payment arrangements, under which we receive services from employees in consideration for equity instruments (share options and shares) of the group. Equity-settled share-based payments are measured at fair value at the date of grant. Market-based performance criteria and non-vesting conditions (for example, the requirement for employees to make contributions to the share purchase programme) are reflected in this measurement of fair value. The fair value determined at the grant date is recognised as an expense on a straight line basis over the vesting period, based on the group’s estimate of the options or shares that will eventually vest and adjusted for the effect of non market-based vesting conditions. Fair value is measured using either the Binomial options pricing model or Monte Carlo simulations, whichever is more appropriate to the share-based payment arrangement.

Service and performance conditions are vesting conditions. Any other conditions are non-vesting conditions which have to be taken into account to determine the fair value of equity instruments granted. In the case that an award or option does not vest as a result of a failure to meet a non-vesting condition that is within the control of either counterparty, this is accounted for as a cancellation. Cancellations are treated as accelerated vesting and all remaining future charges are immediately recognised in the income statement. As the requirement to save under an employee saveshare arrangement is a non-vesting condition, employee cancellations, other than through a termination of service, are treated as an accelerated vesting.

No adjustment is made to total equity for awards that lapse or are forfeited after the vesting date.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Employee Saveshare Plans

     38        42        40  

Executive Share Plans:

        

Incentive Share Plan (ISP)

     6        16         

Deferred Bonus Plan (DBP)

     6        4        9  

Retention Share Plan (RSP)

     17        21        8  

Other plans

            1         
                            
     67        84        57  
                            

What share incentive arrangements do we have?

Our plans include savings-related share option plans for employees and those of participating subsidiaries, further share option plans for selected employees and a stock purchase plan for employees in the US. We also have several share plans for executives. All share-based payment plans are equity-settled. Details of these plans is set out below.


Table of Contents

156

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

22. Share-based payments  continued

 

Employee Saveshare Plans

Under an HMRC-approved savings-related share option plan, employees save on a monthly basis, over a three or five-year period, towards the purchase of shares at a fixed price determined when the option is granted. This price is usually set at a 20% discount to the market price for five-year plans and 10% for three-year plans. The options must be exercised within six months of maturity of the savings contract, otherwise they lapse. Similar plans operate for our overseas employees.

Incentive Share Plan (ISP)

Under the ISP, participants are entitled to these shares in full at the end of a three-year period only if the company has met the relevant pre-determined corporate performance measures and if the participants are still employed by the group. For ISP awards granted in 2018/19, 2017/18 and 2016/17: 40% of each award is linked to a total shareholder return (TSR) target for a comparator group of companies from the beginning of the relevant performance period; 40% is linked to a three-year cumulative normalised free cash flow measure; and 20% to growth in underlying revenue excluding transit.

Deferred Bonus Plan (DBP)

Under the DBP, awards are granted annually to selected employees. Shares in the company are transferred to participants at the end of three years if they continue to be employed by the group throughout that period.

Retention Share Plan (RSP)

Under the RSP, awards are granted to selected employees. Shares in the company are transferred to participants at the end of a specified retention period if they continue to be employed by the group throughout that period.

Under the terms of the ISP, DBP and RSP, dividends or dividend equivalents earned on shares during the conditional periods are reinvested in company shares for the potential benefit of the participants.

Employee Saveshare Plans

Movements in Employee Saveshare options are shown below.

 

     Movement in the number of share
options
           Weighted average exercise price  
Year ended 31 March   

2019

millions

    

2018

millions

    

2017

millions

           

2019

pence

    

2018

pence

    

2017

pence

 

Outstanding at 1 April

     175        189        197          306        313        287  

Granted

     80        69        44          175        250        362  

Forfeited

     (44      (41      (18        298        328        345  

Exercised

     (1      (30      (33        247        169        208  

Expired

     (20      (12      (1        294        353        345  
                                                               

Outstanding at 31 March

     190        175        189          254        306        313  
                                                               

Exercisable at 31 March

                            249        320        237  
                                                               

The weighted average share price for all options exercised during 2018/19 was 249p (2017/18: 311p, 2016/17: 357p).

The following table summarises information relating to options outstanding and exercisable under Employee Saveshare plans at 31 March 2019.

 

Normal dates of vesting and exercise (based on calendar years)   

Exercise price

per share

    

Weighted

average

exercise

price

    

Number of

outstanding

options

millions

    

Weighted

average

remaining

contractual life

 

2019

     319p – 397p        333p        40        10 months  

2020

     243p – 376p        305p        34        22 months  

2021

     170p – 353p        232p        43        34 months  

2022

     243p        243p        29        46 months  

2023

     170p        170p        43        58 months  
                                     

Total

        254p        189        34 months  
                                     


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

157

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

22. Share-based payments  continued

 

Executive share plans

Movements in executive share plan awards during 2018/19 are shown below:

 

     Number of shares (millions)  
      ISP      DBP      RSP      Total  

At 31 March 2018

     54        6        12        72  

Awards granted

     33        4        7        44  

Awards vested

            (1      (7      (8

Awards lapsed

     (18      (1      (1      (20

Dividend shares reinvested

     5                      5  
                                     

At 31 March 2019

     74        8        11        93  
                                     

Fair values

The following table summarises the fair values and key assumptions used for valuing grants made under the Employee Saveshare plans and ISP in 2018/19, 2017/18 and 2016/17.

 

     2019            2018            2017  
Year ended 31 March   

Employee

Saveshare

     ISP            

Employee

Saveshare

     ISP            

Employee

Saveshare

     ISP  

Weighted average fair value

     41      156        56      202        72      328

Weighted average share price

     208      211        296      281        422      426

Weighted average exercise price of options granted

     175      n/a          250      n/a          362      n/a  

Expected dividend yield

     3.47% – 3.83      n/a          3.12% – 3.21      n/a          2.9% – 3.4      n/a  

Risk free rates

     0.74% – 1.07      0.7        0.1% – 0.2      0.2        0.5% – 0.8      0.6

Expected volatility

     23.3% – 25.8      23.5        23.1% – 24.3      23.6        19.0% – 21.5      21.8
                                                                       

Employee Saveshare grants are valued using a Binomial options pricing model. Awards under the ISP are valued using Monte Carlo simulations. TSRs are generated for BT and the comparator group at the end of the three-year performance period, using each company’s volatility and the cross correlation between pairs of stocks.

Volatility has been determined by reference to BT’s historical volatility which is expected to reflect the BT share price in the future. An expected life of three months after vesting date is assumed for Employee Saveshare options. For all other awards the expected life is equal to the vesting period. The risk-free interest rate is based on the UK gilt curve in effect at the time of the grant, for the expected life of the option or award.

The fair values for the DBP and RSP were determined using the market price of the shares at the grant date. The weighted average share price for DBP awards granted in 2018/19 was 209p (2017/18: 282p, 2016/17: 421p) and for RSP awards granted in 2018/19 217p (2017/18: 282p, 2016/17: 417p).

23. Investments

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to investments

Investments classified as amortised cost

These investments are measured at amortised cost. Any gain or loss on derecognition is recognised in the income statement.

Investments classified as fair value through profit and loss

These investments are initially recognised at fair value plus direct transaction costs. They are re-measured at subsequent reporting dates to fair value and changes are recognised directly in the income statement.

Debt instruments classified as fair value through other comprehensive income

These investments are initially recognised at fair value plus direct transaction costs. Investments are re-measured at subsequent reporting dates to fair value, and unrealised gains and losses are recognised in other comprehensive income (except for changes in exchange rates for monetary items, interest, and impairment losses, which are recognised in the income statement). On derecognition of the investment, the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other comprehensive income is taken to the income statement, in the line that most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction.

Equity instruments classified as fair value through other comprehensive income

We have made an irrevocable election to present changes in the fair value of equity investments that are not held for trading in other comprehensive income. All gains or losses are recognised in other comprehensive income and are not reclassified to the income statement when the investments are disposed of, aside from dividends which are recognised in the income statement when our right to receive payment is established. Equity investments are recorded in non-current assets unless they are expected to be sold within one year.


Table of Contents

158

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

23. Investments  continued

 

IFRS 9 was applied for the first time on 1 April 2018 and introduces new classifications for financial instruments, including investments. Under IAS 39, we classified investments as available-for-sale, loans and receivables, and fair value through profit or loss. On transition to IFRS 9 we have reclassified them as fair value through other comprehensive income, fair value through profit or loss, and amortised cost, as set out in note 1. The current year figures in the following table reflect the classifications under IFRS 9, and the prior year figures reflect the previous classifications under IAS 39.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Non-current assets

        

Fair value through other comprehensive income

     48                

Available-for-sale

            46        37  

Fair value through profit or loss

     6        7        7  
                            
     54        53        44  
                            

Current assets

        

Fair value through other comprehensive income

                    

Available-for-sale

            2,575        1,437  

Investments held at amortised cost

     3,214                

Loans and receivables

            447        83  
                            
     3,214        3,022        1,520  
                            

Investments held at amortised cost consist of investments previously classified as loans and receivables and relate to money market investments denominated in sterling of £2,687m (2017/18: £416m, 2016/17: £35m), in US dollars of £26m (2017/18: £27m, 2016/17: £30m) in euros of £499m (2017/18: £nil, 2016/17: £nil) and in other currencies £2m (2017/18: £4m, 2016/17: £18m). They also include investments in liquidity funds of £2,522m (2017/18: £2,575m, 2016/17: £1,437m) held to collect contractual cash flows. In prior years these were classified as available-for-sale.

Fair value estimation

 

Fair value hierarchy

At 31 March 2019

  

Level 1

£m

    

Level 2

£m

    

Level 3

£m

    

Total held at

fair value

£m

 

Non-current and current investments

           

Fair value through other comprehensive income

     38                –        10             48  

Fair value through profit or loss

     6                      6  
                                     

Total

     44               10        54  
                                     

 

At 31 March 2018   

Level 1

£m

    

Level 2

£m

    

Level 3

£m

    

Total held at

fair value

£m

 

Non-current and current investments

           

Available-for-sale

     32        2,575        14        2,621  

Fair value through profit or loss

     7                      7  
                                     

Total

     39        2,575        14        2,628  
                                     

 

At 31 March 2017   

Level 1

£m

    

Level 2

£m

    

Level 3

£m

    

Total held at

fair value

£m

 

Non-current and current investments

           

Available-for-sale

     21        1,437        16        1,474  

Fair value through profit or loss

     7                      7  
                                     

Total

     28        1,437        16        1,481  
                                     

The three levels of valuation methodology used are:

Level 1 – uses quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.

Level 2 – uses inputs for the asset or liability other than quoted prices that are observable either directly or indirectly.

Level 3 – uses inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data, such as internal models

or other valuation methods.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

159

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

23. Investments  continued

 

Level 2 balances disclosed in prior years consist of investments classified as available-for-sale and relating to liquidity funds denominated in sterling of £2,180m (2017/18) and £900m (2016/17), and in euros of £395m (2017/18) and £537m (2016/17). Their fair value was calculated by using notional currency amounts adjusted by year end spot exchange rates. These have been reclassified on adoption of IFRS 9 and are now held at amortised cost.

Level 3 balances consist of investments classified as fair value through other comprehensive income (previously available-for-sale) of £10m (2017/18: £14m, 2016/17: £16m) which represent investments in a number of private companies. In the absence of specific market data, these investments are held at cost, adjusted as necessary for impairments, which approximates to fair value.

24. Cash and cash equivalents

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and current balances with banks and similar institutions, which are readily convertible to cash and are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value and have an original maturity of three months or less. All are held at amortised cost on the balance sheet, equating to fair value.

For the purpose of the consolidated cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents are as defined above net of outstanding bank overdrafts. Bank overdrafts are included within the current element of loans and other borrowings (note 25).

IFRS 9 was applied for the first time on 1 April 2018 and introduces new classifications for financial instruments. Cash and cash equivalents were classified as loans and receivables under IAS 39, and are now classified as financial assets held at amortised cost under IFRS 9. This has not had an impact on the accounting for these instruments, or on their carrying amounts.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Cash at bank and in hand

     495        446        469  

Cash equivalents

        

US deposits

     3        26        32  

UK deposits

     1,132        31        1  

Other deposits

     36        25        26  
                            

Total cash equivalents

     1,171        82        59  
                            

Total cash and cash equivalents

     1,666        528        528  

Bank overdrafts (note 25)

     (72      (29      (17

Cash and cash equivalents per the cash flow statement

     1,594        499        511  
                            

Cash and cash equivalents include restricted cash of £44m (2017/18: £32m, 2016/17: £43m), of which £40m (2017/18: £29m, 2016/17: £41m) was held in countries where local capital or exchange controls currently prevent us from accessing cash balances. The remaining balance of £4m (2017/18: £3m, 2016/17: £2m) was held in escrow accounts, or in commercial arrangements akin to escrow.

25. Loans and other borrowings

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to loans and other borrowings

We initially recognise loans and other borrowings at the fair value of amounts received net of transaction costs. They are subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method and, if included in a fair value hedge relationship, are re-valued to reflect the fair value movements on the associated hedged risk. The resulting amortisation of fair value movements, on de-designation of the hedge, is recognised in the income statement.

What’s our capital management policy?

The objective of our capital management policy is to target an overall level of debt consistent with our credit rating target while investing in the business, supporting the pension scheme and paying dividends. In order to meet this objective, we may issue or repay debt, issue new shares, repurchase shares, or adjust the amount of dividends paid to shareholders. We manage the capital structure and make adjustments to it in the light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of the group. The Board regularly reviews the capital structure. No changes were made to these objectives and processes during 2018/19, 2017/18 or 2016/17. For details of share issues and repurchases in the year see note 21.

Our capital structure consists of net debt and shareholders’ equity. The analysis below summarises the components which we manage as capital.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Net debt

     11,035        9,627        8,932  

Total parent shareholders’ equity a

     10,140        9,877        8,305  
                            
     21,175        19,504        17,237  
                            

 

a

Excludes non-controlling interests of £27m (2017/18: £34m, 2016/17: £30m). 2017/18 parent shareholders’ equity has been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS 19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations, refer to note 2.


Table of Contents

160

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

25. Loans and other borrowings  continued

 

Net debt

Net debt consists of loans and other borrowings (both current and non-current), less current asset investments and cash and cash equivalents. Loans and other borrowings are measured at the net proceeds raised, adjusted to amortise any discount over the term of the debt. For the purpose of this measure, current asset investments and cash and cash equivalents are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Currency denominated balances within net debt are translated to sterling at swapped rates where hedged.

Net debt is considered to be an alternative performance measure as it is not defined in IFRS. The most directly comparable IFRS measure is the aggregate of loans and other borrowings (current and non-current), current asset investments and cash and cash equivalents.

A reconciliation from the most directly comparable IFRS measure to net debt is given below.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Loans and other borrowings

     16,876        14,275       12,713  

Less:

       

Cash and cash equivalents

     (1,666      (528     (528

Current asset investments

     (3,214      (3,022     (1,520
                           
     11,996        10,725       10,665  

Adjustments:

       

To retranslate debt balances at swap rates where hedged by currency swaps

     (701      (874     (1,419

To remove accrued interest applied to reflect the effective interest method and fair value adjustments

     (260      (224     (314
                           

Net debt

     11,035        9,627       8,932  
                           

The table below shows the key components of net debt and of the increase of £1,408m this year.

 

    

At

1 April

2018

£m

   

Issuance/

(maturities)

£m

   

Fair value

movements

£m

   

Foreign

exchange

£m

   

Transfer

to within

one year

£m

   

Accrued
interest

movements

£m

   

At

31 March

2019

£m

 

Debt due within one year a

    2,281       (1,423     (8     (97     1,281       66       2,100  

Debt due after one year

    11,994       3,972       (11     (102     (1,111     34       14,776  

Cash flows from derivatives related to net debt

          124                   (124            

Overdrafts

          46                   (46            

Impact of cross-currency swaps b

    (874                 182             (9     (701

Removal of the accrued interest and fair value adjustments c

    (226           19                   (56     (263
                                                         

Gross debt

    13,175       2,719             (17           35       15,912  

Less:

             

Cash and cash equivalents

    (528     (1,140           (3           5       (1,666

Current asset investments

    (3,022     (203           11                   (3,214

Removal of the accrued interest c

    2                               1       3  
                                                         

Net debt

    9,627       1,376             (9           41       11,035  
                                                         

 

a

Including accrued interest and bank overdrafts.

b

Translation of debt balances at swap rates where hedged by cross currency swaps.

c  

Removal of accrued interest applied to reflect the effective interest rate method and removal of fair value adjustments.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

161

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

25. Loans and other borrowings  continued

 

The table below gives details of the listed bonds and other debt.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

6.625% £500m bond due June 2017 a

                   526  

5.95% US$1,100m bond due January 2018 a

                   891  

3.25% 600m bond due August 2018 a

            541        539  

2.35% US$800m bond due February 2019 a

            572        642  

4.38% £450m bond due March 2019

            455        460  

1.125% 1,000m bond due June 2019 a

     869        883        863  

8.625% £300m bond due March 2020

     300        300        300  

0.625% 1,500m bond due March 2021 a

     1,289        1,309        1,282  

0.5% 575m bond due June 2022 a

     495        502         

1.125% 1,100m bond due March 2023 a

     946        961        942  

0.875% 500m bond due September 2023 a

     430                

4.5% US$675m bond due December 2023 a

     524                

1% 575m bond due June 2024 a

     498        506         

1% 1,100m bond due November 2024 a

     943        959         

3.50% £250m index linked bond due April 2025

     433        419        403  

1.75% 1,300m bond due March 2026 a

     1,118        1,137        1,113  

1.5% 1,150m bond due June 2027 a

     993        1,009         

2.125% 500m bond due September 2028 a

     433                

5.125% US$700m bond due December 2028 a

     542                

5.75% £600m bond due December 2028

     710        721        731  

9.625% US$2,670m bond due December 2030 a (minimum 8.625% b )

     2,096        1,943        2,191  

3.125% £500m bond due November 2031

     502        502         

3.64% £330m bond due June 2033

     339                

1.613% £330m index linked bond due June 2033

     340                

6.375% £500m bond due June 2037 a

     522        522        522  

3.883% £330m bond due June 2039

     340                

1.739% £330m index linked bond due June 2039

     340                

3.924% £340m bond due June 2042

     350                

1.774% £340m index linked bond due June 2042

     351                

3.625% £250m bond due November 2047

     250        250         
                            

Total listed bonds

     15,953        13,491        11,405  
                            

Finance leases

     206        223        229  
                            

2.21% £350m bank loan due December 2017

                   352  

Other loans

     645        532        710  

Bank overdrafts (note 24)

     72        29        17  
                            

Total other loans and borrowings

     717        561        1,079  
                            

Total loans and other borrowings

     16,876        14,275        12,713  
                            

 

a  

Designated in a cash flow hedge relationship.

b  

The interest rate payable on this bond attracts an additional 0.25% for a downgrade by one credit rating by either Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s to the group’s senior unsecured debt below A3/A–respectively. In addition, if Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s subsequently increase the ratings then the interest rate will be decreased by 0.25% for each rating category upgrade by each rating agency. In no event will the interest rate be reduced below the minimum rate reflected in the above table.

Unless previously designated in a fair value hedge relationship, all loans and other borrowings are carried on our balance sheet and in the table above at amortised cost. The fair value of listed bonds and other long-term borrowings is £17,785m (2017/18: £14,878m, 2016/17: £13,496m) and the fair value of finance leases is £251m (2017/18: £253m, 2016/17: £273m).

The fair value of our bonds and other long-term borrowings is estimated on the basis of quoted market prices (Level 1), or based on similar issuances where they exist (Level 2).

The carrying amount of other loans and bank overdrafts equates to fair value due to the short maturity of these items (Level 3).

The interest rates payable on loans and borrowings disclosed above reflect the coupons on the underlying issued loans and borrowings and not the interest rates achieved through applying associated cross-currency and interest rate swaps in hedge arrangements.


Table of Contents

162

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

25. Loans and other borrowings  continued

 

Loans and other borrowings are analysed as follows:

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Current liabilities

        

Listed bonds

     1,367        1,702        1,539  

Finance leases

     16        18        15  

Bank loans

                   352  

Other loans and bank overdrafts a

     717        561        726  
                            

Total current liabilities

     2,100        2,281        2,632  
                            

Non-current liabilities

        

Listed bonds

     14,586        11,789        9,866  

Finance leases

     190        205        214  

Other loans

                   1  
                            

Total non-current liabilities

     14,776        11,994        10,081  
                            

Total

     16,876        14,275        12,713  
                            

 

a  

Includes collateral received on swaps of £638m (2017/18: £525m, 2016/17: £702m).

The carrying values disclosed in the above table reflect balances at amortised cost adjusted for accrued interest and fair value adjustments to the relevant loans or borrowings. These do not reflect the final principal repayments that will arise after taking account of the relevant derivatives in hedging relationships which are reflected in the table below. Apart from finance leases, all borrowings as at 31 March 2019, 2018 and 2017 were unsecured.

The principal repayments of loans and borrowings at hedged rates amounted to £15,912m (2017/18: £13,175m, 2016/17: £10,980m) and repayments fall due as follows:

 

     2019            2018            2017  
At 31 March   

Carrying

amount

£m

    

Effect of

hedging

and

interest

£m

   

Principal

repayments

at hedged

rates

£m

           

Carrying

amount

£m

    

Effect of

hedging

and

interest

£m

   

Principal

repayments

at hedged

rates

£m

           

Carrying

amount

£m

    

Effect of

hedging

and

interest

£m

   

Principal

repayments

at hedged

rates

£m

 

Within one year, or on demand

     2,100        (264     1,836          2,272        (291     1,981          2,632        (498     2,134  
                                                                                               

Between one and two years

     1,309        (133     1,176          1,192        (66     1,126          1,614        (197     1,417  

Between two and three years

     15              15          1,332        (154     1,178          1,166        (43     1,123  

Between three and four years

     1,463        (89     1,374          18              18          1,295        (121     1,174  

Between four and five years

     964        33       997          1,489        (111     1,378          12              12  

After five years

     10,975        (461     10,514          7,899        (405     7,494          5,844        (724     5,120  
                                                                                               

Total due for repayment after more than one year

     14,726        (650     14,076          11,930        (736     11,194          9,931        (1,085     8,846  
                                                                                               

Total repayments

     16,826        (914     15,912          14,202        (1,027     13,175          12,563        (1,583     10,980  

Fair value adjustments

     50               73               150       
                                                                                               

Total loans and other borrowings

     16,876               14,275               12,713       
                                                                                               

Obligations under finance leases are analysed as follows:

 

     2019      2018     2017            2019      2018      2017  
     Minimum lease payments           

Repayment of outstanding

lease obligations

 
At 31 March    £m      £m     £m             £m      £m      £m  

Amounts payable under finance leases:

                  

Due within one year

     29        33       29          16        18        14  

Between two to five years

     109        122       102          66        71        50  

After five years

     159        193       237          120        130        165  
                                                              
     297        348       368          202        219        229  

Less: future finance charges

     (95      (129     (139                       

Fair value adjustments for purchase price adjustment

     4        4                4        4         
                                                              

Total finance lease obligations

     206        223       229          206        223        229  
                                                              

Assets held under finance leases mainly consist of buildings and network assets. Our obligations under finance leases are secured by the lessors’ title to the leased assets.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

163

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

26. Finance expense

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Finance expense

        

Interest on:

        

Financial liabilities at amortised cost and associated derivatives

     582        478        567  

Finance leases

     13        16        15  

Derivatives

            14        12  

Fair value movements on derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship

     (3      1        (2

Reclassification of cash flow hedge from other comprehensive income

     45        34        (1

Unwinding of discount on provisions

     14        15        16  
                            

Total finance expense before specific items

     651        558        607  
                            

Specific items (note 10)

     139        218        210  
                            

Total finance expense

     790        776        817  
                            

Reconciliation of net finance expense to net interest cash outflow

Net interest cash outflow of £508m (2017/18: £548m, 2016/17: £622m) is £109m lower (2017/18: £2m higher, 2016/17: £28m higher) than the net finance expense in the income statement.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Finance expense before specific items

     651        558        607  

Finance income before specific items

     (34      (12      (13
                            

Net finance expense before specific items

     617        546        594  
                            

Timing differences:

        

Derivative restructuring costs

                   1  

Timing of coupon payments on bonds

     (85      (6      19  

Deferred income

     8        8        8  

Principal uplift on CPI and RPI linked bonds

     (32              
                            

Net interest cash outflow

     508        548        622  
                            

27. Financial instruments and risk management

We issue or hold financial instruments mainly to finance our operations; to finance corporate transactions such as dividends, share buybacks and acquisitions; for the temporary investment of short-term funds; and to manage currency and interest rate risks. In addition, various financial instruments, for example trade receivables and payables arise directly from operations.

How do we manage financial risk?

Our activities expose us to a variety of financial risks: market risk (including interest rate risk and foreign exchange risk), credit risk and liquidity risk.

Treasury operation

We have a centralised treasury operation whose primary role is to manage liquidity and funding requirements as well as our exposure to associated market risks, and credit risk.

Treasury policy

Treasury policy is set by the Board. Group treasury activities are subject to a set of controls appropriate for the magnitude of borrowing, investments and group-wide exposures. The Board has delegated authority to operate these policies to a series of panels responsible for the management of key treasury risks and operations. Appointment to and removal from the key panels requires approval from two of the following: the chairman, the chief executive or the chief financial officer.

There has been no change in the nature of our risk profile between 31 March 2019 and the date of approval of these financial statements.

How do we manage interest rate risk?

Management policy

Interest rate risk arises primarily from our long-term borrowings. Interest cash flow risk arises from borrowings issued at variable rates, partially offset by cash held at variable rates. Fair value interest rate risk arises from borrowings issued at fixed rates.

Our policy, as set by the Board, is to ensure that at least 70% of ongoing net debt is at fixed rates. Short-term interest rate management is delegated to the treasury operation while long-term interest rate management decisions require further approval by the chief financial officer, group director tax, treasury, insurance and pensions or the treasury director who each have been delegated such authority from the Board.

Hedging strategy

In order to manage our interest rate profile, we have entered into cross-currency and interest rate swap agreements to vary the amounts and periods for which interest rates on borrowings are fixed. The duration of the swap agreements matches the duration of the debt instruments. The majority of the group’s long-term borrowings are subject to fixed sterling interest rates after applying the impact of these hedging instruments.


Table of Contents

164

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

How do we manage foreign exchange risk?

Management policy

Foreign currency hedging activities protect the group from the risk that changes in exchange rates will adversely affect future net cash flows.

The Board’s policy for foreign exchange risk management defines the types of transactions typically covered, including significant operational, funding and currency interest exposures, and the period over which cover should extend for each type of transaction.

The Board has delegated short-term foreign exchange management to the treasury operation and long-term foreign exchange management decisions require further approval from the chief financial officer, group director tax, treasury, insurance and pensions or the treasury director.

Hedging strategy

A significant proportion of our external revenue and costs arise within the UK and are denominated in sterling. Our non-UK operations generally trade and are funded in their functional currency which limits their exposure to foreign exchange volatility.

We enter into forward currency contracts to hedge foreign currency capital purchases, purchase and sale commitments, interest expense and foreign currency investments. The commitments hedged are principally denominated in US dollar, euro and Asia Pacific region currencies. As a result, our exposure to foreign currency arises mainly on non-UK subsidiary investments and on residual currency trading flows. We use cross-currency swaps to swap foreign currency borrowings into sterling.

The table below reflects the currency and interest rate profile of our loans and borrowings after the impact of hedging.

 

    2019           2018           2017  
At 31 March  

Fixed rate

interest

£m

   

Floating

rate

interest

£m

   

Total

£m

          

Fixed rate

interest

£m

   

Floating

rate

interest

£m

   

Total

£m

          

Fixed rate

interest

£m

   

Floating

rate

interest

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Sterling

    13,556       1,767       15,323         11,990       676       12,666         9,633       706       10,339  

Euro

          589       589               509       509               641       641  

Total

    13,556       2,356       15,912         11,990       1,185       13,175         9,633       1,347       10,980  
                                                                                         

Ratio of fixed to floating

    85%       15%       100%         91%       9%       100%         88%       12%       100%  

Weighted average effective

                     

fixed interest rate – sterling

    4.0%             4.4%             4.9%      
                                                                                         

The floating rate loans and borrowings bear interest rates fixed in advance for periods ranging from one day to one year, primarily by reference to LIBOR quoted rates, RPI and CPI.

Sensitivity analysis

The income statement and shareholders’ equity are exposed to volatility arising from changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates. To demonstrate this volatility, management has concluded that the following are reasonable benchmarks for performing sensitivity analysis:

 

For interest, a 1% increase in interest rates and parallel shift in yield curves across sterling, US dollar and euro currencies.

 

For foreign exchange, a 10% strengthening/weakening of sterling against other currencies.

The impact on equity, before tax and excluding any impact related to retirement benefit plans, of a 1% increase in interest rates and a 10% strengthening of sterling against other currencies is as detailed below:

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

Increase

(reduce)

    

2018

£m

Increase

(reduce)

   

2017

£m

Increase

(reduce)

 

Sterling interest rates

     672        628       554  

US dollar interest rates

     (350      (267     (348

Euro interest rates

     (399      (401     (229

Sterling strengthening

     (219      (236     (269
                           

A 1% decrease in interest rates and 10% weakening in sterling against other currencies would have broadly the same impact in the opposite direction.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

165

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

The impact of a 1% change in interest rates on the group’s annual net finance expense and our exposure to foreign exchange volatility in the income statement, after hedging, (excluding translation exposures) would not have been material in 2018/19, 2017/18 and 2016/17.

Credit ratings

We continue to target a BBB+/Baa1 credit rating over the cycle. We regularly review the liquidity of the group and our funding strategy takes account of medium-term requirements. These include the pension deficit and shareholder distributions.

Our December 2030 bond contains covenants which require us to pay higher rates of interest since our credit ratings fell below A3 in the case of Moody’s or A– in the case of Standard & Poor’s (S&P). Additional interest of 0.25% per year accrues for each ratings category downgrade by each agency below those levels effective from the next coupon date following a downgrade. Based on the total notional value of debt outstanding of £2.0bn at 31 March 2019, our finance expense would increase/decrease by approximately £10m a year if the group’s credit rating were to be downgraded/upgraded, respectively, by one credit rating category by both agencies.

Our credit ratings were as detailed below:

 

     2019            2018        2017
At 31 March    Rating      Outlook             Rating    Outlook         Rating    Outlook

Rating agency

                     

Moody’s

     Baa2        Stable          Baa2        Stable          Baa1        Negative  

Standard & Poor’s

     BBB        Stable          BBB+        Negative          BBB+        Negative  
                                                                       

How do we manage liquidity risk?

Management policy

We maintain liquidity by entering into short and long-term financial instruments to support operational and other funding requirements, determined using short and long-term cash forecasts. These forecasts are supplemented by a financial headroom analysis which is used to assess funding adequacy for at least a 12-month period. On at least an annual basis the Board reviews and approves the long-term funding requirements of the group and on an ongoing basis considers any related matters. We manage refinancing risk by limiting the amount of borrowing that matures within any specified period and having appropriate strategies in place to manage refinancing needs as they arise. The maturity profile of our loans and borrowings at 31 March 2019 is disclosed in note 25. We have term debt maturities of £1.2bn in 2019/20.

Our treasury operation reviews and manages our short-term requirements within the parameters of the policies set by the Board. We hold cash, cash equivalents and current investments in order to manage short-term liquidity requirements. At 31 March 2019 we had undrawn committed borrowing facilities of £2.1bn (2017/18: £2.1bn, 2016/17: £2.1bn) maturing in September 2021.

In the UK, the group has arranged for funders to offer a supplier financing scheme to the group’s suppliers. This enables suppliers who sign up to the arrangements to sell their invoices to the funders and to be paid earlier than the invoice due date. The group assesses the arrangement against indicators to assess if debts which vendors have sold to the funder under the supplier financing scheme continue to meet the definition of trade payables or should be classified as borrowings. At 31 March 2019 the payables met the criteria of trade payables.

Maturity analysis

The following table provides an analysis of the remaining contractually-agreed cash flows including interest payable for our non- derivative financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis, which therefore differs from both the carrying value and fair value.

 

Non-derivative financial liabilities

At 31 March 2019

  

Loans and
other
borrowings

£m

    

Interest on
loans

and other
borrowings

£m

   

Trade and
other
payables

£m

    

Provisions

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Due within one year

     1,886        541       5,158        39       7,624  

Between one and two years

     1,309        505              33       1,847  

Between two and three years

     15        497              35       547  

Between three and four years

     1,463        496              14       1,973  

Between four and five years

     964        482              12       1,458  

After five years

     10,975        3,543              127       14,645  
                                            
     16,612        6,064       5,158        260       28,094  
                                            

Interest payments not yet accrued

            (5,850                  (5,850

Fair value adjustment

     50                           50  

Impact of discounting

                         (29     (29
                                            

Carrying value on the balance sheet a,b

     16,662        214       5,158        231       22,265  
                                            


Table of Contents

166

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

Non-derivative financial liabilities

At 31 March 2018

  

Loans and
other
borrowings

£m

  

Interest on
loans

and other
borrowings

£m

   

Trade and
other
payables

£m

  

Provisions

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Due within one year

     2,120        452       4,939        54       7,565  

Between one and two years

     1,192        404              34       1,630  

Between two and three years

     1,332        365              25       1,722  

Between three and four years

     18        357              43       418  

Between four and five years

     1,489        355              19       1,863  

After five years

     7,899        2,714              197       10,810  
                                            
     14,050        4,647       4,939        372       24,008  
                                            

Interest payments not yet accrued

            (4,495                  (4,495

Fair value adjustment

     73                           73  

Impact of discounting

                         (72     (72
                                            

Carrying value on the balance sheet a,b

     14,123        152       4,939        300       19,514  
                                            

 

Non-derivative financial liabilities

At 31 March 2017

  

Loans

and other
borrowings

£m

  

Interest on
loans

and other
borrowings

£m

   

Trade

and other
payables

£m

  

Provisions

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Due within one year

     2,468        507       5,259        62       8,296  

Between one and two years

     1,614        415              41       2,070  

Between two and three years

     1,166        364              21       1,551  

Between three and four years

     1,295        327              18       1,640  

Between four and five years

     12        319              17       348  

After five years

     5,844        2,726              310       8,880  
                                            
     12,399        4,658       5,259        469       22,785  
                                            

Interest payments not yet accrued

            (4,494                  (4,494

Fair value adjustment

     150                           150  

Impact of discounting

                         (177     (177
                                            

Carrying value on the balance sheet a,b

     12,549        164       5,259        292       18,264  
                                            

 

a  

Foreign currency-related cash flows were translated at closing rates as at the relevant reporting date. Future variable interest rate cash flows were calculated using the most recent rate applied at the relevant balance sheet date.

b  

The carrying amount of trade and other payables excludes £1,479m (2017/18: £1,326m, 2016/17: £1,298m) of non-current trade and other payables which relates to non-financial liabilities, and £632m (2017/18: £2,229m, 2016/17: £2,178m) of other taxation and social security and deferred income.

Trade and other payables are held at amortised cost. The carrying amount of these balances approximates to fair value due to the short maturity of amounts payable.

The following table provides an analysis of the contractually agreed cash flows in respect of the group’s derivative financial instruments. Cash flows are presented on a net or gross basis in accordance with the settlement arrangements of the instruments.

 

    Derivatives – Analysed by earliest payment date a           Derivatives – Analysed based on holding instrument to maturity  

Derivative financial liabilities

At 31 March 2019

 

Net settled

£m

   

Gross settled

outflows

£m

   

Gross settled

inflows

£m

   

Total

£m

          

Net settled

£m

   

Gross settled

outflows

£m

   

Gross settled

inflows

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Due within one year

    167       1,007       (950     224         82       1,007       (950     139  

Between one and two years

    128       541       (489     180         77       541       (489     129  

Between two and three years

    131       131       (96     166         71       131       (96     106  

Between three and four years

    163       633       (591     205         71       633       (591     113  

Between four and five years

    207       1,095       (1,042     260         71       1,095       (1,042     124  

After five years

    43       3,790       (3,660     173         467       3,790       (3,660     597  
                                                                         

Total b

    839       7,197       (6,828     1,208         839       7,197       (6,828     1,208  
                                                                         

 

    Derivatives – Analysed by earliest payment date a           Derivatives – Analysed based on holding instrument to maturity  

Derivative financial liabilities

At 31 March 2018

 

Net settled

£m

   

Gross settled

outflows

£m

   

Gross settled

inflows

£m

   

Total

£m

          

Net settled

£m

   

Gross settled

outflows

£m

   

Gross settled

inflows

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Due within one year

    140       587       (547     180         91       587       (547     131  

Between one and two years

    135       183       (166     152         91       183       (166     108  

Between two and three years

    156       442       (446     152         85       69       (47     107  

Between three and four years

    143       52       (29     166         80       68       (47     101  

Between four and five years

    161       52       (29     184         80       68       (47     101  

After five years

    291       2,234       (2,149     376         599       2,575       (2,512     662  
                                                                         

Total b

    1,026       3,550       (3,366     1,210         1,026       3,550       (3,366     1,210  
                                                                         


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

167

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

    Derivatives – Analysed by earliest payment date a           Derivatives –Analysed based on holding instrument to maturity  

Derivative financial liabilities

At 31 March 2017

 

Net settled

£m

   

Gross settled

outflows

£m

   

Gross settled

inflows

£m

   

Total

£m

          

Net settled

£m

   

Gross settled

outflows

£m

   

Gross settled

inflows

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Due within one year

    291       582       (576     297         92       582       (576     98  

Between one and two years

    296       1,139       (1,097     338         92       1,139       (1,097     134  

Between two and three years

    198                   198         92                   92  

Between three and four years

    114                   114         88                   88  

Between four and five years

    104                   104         83                   83  

After five years

    123                   123         679                   679  
                                                                         

Total b

    1,126       1,721       (1,673     1,174         1,126       1,721       (1,673     1,174  
                                                                         

 

a  

Certain derivative financial instruments contain break clauses whereby either the group or bank counterparty can terminate the swap on certain dates and the mark to market position is settled in cash.

b

Foreign currency-related cash flows were translated at closing rates as at the relevant reporting date. Future variable interest rate cash flows were calculated using the most recent rate applied at the relevant balance sheet date.

How do we manage credit risk?

Management policy

Our exposure to credit risk arises from financial assets transacted by the treasury operation (primarily derivatives, investments, cash and cash equivalents) and from trading-related receivables.

For treasury-related balances, the Board’s defined policy restricts exposure to any one counterparty by setting credit limits based on the credit quality as defined by Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s. The minimum credit ratings permitted with counterparties in respect of new transactions are A3/A– for long-term and P1/A1 for short-term investments. If counterparties in respect of existing transactions fall below the permitted criteria we will take action where appropriate.

The treasury operation continuously reviews the limits applied to counterparties and will adjust the limit according to the nature and credit standing of the counterparty, and in response to market conditions, up to the maximum allowable limit set by the Board.

Operational management policy

Our credit policy for trading-related financial assets is applied and managed by each of the customer-facing units to ensure compliance. The policy requires that the creditworthiness and financial strength of customers are assessed at inception and on an ongoing basis. Payment terms are set in accordance with industry standards. Where appropriate, we may minimise risks by requesting securities such as deposits, guarantees and letters of credit. We take proactive steps including constantly reviewing credit ratings of counterparties to minimise the impact of adverse market conditions on trading-related financial assets.

Exposures

The maximum credit risk exposure of the group’s financial assets at the balance sheet date is as follows:

 

At 31 March    Notes   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Derivative financial assets

        1,592        1,509        2,246  

Investments

     23        3,268        3,075        1,564  

Trade and other receivables a

     17        1,766        2,518        2,729  

Contract assets

     6        1,602                

Cash and cash equivalents

     24        1,666        528        528  
                                     
        9,894        7,630        7,067  
                                     

 

a  

The carrying amount excludes £445m (2017/18: £317m, 2016/17: £360m) of non-current trade and other receivables which relate to non-financial assets, and £1,456m (2017/18: £1,496m, 2016/17: £1,106m) of prepayments, deferred contract costs and other receivables.

The credit quality and credit concentration of cash equivalents, current asset investments and derivative financial assets are detailed in the tables below. Where the opinion of Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s (S&P) differ, the lower rating is used.

 

Moody’s/S&P credit rating of counterparty   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Aa2/AA and above

     2,522        2,575        1,444  

Aa3/AA–

     1,376        313        208  

A1/A+ a

     1,145        651        952  

A2/A a

     649        628        370  

A3/A– a

     50        180        204  

Baa1/BBB+ a

     75        59        561  

Baa2/BBB and below a

     160        207        86  
                            
     5,977        4,613        3,825  
                            

 

a  

We hold cash collateral of £638m (2017/18: £492m, 2016/17: £702m) in respect of derivative financial assets with certain counterparties.

The concentration of credit risk for our trading balances is provided in note 17, which analyses outstanding balances by customer-facing unit. Where multiple transactions are undertaken with a single financial counterparty or group of related counterparties, we enter into netting arrangements to reduce our exposure to credit risk by making use of standard International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) documentation. We have also entered into credit support agreements with certain swap counterparties whereby, on a daily, weekly and monthly basis, the fair value position on notional £3,289m of long dated cross-currency swaps and interest rate swaps is collateralised. The related net cash inflow during the year was £129m (2017/18: outflow £220m, 2016/17: inflow £100m). The collateral paid and received is recognised within current asset investments and loans and other borrowings, respectively.


Table of Contents

168

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

Offsetting of financial instruments

The table below shows our financial assets and liabilities that are subject to offset in the group’s balance sheet and the impact of enforceable master netting or similar agreements.

 

            Related amounts not set off in the balance sheet  

Financial assets and liabilities

At 31 March 2019

  

Amounts

presented in the

balance sheet

£m

    

Right of set off

with derivative

counterparties

£m

    

Cash

collateral

£m

    

Net

amount

£m

 

Derivative financial assets

     1,592        (802      (638      152  

Derivative financial liabilities

     (940      802        90        (48
                                     

Total

     652               (548      104  
                                     

 

            Related amounts not set off in the balance sheet  

Financial assets and liabilities

At 31 March 2018

  

Amounts

presented in the

balance sheet

£m

    

Right of set off

with derivative

counterparties

£m

    

Cash

collateral

£m

    

Net

amount

£m

 

Derivative financial assets

     1,509        (754      (492      263  

Derivative financial liabilities

     (837      754        60        (23
                                     

Total

     672               (432      240  
                                     

 

            Related amounts not set off in the balance sheet  

Financial assets and liabilities

At 31 March 2017

  

Amounts

presented in the

balance sheet

£m

    

Right of set off

with derivative

counterparties

£m

    

Cash

collateral

£m

    

Net

amount

£m

 

Derivative financial assets

     2,246        (693      (702      851  

Derivative financial liabilities

     (903      693        64        (146
                                     

Total

     1,343               (638      705  
                                     

Derivatives and hedging

We use derivative financial instruments mainly to reduce exposure to foreign exchange and interest rate risks. Derivatives may qualify as hedges for accounting purposes if they meet the criteria for designation as fair value hedges or cash flow hedges in accordance with IFRS 9.

 

 

Significant accounting policies that apply to derivatives and hedge accounting

All of our derivative financial instruments are held at fair value on the balance sheet.

Derivatives designated in a cash flow hedge

The group designates certain derivatives as cash flow hedges. Where derivatives qualify for hedge accounting, recognition of any resultant gain or loss depends on the nature of the hedge. To qualify for hedge accounting, hedge documentation must be prepared at inception, the hedge must be in line with BT’s risk management strategy and there must be an economic relationship based on the currency, amount and timing of the respective cash flows of the hedging instrument and hedged item. This is assessed at inception and in subsequent periods in which the hedge remains in operation. Hedge accounting is discontinued when it is no longer in line with BT’s risk management strategy or if it no longer qualifies for hedge accounting.

When a derivative financial instrument is designated as a hedge of the variability in cash flows of a recognised asset or liability, or a highly probable transaction, the effective part of any gain or loss on the derivative financial instrument is recognised directly in equity, in the cash flow reserve. For cash flow hedges of recognised assets or liabilities, the associated cumulative gain or loss is removed from equity and recognised in the same line of the income statement and in the same period or periods that the hedged transaction affects the income statement. Any ineffectiveness arising on a cash flow hedge is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Other derivatives

Our policy is not to use derivatives for trading purposes. However, due to the complex nature of hedge accounting, some derivatives may not qualify for hedge accounting, or may be specifically not designated as a hedge because natural offset is more appropriate. These derivatives are classified as fair value through profit and loss and are recognised at fair value. Any direct transaction costs are recognised immediately in the income statement.

Gains and losses on re-measurement are recognised in the income statement in the line that most appropriately reflects the nature of the item or transaction to which they relate. Derivative financial instruments are classified as current assets or current liabilities where they have a maturity period within 12 months. Where derivative financial instruments have a maturity period greater than 12 months, they are classified within either non-current assets or non-current liabilities.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

169

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

Where the fair value of a derivative contract at initial recognition is not supported by observable market data and differs from the transaction price, a day one gain or loss will arise which is not recognised in the income statement. Such gains and losses are deferred and amortised to the income statement based on the remaining contractual term and as observable market data becomes available.

The fair values of outstanding swaps and foreign exchange contracts are estimated using discounted cash flow models and market rates of interest and foreign exchange at the balance sheet date.

 

At 31 March 2019   

Current

asset

£m

    

Non-current

asset

£m

    

Current

liability

£m

    

Non-current

liability

£m

 

Designated in a cash flow hedge

     102        1,228        40        689  

Other

     9        253        8        203  
                                     

Total derivatives

     111        1,481        48        892  
                                     

 

At 31 March 2018   

Current

asset

£m

    

Non-current

asset

£m

    

Current

liability

£m

    

Non-current

liability

£m

 

Designated in a cash flow hedge

     187        1,061        41        587  

Other

     10        251        9        200  
                                     

Total derivatives

     197        1,312        50        787  
                                     

 

At 31 March 2017   

Current

asset

£m

    

Non-current

asset

£m

    

Current

liability

£m

    

Non-current

liability

£m

 

Designated in a cash flow hedge

     417        1,508        25        616  

Other

     11        310        9        253  
                                     

Total derivatives

     428        1,818        34        869  
                                     

All derivative financial instruments are categorised at Level 2 of the fair value hierarchy as defined in note 23.

Instruments designated in a cash flow hedge include interest rate swaps and cross-currency swaps hedging euro- and US dollar- denominated borrowings. Forward currency contracts are taken out to hedge step-up interest on currency denominated borrowings relating to the group’s 2030 US dollar bond. The hedged cash flows will affect the group’s income statement as interest and principal amounts are repaid over the remaining term of the borrowings (see note 25).

We hedge forecast foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollar, euro and Asia Pacific currencies 12 months forward with certain specific transactions hedged further forward. The related cash flows are recognised in the income statement over this period.

The amounts related to items designated as hedging instruments were as follows:

 

Hedged items

At 31 March 2019

  

Notional
principal

£m

    

Asset

£m

    

Liability

£m

   

Balance in cash
flow hedge
related reserves
(gain)/loss

£m

   

Fair value
(gain)/loss
recognised
in OCI

£m

   

Amount
recycled from
cash flow hedge
related
reserves to P&L

£m

 

Sterling, euro and US dollar denominated borrowings a

     13,518        1,311        (702     (48     (130     (19

US dollar step up interest on US denominated borrowings b

     145        3        (1     (38     (13     4  

Foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollar, euro and Asia Pacific currencies c

     1,821        16        (26     (13     (33     33  
                                                    

Total cash flow hedges

     15,484        1,330        (729     (99     (176     18  
                                                    

Deferred tax

                     15      

Derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship

        262        (211          

 

     

 

 

     

Carrying value on the balance sheet

        1,592        (940     (84    

 

     

 

 

     

 

Hedged items

At 31 March 2018 d

  

Notional
principal

£m

    

Asset

£m

    

Liability

£m

   

Balance in cash
flow hedge
related reserves
(gain)/loss

£m

   

Fair value
(gain)/loss
recognised
in OCI

£m

    

Amount
recycled from
cash flow hedge
related reserves
to P&L

£m

 

Sterling, euro and US dollar denominated borrowings a

     12,504        1,222        (608     101       347        (333

US dollar step up interest on US denominated borrowings b

     143               (6     (29     13        3  

Foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollar, euro and Asia Pacific currencies c

     1,989        26        (14     (13     8        53  
                                                     

Total cash flow hedges

     14,636        1,248        (628     59       368        (277
                                                     

Deferred tax

                     (22     

Derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship

        261        (209           

 

     

 

 

      

Carrying value on the balance sheet

        1,509        (837     37       

 

     

 

 

      


Table of Contents

170

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

27. Financial instruments and risk management  continued

 

Hedged items

At 31 March 2017 d

  

Notional
principal

£m

    

Asset

£m

    

Liability

£m

   

Balance in cash
flow hedge
related reserves
(gain)/loss

£m

   

Fair value
(gain)/loss
recognised
in OCI

£m

   

Amount
recycled from
cash flow hedge
related reserves
to P&L

£m

 

Sterling, euro and US dollar denominated borrowings a

     10,041        1,845        (621     87       (800     938  

US dollar step up interest on US denominated borrowings b

     146        5        (2     (45     (21     4  

Foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollar, euro and Asia Pacific currencies c

     2,327        75        (18     (74     (63     (4
                                                    

Total cash flow hedges

     12,514        1,925        (641     (32     (884     938  
                                                    

Deferred tax

                     (95    

Derivatives not in a designated hedge relationship

        321        (262          

 

     

 

 

     

Carrying value on the balance sheet

        2,246        (903     (127    

 

     

 

 

     

 

a  

Sterling, euro and US dollar denominated borrowings are hedged using cross currency swaps and interest rate swaps. Amounts recycled to profit and loss are presented within other operating costs and finance expense.

b  

US dollar step up interest on US denominated borrowings are hedged using forward currency contracts. Amounts recycled to profit and loss are presented within finance expense.

c  

Foreign currency purchases, principally denominated in US dollar, euro and Asia Pacific currencies are hedged using forward currency contracts. Amounts recycled to profit and loss in respect of these items are presented within cost of sales and other operating costs.

d  

We have presented comparatives to this information, now required by IFRS 7 following the adoption of IFRS 9, for 31 March 2018 and 31 March 2017.

All cash flow hedges were fully effective in the period.

28. Other reserves

 

            Other comprehensive income         
     

Capital

redemption

reserve

£m

    

Cash flow

reserve a

£m

    

Fair
value
reserve b

£m

    

Cost of
hedging
reserve c

£m

    

Translation

reserve d

£m

    

Total

£m

 

At 1 April 2016

     27        173        16               469        685  

Exchange differences e

                                 227        227  

Net fair value gain (loss) on cash flow hedges

            884                             884  

Movements in relation to cash flow hedges recognised in income
and expense

            (938                           (938

Fair value movement on available-for-sale assets

                   (3                    (3

Tax recognised in other comprehensive income

            8                      21        29  
                                                       

At 31 March 2017

     27        127        13               717        884  
                                                       

Exchange differences e

                                 (188      (188

Net fair value gain (loss) on cash flow hedges

            (368                           (368

Movements in relation to cash flow hedges recognised in income
and expense

            277                             277  

Fair value movement on available-for-sale assets

                   11                      11  

Tax recognised in other comprehensive income

            10                      (9      1  

Transfer to realised profit

            (83                           (83
                                                       

At 31 March 2018

     27        (37      24               520        534  
                                                       

Transfer to cost of hedging reserve

            81               (81              
                                                       

At 1 April 2018

     27        44        24        (81      520        534  
                                                       

Exchange differences e

                                 64        64  

Net fair value gain (loss) on cash flow hedges

            168               8               176  

Movements in relation to cash flow hedges recognised in income
and expense

            (31             13               (18

Fair value movement on assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

                   3                      3  

Tax recognised in other comprehensive income

            (37                    (4      (41

Transfer to realised profit

                                         
                                                       

At 31 March 2019

     27        144        27        (60      580        718  
                                                       

 

a  

The cash flow reserve is used to record the effective portion of the cumulative net change in the fair value of cash flow hedging instruments related to hedged transactions that have not yet occurred. Amounts ‘recognised in income and expense’ include a net charge to the cash flow reserve of £30m (2017/18: credit of £295m, 2016/17: charge of £941m) relating to fair value movements on derivatives. The items generating these foreign exchange movements are in designated cash flow hedge relationships.

b  

The fair value reserve (2017/18, 2016/17: available-for-sale reserve) is used to record the cumulative fair value gains and losses on assets classified as fair value through other comprehensive income (2017/18, 2016/17: available-for-sale financial assets). The cumulative gains and losses are recycled to the income statement on disposal of the assets.

c  

The cost of hedging reserve reflects the gain or loss on the portion excluded from the designated hedging instrument that relates to the currency basis element of our cross currency swaps. It is initially recognised in other comprehensive income and accounted for similarly to gains or losses in the cash flow reserve.

d  

The translation reserve is used to record cumulative translation differences on the net assets of foreign operations. The cumulative translation differences are recycled to the income statement on disposal of the foreign operation.

e  

Excludes £(2)m (2017/18: £1m, 2016/17: £10m) of exchange differences in relation to retained earnings attributed to non-controlling interests.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

171

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

29. Related party transactions

Information about material related party transactions of the BT Group is set out below.

Key management personnel comprise executive and non-executive directors and members of the Executive Committee. Compensation of key management personnel is disclosed in note 7.

Amounts paid to the group’s retirement benefit plans are set out in note 20.

30. Financial commitments and contingent liabilities

Financial commitments were as follows:

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

 

Operating lease commitments

     6,619        6,597  

TV programme rights commitments

     2,113        2,823  

Capital commitments

     1,432        993  

Other commitments

     253        624  
                   

Total

     10,417        11,037  
                   

TV programme rights commitments, mainly relating to football broadcast rights, are those for which the licence period has not yet started.

Future minimum operating lease payments were as follows:

 

Payable in the year ending 31 March:   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

 

2019

            600  

2020

     755        550  

2021

     641        513  

2022

     599        486  

2023

     555        463  

2024

     512        449  

Thereafter

     3,557        3,536  
                   

Total future minimum operating lease payments

     6,619        6,597  
                   

Operating lease commitments were mainly in respect of land and buildings which arose from a sale and operating leaseback transaction in 2001. Leases have an average term of 13 years (2017/18: 14 years) and rentals are fixed for an average of 13 years (2017/18: 14 years).

Other than as disclosed below, there were no contingent liabilities or guarantees at 31 March 2018 other than those arising in the ordinary course of the group’s business and on these no material losses are anticipated. We have insurance cover to certain limits for major risks on property and major claims in connection with legal liabilities arising in the course of our operations. Otherwise, the group generally carries its own risks.

Commitments and guarantees

BT plc

On 27 March 2019 a formal guarantee was put in place for BT Group plc to fully and unconditionally guarantee the obligations of its wholly-owned subsidiary British Telecommunications plc (‘BT plc’) under it’s US dollar-denominated SEC-registered bonds. BT Group will also guarantee the obligations under the existing notes and new notes issued under BT plc’s Euro Medium Term Note Programme (EMTN), and under BT plc’s £300m 8.625% bonds due in 2020 and £600m 5.75% bonds due in 2028.

BDUK

Under the Broadband Delivery UK programme, grants received by the group may be subject to reinvestment or repayment to the local authority depending on the level of take-up.

Telefónica UK Limited leases

We’ve provided guarantees relating to certain leases entered into by Telefónica UK Limited (formerly O2 UK Limited) prior to the demerger of mmO2 from BT on 19 November 2001. mmO2 plc (now part of the Telefónica Group) has given BT a counter indemnity for these guarantees. There is no exposure in the event of credit default in respect of amounts used to defease future lease obligations. The guarantee lasts until Telefónica UK Limited has discharged all its obligations.

Legal proceedings

The group is involved in various legal proceedings, including actual or threatened litigation, and government or regulatory investigations. However, save as disclosed below, the group does not currently believe that there are any legal proceedings, or government or regulatory investigations that may have a material adverse impact on the operations or financial condition of the group. In respect of each of the claims below, the nature and progression of such proceedings and investigations can make it difficult to predict the impact they will have on the group. There are many reasons why we cannot make these assessments with certainty, including, among others, that they are in early stages, no damages or remedies have been specified, and/or the often slow pace of litigation.


Table of Contents

172

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the consolidated financial statements continued

 

 

30. Financial commitments and contingent liabilities  continued

 

Italian business

US securities class action complaints: The plaintiffs filed a third amended complaint in December 2018. We filed a motion to dismiss that complaint, which plaintiffs opposed. We filed our reply to the plaintiff’s opposition to the motion to dismiss on 11 January 2019. We are awaiting a decision from the US District court.

Italian Authorities: On 11 February 2019 the Milan Public Prosecutor served BT Italia S.P.A. with a notice regarding conclusion of their preliminary investigation. The notice (which named BT Italia, as well as various individuals) records the prosecutor’s view that as at the conclusion of the preliminary investigation there is a basis for proceeding with its case against BT Italia for certain potential offences under articles 5 and 25 of Legislative Decree 231/2001. BT Italia disputes this and maintains in a defence brief filed on 19 April 2019 that it should not be prosecuted. BT Italia is not presently the subject of any formal charge (nor are any of the individuals named in the prosecutor’s notice).

Phones 4U

In December 2016, the administrators of Phones 4U started legal proceedings in the High Court in the United Kingdom against EE, claiming payments under a retail trading agreement for sums then due in respect of revenues (net of costs) from certain customers prior to Phones 4U entering administration. This sharing of revenue under the retail trading agreement was due to continue until September 2019, with related payments continuing until April 2021. On May 2018 we reached a confidential agreement with the administrators of Phones 4U to settle this matter. This settlement is in line with the accruals we held to cover potential payments required by EE.

Since 2015 the administrators of Phones 4U Limited have made allegations that EE and other mobile network operators colluded to procure Phones 4U’s insolvency. During the year proceedings were issued for an unquantified amount by the administrators and in April 2019 we submitted our defence to this claim. We continue to dispute these allegations vigorously.

Brazilian tax claims

Brazilian tax claims The Brazilian state tax authorities have made tax demands on the exchange of goods and services (ICMS) and regulatory assessments (FUST/FUNTTEL) against certain Brazilian subsidiaries. These are indirect taxes imposed on the provision of telecommunications services in Brazil. The state tax and regulatory authorities are seeking to impose ICMS and FUST/FUNTTEL on revenue earned on activities that the company does not consider as being part of the provision of telecommunications services, such as equipment rental and managed services. We have disputed the basis on which ICMS and FUST/FUNTTEL are imposed and, in the case of ICMS, have challenged the rate which the tax authorities are seeking to apply.

We currently have 33 ICMS cases with a current potential value of £204m (as at the end of March 2019). This is the assessed amount for all cases spanning the period from 1998 to 2012 (plus one outlier case for the period 2013 to 2016 in the state of Minas Gerais and one case for the period 2014 to 2015 in the state of Amazonas). There are currently 56 FUST/FUNTTEL cases with a known overall liability of £19m; with a further £4m estimated (as at the end of April 2019). The judicial process is likely to take many years. There are eight ICMS cases worth approximately £55m which are at an advanced stage. These are currently pending before the Sao Paulo Court of Appeal. We are waiting for the Reporting Judge to schedule the trial hearing and expect to have a date soon, following the February judicial recess.

Regulatory matters

In respect of regulatory risks, the group provides for anticipated costs where an outflow of resources is considered probable and a reasonable estimate can be made of the likely outcome. Estimates are used in assessing the likely value of the regulatory risk. The ultimate liability may vary from the amounts provided and will be dependent upon the eventual outcome of any settlement.

Northern Ireland Public Sector Shared Network contract

On 4 April 2019 Ofcom opened an investigation into whether the award of the Public Sector Shared Network contract for Northern Ireland to BT complied with relevant significant market power conditions. We are cooperating with Ofcom’s investigation.

Other regulatory matters

We hold provisions reflecting management’s estimates of regulatory risks across a range of issues, including price and service issues. The precise outcome of each matter depends on whether it becomes an active issue, and the extent to which negotiation or regulatory decisions will result in financial settlement.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

173

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

 

Financial Statements of BT Group plc

BT Group plc company balance sheet

Registered number 04190816

 

 

At 31 March    Notes   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

 

Non-current assets

        

Investments

   2      10,952        10,885  

Trade and other receivables a

        4,540        6,928  
                        
        15,492        17,813  
                        

Current assets

        

Trade and other receivables a

        1,117        112  

Cash and cash equivalents

        2        6  
                        
        1,119        118  
                        

Current liabilities

        

Trade and other payables b

        96        75  
                        
        96        75  
                        

Total assets less current liabilities

        16,515        17,856  
                        

Non-current liabilities

        

Loans and other borrowings c

        3,029        2,983  
                        
        3,029        2,983  
                        

Equity

        

Ordinary shares

        499        499  

Share premium

        1,051        1,051  

Capital redemption reserve

        27        27  

Merger reserve

   3      3,149        5,649  

Own shares

        (167      (186

Profit and loss account d

        8,927        7,833  
                        

Total equity

        13,486        14,873  
                        
        16,515        17,856  
                        

 

a  

Trade and other receivables primarily relate to a £1,010m equity placing raised in February 2015 and net proceeds of £7,507m, before £3m of issue costs, relating to the sale of EE to British Telecommunications plc on 29 January 2016. Subsequently £4,275m of the loan receivable relating to the sale of EE has been repaid. The balance consists of two loans to group undertakings of £1,061m (2017/18: £1,044m) repayable on 31 January 2058 and £3,479m (2017/18: £5,884m) repayable on 21 December 2064. The loans attract interest of LIBOR plus 102.5 basis points (2017/18: LIBOR plus 90 basis points). Included in the current trade and other receivables are loan to group undertakings of £997m (2017/18: £nil) and accrued interest of £120m (2017/18: £112m).

b  

Trade and other payables consists of loans from group undertakings of £60m (2017/18: £34m) and other creditors of £36m (2017/18: £41m).

c  

Loans and other borrowings consist of a loan from group undertakings of £3,029m (2017/18: £2,983m). The loan is repayable on 31 January 2058 and attracts interest of LIBOR plus 102.5 basis points (2017/18: LIBOR plus 90 basis points).

d  

As permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, no profit and loss account of the company is presented. The profit for the financial year, dealt with in the profit and loss account of the company was £44m (2017/18: £61m).

The financial statements of the company on pages 173 to 176 were approved by the Board of Directors on 8 May 2019 and were signed on its behalf by:

 

Jan du Plessis

Chairman

 

Philip Jansen

Chief Executive

 

Simon Lowth

Chief Financial Officer


Table of Contents

174

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

BT Group plc company statement

of changes in equity

 

 

      Note   

Called up share

capital a

£m

  

Share

premium

account

£m

  

Capital

redemption

reserve

£m

  

Merger

reserve

£m

   

Own shares b

£m

   

Profit

and loss

account b,c

£m

   

Total

£m

 

At 1 April 2017

        499        1,051        27        5,649       (96     9,290       16,420  

Profit for the financial year

                                         61       61  

Dividends paid

                                         (1,524     (1,524

Capital contribution in respect of share-based payments

                                         84       84  

Net buyback of own shares

                                   (90     (78     (168
                                                                  

At 1 April 2018

        499        1,051        27        5,649       (186     7,833       14,873  

Profit for the financial year

                                         44       44  

Transfer to realised profit

   3                           (2,500           2,500        

Dividends paid

                                         (1,503     (1,503

Capital contribution in respect of share-based payments

                                         67       67  

Net buyback of own shares

                                   19       (23     (4

Unclaimed dividends over 10 years

                                         9       9  
                                                                  

At 31 March 2019

        499        1,051        27        3,149       (167     8,927       13,486  
                                                                  

 

a  

The allotted, called up and fully paid ordinary share capital of the company at 31 March 2019 was £499m (31 March 2018: £499m), representing 9,968,127,681 (31 March 2018: 9,968,127,681) ordinary shares of 5p each.

b  

In 2018/19 9,066,942 shares (2017/18: 38,627,352) were issued from Own shares to satisfy obligations under employee share schemes and executive share awards at a cost of £28m (2017/18: £130m). At 31 March 2019, 54,330,273 shares (31 March 2018: 59,249,666) with an aggregate nominal value of £3m (31 March 2018: £1m) were held as part of Own shares at cost.

c  

As permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, no profit and loss account of the company is presented. The profit for the financial year, dealt with in the profit and loss account of the company, was £44m (2017/18: £61m).


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

175

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

 

Notes to the company financial statements

 

 

1. BT Group plc accounting policies

Principal activity

The principal activity of the company is to act as ultimate holding company of the BT group.

Accounting basis

As used in these financial statements and associated notes, the term ‘company’ refers to BT Group plc (a public company limited by shares). These separate financial statements of the company are prepared in accordance with, and presented as required by, the Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using Financial Reporting Standard 101 (FRS 101). These financial statements have been prepared in accordance with FRS 101. FRS 101 incorporates, with limited amendments, International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS).

Financial statements

The financial statements are prepared on a going concern basis and under the historical cost convention.

As permitted by Section 408(3) of the Companies Act 2006, the company’s profit and loss account has not been presented.

New and amended accounting standards effective during the year

There have been no new or amended accounting standards or interpretations adopted during the year that have a significant impact on the financial statements.

Exemptions

As permitted by FRS 101, the company has taken advantage of the disclosure exemptions available under that standard in relation to business combinations, share-based payments, non-current assets held for sale, financial instruments, capital management, and presentation of comparative information in respect of certain assets, presentation of a cash flow statement, standards not yet effective, impairment of assets and related party transactions. The company intends to continue to take advantage of these exemptions in future years. Further detail is provided below.

Where required, equivalent disclosures have been given in the consolidated financial statements of BT Group plc.

The BT Group plc consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2019 contain a consolidated cash flow statement. Consequently, as permitted by IAS 7 ‘Statement of Cash flow’, the company has not presented its own cash flow statement.

The BT Group plc consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2019 contain related party disclosures.

Consequently, the company has taken advantage of the exemption in IAS 24, ‘Related Party Disclosures’ not to disclose transactions with other members of the BT Group.

The BT Group plc consolidated financial statements for the year ended 31 March 2019 contain financial instrument disclosures which comply with IFRS 7, ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’.

Consequently, the company is exempt from the disclosure requirements of IFRS 7 in respect of its financial instruments.

Investments

Investments are stated at cost and reviewed for impairment if there are indicators that the carrying value may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised to the extent that the carrying amount cannot be recovered either by selling the asset or by continuing to hold the asset and benefiting from the net present value of the future cash flows of the investment.

Taxation

Full provision is made for deferred taxation on all temporary differences which have arisen but not reversed at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is regarded as more likely than not that there will be sufficient taxable profits from which the underlying timing differences can be deducted. The deferred tax balances are not discounted.

Dividends

Dividend distributions are recognised as a liability in the year in which the dividends are approved by the company’s shareholders. Interim dividends are recognised when they are paid; final dividends when authorised in general meetings by shareholders. Dividend income is recognised on receipt.

Share capital

Ordinary shares are classified as equity. Repurchased shares of the company are recorded in the balance sheet as part of Own shares and presented as a deduction from shareholders’ equity at cost.

Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash in hand and current balances with banks and similar institutions, which are readily convertible to cash and are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value and have an original maturity of three months or less.

Share-based payments

The company does not incur a charge for share-based payments. However, the issuance by the company of share options and awards to employees of its subsidiaries represents additional capital contributions to its subsidiaries. An addition to the company’s investment in subsidiaries is recorded with a corresponding increase in equity shareholders’ funds. The additional capital contribution is determined based on the fair value of options and awards at the date of grant and is recognised over the vesting period.

2. Investments

 

Cost   

Total

£m

 

At 31 April 2017

     10,801  

Additions

     84  
          

At 31 March 2018

     10,885  
          

Additions

     67  
          

At 31 March 2019

     10,952  
          

Additions of £67m (2017/18: £84m) comprise capital contributions in respect of share-based payments.

 


Table of Contents

176

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Notes to the company financial statements continued

 

 

2. Investments  continued

 

The company held a 100% investment in BT Group Investments Limited, a company registered in England and Wales, throughout 2018/19 and 2017/18.

3. Merger reserve

On 29 January 2016, the company issued 1,594,900,429 ordinary shares of 5p at 470.70p per share resulting in a total of £80m being credited to the share capital.

These shares were used as part consideration for the acquisition of EE, which completed on 29 January 2016. As a result of this transaction, a merger reserve was created of £7,424m net of £3m issue costs. The acquisition of EE was structured by way of a share-for-share exchange. This transaction fell within the provisions of Section 612 of the Companies Act 2006 (merger relief) such that no share premium was recorded in respect of the shares issued. The company chose to record its investment in EE at fair value and therefore recorded a merger reserve equal to the value of the share premium which would have been recorded had Section 612 of the Companies Act 2006 not been applicable ie equal to the difference between the fair value of EE and the aggregate nominal value of the shares issued.

This merger reserve was initially considered unrealised on the basis it was represented by the investment in EE. This was not considered to represent qualifying consideration (in accordance with Tech 02/10 (Guidance on the determination of realised profits and losses in the context of distributions under the Companies Act 2006)), as superseded by Tech 02/17 (Guidance on realised and distributable profits under the Companies Act 2006).

Immediately following the acquisition of EE, the company’s investment in EE was transferred to BT in exchange for an intercompany loan. To the extent the loan is settled in qualifying consideration, the related proportion of the merger reserve is considered realised. Hence the merger reserve is an unrealised reserve until it is realised by the settlement of the intercompany loan by qualifying consideration.

During 2018/19, £2,500m (2017/18: £nil) of merger reserve was transferred to realised profit following the settlement of an intercompany loan by qualifying consideration.

4. Other information

Dividends

The Board recommends that a final dividend in respect of the year ended 31 March 2019 of 10.78p per share will be paid to shareholders on 9 September 2019, taking the full year proposed dividend in respect of 2018/19 to 15.4p (2017/18: 15.4p, 2016/17: 15.4p) which amounts to approximately £1,527m (2017/18: £1,524m, 2016/17: £1,532m). This final dividend is subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting and therefore the liability of approximately £1,069m (2017/18: £1,044m, 2016/17: £1,050m) has not been included in these financial statements. The proposed dividend will be payable to all shareholders on the Register of Members on 9 August 2019.

Employees

The chairman, the executive directors and the company secretary & general counsel, governance of BT Group plc were the only employees of the company during 2018/19 and 2017/18. The costs relating to qualifying services provided to the company’s principal subsidiary, British Telecommunications plc, are recharged to that company.

 


Table of Contents
                  177
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

Related undertakings

    

      
Subsidiaries

 

 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Held directly

 

United Kingdom

       

81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ, United Kingdom

BT Group Investments

   

Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Group Nominees

   

Limited

  100%   ordinary

Held via other group companies

 

Albania

       

Rr. Murat Toptani, Eurocol Center, Kati 8, Tirana, Albania

BT Albania Limited SH.P.K

  100%   ordinary

Algeria

       

20 Micro zone d’Activités Dar El Madina, Bloc B, Loc N01 Hydra, Alger, 16000, Algeria

BT Algeria

   

Communications SARL

  100%   ordinary

Argentina

       

Lola Mora 421, 15th Floor, Puerto Madero, Buenos Aires, C1107DDA, Argentina

BT Argentina S.R.L.

  100%   ordinary

BT Latam Argentina S.A

  100%   common

Australia

       

Level 1, 76 Berry Street, North Sydney NSW 2060, Australia

BT Australasia Pty Limited

  100%   ordinary
  100%   preference

Austria

       

Louis-Häfliger-Gasse 10, 1210, Wien, Austria

BT Austria GmbH

  100%   ordinary

Azerbaijan

       

The Landmark III Building, 8th Floor, c/o Deloitte & Touche, 96 Nizami Street, Baku, AZ 1010, Azerbaijan

BT Azerbaijan Limited,

   

Limited Liability Company

  100%   ordinary

Bahrain

       

Suite #650, 6th floor, Building No. 247, Road 1704, Diplomatic Area 317, Bahrain

BT Solutions Limited

   

(Bahrain Branch) b

  100%  

Bangladesh

       

House 51 (3rd Floor), Road 9, Block F, Banani, Dhaka, 1213, Bangladesh

BT Communications

   

Bangladesh Limited

  100%   ordinary

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Barbados

       

The Gabbles, Haggatt Hall, St Michael, BB11063, Barbados

BT (Barbados) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Belarus

       

58 Voronyanskogo St, Office 89, Minsk 220007, Belarus

BT BELRUS Foreign

   

Limited Liability Company

  100%   ordinary

Belgium

       

Telecomlaan 9, 1831 Diegem, Belgium

BT Global Services Belgium

   

BVBA

  100%   ordinary

BT Limited b

  100%  

BT Professional Services

   

(Holdings) N.V.

  100%   ordinary

Rue de L’Aêropostale 8, 4460
Grâce-Hollogne, Belgium

IP Trade SA

  100%   ordinary

Bermuda

       

Century House, 16 Par-la-Ville Road, Hamilton, HM08, Bermuda

Communications Global

   

Network Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

Bolivia

       

Avenida Arce esquina Rosendo Gutierrez, Edifico Multicentre Torre B, Piso 12, La Paz, Bolivia

BT Solutions Limited

   

Sucursal Bolivia b

  100%  

Bosnia and Herzegovina

       

ul. Despiceva broj 3/II, Sarajevo, Sarajevo-Stari Grad, 71000, Bosnia and Herzegovina

BTIH Teleconsult

   

Drustvo sa organicenom odgovornoscu za posredovanje i zastupanje d.o.o. Sarajevo

  100%  

Botswana

       

Plot 113, Unit 28 Kgale Mews, Gaborone International Finance Park, Gaborone, PO BOX 1839, Botswana

BT Global Services

   

Botswana (Proprietary)

   

Limited

  100%   ordinary

Brazil

       

Avenida Das Naçôes Unidas, 4777- 17 andar- Parte- Jardim Universidade, São Paulo- SP- CEP, 05477- 000, Brazil

BT Global Communications do Brasil Limitada

  100%   quotas

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Avenida Das Nações Unidas, 4777 - 14, andar- parte- Jardim Universidade - São Paulo- SP- CEP, 05477-000, Brazil

BT LatAm Holdings Brasil

   

Ltda

  100%   common

BT Communications do

   

Brasil Limitada

  100%   quotas

Rodovia SP 101, KM 9,5, Trecho Campinas- Monte Mor, Unidade 27, Bloco Beta, Distrito Industrial, Hortolandia - SP- CEP, São Paolo, 13185-900, Brazil

BT Brasil Serviços de

   

Telecomunicações Ltda

  100%   quotas

BT LatAm Brasil Ltda.

  100%   quotas

British Virgin Islands

       

Sea Meadow House, P.O. Box 116, Road Town, Tortola, British Virgin Islands

BT LatAm (BVI)

   

Corporation

  100%   common

Bulgaria

       

51B Bulgaria Blvd., fl. 4, Sofia, 1404, Bulgaria

BT Bulgaria EOOD

  100%   ordinary

Canada

       

200 King St W, Suite 1904, Toronto ON M5H 3T4, Canada

BT Canada Inc.

  100%   common

Tikit, Inc.

  100%   ordinary

Cabo Verde

       

Avenida Andrade Corvo, 30, Praia, CP63, Cabo Verde

B. Telecomunicações,

   

Cabo Verde, Sociedade

   

Unipessoal, SA

  100%   ordinary

Chile

       

55 Oficina 52, Las Condes, Santiago, 7580067, Chile, Chile

Servicios de

   

Telecomunicaciones BT

   

Global Networks Chile

   

Limitada

  100%   ordinary

China

       

Building 16, 6th Floor, Room 602-B, No. 269 Wuyi Road, Hi-tech Park, Dalian, 116023, China

BT Technology (Dalian)

   

Company Limited

  100%   registered

No. 3 Dong San Huan Bei Lu, Chao Yang District, Beijing, 100027, China

BT Limited, Beijing Office b

  100%  
 


Table of Contents
178         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Related undertakings continued

    

      
      

 

 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

No. 31 Software Park Road, Tower A, Science & Technology Building, Dalian Software Park, Dalian, 116023, China

BT Global Services (Dalian) Co. Ltd.

  100%   registered

Room 1206, Tower A, United Plaza, 5022 Bin He Avenue, Fu Tian District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Infonet Primalliance

   

Shenzhen Co. Ltd.

  35%   ordinary

Room 2101-2103, 21/F, International Capital Plaza, No. 1318 North Sichuan Road, Hong Kou District, Shanghai, 200080, China

BT China Limited-

   

Shanghai Branch Office b

  100%  

Room 4B, 7/F, Tower W3, Oriental Plaza, 1 East Chang An Avenue, Dong Cheng District, Beijing, P. R. China

Infonet Primalliance

   

Beijing Co. Ltd.

  66%   ordinary

Room 601, No. 2 BLDG, 750 West Zhong Shan Rd., Shanghai, 200051, P.R .China

Infonet Primalliance

   

Shanghai Co. Ltd.

  28%   ordinary

Room 635-3, No. 2 BLDG, 351 Guo Shou Jing Road, Zhang Jiang High Technology Park, Shanghai, P. R. China

Infonet Primalliance

   

Holding Co. Ltd.

  100%   ordinary

Room 702A, Tower W3,Oriental Plaza, 1 East Chang An Avenue, Dongcheng, Beijing, 100738, China

BT China Limited

  100%   registered

Unit 1537B, Floor 15th, No. 55, Xili Road, Shanghai Free Trade Zone, Shanghai, China

BT China Communications

   

Limited

  50%   ordinary

Colombia

       

Calle 113 # 7-21, Torre A oficina 1112, Teleport Business Park, Bogota, Colombia

América Inalámbrica S.A.

  100%   common

BT Colombia Limitada

  100%   quotas

BT LatAm Colombia S.A.

  100%   common

BT LatAm Holdings

   

(Colombia) S.A.

  100%   common

Costa Rica

       

Centro Corporativo Internacional, Piso 1, Avenida 6 y 8, Calle 26 y 28, Barrio Don Bosco, Costa Rica

BT Global Costa Rica SRL

  100%   ordinary

BT LatAm Costa Rica, S.A.

  100%   common

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Côte d’Ivoire

       

Abidjan Plateau, Rue du commerce, Immeuble Nabil 1er étage, 01 BP 12721 Abidjan 01, Côte d’Ivoire

BT Côte d’Ivoire

  100%   ordinary

Croatia

       

Savska 64, 10 000 Zagreb, Croatia

BT Solutions Limited

   

Podruznica Hrvatska b

  100%  

Cyprus

       

236 Strovolos Avenue, Strovolos 2048, Nicosia, Cyprus

BT Solutions Limited b

  100%  

Czech Republic

       

Katerinska 466/40, Nove Mesto, Prague 2,

120 00, Czech Republic

BT Limited, organizacni slozka b

  100%  

Denmark

       

Havnegade 39, 1058, Kobenhavn K, Denmark

BT Denmark ApS

  100%   ordinary

Dominican Republic

       

Av. Abraham Lincoln Esq. Jose Amado Soler, Edif. Progresso, Local 3-A, Sector Ens. Serralles, Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic

BT Dominican Republic,

   

S. A.

  100%   ordinary

BT LatAm Dominicana,

   

S.A.

  100%   common

Ecuador

       

Av. Amazonas N21-252 y Carrión, Edificio Londres, 4° Piso, Quito, Ecuador

BT Solutions Limited

   

(Sucursal Ecuador) b

  100%  

El Salvador

       

Boulevard Orden de Malta, Centro Profesional Madre Tierra, Local 10, Primer Nivel, Antiguo Cuscatlán, La Libertad, El Salvador

BT El Salvador, Limitada de Capital Variable

  100%   ordinary

Edificio Centro Profesional Madre Tierra, Local 10, Piso 1, Santa Elena, Antiguo Cuscatlan, El Salvador

BT LatAm El Salvador, S.A. de CV

  100%   common

Egypt

       

1 Wadi El Nile St., Mohandessin, Giza, Cairo, Egypt

BT Telecom Egypt LLC

  100%   stakes

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Estonia

       

A.H. Tammsaare tee 47, Tallinn, 11316, Estonia

BT Solutions Limited Eesti

Filiaal b

  100%  

Finland

       

Mannerheimvägen 12 B 6, 00100 Helsinki, Finland

BT Nordics Finland Oy

  100%   ordinary

France

       

Tour Ariane, 5 place de la Pyramide, La Defense Cedex, 92088 PARIS, France

BT France S.A.S.

  100%   ordinary

BT Newco France S.A.S.

  100%   ordinary

BT Services S.A.S

  100%   ordinary

Georgia

       

74 Ilia Chavchavadze Avenue, Tbilisi, Georgia

BT Georgia Limited LLC

  100%  

Germany

       

Barthstraße 4, 80339, Munich, Germany

BT (Germany) GmbH &

   

Co. oHG

  100%   ordinary

BT Deutschland GmbH

  100%   ordinary

BT Garrick GmbH

  100%   ordinary

Franfurterstrasse 21-25, 65760, Eschborn Taunus, Germany

IP Trade Networks GmbH

  100%   ordinary

Ghana

       

No 11 Adaman Loop, Near Abeka Junction, P.O. Box AN 19113, Tesano, Accra - North, Ghana

BT Ghana Limited

  100%   ordinary

Gibraltar

       

Montagu Pavilion, 8-10 Queensway, Gibraltar

BT (Gibraltar) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Greece

       

75 Patision Street, Athens, 10434, Greece

BT Solutions Limited-

   

Greek Branch b

  100%  

Guatemala

       

3a Avenida 13–78, Zona 10 Torre Citibank, Nivel 2, Oficina No. 206, Guatemala

BT Guatemala S.A.

  100%   unique

Comsat de Guatemala S.A.

  100%   common

BT LatAm Guatemala, S.A.

  100%   common
 


Table of Contents
                  179
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    

    

 

 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Honduras

       

Colonia Lomas Del Guijarro sur, edificio Plaza azul, 2do. Nivel, local #26, Tegucigalpa, Honduras

BT Sociedad De

   

Responsabilidad Limitada

  100%  

Edificio Plaza Azul, Piso 2 do Nivel, Local No. 26, Colonia Lomas del Guijarro Sur, Avenida Paris, Calle Viena, Tegucigalpa, Honduras

BT LatAm Honduras, S.A.

  100%   common

Hong Kong

       

38th Floor Dorset House, Taikoo Place, 979 King’s Road, Island East, Hong Kong

BT Hong Kong Limited

  39%   ordinary
  61%   preference

Infonet Primalliance Co.,

   

Limited

  100%   ordinary

Infonet China Limited

  100%   ordinary

Room 1102, Lee Garden One, 33 Hysan Avenue, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong

IP Trade Networks Limited

  100%   ordinary

Hungary

       

Budafoki út 91-13, 1117 Budapest, Hungary

BT Limited Magyarorszagi

   

Fioktelepe b

  100%  

BT ROC Kft

  100%   business

Iceland

       

BDO ehf, Skutuvogi 1E, 104 Reykjavik, Iceland

BT Solutions Limited Útibú

á Íslandi b

  100%  

India

       

602, Tower B, RMZ Infinity, Municipal No. 3, Old Madras Road, Benninganahalli, Bengaluru, Karnataka, 560016, India

BT Professional Services

   

(India) Private Limited

  100%   ordinary

11th Floor, Eros Corporate Tower, Opp. International Trade Tower, Nehru Place, New Delhi, 110019, India

BT (India) Private Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT e-Serv (India) Private

   

Limited

  100%   equity

BT Global Business

   

Services Private Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Communications

   

India Private Limited

  74%   ordinary

BT Telecom India Private

   

Limited

  74%   ordinary

A-47, Hauz Khas, New Delhi, Delhi-DL, 110016, India

Orange Services India

   

Private Limited

  100%   ordinary

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Indonesia

       

World Trade Centre 5, Lantai. 13, Jl. Jend. Sudirman Kav. 29-31, Kel. Karet Setiabudi, Jakarta Selatan, Jakarta, 12920, Indonesia

PT BT Indonesia

  100%   ordinary

PT BT Communications

   

Indonesia

  95%   ordinary

PT Sun Microsystems

   

Indonesia

  60%   ordinary

Israel

       

Beit Oz, 14 Abba Hillel Silver Rd, Ramat Gan, 52506, Israel

B.T. Communication Israel

   

Ltd

  100%   ordinary

Italy

       

Strada Santa Margherita, 6 / A, 43123, Parma, Italy

BT Enìa Telecomunicazioni

   

S.P.A.

  87%   ordinary

Via Charles Robert Darwin, no 85, 20019, Settimo Milanese, Italy

ERPTech S.p.A.

  99%   ordinary

Via Correggio 5, 20097, San Donato Milanese, Milan, Italy

Radianz Italia S.r.l.

  100%   ordinary

Via Mario Bianchini 15, 00142 Roma, Italy

BT Global Services Limited b

  100%  

Via Pianezza n° 123, Torino, Italy

Atlanet SpA

  99%   ordinary

Via Tucidide 56, Torre 7, 20134, Milano, Italy

Basictel SpA

  99%   ordinary

BT Italia S.p.A.

  99%   ordinary

BT Nederland N.V. b

  100%  

Infonet Italia S.p.A

  100%   ordinary

Nuova Societa di

   

Telecomunicazioni SpA

  99%   ordinary

Jamaica

       

26 Beechwood Avenue, Cross Roads, St. Andrew, Kingston 5, Jamaica

BT Jamaica Limited

  100%   ordinary

Japan

       

ARK Mori Building, 12-32 Akasaka, 1-Chome, Minato-Ku, Tokyo, 107 - 6024, Japan

BT Global Japan Corporation

  100%   ordinary

BT Japan Corporation

  100%   ordinary

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 Company name   Group
interest in
allotted
capital a
    Share class

Jersey

       

26 New Street, St Helier, JE2 3RA, Jersey

Ilford Trustees (Jersey)

   

Limited

  100%   ordinary

First Floor Windward House, La Route de la Liberation, St Helier, JE1 1BG, Jersey

BT US Investments Limited

  100%   ordinary

PO Box 264, Forum 4, Grenville Street, St Helier, JE4 8TQ, Jersey

BT Jersey Limited

  100%   ordinary

Jordan

       

Al Gardens Area (Tiaa Al Ali), Al Salheen Neighborhood, Building #185, 7th Floor, Wasfi Al Tal Street, Amman, 11118, Jordan

BT (International)

   

Holdings Limited (Jordan)

  100%   ordinary

Kazakhstan

       

36 Al Farabi Ave., Bldg. B, Almaty Financial District, Almaty, Republic of Kazakhstan, 050059, Kazakhstan

BT Kazakhstan LLP

  100%  

Kenya

       

6th Floor, Virtual Offices, Morningside Office Park, Ngong Road, Nairobi, Kenya

BT Communications Kenya

   

Limited

  100%   ordinary

P.O. BOX 10032-00100, Nairobi, Kenya

BT Telecommunications

   

Kenya Limited

  100%   ordinary

Korea

       

8th Floor, KTB Building, 66 Yeoui-daero, Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul, 07325, Korea

BT Global Services Korea

   

Limited

  100%   common

Kuwait

       

Block 2-A, 9th Floor, Ahmad Al Jaber Street, Sharq, Kuwait

BT Solutions Limited –

   

Kuwait Branch b

  100%  

Latvia

       

Muitas iela 1A, Riga, LV-1010, Latvia

BT Latvia Limited,

   

Sabiedriba ar ierobezotu

   

atbildibu

  100%   ordinary

Lebanon

       

Abou Hamad, Merheb, Nohra & Chedid Law Firm, Chbaro Street, 22nd Achrafieh Warde Building, 1st Floor, Beirut, P.O.BOX 165126, Lebanon

BT Lebanon S.A.L.

  100%   ordinary
 


Table of Contents
180         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Related undertakings continued

    

    

      
      

 

    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Lithuania

       

Aludariu str 2-33, LT-01113 Vilnius, Lithuania

UAB BTH Vilnius

  100%   ordinary

Luxembourg

       

12 rue Eugene Ruppert, L 2453, Luxembourg

BT Global Services Luxembourg SARL

  100%   ordinary

BT Professional Services (Luxembourg) S.A.

  100%   ordinary

BT Broadband Luxembourg Sàrl

  100%   ordinary

BT Luxembourg Investment Holdings Sarl

  100%   ordinary

Macedonia

       

Str. Dame Gruev no.8, 5th floor, Building “Dom na voenite invalidi”, SKOPJE 1000, Macedonia

BT Solutions Limited

   

Branch Office in Skopje b

  100%  

Macao

       

Avenida da.Praia Grande, No. 367-371, Keng Ou Building, 15th andar C, em Macao, Macau, Macao

BT Hong Kong Ltd. –

   

Macau Branch b

  100%  

Malawi

       

BDO Tax & Advisory Services (Pvt) Ltd, 6th Floor Unit House, 12 Victoria Street PO BOX 3038, Blantyre, Malawi

BT Malawi Limited

  100%   ordinary

Malaysia

       

Menara BT, Level 8, Tower 3, Avenue 7, Bangsar South, No.8, Jalan Kerinchi, 59200, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia

BT Global Services (M) Sdn Bhd

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Services Solutions Sdn Bhd

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Technology (M) Sdn. Bhd.

  100%   ordinary

BT Systems (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd

  100%   ordinary

Malta

       

Tower Gate Place, Tal-Qroqq Street, Msida MSD 1703, Malta

BT Solutions Limited b

  100%  

Mauritius

       

10 Frere Felix De Valois Street, Port Louis, Mauritius

BT Global Communications (Mauritius) Limited

  100%   ordinary

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Mexico

       

Av. Renato Leduc 321, Col. Toriello Guerra, 14050 Mexico D.F.

BT LatAm México, S.A. de C.V.

  100%   common

Opimus S.A. de C.V.

  100%   common

Moldova

       

IPTEH Building, 65 Stefan cel Mare Blvd, Office 806, Chisinau, Republic of Moldova

BT MDV Limited

  100%   ordinary

Montenegro

       

Bulevar revolucije 7, Podgorica, 81000, Montenegro

BT Montenegro DOO

  100%  

Morocco

       

193, Avenue HASSAN II, Casablanca, MAROC s/c Domicilia services, Morocco

BT Solutions Limited – Morocco Branch b

  100%  

Espace Jet Business Class, 16/18 Lot Attoufik Sidi Maarouf, Casablanca, 20190, Morocco

Syntone S.A.R.L.

  100%   ordinary

Mozambique

       

Av. 25 de Setembro, 1230, 3º, Bloco 5, Caixa Postal 4200, Maputo, 4200, Mozambique

BT Mozambique, Limitada

  100%   quotas

Namibia

       

PO Box 2184, 61 Bismarck Street, Windhoek, Namibia

BT Solutions Limited b

  100%  

Netherlands

       

Minerva & Mercurius building, Herikerbergweg 2, 1101CM, Amsterdam Zuidoost, Netherlands

BT (Netherlands) Holdings B.V.

  100%   ordinary

BT Nederland N.V.

  100%   ordinary

BT Professional Services Nederland B.V.

  100%   ordinary

New Zealand

       

c/o BDO Auckland, Level 4, 4 Graham Street, Auckland, 1010, New Zealand

BT Australasia Pty Limited – New Zealand Branch b

  100%  

Nicaragua

       

Edificio Invercasa, 5to Piso, Suite 505, Via Fontana, frente al colegio La Salle, Managua, Nicaragua

BT LatAm Nicaragua, S.A.

  100%   common

BT Nicaragua S.A.

  100%   capital

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Niger

       

57, Rue des Sorkhos, BP 616, Niamey, Niger

BT Niger

  100%   ordinary

Nigeria

       

ADOL House, 15 CIPM Avenue, Central Business District, Alausa, Ikeja, Lagos, Nigeria

BT (Nigeria) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Norway

       

Munkedamsveien 45, c/o BDO AS, 0121 Oslo, Norway

BT Solutions Norway AS

  100%   ordinary

Oman

       

Maktabi Building, Building No. 458, Unit No. 413 (4th Floor, Road No - R41, Block No. 203, Plot No. 107, Zone No. SW41, Complex No. 271, Al Watiyah, Bausher, Muscat, Sultanate of Oman, Oman

BT International Holdings Limited & Co. LLC

  100%   ordinary

Pakistan

       

2nd Floor, Block C, Lakson Square, Building No. 1, Sarwar Shaheed Road, Karachi, 74200, Pakistan

BT Pakistan (Private) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Panama

       

Edificio Credicorp Bank, Piso 3, Oficina 301, Cuidad de Panama, Panama

BT de Panama, S.R.L.

  100%   ordinary

BT LatAm Panama, Inc.

  100%   common

Paraguay

       

Gral Diaz 521, Edificio Internacional Faro, Piso 6, Asuncion, Paraguay

BT Paraguay S.R.L.

  100%   quotas

Peru

       

Calle Martir Olaya, 129 of 1901, Miraflores, Lima, Peru

BT LatAm Peru S.A.C.

  100%   common

BT Peru S.R.L.

  100%   ordinary

Philippines

       

11th Floor, Page One Building, 1215 Acacia Avenue, Madrigal, Business park, Ayala Alabany, Muntinlupa city, 1780 City, Manila, 1780, Philippines

IT Holdings, Inc

  100%   ordinary

Sun Microsystems Philippines, Inc

  51%   common

18th Floor, Philamlife Tower, 8767 Paseo de Roxas, Makati City, 1226, Philippines

BT Communications

   

Philippines Incorporated

  100%   ordinary
 


Table of Contents
                  181
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    

    

 

    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

c/o Sun Microsystems Phil Inc., 8767 Paseo de Roxas, Makati City, Philippines

PSPI-Subic, Inc

  51%   ordinary

Poland

       

Al. Armii Ludowej 14, 00-638 Warszawa, International Business Center, Poland

BT Poland Spółka

Z Ograniczoną Odpowiedzialnością

  100%   ordinary

Portugal

       

Rua D. Francisco Manuel de Melo 21-1, 1070-085 Lisboa, Portugal

BT Portugal – Telecomunicaçöes, Unipessoal Lda

  100%   ordinary

Puerto Rico

       

The Prentice-Hall Corporation System, Puerto Rico, Inc., c/o Fast Solutions, LLC, Citi Tower, 252 Ponce de Leon Avenue, Floor 20, San Juan, Puerto Rico, 00918, Puerto Rico

BT Communications Sales, LLC Puerto Rico branch b

  100%  

Qatar

       

1413, 14th Floor, Al Fardan Office Tower, Doha, 31316, Qatar

BT Global Services (North Gulf) LLC

  49%   ordinary

Republic of Ireland

       

2 Grand Canal Plaza, Upper Grand Canal Street, Dublin 4, Republic of Ireland

BT Communications Ireland Group Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Communications Ireland Holdings Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Communications Ireland Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Communications (Ireland) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Canal Capital Investment Limited

  100%   ordinary

Whitestream Industries Limited

  100%   ordinary

Romania

       

35-37 Oltenitei Str., Cladirea A1, Biroul Nr. 52, Bucharest, Sector 4, Romania

BT Global Services Limited Londra Sucursala Bucuresti b

  100%  

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Russia

       

Room 62, prem xx, Floor 2, Pravdy, 26, 127137, Moscow, Russian Federation

BT Solutions Limited Liability Company

  100%  

Serbia

       

Dimitrija Georgijevica Starike 20, Belgrade, 11070, Serbia

BT Belgrade d.o.o

  100%   ordinary

Sierra Leone

       

84 Dundas Street, Freetown, Sierra Leone

BT (SL) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Singapore

       

Level 3, #03-01/02 & #03-04, Block B, Alexandra Technopark, 438B Alexandra Road, 119968, Singapore

BT (India) Private Limited Singapore Branch b

  100%  

BT Global Services Technologies Pte. Ltd.

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Solutions Pte. Ltd.

  100%   ordinary

BT Singapore Pte. Ltd.

  100%   ordinary

Sun Vietnam Pte. Ltd.

  60%   ordinary

Slovakia

       

Dvorakovo nabrezie 4, 811 02, Bratislava, Slovakia

BT Slovakia s.r.o.

  100%   ordinary

Slovenia

       

CESTA V MESTNI LOG 1, 1000 LJUBLJANA, Slovenia

BT GLOBALNE STORITVE, telekomunikacijske storitve, obdelava podatkov, podatkovnih baz; d.o.o.

  100%   ordinary

South Africa

       

24-18th Street, Menlo Park, Pretoria, 0081, South Africa

EE Communications (South Africa) Proprietary Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Building North Office Park, 54 Maxwell Drive, Woodmead, 2191, South Africa

BT Communications Services South Africa (Pty) Limited

  70%   ordinary

First Floor, Culross Court North, 16 Culross Road, Bryanston 2021, South Africa

BT Limited b

  100%  

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Spain

       

C/ Isabel Colbrand 6-8, 28050, Madrid, Spain

BT ESPAÑA, Compañia de Servicios Globales de Telecommunicaciones,S.A

  100%   ordinary

Sri Lanka

       

Charter House 65/2, Sir Chittampalam A., Gardiner Mawatha, Colombo, 2, Sri Lanka

BT Communications Lanka (Private) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Sudan

       

Alskheikh Mustafa Building, Parlman Street, Khartoum, Sudan

Newgate Communication (Sudan) Co. Ltd

  100%   ordinary

Sweden

       

Box 30005, 104 25, Stockholm, Sweden

BT Nordics Sweden AB

  100%   ordinary

Switzerland

       

Richtistrasse 5, 8304 Wallisellen, Switzerland

BT Switzerland AG

  100%   ordinary

Taiwan

       

Shin Kong Manhattan Building, 14F, No. 8, Sec. 5, Xinyi Road, Taipei, 11049, Taiwan

BT Limited Taiwan Branch b

  100%  

Tanzania

       

BDO East Africa, 1st Floor-Wing B, Infotech Place, Mwai Kibaki Road, Dar es Salaam, Tanzania

BT Solutions Limited – Tanzania Branch b

  100%  

Thailand

       

Athenee Tower, 23rd Floor, (CEO Suite, Suite 38 & 40), 63 Wireless Road, Lumpini, Pathumwan, Bangkok, 10330, Thailand

BT Siam Communications Co. Ltd.

  49%   class B

BT Siam Limited

  69%   preference

Trinidad and Tobago

       

2nd Floor CIC Building, 122-124 Frederick Street, Port of Spain, Trinidad and Tobago

BT Solutions Limited b

  100%  

Tunisia

       

BT chez BDO Tunisie, Immeuble, ENNOUR BUILDING 3ème étage, Centre Urbain Nord 1082, Mahrajène Tunis, Tunisia

BT Tunisia S.A.R.L

  100%   ordinary
 


Table of Contents
182         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Related undertakings continued

    

    

      
      

 

    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class
Turkey        
Yenisahra Mah. Yavuz Selim Cad. No.19/A D.4 Ataşehir, İstanbu, 34700, Turkey
BT Bilisim Hizmetleri Anonim Şirketi   100%   ordinary
BT Telekom Hizmetleri    
Anonim Şirketi   100%   common
Uganda        
6th Floor Block C, Nakawa Business Park, Plot 3 - 5, New Portbell Road, Kampala, Uganda
BT Solutions Limited b   100%  
Ukraine        
Office 702, 34 Lesi Ukrainky Boulevard, Kyiv 01042, Ukraine
BT Ukraine Limited    
Liability Company   100%   stakes
United Arab Emirates
Office No G03, Ground Floor, EIB Building No 04, Dubai, United Arab Emirates
BT MEA FZ-LLC   100%   ordinary
Office No. (F6) International Business Center, Building No. (27W10), Three Sails Tower, Cornish, Abu Dhabi, United Arab Emirates
BT UAE Limited - Abu Dhabi Branch b   100%  
Office no.206 BLOCK B, Diamond Business Center 1, Al Barsha South Third, Dubai, P.O. BOX 25205, United Arab Emirates
BT UAE Limited - Dubai Branch (1) b   100%  
BT UAE Limited - Dubai Branch (2) b   100%  
United Kingdom        
81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ, United Kingdom
Autumnwindow Limited   100%   ordinary
Autumnwindow No.2 Limited   100%   ordinary
Autumnwindow No.3 Limited   100%   ordinary
BPSLP Limited   100%   ordinary
British Telecommunications plc   100%   ordinary
Bruning Limited   100%   ordinary
BT (International) Holdings Limited   100%   ordinary
BT (RRS LP) Limited   100%   ordinary
BT Centre Nominee 2 Limited   100%   ordinary
BT Communications Ireland Group Limited – UK Branch b   100%  

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

BT Cornwall Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Corporate Trustee

    limited by

Limited

  100%   guarantee

BT European Investments Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Facilities Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Fifty-One

  100%   ordinary

BT Fifty-Three Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Fleet Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Security Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Global Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Holdings Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT IoT Networks Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Lancashire Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Law Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT LGS Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Managed Services (No.2) Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Managed Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Nominees Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Property Holdings (Aberdeen) Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Property Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Sixty-Four Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT SLE Euro Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT SLE USD Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT Solutions Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT South Tyneside Limited

  100%   ordinary

BT UAE Limited

  100%   ordinary

Communications Global Network Services Limited – UK Branch b

  100%  

Communications Networking Services (UK)

  100%   ordinary

Communicator (IOM) Limited – UK Branch b

  100%  

ESAT Telecommunications (UK) Limited

  100%   ordinary

Extraclick Limited

  100%   ordinary

groupBT Limited

  100%   ordinary

Newgate Street Secretaries Limited

  100%   ordinary

Numberrapid Limited

  100%   ordinary

Pelipod Ltd

  100%   ordinary

Radianz Limited

  100%   ordinary

SEV Automotive And Plant Limited

  100%   ordinary

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group        
    interest in        
    allotted        
 Company name   capital a       Share class  

Southgate Developments Limited

    100     ordinary  

Tikit Limited

    100     ordinary  

Tudor Minstrel

    100     ordinary  

Alexander Bain House, 15 York Street, Glasgow, G2 8LA Scotland

 

Holland House (Northern)

   

Limited

    100     ordinary  

BDO LLP, 55 Baker Street, London, W1U 7EU, United Kingdom

 

BT Business Direct Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Fifty

    100     ordinary  

BT Forty-Nine

    100     ordinary  

BT IT Services Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Lease Holdings Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Leasing Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Moorgate One Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Moorgate Two Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Property Holdings (Oxford) Limited

    100     ordinary  

BT Seventy-Three

    100     ordinary  

BTexact Technologies Limited

    100     ordinary  

BTexact Venturing Limited

    100     ordinary  

dabs.com Limited

    100     ordinary  

IP Trade Networks Ltd

    100     ordinary  

Mobilise Telecoms Limited

    100     ordinary  

M-Viron Limited

    100     ordinary  

Newgate Leasing Limited

    100     ordinary  

Postgate Holding Company

    100     ordinary  

Kelvin House, 123 Judd Street, London, WC1H 9NP, United Kingdom

 

Openreach Limited

    100     ordinary  

The Balance, 2 Pinfold Street, Sheffield, S1 2GU, United Kingdom

 

Plusnet plc

    100     ordinary  

Third Floor, St Georges Court, Upper Church Street, Douglas, IM1 1EE, Isle of Man

 

Belmullet Limited

    100     ordinary  

Communicator Insurance Company Limited

    99     ordinary  
    1     preference  

Communicator Limited

    100     ordinary  

Priestgate Limited

    100     ordinary  
 


Table of Contents
                  183
       

 

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

   

 Strategic report

 

   

 

   

 

    

       

 Governance

       

 

    

       

 Financial statements

       

 

    

       

 Additional information

       

 

            

 

    

    

    

    

 

    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Trident Place, Mosquito Way, Hatfield, Hertfordshire, AL10 9BW, United Kingdom

EE (Group) Limited

  100%   ordinary

EE Finance Limited

  100%   ordinary

EE Limited

  100%   ordinary

EE Pension Trustee Limited

  100%   ordinary

EE Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

Everthing Everywhere Limited

  100%   ordinary

Mainline Communications Group Limited

  100%   ordinary

Mainline Digital Communications Limited

  100%   ordinary

Orange Furbs Trustees Limited

  100%   ordinary

Orange Home UK Limited

  100%   ordinary

Orange Personal Communications Services Limited

  100%   ordinary

United States

       

c/o Corporation Service Company, 2215-B Renaissance Drive, Las Vegas, NV 89119, United States

BT LatAm (Nevada) Corp.

  100%   common

c/o Corporation Service Company, 251 Little Falls Drive, Wilmington DE 19808, United States

BT Americas Holdings Inc.

  100%   common

BT Americas Inc.

  100%   common

BT Communications Sales LLC

  100%   units

BT Conferencing Video Inc.

  100%   common

BT Federal Inc.

  100%   common

BT LatAm Holdings One, Inc.

  100%   common

BT LatAm Holdings Three, Inc.

  100%   common

BT LatAm Holdings Two, Inc.

  100%   common

BT LatAm Services, Inc.

  100%   common

BT LatAm, Inc.

  100%   common

BT Procure L.L.C.

  100%   units

BT United States L.L.C.

  100%   units

Infonet Services Corporation

  100%   common

IP Trade Network Corp

  100%   common

Radianz Americas Inc.

  100%   common

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class
Uruguay        

Rincón 487 Piso 11, Montevideo, ZIP CODE 11.000, Uruguay

BT Solutions Limited Sucursal Uruguay b

  100%  

Venezuela

       

Edificio Parque Cristal,Torre Oeste, Piso 5, Oficina 5, Avenida Francisco de Miranda, Urbanización Los Palos Grandes, Caracas 1060,Venezuela

BT LatAm Venezuela, S.A.

  100%   ordinary

BT Global (Venezuela) S.A.

  100%   ordinary

Vietnam

       

16th Floor, Saigon Tower, 29 Le Duan Road, District 1 Ho Chi Minh City, Socialist Republic of Vietnam

BT (Vietnam) Co. Ltd.

  100%   ordinary

7th Floor, ESTAR Building, 147-149 Vo Van Tan Street, Ward 6, District 3, HCM City, Vietnam

Sun Vietnam Co., Ltd.

  60%   ordinary

Zambia

       

Plot No. 4015A, Frost Building, Gallery Office Park, Lagos Road, Rhodespark, Lusaka, Lusaka Province, Zambia

BT Solutions Limited b

  100%  

Zimbabwe

       

3 Baines Avenue, Box 334, Harare, Zimbabwe

Numberrapid Limited b

  100%  

 

    

 


Table of Contents
184         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Related undertakings continued

    

    

      
      

 

Associates

 

    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Held via other group companies

   

British Virgin Islands

       

Craigmuir Chambers, PO Box 71, Road Town, Tortora, British Virgin Islands

Ecquaria Limited

  50%   ordinary

Italy

       

Piazzale Luigi Sturzo, 23, 00144, Roma, Italy

QXN S.c.p.A.

  25%   ordinary

Via XII Ottobre 2N, 16121, Genova, Liguria, Italy

I2 S.r.l

  23%  

Mauritius

       

IFS Court, Bank Street, TwentyEight Cybercity, Ebene, 72201, Mauritius

Mahindra – BT

   

Investment Company (Mauritius) Limited

  43%   ordinary

Philippines

       

32F Philam Life Tower, 8767 Paseo de Roxas, Makati City, Philippines

ePLDTSunphilcox JV, Inc

  20%   ordinary

SunPhilcox JV, Inc

  20%   ordinary

Saudi Arabia

       

New Acaria Commercial Complex, Al-Siteen Street, Malaz, Riyadh, Saudi Arabia

British Telecom Al-Saudia Limited

  49%   other

United Kingdom

       

24/25 The Shard, 32 London Bridge Street, London, SE1 9SG, United Kingdom

Digital Mobile Spectrum Limited

  25%   ordinary

Unit 1, Colwick Quays Business Park, Colwick, Nottingham, Nottinghamshire, NG4 2JY, United Kingdom

Midland Communications Distribution Limited

  35%   ordinary

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Joint Ventures and Joint Operations c

 

    Group    
    interest in    
    allotted    
 Company name   capital a     Share class

Held via other group companies

United Kingdom

       

Sixth Floor, Thames Tower, Station Road, Reading, RG1 1LX, United Kingdom

Mobile Broadband Network Limited

  50%   ordinary

6th Floor, One London Wall, London, EC2Y 5EB, United Kingdom

Internet Matters Limited

  25%  

81 Newgate Street, London, EC1A 7AJ, United Kingdom

BT OnePhone Limited

  70%   ordinary

St Helen’s 1 Undershaft, London, EC3P 3DQ, United Kingdom

Rugby Radio Station (General Partner) Limited

  50%   ordinary

Rugby Radio Station (Nominee) Limited

  50%   ordinary

Rugby Radio Station LP

  50%  

10 Lower Thames Street, Third Floor, London, EC3R 6YT, United Kingdom

Youview TV Limited

  14%   voting

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

Interests in joint operations

EE Limited and Hutchison 3G UK Limited (together ‘the Companies’) each have a 50% share in the joint operation Mobile Broadband Network Limited (‘MBNL’). MBNL’s ongoing purpose is the operation and maintenance of mobile networks through a sharing arrangement. This includes the efficient management of shared infrastructure and networks on behalf of the Companies, acquiring certain network elements for shared use, and coordinating the deployment of new infrastructure and networks on either a shared or a unilateral basis (unilateral elements being network assets or services specific to one company only). The group is committed to incurring 50% of costs in respect of restructuring the Shared Network, a similar proportion of the operating costs (which varies in line with usage), and 100% of any unilateral elements.

Guarantees for the joint operation are given by British Telecommunications plc and CK Hutchison Holdings Limited.

The principal place of business of the joint operation is in the UK.

 

a  

The proportion of voting rights held corresponds to the aggregate interest in percentage held by the holding company and subsidiaries undertaking.

b  

No shares issued for a branch.

c  

All joint ventures are governed by a joint venture agreement or shareholder agreement. MBNL is accounted for as a joint operation.

 


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

185

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

 

Additional information

 

 

Alternative performance measures

Introduction

We assess the performance of the group using a variety of alternative performance measures that are not defined under IFRS and are therefore termed non-GAAP measures. The non-GAAP measures we use are: change in underlying revenue, adjusted revenue, adjusted EBITDA, adjusted earnings per share, normalised free cash flow, and net debt. The rationale for using these measures, along with a reconciliation from the nearest measures prepared in accordance with IFRS, are presented in this Additional Information below.

The alternative performance measures we use may not be directly comparable with similarly titled measures used by other companies.

Specific items

The group’s income statement and segmental analysis separately identify trading results on an adjusted basis, being before specific items. The directors believe that presentation of the group’s results in this way is relevant to an understanding of the group’s financial performance as specific items are those that in management’s judgement need to be disclosed by virtue of their size, nature or incidence. This is consistent with the way that financial performance is measured by management and reported to the Board and the Executive Committee and assists in providing a meaningful analysis of the trading results of the group.

In determining whether an event or transaction is specific, management considers quantitative as well as qualitative factors, such as the frequency or predictability of occurrence.

Examples of charges or credits meeting the above definition and which have been presented as specific items in the current and/or prior years include acquisitions/disposals of businesses and investments, retrospective regulatory matters, historical insurance or litigation claims, business restructuring programmes, asset impairment charges, property rationalisation programmes, net interest on pensions and the settlement of multiple tax years. In the event that items meet the criteria, which are applied consistently from year to year, they are treated as specific items.

Reported revenue, reported operating costs, reported operating profit, reported profit before tax, reported net finance expense and reported EPS are the equivalent IFRS measures. A reconciliation from these can be seen in the Group income statement on page 110.

Change in underlying revenue

Change in underlying revenue is a non-GAAP measure that seeks to reflect the underlying performance of the group that will contribute to long-term sustainable growth. As such this excludes the impact of acquisitions or disposals, foreign exchange movements and specific items.

We have also separately included IFRS 15 in the current year to identify the impact of the new revenue standard which was effective from 1 April 2018. This is important to understand the

movement in revenue year on year as comparatives for prior years are reported under the previous standard (IAS 18).

A reconciliation from the movement in reported revenue, the most directly comparable IFRS measures, to the movement in underlying revenue, is set out below.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

%

    

2018

%

Decrease in reported revenue (IAS 18)

     (1.2      (1.4

Specific items (IAS 18)

             

IFRS 15 adjustment

     (0.1       
                   

Decrease in adjusted revenue (IFRS 15 pro forma)

     (1.3      (1.4

Transit revenue

            0.6  

Acquisitions and disposals

     0.2        0.1  

Foreign exchange movements

     0.2        (0.3
                   

Decrease in underlying revenue

     (0.9      (1.0
                   

Adjusted EBITDA

In addition to measuring financial performance of the group and customer-facing units based on operating profit, we also measure performance based on EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA. EBITDA is defined as the group profit or loss before interest, taxation, depreciation and amortisation. Adjusted EBITDA is defined as EBITDA before specific items, net non-interest related finance expense, and share of profits or losses of associates and joint ventures. EBITDA is a common measure used by investors and analysts to evaluate the operating financial performance of companies, particularly in the telecommunications sector.

We consider EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA to be useful measures of our operating performance because they approximate the underlying operating cash flow by eliminating depreciation and amortisation. EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA are not direct measures of our liquidity, which is shown by our cash flow statement, and need to be considered in the context of our financial commitments.

A reconciliation of reported profit for the period, the most directly comparable IFRS measure, to EBITDA and adjusted EBITDA is set out below.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

    

2017

£m

 

Reported profit for the period

     2,159        2,032        1,908  

Tax

     507        584        446  
                            

Reported profit before tax

     2,666        2,616        2,354  

Net interest related finance expense

     606        530        580  

Depreciation and amortisation

     3,546        3,514        3,572  
                            

EBITDA

     6,818        6,660        6,506  

EBITDA specific items a

     425        610        906  

Net other finance expense

     150        234        224  

Share of post tax losses (profits) of associates and joint ventures

     (1      1        9  
                            

Adjusted EBITDA

     7,392        7,505        7,645  
                            

 

a  

Excludes amortisation specifics of £nil (2017/18: £nil, 2016/17: £62m). Specific items are set out in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

 


Table of Contents

186

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Additional information continued

 

 

Alternative performance measures  continued

 

Earnings per share

We also measure financial performance based on adjusted earnings per share, which excludes specific items. Basic and adjusted earnings per share, and the per share impact of specific items, are as follows:

 

     2019            2018            2017  
Year ended 31 March   

Pence

per share

     £m            

Pence

per share

     £m            

Pence

per share

     £m  

Basic earnings per share/profit

     21.8        2,159          20.5        2,032          19.2        1,908  

Specific items a

     4.5        452          7.4        741          9.7        961  
                                                                       

Adjusted basic earnings per share/profit

     26.3        2,611          27.9        2,773          28.9        2,869  
                                                                       

 

a  

Specific items are set out in note 10 to the consolidated financial statements.

We disclose reported earnings per share, both basic and diluted, in note 12 to the consolidated financial statements.

Normalised free cash flow

Normalised free cash flow is one of the group’s key performance indicators by which our financial performance is measured. It is primarily a liquidity measure. However, we also believe it is an important indicator of our overall operational performance as it reflects the cash we generate from operations after capital expenditure and financing costs, both of which are significant ongoing cash outflows associated with investing in our infrastructure and financing our operations.

Normalised free cash flow is defined as free cash flow (net cash inflow from operating after capital expenditure) after net interest paid, before pension deficit payments (including the cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments) and specific items. It excludes cash flows that are determined at a corporate level independently of ongoing trading operations such as dividends, share buybacks, acquisitions and disposals, and repayment and raising of debt.

Normalised free cash flow is not a measure of the funds that are available for distribution to shareholders.

A reconciliation from cash inflow from operating activities, the most directly comparable IFRS measure, to free cash flow and normalised free cash flow, is set out below.

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Cash generated from operations

     4,687        5,400       6,725  

Tax paid

     (431      (473     (551
                           

Net cash inflow from operating activities

     4,256        4,927       6,174  

Net purchase of property, plant and equipment and software

     (3,637      (3,341     (3,119
                           

Free cash flow

     619        1,586       3,055  

Interest received

     23        7       7  

Interest paid

     (531      (555     (629

Add back pension deficit payments

     2,024        872       274  

Add back net cash flow from specific items

     598        828       205  

Add back net sale of non-current asset investments

     1        19       (20

Add back payments in respect of acquisition of spectrum licences

            325        

Remove refund on acquisition of spectrum licence

     (21             

Remove cash tax benefit of pension deficit payments

     (273      (109     (110
                           

Normalised free cash flow

     2,440        2,973       2,782  
                           

Net debt

Net debt consists of loans and other borrowings (both current and non-current), less current asset investments and cash and cash equivalents. Loans and other borrowings are measured as the net proceeds raised, adjusted to amortise any discount over the term of the debt. For the purpose of this measure, current asset investments and cash and cash equivalents are measured at the lower of cost and net realisable value.

Our net debt calculation starts from the expected future undiscounted cash flows that should arise when our financial instruments mature. We adjust these cash flows to reflect hedged risks that are re-measured under fair value hedges, as well as for the impact of the effective interest method. Currency-denominated balances within net debt are translated to sterling at swap rates where hedged.

Net debt is a measure of the group’s net indebtedness that provides an indicator of overall balance sheet strength. It is also a single measure that can be used to assess both the group’s cash position and its indebtedness. The use of the term ‘net debt’ does not necessarily mean that the cash included in the net debt calculation is available to settle the liabilities included in this measure.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

187

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

Alternative performance measures  continued

 

Net debt is considered to be an alternative performance measure as it is not defined in IFRS. A reconciliation from loans and other borrowings, cash and cash equivalents, and current asset investments, the most directly comparable IFRS measures to net debt, is set out below.

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Loans and other borrowings a

     16,876        14,275       12,713  

Cash and cash equivalents

     (1,666      (528     (528

Current investments

     (3,214      (3,022     (1,520
                           
     11,996        10,725       10,665  

Adjustments:

To retranslate currency denominated balances at swapped rates where hedged b

     (701      (874     (1,419

To remove fair value adjustments and accrued interest applied to reflect the effective interest method c

     (260      (224     (314
                           

Net debt

     11,035        9,627       8,932  
                           

 

a  

Includes overdrafts of £72m at 31 March 2019 (31 March 2018: £29m, 31 March 2017: £17m).

b  

The translation difference between spot rate and hedged rate of loans and borrowings denominated in foreign currency.

c  

Includes remaining fair value adjustments made on certain loans and other borrowings and accrued interest at the balance sheet date.


Table of Contents

188

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

 

 

Additional information continued

 

 

Selected financial data

Summary group income statement

 

Year ended 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 

Revenue

           

Adjusted

     23,459        23,746       24,082       18,879       17,840  

Specific items

     (31      (23     (20     133       128  
                                           
     23,428        23,723       24,062       19,012       17,968  

Operating costs

           

Adjusted

     (19,613      (19,755     (19,947     (15,051     (14,185

Specific items

     (394      (587     (948     (348     (381
                                           
     (20,007      (20,342     (20,895     (15,399     (14,566

Operating profit

           

Adjusted

     3,846        3,991       4,135       3,828       3,655  

Specific items

     (425      (610     (968     (215     (253
                                           
     3,421        3,381       3,167       3,613       3,402  

Net finance expense

           

Adjusted

     (617      (546     (594     (483     (560

Specific items

     (139      (218     (210     (229     (299
                                           
     (756      (764     (804     (712     (859

Share of post tax (loss) profit of associates and joint ventures

           

Adjusted

     1        (1     (9     6       (1

Profit (loss) on disposal of interest in associates and joint ventures – specific items

                              25  
                                           
     1        (1     (9     6       24  

Profit before taxation

           

Adjusted

     3,230        3,444       3,532       3,351       3,094  

Specific items

     (564      (828     (1,178     (444     (527
                                           
     2,666        2,616       2,354       2,907       2,567  

Taxation expense

           

Adjusted

     (619      (671     (663     (607     (631

Specific items

     112        87       217       166       121  
                                           
     (507      (584     (446     (441     (510

Profit for the year

           

Adjusted

     2,611        2,773       2,869       2,744       2,463  

Specific items

     (452      (741     (961     (278     (406
                                           
     2,159        2,032       1,908       2,466       2,057  
                                           

Basic earnings per share

           

Adjusted

     26.3p        27.9p       28.9p       31.8p       30.6p  

Specific items

     (4.5)p        (7.4)p       (9.7)p       (3.3)p       (5.1)p  
                                           
     21.8p        20.5p       19.2p       28.5p       25.5p  
                                           

Average number of shares used in basic earnings per share (millions)

     9,912        9,911       9,938       8,619       8,056  

Average number of shares used in diluted earnings per share (millions)

     9,975        9,961       9,994       8,714       8,191  

Diluted earnings per share

     21.6p        20.4p       19.1p       28.2p       25.1p  

Dividends per share a

     15.4p        15.4p       15.4p       14.0p       12.4p  

Dividends per share, US cents a,b

     20.1c        21.6c       19.3c       20.1c       18.4c  
                                           

 

a  

Dividends per share represents the dividend paid and proposed in respect of the relevant financial year. Under IFRS, interim dividends are recognised as a deduction from shareholders’ equity when they are paid, final dividends when they are approved.

b  

Based on actual dividends paid and/or year end exchange rate on proposed dividends.


Table of Contents

 

 

BT Group plc

  

Annual Report 2019

189

 

Strategic report

 

Governance

 

Financial statements

 

Additional information

 

 

Selected financial data  continued

 

Summary group balance sheet

 

At 31 March   

2019

£m

    

2018

(Restated) a

£m

   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 

Intangible assets

     14,385        14,447       15,029       15,450       3,170  

Property, plant and equipment

     17,835        17,000       16,498       15,971       13,498  

Other non-current assets

     3,623        3,046       3,970       2,997       3,040  
                                           

Total non-current assets

     35,843        34,493       35,497       34,418       19,708  

Current assets less current liabilities

     842        (1,836     (4,050     (3,103     (356
                                           

Total assets less current liabilities

     36,685        32,657       31,447       31,315       19,352  

Non-current loans and other borrowings

     (14,776      (11,994     (10,081     (11,025     (7,862

Retirement benefit obligations

     (7,182      (6,847     (9,088     (6,382     (7,583

Other non-current liabilities

     (4,560      (3,905     (3,943     (3,796     (3,226
                                           

Total assets less liabilities

     10,167        9,911       8,335       10,112       681  
                                           

Ordinary shares

     499        499       499       499       419  

Share premium account

     1,051        1,051       1,051       1,051       1,051  

Own shares

     (167      (186     (96     (115     (165

Merger reserve

     4,147        6,647       6,647       8,422       998  

Other reserves

     718        534       884       685       502  

Retained loss

     3,919        1,366       (650     (430     (2,124
                                           

Total equity

     10,167        9,911       8,335       10,112       681  
                                           

 

a  

Certain results have been restated to reflect the update to the calculation of our IAS19 accounting valuation of retirement benefit obligations. See note 2 to the Condensed consoliated financial statements.


Table of Contents
190         

BT Group plc

   

Annual Report 2019

 

   

 

        
        
        
        

 

    

Additional information continued

    

    

      
      

 

Cautionary statement regarding forward-looking statements

This Annual Report contains certain forward-looking statements which are made in reliance on the safe harbour provisions of the US Private Securities Litigation Reform Act of 1995. These statements relate to analyses and other information which are based on forecasts of future results and estimates of amounts not yet determinable. These statements include, without limitation, those concerning: current and future years’ outlook; underlying revenue and revenue trends; EBITDA; free cash flow; capital expenditure; shareholder returns including dividends and share buyback; net debt; credit ratings; our group-wide transformation and restructuring programme, cost transformation plans and restructuring costs; investment in and roll out of our fibre network and its reach, innovations, increased speeds and speed availability; our broadband-based service and strategy; investment in and rollout of 5G; our investment in TV, enhancing our TV service and BT Sport; the investment in converged network; the recovery plan, operating charge, regular cash contributions and interest expense for our defined benefit pension schemes; effective tax rate; growth opportunities in networked IT services, the pay-TV services market, broadband, artificial intelligence and mobility and future voice; growth of, and opportunities available in, the communications industry and BT’s positioning to take advantage of those opportunities; expectations regarding competition, market shares, prices and growth; expectations regarding the convergence of technologies; plans for the launch of new products and services; network performance and quality; the impact of regulatory initiatives, decisions and outcomes on operations, including the regulation of the UK fixed wholesale and retail businesses and the impact of the Commitments we gave to Ofcom to provide Openreach with greater strategic and operational independence following Ofcom’s Digital Communications Review; BT’s possible or assumed future results of operations and/or those of its associates and joint ventures; investment plans; adequacy of capital; financing plans and refinancing requirements; demand for and access to broadband and the promotion of broadband by third-party service providers; improvements to the control environment; and those statements preceded by, followed by, or that include the words ‘aims’, ‘believes’, ‘expects’, ‘anticipates’, ‘intends’, ‘will’, ‘should’,‘plans’, ‘strategy’, ‘future’, ‘likely’, ‘seeks’, ‘projects’, ‘estimates’ or similar expressions.

Although BT believes that the expectations reflected in these forward-looking statements are reasonable, it can give no assurance that these expectations will prove to have been correct. Because these statements involve risks and uncertainties, actual results may differ materially from those expressed or implied by these forward-looking statements. Factors that could cause differences between actual results and those implied by the forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to:

 

  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  

market disruptions caused by technological change and/or intensifying competition from established players or new market entrants; unfavourable changes to our business where Ofcom raises competition concerns around market power; unfavourable regulatory changes; disruption to our business caused by an uncertain or adversarial political environment; geopolitical risks; adverse developments in respect of our defined benefit pension schemes; adverse changes in economic conditions in the markets served by BT, including interest rate risk, foreign exchange risk, credit risk, liquidity risk and tax risk; financial controls that may not prevent or detect fraud, financial misstatement or other financial loss; security breaches relating to our customers’ and employees’ data or breaches of data privacy laws; failures in the protection of the health, safety and wellbeing of our people or members of the public or breaches of health and safety law and regulations; controls and procedures that could fail to detect unethical or inappropriate behaviour by our people or associates; customer experiences that are not brand enhancing nor drive sustainable profitable revenue growth; failure to deliver, and other operational failures, with regard to our complex and high-value national and multinational customer contracts; changes to our customers’ needs or businesses that adversely affect our ability to meet contractual commitments or realise expected revenues, profitability or cash flow; termination of customer contracts; natural perils, network and system faults or malicious acts that could cause disruptions or otherwise damage our network; supply chain failure, software changes, equipment faults, fire, flood, infrastructure outages or sabotage that could interrupt our services; attacks on our infrastructure and assets by people inside BT or by external sources like hacktivists, criminals, terrorists or nation states; disruptions to the integrity and continuity of our supply chain (including any impact of global political developments with respect to Huawei); insufficient engagement from our people; and risks relating to our BT transformation plan. Certain of these factors are discussed in more detail elsewhere in this Annual Report including, without limitation, in Our approach to risk management on pages 44 to 54. BT undertakes no obligation to update any forward-looking statements whether written or oral that may be made from time to time, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

Material contracts

Excluding contracts entered into in the ordinary course of business, no contracts have been entered into in the two years preceding the date of this document by BT or another member of the group which are, or may be, material to the group or contain a provision under which a member of the group has an obligation or entitlement which is, or may be, material to BT or such other member of the group.

 


Table of Contents
    

Notes

    

    

      
      


Table of Contents
    

Notes

    

    

      
      


Table of Contents

 

 

 

 

BT Group plc

Registered office: 81 Newgate Street, London EC1A 7AJ

Registered in England and Wales No. 4190816

Produced by BT Group

 

PHME 84339

Printed in England by Pindar Scarborough Ltd

Design by emperor.works

Typeset by Donnelley Financial Solutions

Printed on Revive 50 Silk which is made from 50%

de-inked, post-consumer waste and 50% virgin fibre

 

bt.com

 

LOGO      LOGO

   LOGO

Exhibit 15.3

CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT REGISTERED PUBLIC ACCOUNTING FIRM

We hereby consent to the incorporation by reference in the Registration Statements on Form S-8 (No. 333-219524 and 333-178663) of BT Group plc of our report dated 9 May 2018 and 19 September 2018 relating to the financial statements, which appears in BT Group plc’s Annual Report and this Form 20-F for the year ended 31 March 2019, included as Exhibit 15.2 to this Form 20-F.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom

23 May 2019

Exhibit 15.4

23 May 2019

Securities and Exchange Commission

Washington, D.C. 20549

United States of America

Ladies and Gentlemen:

We have read the statements made by BT Group plc (copy attached) included under Item 16F of Form 20-F dated 23 May 2019 of BT Group plc, and are in agreement with the statements contained in the first sentence of paragraph 1, the last sentence of paragraph 2, paragraph 5, and the first sentence of paragraph 6 on pages 30-31 therein. We have no basis to agree or disagree with other statements of the registrant contained therein.

Yours faithfully,

/s/ KPMG LLP

London, United Kingdom

23 May 2019


CHANGE IN REGISTRANT’S CERTIFYING ACCOUNTANT

ITEM 16F DISCLOSURE

KPMG LLP (“KPMG”) was our auditor for the 2018/19 financial year, such appointment having been approved by shareholders at the Company’s Annual General Meeting on 11 July 2018. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) was our auditor for the 2017/18 financial year and for prior financial years.

PwC and its predecessor firms were our auditors since BT listed on the London Stock Exchange in 1984 and PwC’s reappointment had not been subject to a tender until 2017 when the Audit & Risk Committee recommended to the Board that an audit tender process be undertaken with a view to appointing a new auditor for the financial year 2018/19. PwC advised the Audit & Risk Committee on 11 April 2017 that it would not participate in the tender process and so effectively indicated that it would decline to stand for re-election after the completion of the 2017/18 audit for the purposes of Item 16F(a)(1)(i) of Form 20-F. In this regard, we note that PwC would only have been permitted to serve as our auditor until the end of the 2019/20 audit due to the auditor rotation rules in the United Kingdom. In June 2017, following the conclusion of the audit tender process, we announced that the Board had approved the proposed appointment of KPMG as auditor beginning with the 2018/19 financial year, and the appointment was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 11 July 2018.

PwC audited our financial statements for 2016/17 and 2017/18. None of the reports of PwC on those financial statements contained an adverse opinion or disclaimer of opinion, or was qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles.

During those fiscal years there were no disagreements with PwC, whether or not resolved, on any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure, or auditing scope or procedure, which, if not resolved to PwC’s satisfaction, would have caused PwC to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with their reports. During such fiscal years there were no “reportable events” as that term is defined in Item 16F(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F other than management concluded that there was a material weakness in internal control over financial reporting as at 31 March 2017 in respect of the Italian business, as described our Annual Report on Form 20-F for 2016/17 and 2017/18, and as at 31 March 2018 in respect of the IAS 19 accounting error, as described on pages 94 to 95 of the Annual Report 2019 incorporated herein by reference.

As part of our investigation into our Italian business, in October 2016, we engaged KPMG to conduct an independent review of the accounting practices in our Italian business. The investigation, which included our own review with support and oversight from our Legal, Governance & Compliance function and Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer, revealed inappropriate behavior in our Italian business, improper accounting practices and a complex set of improper sales, purchase, factoring and leasing transactions.

In 2017, KPMG and our internal investigation team, with support and oversight from our Legal, Governance & Compliance function and Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer conducted an investigation of the systems and controls relating to our Italian business. This investigation resulted in the steps to improve our internal controls described in our Annual Reports on Form 20-F for 2016/17 and 2017/18.

We have provided KPMG with a copy of this disclosure in response to Item 16F and requested that KPMG provides us with a letter addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission stating whether they agree with such disclosure. A copy of KPMG’s letter, dated May 23, 2019, is attached as Exhibit 15.4 to this Form 20-F.

We have provided PwC with a copy of this disclosure in response to Item 16F and requested that PwC provides us with a letter addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission stating whether they agree with such disclosure. A copy of PwC’s letter, dated May 23, 2019, is attached as Exhibit 15.5 to this Form 20-F.

Exhibit 15.5

23 May 2019

Securities and Exchange Commission

100 F Street, N.E.

Washington, DC 20549

Commissioners:

We have read the statements made by BT Group plc (copy attached), which we understand will be filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission, pursuant to Item 16F of Form 20-F, as part of the Form 20-F of BT Group plc dated 23 May 2019. We agree with the statements concerning our Firm in such Form 20-F.

Very truly yours

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom

23 May 2019


ITEM 16F DISCLOSURE

KPMG LLP (“KPMG”) was our auditor for the 2018/19 financial year, such appointment having been approved by shareholders at the Company’s Annual General Meeting on 11 July 2018. PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (“PwC”) was our auditor for the 2017/18 financial year and for prior financial years.

PwC and its predecessor firms were our auditors since BT listed on the London Stock Exchange in 1984 and PwC’s reappointment had not been subject to a tender until 2017 when the Audit & Risk Committee recommended to the Board that an audit tender process be undertaken with a view to appointing a new auditor for the financial year 2018/19. PwC advised the Audit & Risk Committee on 11 April 2017 that it would not participate in the tender process and so effectively indicated that it would decline to stand for re-election after the completion of the 2017/18 audit for the purposes of Item 16F(a)(1)(i) of Form 20-F. In this regard, we note that PwC would only have been permitted to serve as our auditor until the end of the 2019/20 audit due to the auditor rotation rules in the United Kingdom. In June 2017, following the conclusion of the audit tender process, we announced that the Board had approved the proposed appointment of KPMG as auditor beginning with the 2018/19 financial year, and the appointment was approved by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 11 July 2018.

PwC audited our financial statements for 2016/17 and 2017/18. None of the reports of PwC on those financial statements contained an adverse opinion or disclaimer of opinion, or was qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope or accounting principles.

During those fiscal years there were no disagreements with PwC, whether or not resolved, on any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure, or auditing scope or procedure, which, if not resolved to PwC’s satisfaction, would have caused PwC to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with their reports. During such fiscal years there were no “reportable events” as that term is defined in Item 16F(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F other than management concluded that there was a material weakness in internal control over financial reporting as at 31 March 2017 in respect of the Italian business, as described our Annual Report on Form 20-F for 2016/17 and 2017/18, and as at 31 March 2018 in respect of the IAS 19 accounting error, as described on pages 94 to 95 of the Annual Report 2019 incorporated herein by reference.

As part of our investigation into our Italian business, in October 2016, we engaged KPMG to conduct an independent review of the accounting practices in our Italian business. The investigation, which included our own review with support and oversight from our Legal, Governance & Compliance function and Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer, revealed inappropriate behavior in our Italian business, improper accounting practices and a complex set of improper sales, purchase, factoring and leasing transactions.

In 2017, KPMG and our internal investigation team, with support and oversight from our Legal, Governance & Compliance function and Freshfields Bruckhaus Deringer conducted an investigation of the systems and controls relating to our Italian business. This investigation resulted in the steps to improve our internal controls described in our Annual Reports on Form 20-F for 2016/17 and 2017/18.

We have provided KPMG with a copy of this disclosure in response to Item 16F and requested that KPMG provides us with a letter addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission stating whether they agree with such disclosure. A copy of KPMG’s letter, dated May 23, 2019, is attached as Exhibit 15.4 to this Form 20-F.

We have provided PwC with a copy of this disclosure in response to Item 16F and requested that PwC provides us with a letter addressed to the Securities and Exchange Commission stating whether they agree with such disclosure. A copy of PwC’s letter, dated May 23, 2019, is attached as Exhibit 15.5 to this Form 20-F.